all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Exhibit 8D Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.95 MiB | / February 05 2005 | |||
1 2 |
|
Exhibit 8A Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.73 MiB | / February 05 2005 | |||
1 2 |
|
Exhibit 8B Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.85 MiB | / February 05 2005 | |||
1 2 |
|
Exhibit 8C Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.84 MiB | / February 05 2005 | |||
1 2 |
|
Exhibit 8E Users Manual Supplement RESPONSE TO CRN28353 | Users Manual | 292.84 KiB | / February 05 2005 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | / February 05 2005 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / February 05 2005 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | November 01 2005 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / February 05 2005 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info |
1 2 | Exhibit 8D Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.95 MiB | / February 05 2005 |
APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT6EY1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows in four parts (Exhibit 8A through Exhibit 8D):
EXHIBIT 8D 00M1000EN.book 389 Using Data Communication Data Communication from FOMA Handsets . 390 Before Using Data Communication . 391 Preparing for Data Communication . 393 Installing Connection Setup File (Drivers) for M1000 . 393 Checking Connection Setup Files (Drivers) . 394 Uninstalling M1000 Connection Setup Files (Drivers) . 395 Preparing for Bluetooth Connection . 396 FOMA PC Setup Software . 397 Installing FOMA PC Setup Software. 398 Setting up Data Communication. 399 Simple Setting "Packet Data Communication Setting Using Other ISP's" . 402 Executing the Set Connection . 406 Uninstalling FOMA PC Setup Software . 407 W-TCP Setting . 408 Setting up APN . 410 Assigning COM Port . 412 Displaying Dial-up Networking Type . 412 Setting up Dial-up Networking . 413 Setting up Dial-up . 419 Using Dial-up Networking . 428 389 00M1000EN.book 390 Data Communication from FOMA Handsets You can perform three types of data communication with your FOMA handset and your PC; namely, packet communication, 64K data communication and data transfer PC. Available Data Communication Types 2Packet communication Communication charges are based on the volume of exchanged data. Suitable when you wish to stay connected to the network and exchange data on an as needed basis. Data can be transmitted with maximum download speed of 384Kbps, maximum upload speed of 64Kbps via network supporting FOMA Packet communication such as "mopera" (DoCoMo's Internet provider service). The M1000 can also be used for data communications overseas by accessing GPRS access points.
Performing large volumes of data communication may result in high charges. 264K data communication Communication charges are based on the duration of time being connected to the network. Stable 64K bps data transmission can be performed via network supporting FOMA 64K data communication such as "mopera"
(DoCoMo's Internet provider service) or synchronized ISDN 64K access points. The M1000 can also be used overseas by accessing CSD data communication supported access points. 2Data transfer Data can be transferred free of charge between a PC and FOMA handset. The FOMA handset can be connected directly using the accompanying USB cable or by connecting the desktop holder to a PC using the USB cable. To transfer data, install the Desktop Suite to the PC. 3P527 Connecting the FOMA Handset and PC To connect your FOMA handset to a PC or PDA either of the following methods can be used. USB Connection 2Connect with the accompanying-USB cable 3P414
Separately sold FOMA USB cables can also be used. 2Connect with USB cable for PC via Desktop holder 3P415 Bluetooth Connection 2Connect via Bluetooth 3P419
Device registration is required prior to use. 3P382 Cautions Internet Service Provider Charges You will be charged by your Internet Service Provider (ISP, hereafter) to connect to the Internet. FOMA Service does not include the ISP fee and it must be paid to the ISP directly. Contact your ISP for further details.
"mopera", is DoCoMo's free Internet provider service that does not require you to register. Setting up ISP Connection ISP settings differ between Packet communication and 64K data communication. Select appropriate access points for Packet communication. For 64K data communication, select an access point which supports FOMA 64K data communication or synchronized ISDN 64K.
Connection to DoPa is not supported
Connection to PHS64K/32K Data Communication such as PIAFS is not supported. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 390 00M1000EN.book 391 User Authentication when Accessing the Network Connection may require authentication (ID and password). Enter the user ID and password in Dial-up Network when prompted. Contact the network administrator or the ISP to obtain the ID and password, and further details. Prerequisites to Packet Connection and 64K Data Communication Communication using FOMA handsets requires meeting the following conditions. The service, however, may be unavailable even if required conditions are met due to traffic conditions at base stations or radio wave conditions.
PC must support USB cables
For Bluetooth connection, devices such as PC has must comply with Bluetooth Ver1.1 Dial-up Networking Profile standards.
[
To be within the FOMA service area
For Packet communication, the access point must support FOMA Packet communication
For 64K data communication, the access point
(the designated network) must support FOMA 64K data communication or 64K synchronized ISDN. 1Data communication terminologies APN Stands for Access Point Name. Identifies the network to log in (ISP or LAN) for Packet communication. DoCoMo's Internet connection service mopera's APN is
"mopera.ne.jp". Bluetooth ON 3P382 Bluetooth device registration 3P382 cid Stands for Context Identifier. APN registration number is registered in FOMA made up of digits 1 to 10. Up to ten APN's can be registered. DNS Stands for Domain Name System The system converts an address made up of digits identified by computers to a 'name'
such as "mopera.ne.jp" for easier recognition by human. QoS Stands for Quality of Service and indicates quality of network service. Data transmission speed can be specified on a FOMA handset.* 3P461
*:
The actual data speed may vary by depending on network conditions. W-TCP TCP parameters that optimize TCP/IP transmission capability during Packet communication over FOMA network. Optimization of TCP parameters is necessary in order to generate the maximum FOMA communication capabilities. Administrator rights on PC Full access rights to Windows XP and Windows 2000 systems. All other users do not have rights to install drivers (connection setup files). Before Using Data Communication PC System Requirements PC System requirements for data communication are as follows:
Item Requirement PC main unit
PC-AT compatible machine with a CD-ROM drive
USB Port (Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev1.1/2.0 compliant)
Display Resolutions 800600 dots, High Color(65,536Colors) or higher recommended OS
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP
(Japanese Version) Memory
Windows 98, Windows Me:32MB or more*
Windows 2000:64MB or more*
Windows XP:128MB or more*
5MB of available space or more*
HDD space
*: Required memory and HDD space may depend on PC system specifications. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 391 00M1000EN.book 392 NOTE
Data communication may not be enabled subject to system properties. DoCoMo does not guarantee proper operations nor respond to inquiries when used with system requirements that are not mentioned above. Connecting PC and FOMA Handsets Setting up connection with a USB cable is described in this section. The FOMA handset can be connected directly using the accompanying FOMA USB cable or by connecting the desktop holder using the PC USB cable. To Connect Using the Accompanying FOMA USB Cable NOTE
Use the accompanying FOMA USB cable or a FOMA USB cable sold separately. Do not use general PC USB cables as the connector interface does not match the shape of FOMA external interface.
Do not apply force to the connector when inserting. The connectors can only be inserted in the correct direction and at the correct angle. When inserted correctly, the connectors can be inserted smoothly. In case of difficulty in inserting confirm the orientation of the connectors. 1Removing the USB cable a Pull the USB cable out straight while holding down the release button on the external connector. Screen Screen b Pull out the USB cable from PC Connecting a General PC USB Cable to a Desktop Holder The desktop holder enables data communication by connecting the FOMA handset to both the PC and the AC adapter.
Use a general USB cable with connectors that support USB Rev1.1/2.0 Series A compliant. a Remove the cap covering the external connection interface of the FOMA handset b Connect the accompanying USB connector to a USB port on the PC c Match the direction of the external connector of the accompanying USB cable with the external connection interface on the FOMA handset and insert the connector straight Once the connection is established, the FOMA handset displays "USB cable connected". i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 392 00M1000EN.book 393 1About Connection setup file (drivers) and FOMA PC setup software Connection setup file (drivers) and FOMA PC setup software are included in the FOMA M1000 CD-ROM.
M1000 setup file is the driver software for Packet communication, 64K data communication or data transfer used for connecting the FOMA handset with the accompanying FOMA USB cable to a PC. M1000 setup file installs necessary drivers to Windows.
FOMA PC setup software enables easy setup of Packet communication, 64K data communication or Dial up networking. NOTE
If "FOMA M1000 USB" is not displayed in
"Uninstall M1000 setup file (drivers) "( 3P418), the installation has failed. Run uninstallation
(3P418) and try installation again.
Uninstall driver if PC does not recognize the FOMA handset for some reason and install it again. Installing Connection Setup File (Drivers) for M1000
Install all drivers in one attempt when installing the M1000 setup file. Installation may be unsuccessful if the accompanying FOMA USB cable is pulled out, or if [Cancel] is clicked during installation. If installation is unsuccessful, use uninstall procedures to delete the M1000 setup file by following uninstall procedures (3P418), and try installing again.
Log in as a user with administrator rights when installing the M1000 communication set up file to Windows 2000 or Windows XP. Contact the PC manufacturer or Microsoft regarding operations related to administrator rights settings. a Connect Desktop holder to a PC by using the PC USB cable Screen b Attach the FOMA handset to the desktop holder See P54 on how to attach/remove. Preparing for Data Communication Preparations for packet communication/64K data communication by connecting the FOMA handset with the PC is described in this section. Via USB connection Install connection setup file (drivers) 3P416 Via Bluetooth connection*
Connect the FOMA handset with PC 3P419 Install connection setup file (drivers)*3P416 Set up connection details To set up using the FOMA PC setup software 3P419 To set up without using the FOMA PC setup software 3P436 Connect 3P429, P451 Disconnect 3P430, P452
*: Connection setup file (drivers) installation is not necessary if a Bluetooth modem other than that of FOMA handsets has already been installed. Go on to set up connection details. See P417 to check for an installed Bluetooth modem. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 393 00M1000EN.book 394 Checking Connection Setup Files (Drivers) Checking whether the M1000 setup file is installed properly. a Launch the
(Control Panel) in Windows 1Windows XP Click (Start) y
(Control Panel) 1Windows 2000, Windows Me or Windows 98 Click (Start) y
(Settings) y
(Control Panel) b Launch the (Systems) in
(Control Panel) 1Windows XP Click (Systems) in
(Performance and Maintenance) 1Windows Me Click
(Show all options in Control Panel) if (Systems) icon is not displayed in the
(Control Panel). c Launch the Device Manager 1Windows XP or Windows 2000 Click (Hardware) tab then click (Device Manager). 1Windows Me or Windows 98 Click (Device Manager) tab d Check installed driver names by clicking each device Check whether all drivers are listed under COMLPT) (Port(COM and LPT), (USB)
(USB Controller) and
(Modem). i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 394 00M1000EN.book 395 Go to "Using FOMA PC Setup Software"
(3P419) if all driver names are found. Connecting with USB
(Windows XP) Screen Device name Driver name Universal Serial Bus
(USB) Controller or USB
(Universal Serial Bus) Controller
FOMA M1000
FOMA M1000 Command*
FOMA M1000 Modem*
FOMA M1000 OBEX*
*:
only for Windows Me/98 Connecting with Bluetooth
(Windows XP)
(Windows 2000) Screen Screen
(Windows Me, Windows 98) Screen Device name Driver name Port (COM/LPT)
FOMA M1000 Command Port
FOMA M1000 OBEX Port Modem
FOMA M1000 Device name Modem Driver name To be decided NOTE
Upon verifying above, if the list of driver names is incomplete, delete the M1000 setup file by following uninstall procedures, and try installing again. Uninstalling M1000 Connection Setup Files (Drivers) Follow the procedures below when uninstalling of drivers is necessary. The uninstall instructions below are for Windows XP. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 395 00M1000EN.book 396 Connecting with USB Preparing for Bluetooth Connection Connecting with Bluetooth i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 396 00M1000EN.book 397 FOMA PC Setup Software Packet communication or 64K data communication from FOMA handset to PC requires various settings. FOMA PC setup software enables easy configuration simple operations.
Packet communication or 64K data communication can be set up without using FOMA PC setup software. 3P436
See P414 for connection between FOMA handsets and PC Simple settings Follow the guidance to set up "Create FOMA data communication Dial-up Network" while configuring "W-TCP settings" etc. automatically. W-TCP settings The communication settings in PC are optimized before using "FOMA Packet communication". Optimizing W-TCP settings is required in order to maximize connection performance. Setting up Access Point Names (APN) Access Point Names for Packet communication need to be setup. Unlike 64K data communication, FOMA Packet communication does not require use of a telephone number. Register Access Point Names in FOMA handset and connect to the network by designating its registered number (cid) in the access telephone number field.
"mopera" is pre-registered as mopera.ne.jp, the first in the cid list by default. Set up APNs to connect to other ISP's or LAN's. NOTE
If W-TCP setup software or FOMA data communication setup software not included in the bundled FOMA M1000 CD-ROM have already been installed, uninstall them prior to installing the FOMA PC setup software. Procedures from Installation of FOMA PC Setup Software to Internet Connection Step1: Install software FOMA PC setup software is installed
Uninstall "old W-TCP setup software",
"old APN setup software" or older versions of "FOMA PC setup software"
before installing "FOMA PC setup software".
"FOMA PC setup software" cannot be installed if "old W-TCP setup software"
or "old APN setup Software" is installed. Step2: Prepare before setting up Preparations are conducted prior to setting up
Check that FOMA handset is connected to the PC and is acknowledged by the PC.
See P414 for connecting FOMA handset
with PC. If FOMA handset is not properly acknowledged by PC, various setup and data communication cannot be done. If the FOMA handset is not acknowledged then see P416 to install the connection setup file. Step3: Perform various settings Setup is done according to the desired type of data communication
Configuring simple settings
- Packet communication setting using
"mopera" 3P423
- Packet communication setting using other Internet Service Providers 3P424
- 64K data communication setting using
"mopera" 3P427
- 64K data communication using other Internet Service Providers 3P428
- See P436 onwards for all other settings. Setup 4: Connect Connection to the Internet is made
See P429 for connection procedures. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 397 00M1000EN.book 398 Before Installing Check the system requirements.
Use the FOMA PC setup software under the following system requirements. Item Requirement PC main body
PC-AT Compatible OS
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP
(Japanese Version) Memory
Windows 98 or Windows Me:
32MB or more*
Windows 2000: 64MB or more*
Windows XP: 128MB or more*
5MB or more*
HDD Space
*: Required memory and HDD space may vary depending on the system configuration of the PC. Installing FOMA PC Setup Software
Log in with the user account with Administrator rights to install ("FOMA PC setup software") on Windows XP or Windows 2000. Contact the PC manufacturer or Microsoft regarding administrator rights setting.
Check that no resident program or application is in use before installation. If any program is in use, click [] (Cancel) to end the program and start installation again. a b If displayed screens show that old W-TCP
(W-TCP Setup Software) or old APN (APN Setup Software) are installed, refer to P421. c Click [ ] (Yes/agree) to agree to the End User License Agreement after reading Installation will be canceled if [ ] (No/
disagree)is clicked. d Click [ ] (Next) Select whether "W-TCP Setup Software"
stays in Task tray or not after setting up. Selecting the checkbox (Remain in Task tray) is recommended for the program to set/release the optimization of "W-TCP communication". Select (Remain in Task tray) $$ and continue the installation unless you have any particular problem. Settings can be changed by clicking on
(Menu) in FOMA PC setup software and selecting W-TCP
(Set W-TCP Software in task tray) even if
(Stay in task tray) has been deselected.
* You are unable to select if
(Remain in task tray) has been selected. Displays icon in the task tray on the bottom right (normally) of the PC screen. e Verify the installation folder and click [ ](Next) Click [ ] (Browse) to make changes, specify desired installation folder, and click
[] (Next). If HDD lacks space, you can install to a different driver. Otherwise, proceed accordingly. f Verify the folder name and click [
] (Next) Name the new folder and click [] (Next) if necessary. Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 398 00M1000EN.book 399 g Click [ ] (Done)
"FOMA PC setup software" operation screen is launched when setup is complete. Proceed to each setup. 1If "FOMA PC setup software" is already installed The Following message is displayed. Precautions during Installation of FOMA PC Setup Software 1If "old W-TCP setup software" is installed The following message is displayed. Screen Delete W-TCP (Older version of W-TCP Setup Software) from Add/Delete Programs in the Control Panel 1If "Older version of Access Point Name Setup Software" is installed, the following message is displayed. Screen Click [] (Yes) to automatically uninstall the previously installed software followed by the installation of FOMA PC setup software. 1When [] (Cancel) is clicked during installation When [] (Cancel) or []
(No) is clicked during installation, and when selected to not proceed further, the following screen is displayed. Screen Screen Click [] (Continue) to proceed with the installation, and [] (Cancel) to terminate. Click [] (Yes) to automatically uninstall the old software followed by the installation of FOMA PC setup software. 1If old versions of "FOMA PC setup software" is installed The following message is displayed. Screen Click [] (Yes) to automatically uninstall the old software followed by the installation of FOMA PC setup software. Setting up Data Communication Settings for Packet communication or 64K data communication is made.
Check that FOMA handset is properly connected to PC before setting up. 3P414 Launch FOMA PC Setup Software a Click (Start) y
(Programs) y FOMA PC
(FOMA PC Setup Software) y FOMA PC (FOMA PC FOMA PC setup software) i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 399 00M1000EN.book 400 1Windows XP Click (Start) y
(All Programs) y FOMA PC
(FOMA PC setup software) y FOMA PC (FOMA PC setup software) Screen
Be cautioned that large volume data exchanges such as browsing web sites with images and downloading large files using Packet communication may result in high charges. a Click [ ] (Simple Settings) b Select (Packet communication) then Click [ ]
(Next) FOMA PC setup software is launched and the operation screen is displayed. Screen Screen c Select mopera (mopera connection) then Click [ ] (Next) See P424 if you wish to use other ISP than
"mopera". Packet data communication using "mopera"
3P423 Packet data communication using other Internet Service Providers 3P424 64K data communication setting using
"mopera" 3P427 64K data communication using other Internet Service Providers 3P428 Simple Setting "Packet Data Communication with mopera"
High speed packet data communication with maximum speed of 384kbps via DoCoMo's ISP service called "mopera" is set up.
High speed packet data communication :
Maximum downlink speed 384kbps, Maximum uplink speed 64kbps (excluding some models). The charge is based on the volume of exchanged data. You do not need not to worry about the duration of connecting time. This service is based on a best-effort connection where transmission speed is affected by network traffic and communication infrastructure. Screen d Click [OK]
Please wait while the FOMA handset connected to the PC obtains APN setup. Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 400 00M1000EN.book 401 e Enter the connection name then Click [ ] (Next) Specify the desired connection name. Enter a recognizable name in
(Connection Name) field. This field is case sensitive. Enter name accurately. Invalid characters: / : * ? ! | " (single byte only) cannot be accepted.
(Windows Me, Windows 98) Screen Screen f Input username/password then click [ ] (Next) When mopera (mopera connection) is selected, username/password are entry can be omitted.
(Windows XP, Windows 2000) Select user when using Windows XP or Windows 2000. Enter the username and password provided by the ISP. Enter accurately. The fields are case sensitive. g Check (Optimize) then click [ ] (Next)
"W-TCP Settings" necessary for Packet communication is optimized. This message will not be displayed if it is already optimized. Reboot PC to validate the change. Screen Screen h Confirm settings and Click [ ]
(Done) A list of all setting information is displayed. Check that all settings are properly configured. A shortcut is created automatically if
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on desktop) is selected. Click [] (Back) to modify setting information. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 401 00M1000EN.book 402 After acquiring handset settings,
(Packet communication settings) screen is displayed. Specify a name in the APN input field The field is case sensitive. Enter accurately. Invalid characters: / : * ? !<> | " (single byte only) cannot be accepted If (display ID number) is selected, Phone number. will be notified to the receiver while making a call. mopera.ne.jp is set by default in the
(APN) (Select APN) field. Screen f Set up APN mopera.ne.jp is pre-registered by default as the first cid. Click [ ] (Add) to display (APN)
(Add APN) to specify the desired APN in the field. The APN must support FOMA Packet communication. Click [OK]. You are reverted to the (APN)
(set up APN) screen. Only single byte alphanumerical characters, (-) dash, and (.) full stop, can be entered in the APN field. Up to 10 cid can be registered.
Select PDP-PPP (PDP-PPP connection) or PDP-IP (PDP-IP connection) from
(Dial-up Networking types) if field
(Display Dial-up Networking) is set to (Display all) 3P435 Screen i Click [OK]
Reboot PC to validate the changes. Click
[] (Yes) if prompted by reboot selection screen. Execute the connection 3P429 Simple Setting "Packet Data Communication Setting Using Other ISP's"
High speed packet data communication with maximum speed of 384kbps is set up.
High speed packet data communication :
Maximum downlink speed 384kbps, Maximum uplink speed 64kbps (excluding some models). The charge is based on the volume of exchanged data. You do not need not to worry about the duration of connecting time. This service is based on a best-effort connection where transmission speed is affected by network traffic and communication infrastructure.
Be cautioned that large volume data exchanges such as browsing web sites with images and downloading large files using Packet communication may result in high charges. a Click [ ] (Simple setting) b Select (Packet communication) then Click [ ]
(Next). c Select (Others) then Click [
] (Next) d Click [OK]
Please wait while the FOMA handset connected to the PC obtains APN setup. e Set up Packet communication i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 402 00M1000EN.book 403 g Configure Advanced Settings (TCP/
IP) Click [] (Advanced settings) in (Packet communication settings) to display IP
(IP Address) and
(Name Server) setting screen. Input necessary information related to ISP and LAN Dial-up Networking where required. h Select APN then click [OK]
Back to Step 5. The APN list set in Step 6 is displayed in the
(APN) (Select APN) dialog. i Verify connection with designation
(APN) in (APN)
(Select APN) menu then click
[ ] (Next) j Set username and password then click [ ] (Next) In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select user.
(Windows XP, Windows 2000) Screen username and password provided by ISP must be entered correctly. Note that fields are case sensitive. k Select (Optimize) then click [ ] (Next) W-TCP (W-TCP setting) necessary for Packet communication is optimized. This screen is not displayed if already optimized. (Proceed to step12) Screen l Verify setting information then click
[ ] (Done) All configured settings are listed. Verify that there are no errors in the setup information. A shortcut on desktop will be created automatically if
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on desktop) is selected. Click [] (Back) to change settings
(Windows Me, Windows 98) Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i Screen m Click [OK]
Reboot PC to validate changes. Click
[] (Yes) if prompted by the reboot selection screen. Execute the connection 3P429 403 00M1000EN.book 404 Invalid characters: / : * ? ! < > | " (single byte only) are not accepted. Select "FOMA M1000" for modem name. Screen Simple Settings "64K Data Communication Setting Using mopera"
64Kbps data communication is set up. DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" is used.
Charges are based on the duration of connecting time a Click [ ] (Simple setting) b Select 64K (64K data communication) then click [ ]
(Next). e Set username and password then click [ ] (Next) User may ignore this step if mopera connection is selected. Screen
(Windows XP, Windows 2000) c Select mopera (mopera connection) then click [ ] (Next) See P428 to use ISP connection other than
"mopera"
Screen
(Windows Me, Windows 98) Screen Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i d Enter APN and select modem then click [ ] (Next) 64K (64K Data communication) dialog is displayed. Specify a name as you wish in
(Connection) field. This field is case sensitive. Enter name accurately. 404 In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select a user. Setup information provided by ISP must be entered correctly. Note that fields are case sensitive. 00M1000EN.book 405 f Verify setup information then click
[ ] (Done) All configured settings are listed. Verify that there are no errors in the setting information. A shortcut on desktop is created automatically if
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on desktop) is selected. Click [] (Back) to change settings. Connection name must be entered. The field is case sensitive. Enter accurately. Note that fields are case sensitive. Invalid characters: / : * ? ! < > | " (single byte only) Screen When using the accompanying FOMA-USB cable, select "FOMA M1000" (FOMA M1000) as modem. Enter the information provided by ISP correctly. The fields are case sensitive and accept only single byte characters. The phone number is notified once connected if
(Display caller ID) is selected. e Configuring Advanced setting
(TCP/IP setting) Click (Advanced setting) to display IP (IP Address) and
(Name Server) setting dialog. Input necessary information related to ISP or LAN Dial-up Networking where required. f Set up username and password then click [ ] (Next) In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select a user. Screen g Click [OK]
Execute the connection 3P429 Simple Setting "64K Data Communication with Other ISP"
Setting is performed for 64K data communication at 64Kbps.
Charges are based on duration of time connected. a Click [ ] (Simple setting) b Select 64K (64K data communication) then click [ ]
(Next) c Select (Other) then click [
] (Next) d Enter Dial-up Networking information then click [ ] (Next) If connecting to another ISP that possesses synchronized ISDN 64K access points, the following information need to be registered.
- Connection name (optional)
- Modem selection (FOMA M1000)
- Dial-up phone number i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 405 00M1000EN.book 406
(Windows XP, Windows 2000) h Click [OK]
Execute the connection 3See right Screen
(Windows Me, Windows 98) Screen Set username and password information accurately according to the information provided by the ISP. The fields are case sensitive. g Verify setup information then click
[ ] (Done) A list of all settings is displayed. Check that all settings are properly configured. A shortcut is created automatically if
(Create Dial-up Networking shortcut on desktop) is selected. Click [] (Back) to change settings. Executing the Set Connection Connection and disconnection using the settings configured with the FOMA PC Setup software is described in this section.
Connection from dial-up icon is valid only for the FOMA handset used to configure with the icon. Install connection setup file again if connecting with another FOMA handset. a Click connection icon on the PC b Click [ ] (Dial) and connect Click (Dial) without entering the
(Username)and
(Password) if mopera is selected. Enter
(Username)and
(Password) and click (dial) if another ISP or dial up connection is selected. No need to enter password again if
(Save password) is selected. Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i Screen c Click [OK] upon verifying connection The Following screen is displayed when connecting the dial up normally.
The message is not displayed if
(connection) has been set to hide the message previously. 406 00M1000EN.book 407 Disconnecting Closing the web browser does not always guarantee disconnection from the network. Disconnect the connection by following the steps below. a Click dial up icon in task tray on PC screen Dial up icon The connection screen is displayed. b Click [ ] (Disconnect) Screen Right click on the W-TCP (W-
TCP icon) in the task tray, and click
(terminate in task tray). Right click Click b Terminating active programs The following messages will be displayed if uninstallation is attempted while FOMA PC
(FOMA PC Setup software) or W-TCP (W-TCP setting) is running. Stop uninstalling and close all active programs. NOTE
The displayed data speed on the PC may be different from the actual speed. Uninstalling FOMA PC Setup Software Before Uninstallation Undo all changes made for the FOMA handset settings before uninstalling the FOMA PC setup software. a Disable W-TCP (W-TCP setting) in task tray Screen Screen Uninstalling a Launch
(Add/Remove Programs) in Windows 1Windows XP Click (Start) y
(Control Panel) y
(Add/Remove Programs) 1Windows Me, Windows 98 or Windows 2000 Click (Start) y
(Settings) y
(Control Panel) y
(Add/Remove Programs)
"
(Add/Remove Applications properties) will be displayed in Windows Me or Windows 98. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 407 00M1000EN.book 408 b Select FOMA PC
(FOMA PC Setup software) y click [
] (Change/Delete) Select NTT DoCoMo FOMA PC
(NTT FOMA PC Setup software) Optimization of W-TCP is disabled after PC is rebooted. Screen Screen Click here W-TCP Setting c Verify the program to delete y click
[ ] (Yes) Uninstallation begins. Screen W-TCP Roles W-TCP (W-TCP Setting) is a "TCP Parameters setting tool" to optimize TCP/IP performance for Packet communication in FOMA network. Setting this software is required to fully utilize FOMA handset communication performance. d Click [OK] Installation of FOMA PC setup software is completed. Setting/Disabling the Optimization. Screen 1Disabling W-TCP (Optimizing W-TCP) Displays following message if W-TCP
(Optimizing W-TCP) is performed. Click [] (Yes) to uninstall Screen Windows XP Each Dial-up Networking can be optimized separately in Windows XP. a Launch the program 1To operate from FOMA PC Setup software Click [W-TCP] (W-TCP setting) in
(Manual setting) after launching the program Screen 1To operate from task tray Click W-TCP icon in task tray. Left Click i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 408 00M1000EN.book 409 b Conduct the following operations 1When system setting is not optimized Click [ ] (Optimize) 1When disabling optimization a Click [] (System setting) in W-TCP (W-TCP setting) b Click [ ] (Disable Screen optimization) Screen
"(W-TCP (Dial-up Networking) setting)" is displayed. Select the desired Dial-up Networking and click [] (Execute) to optimize system setting or Dial-up Networking. System setting is optimized after PC is rebooted by following the instructions displayed. 1When system setting is already optimized Screen W-TCP() (W-TCP
(Dial-up Networking) setting) is displayed. Perform necessary settings to make changes. System setting is optimized after PC is rebooted by following the instructions displayed. Optimization is disabled after PC is rebooted by following the instructions displayed. Windows Me, Windows 2000 or Windows 98 a Launch program 1When operating from FOMA PC
(FOMA PC Setup software) Click [W-TCP] (W-TCP setting) in
(Manual setting) after launching program 1When operating from Task tray Click (W-TCP icon) in task tray. Left Click b Conduct the following operations 1If it is not optimized Click [ ] (Optimize) i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 409 00M1000EN.book 410 Screen Optimization is enabled after PC is rebooted by following the instructions displayed. 1If it is already optimized
(Already optimized) message is displayed in W-TCP
(W-TCP Setting) Setting up APN APN for Packet communication is set up. Up to 10 APN numbers can be set up. Numbers from 1 to 10 can be assigned to the cid's. The cid is used to specify connection for Packet communication.
"mopera" is pre-registered as 1 in the cid list by default. Other APNs must be assigned a number from in 2 to 10.
Check that FOMA handset is properly connected to PC before setting up 3P414 a Click [ (APN) ] (APN Setting) after launching FOMA PC
(FOMA PC Setup software) Screen Screen Click [] (Disable optimization) to disable settings resulting from transmission with devices other than the FOMA handset. Optimization is disabled after PC is rebooted by following the instructions displayed. b Click [OK] in FOMA handset setting screen. Load registered APN information by accessing connected FOMA handset automatically.
Launching is disabled if FOMA handset is not connected c Setting up APN Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 410 00M1000EN.book 411 Adding/Editing/Deleting APN Loading APN Setting in FOMA Handset 1When Adding an APN Click [ ] (Add) in (APN)
(APN Setting) 1When Editing registered APN Select desired APN from list in
(APN) (APN Setting) yClick []
(Edit)
You can select from PDP-PPP
(PDP-PPP connection)or PDP-IP
(PDP-IP connection) to add/edit an APN if (Display Dial-up Networking) is set to
(Display all) 3P435 1When Deleting registered APN Select desired APN from list in
(APN) (APN Setting) yClick []
(Delete)
APN Registered in cid 1 cannot be deleted. Saving Setting Information info a file APN setting information registered in FOMA handset can be backed up, and APN setting information in edit mode can be saved. a Click (File) y
(Save as)/
(Save) in (APN) (APN Setting) Loading APN Setting Information from File APN setting saved in PC can be re-edited and written to FOMA handset. a Click (File) y
(Open)in (APN) (APN setting) Writing APN Setting Information to FOMA Handset Displayed APN setting can be written to FOMA handset a Click FOMA
(Save in FOMA handset) in
(APN) (APN setting) APN setting can be retrieved by manually accessing the FOMA handset a Click (File) y FOMA
(Retrieve setting from FOMA handset) in
(APN) (APN setting) Creating Dial-up Networking Dial-up Networking for Packet communication can be created from an added/edited APN in
(APN) (APN setting), and be saved in FOMA handset. a Select an added/edited APN in
(APN) (APN Setting), and click [ ] (Create Dial-up Networking) Write to FOMA handset confirmation screen is displayed. b Click [ ] (Yes)
(Create Dial-up Networking for Packet communication) is displayed
Perform Step 5 if mopera is selected as the APN. c Enter desired APN name and click
(Setting up account /password) d Enter username and password then click [OK]
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, a user is selected.
Click [ ] (Advanced setting) in
(Create Dial-up Networking for Packet communication) if IP address and DNS setting are provided by your ISP. Then click [OK] after registering required information. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 411 00M1000EN.book 412 e Click [FOMA ]
(Write settings to FOMA handset) and perform writing
NOTE
APN information are stored in FOMA handset. To connect another FOMA handset set up APN again. If you wish to continue to use the same APN as that registered in the PC, register the APN to the same number (cid) in the FOMA handset. If the COM port connecting the FOMA handset is recognized by the PC as greater than COM20 then loading and writing of APN information is disabled. In these cases, use
(Hyper Handset) which is accompanied with Windows. 3P440
Assigning COM Port The COM port of the PC is assigned to the FOMA handset to manually perform connection setting. This COM port can be changed. Normally, however, set it to
() (Auto setting (recommended)) . a Click (Menu) y
(Connection setting) after launching program Set up screen is displayed. c Click [OK]
Assigned COM Port is set up.
Use (Hyper terminal) which is accompanied with Windows to check COM port 3P440 Displaying Dial-up Networking Type Select from PDP-PPP (PDP-PPP connection)or PDP-IP (PDP-IP connection)* from Dial-up Networking type if
(Display Dial-up Networking) is set to (Display all). Select PPP (PDP-IP
) (Display only PPP (Display/Set up only PDP-IP connection)) normally.
*:
PDP-PPP (PDP-PPP connection) is Packet communication using Point-to-Point protocol. PDP-PPP (PDP-PPP connection) is used to connect to mopera
(mopera)etc. Contact your ISP or network administrator to check connection protocol of APN. a Click (Menu) y
(Connection setting) after launching program Set up screen is displayed. Screen Screen b Select COM (Assign COM port) , and assign COM Port COM Port number is displayed in COM. b Select PPP (Display only PPP)/ (Display All) in
(Display Dial-up Networking) c Click [OK]
i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 412 00M1000EN.book 413 Setting up Dial-up Networking You can set up Dial-up Networking for Packet communication/64K data connection without using FOMA PC setup software. The flow is explained below. Set up Packet communication Set up 64K data connection How to attach 3P414 Install connection setup file (driver). 3P416 1AT Commands AT Commands consist of commands for controlling modems. The FOMA handset supports standard AT commands, some extended commands and proprietary AT commands.
Detailed settings of (data connection) or FOMA handset can be checked with AT Command entries. NOTE
Set *9601 as connection number when using Check COM port Check COM port. 3P437 Set up APN Set up APN 3P440
Set up is not required with "mopera". Set up caller ID Set up to display/hide caller ID. 3P442 Other settings Perform other settings. (AT Command) 3P453 Set up Dial-up Networking
Contact your ISP or network administrator for further setup details.
Windows XP users Set up APN 3P438
Windows 2000 users Set up APN 3P439
Windows Me users Set up APN. 3P439
Windows 98 users Set up APN. 3P439 Connect Dial-up Networking 3P451 DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" for 64K data connection.
Set (Caller ID display ON/OFF) as required. Set to (ON) to use "mopera".
Set (Other settings) as required. FOMA is operational with default settings.
Contact your ISP or network administrator for further setup details. Checking COM Port You are required to specify COM port number assigned to "FOMA M1000" (modem) embedded after installation of connection setup file when setting up the APN. This section explains about procedures to verify COM Port number. The verified COM port is used for APN setting
(3P440).
There is no need to check modem when if using DoCoMo's ISP "mopera" APN setup is not necessary, then. Proceed to
(Display/hide caller ID)
(3P442) 1About APN and cid Unlike 64K data connection, a regular telephone number is not used for Packet communication. APN is used instead.
The (cid) registration number 1 to 10 are registered in FOMA handsets as part of the APN when APN numbers are set up.
APN is managed by cid (registration number from 1 to 10). Entering (*99***<cid number>#) connects to the corresponding APN.
"mopera" is pre-registered to 1 in the cid list by default as ("mopera.ne.jp"). "mopera" can
i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 413 00M1000EN.book 414 easily be used by entering the number
(*99***1#). Use cid 2 to 10 to register other APNs.
APNs can be registered like registering contact information to a mobile phone. The table below summarizes differences and similarities when compared to a contact list in a mobile phone. Item to compare APN Setting Registration data APN cid
(Using FOMA PC Setup software)
(Unable to confirmed) Registration process Registrati on via PC Registrati on via mobile phone Contact list in handset Phone number Memory number in contact list Name of intended party
(Using dedicated software) How to use Specify cid and connect Search contact list and call Enter phone number and dial from FOMA handset Checking COM Port in Windows XP a Click (Start) y
(Control Panel) Screen b Click
(Printer and other hardware) in
(Control Panel) y
(Telephone and modem options) Screen c Enter
(Area code) if
(Location information) is displayed, and click [OK]
d Click (Modem) tab. Checking COM port in
(Connection) list of FOMA M1000, and click [OK]
The verified COM port is used for APN setup. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 414 00M1000EN.book 415
Displayed messages and COM port numbers may vary depending on your PC. Screen c Enter (Area code) then click [OK] if (Location information) is displayed d Click (Modem) tab and check COM port in
(Connection) list of FOMA M1000
(FOMA M1000). Click [OK]
The verified COM port number is used for APN Setup.
Displayed message and COM port number may vary depending on your PC. Checking COM Port in Windows 2000 a Click (Start) y
(Settings) y
(Control Panel) Screen Screen Checking COM Port in Windows Me/98 a Click (Start) y
(Settings) y
(Control Panel) b Click
(Telephone and modem options) in
(Control Panel) Screen Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 415 00M1000EN.book 416 b Click [ ] (Modem) in
(Control Panel) If (modem) icon is not displayed, click
(Display all options in control panel). Screen Screen c Check that FOMA M1000 is properly set up then click (More Info on the Diagnostics) tab Screen d Check COM port to which FOMA M1000 is set up and click [OK]
The verified COM port number is used for APN Setup.
Displayed message and COM port number may vary depending on your PC. Setting up APN Default setting cid1:mopera.ne.jp cid2~10: never Connection software for AT commands is required to set up APN. Setup procedures using Hyperterminal in Windows is explained in this section.
APN for Packet communication is set up. Up to 10
APNs with registration number <cid>
1 to 10(3P437) can be set up.
"mopera" is pre-registered to 1 in the cid list by default as "mopera.ne.jp". Registration numbers 2 to 10 are recommended for use with other APNs.
The registered cid is used as the connection number for the APN setting up Dial-up Networking. Inquire your network administrator or ISP regarding APN's other than mopera.
AT commands may not be displayed in Hyperterminal from Step 6 P441 onwards.
Entering in the following manner:
ATE1
Displays AT commands.
<Example: in Windows XP>
a Connect FOMA handset with accompanying USB cable 3P414 b Turn on FOMA handset and connect the other end of the USB cable to PC i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 416 00M1000EN.book 417 c Click (Start) y
(All Programs) y
(Accessories) y
(Communication) y
(Hyperterminal) Hyperterminal is launched. 1In Windows Me or Windows 2000 On the PC, click (Start) y
(Program) y
(Accessories) y
(Communication) y
(Hyperterminal) 1In Windows98 Click Hypertrm.exe after clicking
(Hyperterminal) d Enter desired name in (name) and click [OK]
Enter name as "sample" here as an example Screen 1When COM port in FOMA M1000 cannot be selected a Click [ ] (Cancel)
(Set up connection) screen is closed. b Click (File) and select
(Properties) c Select FOMA M1000 in
(Connection method) of
(Set up connection) tab of sample
(Sample properties) screen d Deselect OFF
(Use country code and area code) Screen e Click [OK]
Screen e Select FOMA M1000 in
(Connection method) then click
[OK]
1When COM port in FOMA M1000 can be selected Click [OK] in COM port properties.
To check COM port number selected in
(Connection method)
(3P437), perform COM
(Check COM Port) f Enter APN then press Enter in the following format AT+CGDCONT=<cid>,"PPP", "APN"
<cid> : Enter desired number between 2 to 10 If a cid is already set up, not that the new CID overwrites the previous setting.
"APN" : Enter APN with double quotation mark
"PPP" : Enter "PPP" as is i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 417 00M1000EN.book 418 APN setup is complete if OK is displayed.
Caller ID can be set up with AT command before Example: When XXX.abc is set up in cid 2 Enter "AT+CGDCONT=2,"PPP","XXX.abc"
$$"
performing Dial-up Networking
Use *DGPIR command to setup caller ID to notify or hide, or to reset to (None) (default value) (3P454) a Launch
(Hyperterminal) b Set up caller ID display during Packet communication Enter in the following format
"AT*DGPIR=<n>"
1To Append 184 (hiding caller ID) automatically when calling or answering Enter AT*DGPIR=1 Screen 1To Append 186 (notifying caller ID) automatically when calling or answering Enter AT*DGPIR=2 c Click (File) y
(End Hyperterminal) if [OK] is displayed Screen Screen g Check that if OK is displayed, and click (File) y
(End Hyperterminal) Hyperterminal is closed. Saving is not necessary when confirm save screen is displayed. 1When APN settings are reset with AT command
cid=1 is reset to mopera.ne.jp (default value), and cid=2 to 10 is unregistered.
<Input method>
AT+CGDCONT=
all cids) AT+CGDCONT=<cid>
resetting a specific cid)
(When resetting
(When 1When checking APN with AT command
Display current settings
<Input method>
AT+CGDCONT?
1When nothing is displayed as AT command is entered
<Input method>
ATE1 Notifying/Hiding Caller ID Default setting Notify
Caller ID can be turned on or off to enable/disable notifying Caller ID to the designator during packet connection. Use caller ID with care. Your caller ID is valuable information. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 418 00M1000EN.book 419 1Setting up 186(Notify)/184(Hide) in Dial-up Networking 186/184 can also be appended to a number in Dial-up Networking.
* When 186/184 are setup in both DGPIR and Dial-up Networking, the applicable settings are described in the following table. Dial-up Networking setup (when cid=1)
*Caller ID display setting with DGPIR command Notify/hide caller ID
*99***1#
184*99***1#
Never Hide Notify Never Hide Notify 186*99***1#
Never Hide Notify Notify Hide Notify Hide (Priority given to 184 setup in Dial-up Networking) Notify (Priority given to 186 setup in Dial-up Networking) Setting up Dial-up
<Example: Connecting to "mopera" using
<cid>=1>
Contact your ISP or network administrator to setup and connect with another ISP. Setting up Dial-up Connection in Windows XP a Click (Start) y
(All Programs) y
(Accessories) y
(Communications) y
(New connection wizard) b Click [ ] (Next) in
(New connection wizard) NOTE
Enter AT*DGPIR=0 to reset caller ID setup with DGPIR command to "Never".
Set caller ID setting to "Notify" when using
"mopera", DoCoMo's ISP service. Screen c Select
(Connecting to the Internet), and click [ ] (Next) i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i Screen 419 00M1000EN.book 420 d Select
(Setting up connection manually) then click [ ] (Next) g Enter desired name in ISP (ISP name) then click [ ] (Next) Screen Screen e Select
(Connection with dial-up modem) then click [ ]
(Next) f (Select device) is displayed, select FOMA M1000(COMx) (Modem-FOMA M1000 (COMx)) then click [ ]
(Next)
(Select device) is only displayed when multiple modems are installed.
(COMx) is COM Port number displayed in COM (Checking COM Port)
(3P437) Screen h Enter APN number in
(Phone number) then click
[ ] (Next) Screen i Leave (Username),
(Password) and
(Confirm password) blank, and click [ ]
(Next) Entering of username and password is not required for "mopera"
Enter (Username),
(Password) and
(Confirm password) provided by your ISP or network administrator if connecting to another ISP. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 420 00M1000EN.book 421 Screen m Check setting in (General) tab Verify that FOMA M1000
(Modem-FOMA M1000) in
(Connection method) is selected if 2 or more modems are connected to your PC. Select if it is deselected. Verify that (Use dial up information) is not selected. Deselect OFF if selected. j Click [ ] (Done) Displays newly created connection wizard. Screen Screen k Click (Start) y
(All Programs) y
(Accessories) y
(Communication) y
(Network connection) l Select icon of newly created dial up, and click (File) y
(Properties) n Click (Network) tab and perform each setup. Select PPP:Windows 95/98/NT4/2000, Internet in
(Dial up server) Select (TCP/
IP) (Internet protocol(TCP/IP)) in
(Use following items in this connection)
Settings to cannot be changed in QoS
(QoS Packet Scheduler) Screen Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i o Click [ ] (Setting) 421 00M1000EN.book 422 p Deselect all checkboxes then click
[OK]
Screen q Click [OK] in
(Network) tab screen Setting up Dial-up Networking in Windows 2000 a Click (Start) y Program) y
(Accessories) y
(Communication) y
(Network and dial up connection) b Click (Create new connection) icon in
(Network and dial up connection) c Enter (Area code) then click [OK] if (Location information) is displayed
(Location information) is displayed when launching
(Create new connection) for the first time in Step2. From the second launch onwards, this is not displayed.
(Network connection wizard) is displayed instead. Proceed to Step5 when displayed. d Click [OK] in
(Telephone and modem option) e Click [ ] (Next) in
(Network connection wizard) Screen Screen f Select
(Dial up connection to the Internet) then click [ ] (Next) Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 422 00M1000EN.book 423 g Select
(LAN)
(Connect to the Internet manually or via Local Area Network(LAN)) then click [ ]
(Next) Screen Screen j Enter APN number in
(Telephone number) then click [
] (Advanced setting) Deselect
(Use area code and dial up information). h Select
(Connect to the Internet with telephone line and modem) then click [ ] (Next) Screen Screen k Set each settings in
(Connection) tab then click
(Address) tab as shown Enter the information provided by your ISP in (Connection type) and
(Log on process) i Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed in
(Select modem for Internet connection) then click
[ ] (Next) Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is not displayed.
The following message is not displayed if modems other than FOMA M1000 are not installed. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i Screen 423 00M1000EN.book 424 l Click (Address) tab, and set IP address or DNS (Domain Name Service) as shown the click
[OK]
Enter the information such as IP
(IP address) or ISPDNS
(DNS(Domain Name Service) address auto-assigned by ISP) provided by your ISP or network administrator in order to connect to an ISP other than "mopera". o Enter the desired name in
(Connection) then click [] (Next) Screen Screen p Select (No) then click
[ ] (Next) m Click [ ] (Next) in
(Internet accounts set up information) n Leave (Username) and
(Password) blank then click [ ] (Next) Username and password confirmation screens are continuously displayed. Click
[OK] in each screen Username and password are not required for "mopera". Enter (Username) and
(Password) provided by your ISP or network administrator in order to connect to an ISP other than "mopera". Screen q Deselect
[ ]
(Select here and click [Done] to connect to the Internet now) then click [ ]
(Done) Screen Screen i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 424 00M1000EN.book 425 r Select newly created dial up icon, then click (File) y
(Properties) Screen Screen s Check settings in (General) tab Check if FOMA M1000 (Modem-
FOMA M1000) in (Connection method) is selected when 2 or more modems are connected to PC. Select if it is deselected. Verify that (Use for dial up information) is deselected. Deselect if it is selected. Screen t Click (Network) tab, and perform each setup Select PPP:FWindows 95/98/NT4/2000, Internet in
(Dial up server). Select only
(TCP/IP) (Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)) for component. u Click [ ] (Setting) v Deselect all settings, then click [OK]
Screen w Click [OK] in
(Network) tab Setting up Dial-up Networking in Windows Me/Windows 98 a Click (Start) y
(Program) y
(Accessories) y
(Communication) y
(Dial-up Networking) b Click [ ] (Next) in
(Welcome to Dial-up Networking) This message is displayed when launching Dial-up Networking for the first time. Click
[] (Next) to proceed to Step 4. From the second time onwards, this is not displayed.
(Dial-up Networking) in Step 3 is displayed instead. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 425 00M1000EN.book 426 e Enter APN number in
(Telephone number), then click [
] (Next) Leave (Area code) blank. Screen c Click (New connection) icon in
(Dial-up Networking) Screen f Check connection name (Desired) then click [ ] (Done) Screen Screen d Enter desired name in
(Connection name) then click []
(Next) Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed in
(Select modem).
Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is not displayed. Screen g Click (Start) y
(Program) y
(Accessories) y
(Communication) y
(Dial-up Networking) i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 426 00M1000EN.book 427 h Select newly created Dial-up Networking icon then click
(File) y
(Properties) Screen Screen i Select (Phone number) and (Connection method) in (General) tab. Deselect
(Use properties in area code and dial) Verify that FOMA M1000 is displayed in
(Connection method)
Select FOMA M1000 if FOMA M1000 is not displayed Screen j Click (Network) tab and perform various settings. Select PPP:,Windows 2000/
NT,Windows Me (PPP:Internet, Windows 2000/NT, Windows Me) in
(Dial up server) Select only
(TCP/IP) (Internet protocol (TCP/IP)) for component. 1In Windows 98 Click (Server type) tab and perform various settings. Select PPP:, Windows NT Server, Windows 98 (PPP:Internet, Windows NT Server, Windows 98) in
(Dial up server). Select only
(TCP/IP) (Internet protocol (TCP/IP)) for component. k Click (Security) tab, and click [OK] without entering Username and password Entering of Username and password is not required for "mopera". Enter (Username) and
(Password) provided by your ISP or network administrator for other ISP in order to connect to an ISP other than "mopera". Screen 1In Windows 98 Click [OK]
i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 427 00M1000EN.book 428 Using Dial-up Networking Using Dial-up Networking for Packet communication and 64K data connection without the use of FOMA PC setup software is explained in this section.
Check that your FOMA handset is properly connected to your PC before connecting. Check connection between FOMA handset and PC prior to establishing Bluetooth connection
<Example: in Windows XP>
a Click (Start) y
(All programs) y
(Accessories) y
(Communication) y
(Network connection) b Click connection icon Select Dial-up Networking icon of ISP name setup in Step7 of P444, then click
(Network task) y
(Start connection), or click the connection icon.
Check setting if a message notifying the completion of connection is not displayed. Screen Disconnecting Disconnecting may not be completed by closing the Internet browser. Disconnect by performing the following procedures. a Click Dial-up Networking icon in task tray Connection screen is displayed. Dial-up Networking icon b Click [ ] (Disconnect) Screen Screen c Check setting and click [ ]
(Dial) Dial-up network is completed when a connection in progress message is displayed followed by a connection established message.
Check each setting and click []
NOTE
Transmission speed displayed on the PC may vary from the actual transmission speed. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i
(Connect) when using an OS other than Windows XP.
Entering of a (Username) and (Password) is not required to connect to "mopera". 428 00M1000EN.book 429 AT Commands AT Commands are commands for setting FOMA handset functions from a PC.
AT Command input format.
[&F]
[&W]
[AT]
[M]
: Reset to factory default.
: Register setting. Called settings by ATZ Command.
: Can be used in FOMA M1000 Command Port.
: Can be used with FOMA M1000 (Modem). AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples AT%V
[M]
AT&C n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT&D n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT&F n
[AT] [M]
AT&S n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT&W n
[AT] [M]
AT *DGANSM=n
[M]
AT*DGAPL=n [,cid]
[M]
Displays versions of FOMA handset.
-
AT%V Ver1.00 OK Set the operating conditions of the circuit CD for DTE. Set the operation performed when circuit ER signal received from DTE is switched from ON to OFF. Reset to factory default. If the command is entered during communication, the handset is reset. Set how to control the data set ready signal to be output to DTE. n=0 n=1
: Always keeps line CD signal ON
: Line CD signals vary according to AT&C1 OK line connection status (default) n=0 n=1 Ignore status (assumed to be ON)
:
: Online command mode is set AT&D1 OK n=2 when status changes from ON to OFF
: Line is disconnected and OFF LINE mode (default) is enabled when status changes from ON to OFF Only n=0 can be set (skippable)
-
n=0 n=1
: Always ON (default)
: DR signal ON at time of line AT&S0 OK connection Register current settings. Only n=0 can be set (skippable)
-
Set the reject/permit setting mode for incoming Packet communication. The setting is only valid for Packet communication received immediately after the command is entered. Set up APN to permit incoming Packet communication from APN settings. Use <cid>
parameters defined by AT+CGDCONT. n=0
: Turn OFF reject (AT*DGARL)/
permit setting for incoming Packet communication (default) n=1
: Turn ON reject setting for incoming Packet communication n=2
: Turn ON permit setting for incoming Packet communication AT *DGANSM?
: Display currently settings n=0
: Add APN defined by <cid> to list of APNs permitted for incoming Packet communication n=1
: Delete APN defined by <cid> from list of APNs permitted for incoming connection If <cid> parameter is omitted, all the <cids>
are added to/deleted from the list. AT *DGAPL?
: Display permit incoming Packet communication AT *DGANSM=0 OK AT *DGANSM?
*DGANSM:0 OK AT*DGAPL =0,1 OK AT *DGAPL?
*DGAPL:1 OK AT *DGAPL =1 OK AT *DGAPL?
OK i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 429 00M1000EN.book 430 AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples AT*DGARL=n[,cid]
Set APN to refuse incoming connection. APN setting uses <cid>
parameters defined by
+CGDCONT. n=0
: Add APN defined by <cid> to list of APNs refused for incoming connection n=1
: Delete APN defined by <cid> to list of APNs refused for incoming connection If <cid> parameter is omitted, all <cids> are added to/deleted from the list. AT *DGARL?
: Display refused incoming connection AT *DGARL =0,1 OK AT *DGARL?
*DGARL:1 OK AT *DGARL =1 OK AT *DGARL?
OK n=0
: Connecting to APN directly
(default)
: Send 184 to APN (always OFF)
: Send 186 to APN (always ON) n=1 n=2 AT *DGPIR?
: Display current setting AT *DGPIR =0 OK AT *DGPIR?
*DGPIR:0 OK
-
(Online Data Mode)
+++ (Unable to see the display) OK The setting for notify or hide made by this command is valid when a connection is sent or received. The Dial-up Networking settings can also be used to append 186(ON) or 184(OFF) to the dial-up connection. 3 P442 Switch FOMA handset's mode from online data mode to online command status without disconnecting when escape sequence executed. Register criteria value for determining if QoS
(Quality of Service) sent from network when PPP Packet communication is established, is acceptable or not. Set QoS (Quality of Service) to request for the network when PPP Packet communication is established. Disconnection reason display.
<report>
See Disconnection reason list 3 P460 Set APN when sending Packet communication. 3 P461 AT+CEER
+CEER:36 OK 3 P461 3 P461 AT+CGEQMIN=[Parameters] 3 P461 AT+CGEQMIN=?
: Display all lists of settings AT+CGEQMIN?
: Display current settings AT+CGEQREQ= [Parameters] 3 P462 AT+CGEQREQ=?
: Display all lists of settings AT+CGEQREQ?
: Display current settings 3 P462 Display FOMA handset's version.
-
Set whether to report network service registration status. Upon receiving the status report, "Within service area" or "Outside service area" will be displayed. n=0 n=1
: OFF (default)
: ON (Report the status when it is shifted between within service area and Outside service area) AT+CGREG?
:
Display current setting
+CGREG:< n>,<stat>
n stat
: Parameter
:
0 Outside service area 1 Within service area 4 Unknown 5 Outside service area
(Roaming) AT+CGMR 12345XXXXXXXXXXX OK AT+CGREG=1 OK
(Set to report status) AT+CGREG?
+CGREG:1,0 OK
(Outside service area)
(Move from Outside service area to Within service area)
+CGREG:1
[M]
AT *DGPIR=n
[M]
+++
[M]
AT+CEER
[M]
AT+CGDCONT
[M]
AT+CGEQMIN
[M]
AT+CGEQREQ
[M]
AT+CGMR
[AT] [M]
AT+CGREG=n i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
430 00M1000EN.book 431 AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples AT+CGSN
[AT] [M]
AT+CMEE=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CNUM
[M]
AT+CR=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CRC=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CREG=n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
AT+GMI
[M]
AT+GMM
[M]
AT+GMR
[M]
Display FOMA handset's serial number.
-
Set if any error report in FOMA handset n=0
: Display ERROR and not result code (default) n=1
: +CME ERROR:<err> Use result code and display reason as number n=2
: +CME ERROR:<err>User result code and display reason as characters AT+CMEE?
: Display current settings The right hand side is the command examples when errors in FOMA handset or connection. Display FOMA handset's own number. Display bearer types before displaying CONNECT result code during line connection. 145
:
n=0 n=1
<serv>
number: Telephone number type : 129 or 145 129
:
International access code does not include +
International access code includes +
: Do not display (default)
: Display
: Display only "GPRS" for Packet communication
(Display "SYNC", "AV32K",
"AV64K" for data connection) AT+CGSN 12345XXXXXXXXXX OK AT+CMEE=0 OK AT+CNUM ERROR AT+CMEE=1 OK AT+CNUM
+CME ERROR:10 AT+CMEE=2 OK AT+CNUM
+CME ERROR:SIM not inserted AT+CNUM
+CNUM:,"+8190XXXXXX XX",145 OK AT+CR =1 OK ATD *99 ***1#
+CR:GPRS CONNECT AT+CR?
Set to use extend result code for incoming connection. n=0 n=1
: Display current settings
: Do not use (default)
: Use +CRING.<type>+CRING Form for +CRING is as follows
+CRING
: GPRS "PPP",,, "<APN>"
AT+CRC=0 OK AT+CRC?
+CRC:0 OK Set to display network information indicating
"Within service area" or
"Outside service area".
OS dependant AT+CRC?
: Display current setting. n=0 n=1
: Not notifying (default)
: Notifying (when switching "Within service area" and "Outside service area") AT+CREG=1 OK
(Set to notify) AT+CREG?
: Display current settings
+CREG
: < n>,<stat>
: set value
:
n stat 0 Outside service area 1 Within service area 4 Unknown 5 Within service area (Roaming) AT+CREG?
+CREG:1,0 OK
(Outside service area)
(Move from "Outside service area" to "Within service area")
+CREG:1 i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i Display FOMA handset's manufacturer. Display FOMA handset's product name. Display FOMA handset's version.
-
-
-
AT+GMI Motorola OK AT+GMM FOMA M1000 OK AT+GMR Ver1.00 OK 431 00M1000EN.book 432 AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples AT+IFC=n,m Set to control local flow
[&F] [&W][AT] [M]
AT+WS46=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
ATA
[M]
A/
[AT] [M]
ATD Set wireless network for FOMA handset. Perform the receiving process while receiving Packet communication or 64K data connection. Execute the previously executed command. No carriage return is necessary. Perform automatic call process based on parameters and dial-up parameters to FOMA handset.
: DCE by DTE n m
: DTE by DCE Each set value for n,m 0 : No flow control 1 : Perform XON/XOFF flow control 2 : Perform RS/CS (RTS/CTS) flow control Default: n,m=2.2 AT+IFC?
: Display current settings n=22 : W-CDMA (WidebandCDMA) only
(default)
-
-
AT+IFC=2,2 OK AT+WS46=22 OK RING ATA CONNECT A/
OK ATD*99***<cid># : Packet
<cid>1 to 10 : APNs set in +CGDCONT communication
<Packet communication>
ATD*99***1#
CONNECT Set AT+CBST=116,1,0 ATD<phone number> : 64K data connection Set AT+CBST=131,1,0 ATD< phone number > : AV32K connection Set AT+CBST=134,1,0 ATD< phone number > : AV64K connection
<64K connection>
AT+CBST=116,1,0 OK ATD090XXXXXXXX CONNECT
<AV32K connection>
AT+CBST=131,1,0 OK ATD090XXXXXXXX CONNECT
<AV64K connection>
AT+CBST=134,1,0 OK ATD090XXXXXXXX CONNECT n=0 n=1
: Echo "OFF"
: Echo "ON"(default) ATE1 OK n=0
: Disconnect line (can be skipped) Sets the presence of echo for DTE in command mode. Performs onhook action to FOMA handset. Display the confirmation code. n=0 n=1
: Display "NTT DoCoMo"
: Display product name (same as
+GMM) n=2
: Display version in PPP Packet communication (same as +GMR) Return from online command mode to offline data mode during connection. n=0
: Return from online command mode to offline data mode (can be skipped)
(packet communication)
+++
ATH NO CARRIER ATI0 NTT DoCoMo OK ATI1 FOMA M1000 OK ATO CONNECT
[M]
ATE n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATH n
[M]
ATI n
[AT] [M]
ATO n
[M]
i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 432 00M1000EN.book 433 AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples ATQ n Set up to display/hide result code to DTE. n=0 n=1
: Display result code (default)
: Does not display result code
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATS0=n Set number of rings until FOMA handset receives connection automatically.
[&F] [&W] [M]
ATS2=n Set escape character. n=0
: Do not receive automatically
(default) n=1- 255
: Receive automatically with specified number of rings. ATS0?
: Display current setting n=43 n=127 ATS2?
: Default
: Disabled
: Display current settings
[&F] [M]
ATS3=n
[&F] [M]
ATS4=n
[&F] [M]
ATS5=n
[&F] [M]
ATS7=n
[&F] [&W] [M]
ATV n
[&F] [&W] [AT] [M]
ATX n
[&F] [&W]
ATZ
[AT] [M]
Set carriage return character. n=13
: Default (Only n=13. Can be set) ATS3?
: Display current settings Set Line Feed (LF) character. n=10
: Default (Only n=10. Can be set) ATS4?
: Display current settings Set Back Space (BS) character. n=8 ATS5?
: Default (Only n=8. Can be set)
: Display current settings Set waiting time till end of connection. n=1 to 120 (default: n=60)(second) Setting 121 to 255 is regarded as 120 ATS7? : Display current settings Set all result code to be displayed in either numerals or alphabet characters. n=0
: Send back a result code in numerals n=1
: Send back a result code in alphabet characters (default) Set whether to show speed display in the CONNECT display for the connection. Also detect busy tone or dial tone. n=0
: No dial tone detected, no busy tone detect, no speed display n=1
: No dial tone detected, no busy tone detected, speed display n=2
: Detect dial tone, no busy tone detected, speed display n=3
: No dial tone detected, detect dial tone, speed display n=4
: Detect dial tone, detect dial tone, speed display (default)
-
Reset to the status of nonvolatile memory. Disconnect the line if this command is entered during connection. ATQ0 OK ATQ1
(OK is not displayed this time) ATS0=0 OK ATS0?
000 OK ATS2=43 OK ATS2?
043 OK ATS3=13 OK ATS3?
013 OK ATS4=10 OK ATS4?
010 OK ATS5=8 OK ATS5?
008 OK ATS7=60 OK ATS7?
060 OK ATV1 OK ATX1 OK i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i
(Off line command mode) ATZ NO CARRIER
(On line command mode) ATZ OK 433 00M1000EN.book 434 AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples ATS Display current set of commands and S register setting.
-
[M]
ATV n
[&F] [&W] [M]
AT+CPIN Select type of response code when connected. Enter PIN in FOMA handset. n=0
: Do no use expanded result code
(default) n=1
: Use expanded result code Format
: AT+CPIN="<pin>",
"<newpin>"
This command is to enter PIN1, PIN2 or PIN unlock number in FOMA handset based on result code replied by AT+CPIN?
PIN cannot possibly be entered with this command depending on result code when AT+CPIN? is entered even if PIN or PIN unlock code is required. Do not use this command in order to change PIN. <pin>
and <newpin> must be surrounded with " " . Result of AT+CPIN?
+CPIN:READY:PIN1 code PIN2 PIN1 unlock code, Unable to input PIN2 unlock code
+CPIN:SIM PIN: Waiting to enter PIN1
+CPIN:SIM PIN2: Waiting to enter PIN2
+CPIN:SIM PUK: Locking PIN1 (Possible to enter PIN1 unlock code)
+CPIN:SIM PUK2: Locking PIN2 (Possible to enter PIN2 unlock code) The right is the example of PIN"1234" "and "12345678". i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i
[AT][M]
434 ATS E1 Q0 V1 X4 &
C1&D2&S0V0 S000=000 S002=043 S003=013 S004=010 S005=008 S006=005 S007=060 S008=003 S010=001 S030=000 S103=001 S104=001 OK ATV0 OK
(+CPIN:READY is ready to respond when +CPIN? is entered) AT+CPIN="1234"
ERROR
(+CPIN:READY is ready to respond when +CPIN? is entered) AT+CPIN="12345678","12 34"
ERROR
(+CPIN:SIM PIN is ready to respond when +CPIN?
is entered) AT+CPIN="1234"
OK
(+CPIN:SIM PIN2 is ready to respond when +CPIN?
is entered) AT+CPIN="1234"
OK
(+CPIN:SIM PUK is ready to respond when +CPIN?
is entered: PIN locked) AT+CPIN="12345678","12 34"
OK
(+CPIN:SIM PUK2 is ready to respond when
+CPIN? is entered: PIN locked) AT+CPIN="12345678","12 34"
OK AT+CPIN?
+CPIN:READY OK AT+CPIN=?
OK 00M1000EN.book 435 AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples AT+CLIP=n Display sender's caller ID when 64K data connection is received. n=0 n=1 Result m=0
: No output result (default)
: Output result
: +CLIP (n,m)
: Network setting that does not notify caller ID m=1
: Network setting that notifies AT+CLIP=0 OK AT+CLIP=?
+CLIP:(0,1) OK
[&F][&W][M]
AT+CLIR=n Set to notify phone number when sending 64K data connection. m=2 caller ID
: Unknown
(+CLIP=1 Output result) RING
+CLIP:
"090XXXXXXXX",177,
"123",136 n=0
: Use setting written in service agreement n=1 n=2 Result m=0
: Do not send Caller ID
: Send Caller ID (default)
: +CLIR(n, m)
: CLIR is not operating (always notify) m=1
: CLIR is operating (always does not notify)
: Unknown
: CLIR Temporary mode (default;
m=2 m=3 does not notify) m=4
: CLIR Temporary mode (default:
notify) AT+CLIR=0 OK AT+CLIR?
+CLIR:0,1 OK AT+CLIR=?
+CLIR:(0-2) OK Disconnect handset if no data is received or sent. Inactive timer off (default)
:
n=0 n=0 to 255 Set to append and send received sub address. n=0 n=1 n=2
: *
:
: (yen symbol or backslash)
/ (default) Set to append and send outgoing sub address. n=0 n=1 n=2
: #
: % (default)
: &
Display reception level with a number. n=0 n=1 n=2 n=3
: Reception level 0
: Reception level 1
: Reception level 2
: Reception level 3 ATS30=0 OK ATS30?
000 OK ATS30=?
ERROR ATS103=0 OK ATS103?
000 OK ATS103=?
ERROR ATS104=0 OK ATS104?
000 OK ATS104=?
ERROR AT*DANTE
*DANTE:3 OK AT*DANTE=?
*DANTE:(0-3) OK i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 435
[M]
ATS30=n
[&F][M]
ATS103=n
[&F][M]
ATS104=n
[&F][M]
AT*DANTE
[M]
00M1000EN.book 436 AT Command Overview Parameters/Description Command Examples Display an index for reception power of the radio signal.
-
AT*DRPW
[M]
AT*DRPW
*DRPW:0 OK AT*DRPW=?
*DRPW:(0-75) OK Lists of Disconnected Reasons Disconnected reasons for requested contents are as follows:
1Packet communication Value 27 30 33 36 Reason APN is not present or incorrect. Disconnected from network. Requested service option is not subscribed. Connection is disconnected properly. 164K Data connection Value Reason 1 16 17 18 19 21 63 65 88 Specified number does not exist. Connection is disconnected properly. Unable to communicate because remote device is busy. Call was made, but no response within the specified time. Unable to communicate because remote device is busy calling. Remote device rejected a call. Network service and option are not valid. Unavailable processing speed was specified. You made a call to or received a call from a handset with different handset properties. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 436 00M1000EN.book 437 Additional AT Commands Descriptions 1Invalid AT command The following commands will not generate errors but will not act as commands.
AT (Enter only AT)
ATT (Tone setting)
ATP (Pulse setting)
ATS6 (Specify duration of pause till dialing commences)
ATS8 (Specify duration of comma till dialing commences)
ATS10 (Set delay time for automatic disconnection) 1Command name +CGDCONT[M]
Overview Set APN when sending packet connection. Although this command is a setup command, it does not get stored to the status of nonvolatile memory by &W, and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
Form
+CGDCONT=[<cid>[,"PPP"[ ,"<APN>"]
] ]
Parameter descriptions Set APN when sending Packet communication. See examples in command operation lists
<cid>*
<APN>*
*:
: 1 to 10
: Optional
<cid> is the number used to control the destination (APN) for the Packet communication to be registered in FOMA handset. 1~10 can be registered. <cid>=1 is set as mopera.ne.jp as default but overwrittable.
<APN>is optional connection name that indicates each destination.
Operation without parameter
+CGDCONT=
: Set default value
Command examples Registered APN named abc (cid=3) AT+CGDCONT=3,"PPP","abc"
OK 1Command name:+CGEQMIN=[Parameter]
[M]
Overview Register criteria value to determine if QoS sent from network when PPP Packet communication established is permitted. 4 ways to set up as stated in command examples. Although this command is a setup command, it does not get stored to the status of nonvolatile memory by &W, and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
Form
+CGEQMIN=[<cid>[,,<Maximum bitrate UL>[ ,<Maximum bitrate DL>] ] ]
Parameter description
<cid>*
<Maximum bitrate UL>*
: 1 to 10
: None (default) or 64
<Maximum bitrate DL>*
*:
: None (default) or 384
<cid> is the number used to control the destination (APN) for the Packet communication to be registered in FOMA handset. 1 to 10 can be registered. In <Maximum bitrate UL> and
<Maximum bitrate DL>, the minimum connection speed [in kbps] is set for both upload and download traffic between FOMA handset and the base station. If the parameter is set to None
(default), all speeds are permissible. If 64 and 384 are set, any connection at a speed except the above limit is not permitted, and the Packet communication will not be connected.
Operation without parameter
+CGEQMIN= : Set default value for all <cid>
i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i for all <cid>
+CGEQMIN=<cid>
+CGDCONT=<cid>
: Set specified
<cid> as default
+CGDCONT=?
: Display list of values that can be configured
+CGDCONT?
: Display current settings
: Set specified <cid>
as default value
Command examples 437 00M1000EN.book 438
: Set specified <cid>
as default.
Command examples Only 1 way to set the command. The contents are set by default for each cid. Command used to require 64kbps upload and 384kbps download
(when<cid>=3) AT+CGEQREQ=3 OK 1Saving modem port command setting values Settings by AT commands are initialized when FOMA handset is switched ON and OFF, except APN setting by AT+CGDCONT (3 P440), QoS settings by AT+CGEQMIN and AT+CGEQREQ commands, permit/reject setting mode for incoming connection set by AT*DGAPL/
AT*DGARL/AT*DGANSM commands or appending 184 or 186 for packet connection by AT*DGPIR command. Commands with [&W] can be saved by entering AT&W after setting. And at the same time, other settings with [&W] are also saved. These values can be called by entering ATZ even if after FOMA handset was switched ON and OFF. 4 ways to set up as states in command examples. Set (1) as states value for each <cid>s
(1) Command used to permit all speed both upload and download
(when<cid>=2) AT+CGEQMIN=2 OK
(2) Command used to permit only 64kbps upload and 384kbps download (when<cid>=3) AT+CGEQMIN=3,,64,384 OK
(3) Command used to permit 64kbps upload and all speed download
(when<cid>=4) AT+CGEQMIN=4,,64 OK
(4) Command used to permit all speed upload and only 384kbps download
(when<cid>=5) AT+CGEQMIN=5,,,384 OK 1Command name:
:+CGEQREQ=[Parameter] [M]
Overview Sets up QoS to request to the network when PPP Packet communication is established. This set up is also set up as the default value in one of the patterns stated in the following command execution example. Although this command is a setup command, it does not get stored to the status of nonvolatile memory by &W, and does not get reset by &F and &Z.
Form
+CGEQREQ=[<cid>]
Parameter Description
<cid>*:1 to 10
*:
<cid> is the number used to control the destination (APN) for the Packet communication to be registered in FOMA handset. 1 to 10 can be registered to FOMA handset.
Operation without parameter
+CGEQREQ=
: Set default value for all <cid>s.
+CGEQREQ=<cid>
i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 438 00M1000EN.book 439 Result Codes 1Result codes for data connection No. Text display Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 101 OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIALTONE BUSY NO ANSWER RESTRICTION DELAYED 1Extended result codes Operation performed properly. Connected to their party. Incoming call. Line disconnected. Unable to accept command. Unable to detect dial tone. Detect busy tone. Completed connection. Timeout. Network restriction in place. Redial call restricted. No. Text display Description 5 10 11 13 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 CONNECT 1200 CONNECT 2400 CONNECT 4800 CONNECT 7200 CONNECT 9600 CONNECT 14400 CONNECT 19200 CONNECT 38400 CONNECT 57600 CONNECT 115200 CONNECT 230400 CONNECT 460800 Connected at 1200bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 2400bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 4800bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 7200bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 9600bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 14,400bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 19,200bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 38,400bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 57,600bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 115,200bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 230,400bps between FOMA handset and PC. Connected at 460,800bps between FOMA handset and PC. 1Connection protocol result code No. Text display Description 1 2 3 5 PPPoverUD Connect via PPPoverUD(BC=UDI, +CBST=116,1,0) AV32K AV64K PACKET AV (video-phone) connect via [32K]
AV (video-phone) connect via [64K]
Connect with PACKET NOTE
When ATVn command (3 P457) is set to n=1, the result code is displayed in the alphanumeric display format
(default). When the command is set to n=0, the result code is displayed in the numerical display format.
To retain compatibility with a modem connected via conventional RS-232C, connection speed is displayed but it differs from the actual connection speed because FOMA handset is connected to the PC with a USB cable.
When "RESTRICTION" message is displayed, (No.100), the network is busy. Please try later. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 439 00M1000EN.book 440 Examples of Result Codes 1When ATX0 is set
Regardless of the settings of ATVn command ( 3 P459), only CONNECT is displayed upon completion of connection. Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT Number display example
: ATD*99***1#
1 1When ATX1 is set
When ATX1, ATV0 is set (default)
Upon completion of connection, result code is displayed in the following format:
CONNECT <speed between FOMA handset - PC>
Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT 460800 Number display example
: ATD*99***1# 1 21
When ATX1, ATV1 is set*
The code is displayed upon completion of connection in the following format:
CONNECT <speed of FOMA handset -
PC>PACKET <destination APN>/
<upload maximum speed (between FOMA handset 3 radio base station)>/
<download maximum speed (between FOMA handset radial base station)>
Maximum 64kbps for sending and maximum 384kbps for receiving connection to mopera.ne.jp is displayed as follows. Text display example
: ATD*99***1#
CONNECT 460800 PACKET mopera.ne.jp /
64/ 384 Number display example
: ATD*99***1#
1 21 5
*: When ATX1 and ATV1 are set at the same time, it is likely that dial-up connection will fail. Only use of ATV0 is recommended. i U s n g D a t a C o m m u n c a t i o n i 440 00M1000EN.book 441 Entering Characters Character Input . 442 Entering Characters with Direct Input <Direct Input Method> . 444 Editing/Registering Fixed Phrases <Save Phrases> . 456 Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters <Character copy> . 458 Registering Frequently Used Words <Save word>. 460 Using Electronic Dictionary . 462 Setting the Detail of Character Entry. 466 Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method
<Indirect input method> . 470 441 00M1000EN.book 442 Character Input With FOMA handset, a character is entered by tapping a target character at a keyboard displayed on the touch screen with the Stylus. Also, by switching the input method, a character can be entered by a free draw. Since character input is needed in various situations of FOMA handset operation, such as registering contacts, creating messages, and creating notes, it would be convenient if you memorize the procedure beforehand. Displaying Character Entry Screen Tap the character input field where a character needs to be entered, and tap $$ on the Status bar to display the character entry screen. Enter a target character by switching the input mode.
Switching input method 3 P467 Input mode 3 P467 Input method 3 P466 In case of 50-character kana syllabary keyboard Input Method There are following methods to enter characters with FOMA handset. Choose an input method that suites you. Input method Description Reference Direct input method 50-character kana syllabary keyboard
(Kana Keyboard) From the keyboard arranged in the order of 50-
character kana syllabary, you can enter a character by tapping a target character. Qwerty keyboard From the keyboard arranged in alphabetical order, you can enter a character by tapping a target character. Handwriting Indirect input method Multi Tap Two Tap A character is entered by writing a character on the free draw input area, using the Stylus. From the keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key, a character is entered by tapping a key multiple times to switch the characters. From the keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key, a character is entered by Two Tap operations P469 P471 P478 P496 P500 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 442 00M1000EN.book 443 Switching Input Method Default setting Kana keyboard The input method used at the time of entering a character can be changed. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap "Handset" tab y Text input and on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Input method on Preferences screen
Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display between left and right. b Tap $$ of input method you are setting y [Close] y [Done]
Input method is changed. Input Mode There are following input modes to enter a character. Entering text with a mixture of hiragana, kanji, katakana, alphabet and numeric characters are performed by switching the input mode. To switch the input mode, tap the keyboard for each input method, or tap the key to switch the input mode in the free draw input screen. Input mode Key display Description Hiragana/kanji
[Hiragana]/[Kanji]/[Hira]/"/"
Katakana
[Kata]/[Single-byte Kana]
Alphabet Numeric Symbol
[]/[Abc]/[Eng]/" "
[Num]/[Eng]/[]/[Abc]/""
[Mark]
Hiragana, kanji, and double-byte katakana can be entered. Double-byte/single-byte katakana can be entered. Double-byte/single-byte alphabet character can be entered. Double-byte/single-byte numeric character can be entered. Double-byte/single-byte symbols, special characters or fixed phrases can be selected. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 443 00M1000EN.book 444 NOTE
To switch the input mode, tap the corresponding key in the character input screen for each input method.
When the character input screen is displayed, there are input modes that cannot be switched, depending on the application running or what is to be entered. Direct Input Method Entering Characters with Direct Input With FOMA handset, there are three direct input methods: "50-character kana syllabary keyboard", "Qwerty keyboard" and "free draw input". By setting the input method in advance, each input screen can be displayed at the time of a character input. 3 P492 50-character Kana Syllabary Keyboard When the input method is set to Kana keyboard following keyboards will be displayed by tapping
$$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters. Hiragana/kanji input mode Katakana input mode E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 444 Alphabet/numeric input mode Numeric input mode Item Description a Input method switch key A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched. b Number of characters The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for character input are displayed. c Move key The keyboard is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch screen. d Dictionary key A dictionary search is performed. 00M1000EN.book 445 Item e Input field switch key Description When two or more input field (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be changed while the free draw input screen is displayed. f Minimize key Temporarily hides the keyboard. g End key h Convert key i LF/CR key j Space key k Clear key l Double-byte key m caps/key n Date key o Time key Closes the free draw input screen. Converts input characters. Starts a new line. A space is entered. Deletes a character entered. Double-byte characters and numbers can be entered. Capital letters and small letters are switched. Current date can be entered. Current time can be entered.
To switch the input mode, tap either [Hira]/[Alphabet]/[Kana]/[Numeric] key from each input mode keyboard.
Tap [Symbol] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
List of fixed phrases 3 P522 Kana keyboard Entering Characters Using Kana Keyboard With a kana keyboard, characters that can be entered are displayed on the keyboard. Tap a target character directly to input, and if necessary, switch the input mode by tapping the input mode key.
<Example: when entering "" in Name of a contact>
a Tap Name filed in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
How to operate 3 P99
When an input mode is other than hiragana/kanji mode, tap [Hira]. b Tap [ ] y [ ] y [ ]
Conversion candidates c From the conversion candidates, tap [ ]
Input of "" is set.
When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 445 00M1000EN.book 446
When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
Tap END key to end the entry.
To continue entering characters, tap a key you are entering. NOTE
Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters. Qwerty Keyboard When the input method is set to "Qwerty keyboard", following keyboards will be displayed by tapping $$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters. Hiragana/kanji input mode Alphabet/numeric input mode E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 446 Numeric input mode Item Description a Input method switch key A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched. b Number of characters The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for character input are displayed. c Move key The keyboard is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch screen. d Dictionary key A dictionary search is performed. 00M1000EN.book 447 Item e Input filed switch key Description When two or more input fields (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be changed while the free draw input screen is displayed. f Minimize key Temporarily hides the keyboard. g End key h Convert key i LF/CR key j Space key k Clear key l Double-byte key m caps/key n Date key Closes the free draw input screen. Converts input characters. Starts a new line. A space is entered. Deletes a character entered. Double-byte characters and numbers can be entered. Capital letters and small letters are switched. Current date can be entered. Tapping [caps]/[ ] will switch to Date key, and current date can be entered.
To switch the input mode, tap either [Kanji]/[Alphabet]/[Numeric] key from each input mode keyboard.
Tap [Symbol] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
List of fixed phrases 3 P522 Qwerty keyboard Entering Characters Using Qwerty Keyboard With a Qwerty keyboard, characters that can be entered are displayed on the keyboard. Tap directly on a target character to input, and if necessary, switch the input mode by tapping the input mode key. However, even if the input mode is switched to kanji, hiragana would not show on the keyboard. When entering hiragana/kanji from the Qwerty keyboard, use the Roman character entry method.
The input method must be set to "Qwerty keyboard" beforehand. 3 P492
<Example: when entering "" in Name of a contact >
a Tap Name field in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
How to operate 3 P99
When an input mode is other than hiragana/kanji mode, tap [Kanji]. b Enter " "
Roman character entry is used.
To enter "": tap [t] 3 [a]
To enter "": tap [r] 3 [o]
To enter "": tap [u]
Conversion candidates c From the conversion candidates, tap [ ]
E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 447 00M1000EN.book 448 Input of "" is set.
When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
Tap END key to end the entry.
To continue entering characters, tap a key you are entering. NOTE
Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters.
List of Roman character entries 3 P523 Entering a Fixed Phrase Fixed phrases can be entered by selecting from 5 categories.
This can be used from all input methods. a While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Category names of fixed phrases b Tap a category of a phrase you are entering
Selections can be made from the categories of "General",
"Reply", "Business", "Private" and "English".
Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. c Tap a fixed phrase to enter The phrase is entered.
Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of fixed phrases. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 448 00M1000EN.book 449 NOTE
List of fixed phrases3 P522 Entering a Symbol Double-byte/single-byte symbols and special characters can be selected for entries.
This can be used from all input methods. a While entering characters, tap [Mark]
Types of symbols b Tap the type of symbols
A type of symbol can be selected from "", "Mark" and Particular".
Tap [All] to select from all double-byte/single-byte symbols, special characters and kanji characters.
Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. c Tap a symbol to enter A symbol is entered.
Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of symbols. NOTE
List of symbols and special characters 3 P521 Entering a Face Mark A "Face mark" which expresses a face by using symbols and alphabet characters can be entered.
This can be used from all input methods. a While entering characters, enter " "
Face marks are displayed as for conversion candidates. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 449 00M1000EN.book 450
The following face marks are displayed as for conversion candidates.
(-_-)
(-_-;)
(;_;)
(^.^)
(^^
(^o^)
(~_~;)
^/^
m()m
(-.-)
(..)
(>_<)
(^O_O^)
(^_-)
(^^)
(~o~)
^^;
(+_+)
(._.)
(@_@)
(^O^)
(^_^)
()
)^O^(
^_^;
(*_*)
(._.)_
(T_T)
(^^)
(^_^;)
(~_~)
>^_^<
_(._.)_ b Tap a face mark to enter A face mark is entered. Simple Entry of an Email Address Strings of fixed form used for email or internet address, such as a domain name (that follows after @) of an email address, can be entered.
This can be used from all input methods. a While entering characters, tap [Mark]
b Tap [Web] from the screen for switching between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary
Tap [Back] to go back to the screen for switching between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. c Tap a string to enter The string is entered.
Tap $$ $$ to scroll up and down the list of symbols. NOTE
List of fixed phrases3 P522 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 450 00M1000EN.book 451 Entering Characters from Dictionary A lemmatized search can be performed from a dictionary by selecting a string from the entered text. It is convenient to check the meaning, a declensional kana ending, etc. of the selected string. Furthermore, the searched contents can also be copied.
This can be used from all input methods. Dictionary Search while Entering Characters with Direct Input Method After setting the character input method to "Kana keyboard", "Qwerty keyboard" or "handwriting", a dictionary search is performed while entering characters. a Drag a string for a dictionary search from the entering text The cursor hits the specified area. b Tap $$
Decided character display area Direction word display area Search result display area Dictionary search key Dictionary search screen c Tap a dictionary search key of a dictionary you are using A search begins, and related direction words are displayed in direction word display area.
A dictionary can be selected from "national language", "Japanese-English" or "English-
Japanese". d Tap a target direction word from the direction word display area The explanation of the selected direction word is displayed in the search result display area.
Tap [Copy] to copy the contents displayed in the search result display area. Drag a string in the search result display area, and tap [Copy] to copy the specified string. Tap [Paste]
to paste the copied content in the decided character display area.
Tap [Back] to end the dictionary search. Dictionary Search while Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method After setting the character input method to "Multi Tap" or "Two Tap", a dictionary search is performed while entering characters. a Drag a string for a dictionary search from the entering text The cursor hits the specified area. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 451 00M1000EN.book 452 b Tap [Mark]
The screen for switching between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary c Tap [Dictionary] y perform a dictionary search Subsequent operations are the same as dictionary search for a direct input method.
How to operate3 P475 Deleting Characters Entered characters can be deleted one at a time or several at once. Also, a range for deletion can be specified. 1When deleting one character a time In the display area, tap the right side of a character you want to delete to bring the cursor there, and tap [Clear]
1When deleting all characters entered
Tap the right side of the last character to bring the cursor there, and point [Clear]
for more than one second E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 452 00M1000EN.book 453
Drag on entered characters, and tap [Clear]
1When deleting all characters beyond specified location Tap the left side of the first character of the string you want to delete to bring the cursor there, and point [Clear] for more than one second 1When deleting by specifying the area Drag on the string you are deleting, and tap [Clear]
Entering Characters with Handwriting With handwriting, a character is entered in the free draw input screen by directly writing on the touch screen with the Stylus.
It is necessary to set the input method to "Handwriting" beforehand. 3 P492 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 453 00M1000EN.book 454 Handwriting Input Screen When the input method is set to "free draw input", following input screen will display by tapping
$$ on the Status bar in the situation of entering characters. Item Description a Input method switch key A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched. b Number of characters The number of confirmed characters/maximum number available for character input are displayed. c Move key The free draw input screen is moved to the upper part/lower part of the touch screen. d Dictionary key A dictionary search is performed. e Input field switch key When two or more input fields (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be changed with having the free draw input screen displayed. f Minimize key Temporarily hides the keyboard. g End key Closes the free draw input screen. h Recognition mode tab Switches the mode which recognizes the type of character entered with free draw. i Help key Displays the help for free draw input. j Maximize/standard key The size of free draw input area can be switched between enlarged size and standard size. k Input area A character is entered with free draw. l Input area switch key A continuation of the input area current entering is displayed. m Symbol key n Convert key o New-line key p Space key q Clear key A screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary is displayed. Converts input characters. A new line is started. A space is entered. Deletes a character entered.
Tap [Mark] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
List of fixed phrases 3 P522 Entering Characters The input method for entering characters with handwriting input is explained. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 454 00M1000EN.book 455
<Example: when entering "" in Name of a contact>
a Tap Name field in a contact y tap $$ on the Status bar
How to operate 3 P99 b Write " "in the input area Conversion candidates c From the conversion candidates, tap [ ]
Input of "" is set.
When there are more than one candidate, display them by dragging the scroll bar.
When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
Tap END key to end the entry.
To continue entering characters, write a character in the input area. 1When changing the character which has not been recognized correctly When a character is entered in the input area, the bottom right of the input area displays as following, and by tapping it will display the candidates for the entered character. If a target character exists in the candidates, tap the character for a conversion. If a target character does not exist in the candidates, tap $$ and rewrite the character.
In the input area and for the candidates, the recognized characters are classified and displayed in the following colors. When the character type currently displayed is unclear, it can also be judged by its color.
Hiragana: Pink
Alphabet: Green
Kanji: Yellow
Number: Light-blue
Katakana: Purple
Symbol: Orange E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 455 00M1000EN.book 456 NOTE
Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
When a character entered in standard mode could not be recognized correctly, or is hard to recognize, we recommend you to change the mode that corresponds to the character entered (kana mode or alphanumeric mode).
A character would be more easily recognized by writing it large within the frame.
The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters. Save Phrases Editing/Registering Fixed Phrases By registering frequently used greetings and phrases, they can be entered quickly by just selecting a fixed phrase.
When Master Clear is performed, the registered fixed phrases are all deleted, and it will return to the default state. Registering a New Fixed Phrase A fixed phrase is registered. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector Bar, tap "Handset" tab y Text input on the Control Panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Edit Template on Preferences screen Category: Switches the category of fixed phrases. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 456 Fixed phrase edit screen b Tap the Category and select a category where you are registering
Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet".
Maximum of 20 fixed phrases can be registered for each category. 00M1000EN.book 457 c Tap [Add]
Sentence : Entered the phrase to be registered. d Enter a phrase y Tap [Settings]
The phrase is registered.
Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be entered is 32. Editing the Default Fixed Phrases A registered fixed phrase is edited. a Display the fixed phrase edit screen
How to operate 3 P480 b Tap the Category and select a category of the fixed phrase you are making a change
Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet". c Tap the fixed phrase you are editing y tap [Change]
d Edit the phrase y tap [Settings]
The fixed phrase is edited.
Up to 32 double-byte/single-byte characters can be entered is 32.
Tap [Cancel] to stop editing the fixed phrase. Deleting a Fixed Phrase Registered fixed phrases can be deleted one at a time. a Display the fixed phrase edit screen
How to operate 3 P480 b Tap the Category and select a category of the fixed phrase you are deleting
Selections can be made from the categories of "General", "Reply", "Business", "Private"
"English" and "Internet". E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 457 00M1000EN.book 458 c Tap the fixed phrase you are deleting y tap [Delete]
d Tap [Yes]
The fixed phrase will be deleted.
Tap [No] to cancel the deletion. Character copy Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters Characters and numbers such as from notes or messages can be copied or cut, and pasted on another character input screen. Copying/Cutting Characters Specify the range of text to copy/cut in Notes etc., display the screen to paste and paste. When a copy is performed, the original copied content remains and the same content is pasted to the pasted location. Moreover, when a cut is performed, the original copied content is lost, and the copied content is pasted to the pasted location. a Display the screen to perform Copy/Cut Edit screen of Notes b Drag and specify the range of string to copy/cut The specified area will be highlighted. c Tap Edit on the Menu bar y tap Copy/Cut Selected range will be copied/cut.
Tap Copy to copy the selected range.
Tap Cut to cut the selected range. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 458 00M1000EN.book 459 NOTE
Depending on application, it is not necessary to specify the range to perform a copy/cut. For examples, calculation result of a calculator and a phone number entered in the phone number entry screen are copied as the way they are.
Depending on application, the item names for Copy/Paste displayed on a menu bar may differ, or they may be displayed at different place than the menu bar. 1Copy/Cut and Paste operations For screens displayed such as when entering a keyword for a search, a menu can be displayed from other than a menu bar to perform Copy/Cut and Paste. Tap $$ beside the title to display the menu. Search screen for Notes Pasting a Character A content copied/cut is pasted. a Display a screen to paste a copied/cut content b Tap on the place to specify the position to paste Tap $$ beside the title to display the menu. The cursor moves to the location where the paste is performed. c Tap Edit on the Menu bar y tap Paste A content copied/cut is pasted. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 459 00M1000EN.book 460 NOTE
Depending on application, it is not necessary to specify the range to perform a copy/cut. For examples, calculation result of a calculator and a phone number entered in the phone number entry screen are copied as the way they are.
Depending on application, the item names for Paste displayed on a Menu bar may differ, or they may be displayed at different place than the Menu bar. Save word Registering Frequently Used Words By registering frequently used names and words in the user dictionary, they can be displayed as conversion candidates at a character conversion, and can be entered quickly.
When Master Clear is performed, the registered words are all deleted. Registering a New Word A word is registered in the user dictionary.
Up to 100 words can be registered. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control Panel screen, and tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen Word edit screen b Tap [Add]
Reading : A reading of the word to register is entered. Word
: A word to register is entered. c Tap Reading y Enter a reading E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 460 00M1000EN.book 461
Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11. d Tap Word y Enter a word
Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11. e Sap [Settings]
The word is registered.
Tap [Cancel] to stop registering. Editing a Registered Word A word registered in the user dictionary is edited. a Display the word edit screen
How to operate 3 P484 b Tap the word you are editing y tap [Change]
c Tap the field you want to edit y edit the Reading/Word
Regardless of double-byte/single-byte, the maximum number of characters that can be entered for the combination of Reading and Word is 11. d Tap [Settings]
The word is edited. Deleting a Registered Word A word registered in the user dictionary is deleted one at a time. a Display a word edit screen
How to operate 3 P484 b Tap the word you are deleting y tap [Delete]
c Tap [Yes]
The word is deleted.
Tap [No] to cancel the deletion. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 461 00M1000EN.book 462 Using Electronic Dictionary Settings and registration for the dictionary installed in FOMA handset are performed. Setting to Perform a Dictionary Search Automatically at a Conversion You can set it so that when a character entered is converted, conversion candidates are searched from the dictionary and displayed. Also, the type of dictionary used for the search can be set. a Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Dictionary search at conversion on Preferences screen Use dictionary search
: Sets so that a dictionary search is performed when a character is converted. National language dictionary
: National language dictionary is added to the dictionary used for the search. Japanese-English dictionary
: Japanese-English dictionary is added to the dictionary used for the search.
Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display between left and right. b Tap $$ at the field of Use dictionary search c Tap $$ of the dictionary used for the search It is set so that a dictionary search is performed at conversion, and the dictionary used for the search is selected. Adding a Dictionary Dictionaries installed to FOMA handset from the attached CD-ROM can be added as the dictionaries used at a character conversion. Also, setting the priority for a dictionary search and deleting added dictionaries can be performed.
Up to 64 dictionaries can be registered. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 462 00M1000EN.book 463 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab on Preferences screen Dictionaries installed are displayed. b Tap in the order from $$ of the dictionary to add y [Add]
Unless $$ of the dictionary is tapped, the installed dictionary cannot be used. c Tap [Settings]
The dictionary is added. Setting the Priority of Dictionary Search If there are two or more dictionaries added, the priority for dictionary search can be set up. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab on Preferences screen E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 463 00M1000EN.book 464 b Tap [Priority]
c Tap the dictionary moving the priority y tap [ ]/[ ]
d Tap [Set]
The priority is set. Deleting an Added Dictionary A dictionary added for search at conversion is set not to be used.
A dictionary installed will not be erased. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Additional Dictionary tab from Preferences screen b Tap [Delete] y [Yes]
The dictionary is set not to be used. Setting the Saving Method of User Dictionary and Learning Dictionary User dictionary and learning dictionary stored in FOMA handset can be set so that they are automatically backed up in Trans Flash memory card. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 464 00M1000EN.book 465 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Save Dictionary tab on Preferences screen Save automatically
: Sets whether or not to save the dictionary automatically. Saving cycle Once a day : Saves when the first character input screen displayed in a day is closed. When closing keyboard
: Saves when the character input screen is closed.
Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display between left and right. b Tap $$ at the field of Save automatically c Tap $$ of Once a day/When closing keyboard at field of Saving cycle Returning the Learning Dictionary to the Default State Learned information stored in the user dictionary can be reset to default state. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Learning tab on Preferences screen
Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display between left and right. b Tap [Clear learning information] y [Yes]
The learned information will be deleted.
Tap [No] to cancel the deletion of the learning information. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 465 00M1000EN.book 466 1Learning Information A converted content of a character input by the user is stored in the user dictionary in FOMA handset, and when the same character is entered and converted again, it will be displayed as one of the conversion candidates. Setting the Detail of Character Entry The settings related to character input, such as the usage of predict conversion function and the input mode when the character entry screen is activated are set. Setting the Input System Default setting AWnn Japanese keyboard The input system of FOMA handset can be changed to other input systems.
Other input systems are not installed in the FOMA handset by default. This operation can be performed only when other input system is installed. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen b Tap Primary input method y select an input system An input system is set.
Tap [Default] to reset the input system back to the default state. Setting Alternative Input Method The alternative input method for the FOMA handset can be changed.
No other alternative input system is installed in the FOMA handset by default. This operation can be performed only when another input system is installed. Default setting None E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 466 00M1000EN.book 467 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, and tap Alternative on the text input setup screen b Tap Alternative input method y select an alternative input system An alternative input system is selected.
Tap [Default] to reset the changed alternative input method back to the default state. Using Predict Conversion Function Default setting Use predict conversion: $$
Whether to use the predict conversion function or not at the conversion of a character can be set. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Predict conversion tab on Preferences screen
Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display between left and right. b Tap $$ at Use Predict conversion The Predict conversion function is set. Setting the Input Mode at the Time of Activation The input mode displayed when the text input screen is displayed can be set up beforehand. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 467 00M1000EN.book 468 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] from Text input setup screen, and tap Input mode at activation tab from Preferences screen Hiragana input: Sets hiragana as the input mode to be always displayed. Single-byte alphabet input
: Sets single-byte alphabet as the input mode to be always displayed. System setup : Sets so that the input mode corresponding to the contents of an input may be displayed automatically.
Tap $$ $$ at the tab display area to switch the tab display between left and right. b Tap $$ of the input mode you are using at At activation The input mode at activation is set. Setting the Display Format of Date and Time The display format of a date and time inputted by tapping a specific key can be set for each input mode beforehand. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input on the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Date and time tab on Preferences screen Hiragana input: Sets the display format of a date and time at hiragana input mode. Single-byte kana input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at single-byte kana input mode. Double-byte alphabet input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at double-byte alphabet input mode. Single-byte alphabet input
: Sets the display format of a date and time at single-byte alphabet input mode.
Tap $$ $$ on the tab display area to switch the tab display between left and right. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 468 00M1000EN.book 469 b Tap $$ of the input mode you are setting y [Change]
Date : Selects the display format for Date. Time : Selects the display format for Time. c Tap the field to set, and select a display format d Tap [Set]
The display formats of date and time for the selected input mode are set up. NOTE
Input method of Date and Time 3 P468, P470, P496, P500 Setting Details for Handwriting The recognition speed of a free draw input, the width of the pen, and the color of the pen can be set up. Also, My symbol that inputs a character string by just entering a simple sign can be set. Registering My Symbol A setting can be made for registering strings to be converted just by entering a Symbol, such as a simple sign or mark.
Up to 30 symbols can be registered. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, and tap Handwriting tab y [Handwriting settings] on Preferences screen
Tap $$ to display the help for handwriting. Symbol field Registration text field b Write a symbol at the symbol field Drag and draw a symbol to register within the frame. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 469 00M1000EN.book 470
Tap [Clear] below the symbol field to delete and rewrite the symbol c Tap a registration text column y enter a text
Tap [Clear] below the registration text field to delete a text. Setting the Recognition Speed of Free Draw and Width/Color of Characters The recognition speed of free draw can be set. Also thickness and color of characters entered with free draw can be set. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input from the Control panel screen, tap [Advanced] on Text input setup screen, tap Handwriting tab y [Handwriting settings]
from Preferences screen, and tap Others tab on Decuma Settings screen Recognition timeout Pen size Pen color
: Selects the drag speed that can be recognized.
: Selects the width of the pen.
: Selects the color of the pen. b Tap $$ of the speed you are setting at Recognition timeout
By setting the recognition speed faster, characters entered by free draw with fast drag operation can be recognized. c Tap $$ of the width you are setting at size d Tap $$ of the color you are setting at Pen color e Tap [Done]
The recognition timeout, width and size/color of the pen are set. Indirect input method Entering Characters with Indirect Input Method FOMA handset has two indirect input methods "Multi Tap" and "Two Tap". By setting up an input method beforehand, each input screen (keyboard) can be displayed at the time of a character input. 3 P492 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 470 00M1000EN.book 471 Multi Tap/Two Tap Keyboard When the input method is set as Multi Tap or Two Tap, following keyboard will display by tapping
$$ on the Status bar when a character is entered. For the procedure for Multi Tap and Two Tap, please refer to each explanation. 3 P495, P500 Hiragana input mode Item Description a Input method switch key A menu is displayed, and input method can be switched. b Name The name of the character input field is displayed. c Minimize key Temporarily hides the keyboard. d Input field switch key When two or more input field (name, family name, address, etc.) exist in one screen, such as a registration screen for a contact, the input field can be changed with having the keyboard displayed. e End key Closes the keyboard. f Display area Characters entered/decided are displayed. g Conversion candidate Conversion candidates for characters entered are displayed. area h Scroll arrow When conversion candidates cannot all fit in the display, tap the arrow to scroll up and down to display the rest of the candidates. i Number of characters The number of decided characters/maximum available character input is displayed.
In order to switch an input mode, tap [Character] at the keyboard of each input mode, and from the screen that switches input mode, tap one of the keys from [kanji]/[Kata]/[]/[Abc]/[Eng]/[Num].
Tap [Mark] to display the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 P472
List of symbols and special characters 3 P521
List of fixed phrases 3 P522 Multi Tap Entering a Character with Multi Tap With Multi Tap, a keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key is displayed as a character input screen. In order to enter a character, tap the key where a character is assigned multiple times until that character is displayed.
The input method needs to be set as Multi Tap beforehand. 3 P492 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 471 00M1000EN.book 472 Keyboard Display and Character Assignments for Each Input Mode Following are the keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode. Whenever a key is tapped where the character entering is assigned, the character on the key changes. 1Input mode: hiragana Keyboard display Characters assigned
# *1, *2 3 33333 3 3 3 3 3 3 33333 3 33333 3 33333 3 3 33333 3 33333 3 33333 3 333 3 3 3 3 33333 3 333 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 " 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 (double-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3 Character Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Symbol Convert Clear Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Converts a character entered. Deletes a character entered. 1Input mode: single-byte katakana Keyboard display Characters assigned 33333333333 333333 333333 3333333 333333 333333 333333 3333333 333333 3333 3 3 3 - 3 ? 3 ! 3 & 3 " 3 3 3 3 ( 3 ) 3 3 3 3 (single-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3 Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Deletes a character entered.
*
#*2 Character Symbol Clear E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 472 00M1000EN.book 473 1Input mode: single-byte alphabet Keyboard display 1 2ABC 3DEF 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7PQRS 8TUV 9WXYZ 0
*
#*2 Characters assigned 1 3a3b3c3A3B3C32 3 3d3e3f3D3E3F33 3 3g3h3i3G3H3I34 3 3j3k3l3J3K3L35 3 3m3n3o3M3N3O363 3 P3q3r3s3 P3Q3R3S37 3 3t3u3v3T3U3V383 3w3x3y3z3W3X3Y3Z393 0 3 . 3 @ 3 _ 3 - 3 / 3 ? 3 ! 3 & 3 ' 3 " 3 : 3 ; 3 ~ 3 3 (single-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3 .co.jp 3 .com 3 .net 3 .ne.jp 3 .or.jp 3 http:// 3 www. 3 @docomo.ne.jp 3 Character Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Symbol Clear Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Deletes a character entered. 1Input mode: double-byte alphabet Keyboard display
# *2 Characters assigned 33333333 33333333 33333333 33333333 33333333 3 P3333 P33333 33333333 333333333 3 3 3 3 3 / 3 3 3 3 ' 3 " 3 3 3 3 3 (double-byte space) 3 (Date*3) 3 (Time*3) 3 Character Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Symbol Clear Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Deletes a character entered. 1Input mode: single-byte number Keyboard display Characters assigned 1 2 3 1 2 3 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 473 00M1000EN.book 474 Keyboard display Characters assigned 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
*
#
Character Symbol Others Clear 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
*
#
Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. 3 (double-byte space) 3 (New-line) 3 3 / 3. 3, 3 Deletes a character entered.
*1:
Voiced sound and semi-voiced sound can be added (Only the characters that can add them). Each time you tap, it will switch as: "3 (voiced sound)3 (semi-voiced sound) 3 none 3 ".
*2: Will start a new line by pointing it for more than 1 second,
*3:
Date and Time can be entered by set display format. 3 P492 Entering a Character The method to enter a character with Multi Tap is explained.
<Example: when entering "" in Name of a contact >
a Tap in the order by Name in a contact y $$ at the Status bar
How to operate 3 P99 b Enter " "
To enter "" : Tap "" once
To enter "" : Tap "" five times
To enter "" : Tap "" three times c From the conversion candidates, tap [ ]
Input of "" is set.
When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
Tap END key to end the entry. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 474 00M1000EN.book 475
To continue entering characters, tap a key where the character you are entering is assigned.
For a character input, please refer to "Keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode" 3 P496 NOTE
Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters. Determining the Characters Entered with Multi Tap Automatically Default setting Determine automatically $$:
You can setup for the cursor to move automatically to the next input position and wait for an input after each character is entered by multi-taps. When entering a character assigned to the same key continuously, the operation to tap the right side of the entered character to move the cursor becomes unnecessary. a Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar, tap Handset tab y Text input from the Control Panel screen, tap [Advanced] from Text input setup screen, and tap Multi Tap tab from Preferences screen Determine automatically
: Sets to automatically determine entered characters. Determining cycle
: Selects the speed to determine. b Tap $$ at the field of Determine automatically c Tap $$ of the speed to set for Determining cycle Characters entered by Multi Tap are set to be determined automatically. Two Tap Entering a Character with Two Tap With Two Tap, a keyboard with two or more characters assigned to one key is displayed as a character input screen. In order to enter a character, tap the key where a character to input is assigned, display the selection screen for the assigned character, and tap the character to input.
The input method needs to be set as Two Tap beforehand.3 P492 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 475 00M1000EN.book 476 Keyboard Display and Character Assignments for Each Input Mode Following are the keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode. Tap a key where the character entering is assigned, and a selection screen for assigned character is displayed. 1Input mode: hiragana Keyboard display Characters assigned
#
Character Symbol Convert Clear
- " ( )
$$(double-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Converts a character entered. Deletes a character entered. 1Input mode: single-byte katakana Keyboard display Characters assigned
*
#
Character Symbol Clear E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 476
- ? ! & " ( )
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Deletes a character entered. 00M1000EN.book 477 1Input mode: single-byte alphabet Keyboard display Characters assigned 1 2ABC 3DEF 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7PQRS 8TUV 9WXYZ 0
*
#
Character Symbol Clear 1 A B C 2 a b c D E F 3 d e f G H I 4 g h i J K L 5 j k l M N O 6 m n o P Q R S 7 p q r s T U V 8 t u v W X Y Z 9 w x y z 0
. , ? ! - & ' " : ; @ ~ /
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time .co.jp
.com .net .ne.jp .or.jp http:// www. @docomo.ne.jp Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Deletes a character entered. 1Input mode: double-byte alphabet Keyboard display Characters assigned
#
Character Symbol Clear
' "
$$(double-byte space) $$(New-line) Date Time Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary. Deletes a character entered. 1Input mode: single-byte number Keyboard display Characters assigned 1 2 3 1 2 3 E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 477 00M1000EN.book 478 Keyboard display Characters assigned 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
*
#
Character Symbol Others Clear 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
*
#
Displays the screen that switches the input mode. Displays the screen that switches between symbols, fixed phrases and dictionary.
$$(single-byte space) $$(New-line) : / . , Deletes a character entered. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 478 00M1000EN.book 479 Entering a Character The method to enter a character with Two Tap is explained.
<Example: when entering "" in Name field of a contact>
a Tap the Name field in a contact y $$ at the Status bar
How to operate 3 P99 b Tap [ ]
A selection screen with the characters assigned to [ ] key is displayed. c Tap [ ]
"" is entered. Enter "" the same way.
To enter "": Tap in the order by [] 3 []
To enter "": Tap in the order by [] 3[]
d From the conversion candidates, tap [ ]
Input of "" is set.
When predict conversion function is set to ON, the conversion candidate predicted to follow the character decided in conversion candidate area is displayed.
Tap END key to end the entry.
To continue entering characters, tap a key where the character you are entering is assigned.
For a character input, please refer to "Keyboard display and character assignments for each input mode" 3 P500 NOTE
Following operations are also available:
- Entering a fixed phrase 3 P472
- Entering a symbol 3 P473
- Entering a face mark 3 P474
- Deleting an entered character 3 P476
- Searching a dictionary 3 P475
The maximum number of characters that can be converted at once is 32 characters. E n t e r i n g C h a r a c t e r s 479 00M1000EN.book 480 00M1000EN.book 481 Overseas Use 1International Roaming
"WORLD WING" International Roaming Service . 482 Services Available Outside Japan . 483 Before Use . 484 1Making/Answering Calls from Overseas Making Calls . 487 Answering Calls . 490 1Settings for Overseas Use Switching Networks . 491 Setting Operations in Roaming . 491 481 00M1000EN.book 482
"WORLD WING" International Roaming Service International roaming is a service that makes telephone and other types of communications available from overseas, which is outside of the FOMA network service area, by using affiliated operators' networks. The international roaming service allows subscribers to use their FOMA handsets to make telephone communication including voice and video calls*2, and email, Short Message Service
(SMS) and packet communication in about 220*1 countries and regions around the world.
*1:
*2:
As of XX 2004 As of XX 2004, videophone communication is available when you and the other parties are using DoCoMo (Japan), Hutchison 3G UK (United kingdom.) or Hutchison 3G HK (Hong Kong). For details, visit the DoCoMo website.
Use of the international roaming service requires a subscription to "WORLD WING," the international roaming service provided by DoCoMo. In addition, a UIM (green) made available for WORLD WING must be attached to the FOMA handset.
A UIM (blue) must be switched with a UIM (green).
When you purchase a subscription to WORLD WING at a DoCoMo information desk, the card will be exchanged free of charge.
Communication services and functions available depend on the network operator connected to. 3 P507
The communication system in Overseas networks to be applied are W-CDMA or GSM/GPRS. W-CDMA 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)* is a global standard. A 3G mobile communication system is compliant to 3GPP.
*:
A regional standardization organization founded for the development of common technology specification relating to the 3G mobile communication system (IMT-2000). GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) The 2nd generation mobile communication system in digital mode is most widely used around the world, especially in Europe and Asia. GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) The 2.5 generation mobile communication system is the communication method that enables high-speed packet communication through the GPRS* by utilizing GSM
*:
Packet communication with transmission speed of up to 115 kbps is available.
By default, network switching for overseas use automatically takes place. 3 P515 O v e r s e a s U s e 482 00M1000EN.book 483 Services Available Outside Japan Services Available The following services are available outside Japan:
Service Description Voice call Video call Email Short Message Service (SMS) Packet communication The phone number used in Japan can also be used for making and answering domestic calls in the country of stay and making international calls to Japan or other countries. International videophone communication is available with subscribers of specific overseas 3G mobile operators or FOMA handset users in Japan. The email address used in Japan can also be used for email exchange from overseas. The recipients' FOMA handset phone numbers can be used to exchange Short Message Service (SMS) messages between FOMA handset users from overseas. Packet communication is available from overseas by connecting to PCs, etc.
*:
Services that may be available depending on the network operator or network used. Communication Systems and Services Available Services and functions available differ between networks in Japan and overseas. Different communication systems and services available are as described below:
Voice call Video call Internet Email Service Packet communication W-CDMA GSM GPRS s y s t e m C o m m u n c a i t i o n Short Message Service
(SMS) O v e r s e a s U s e 483 00M1000EN.book 484 Before Use Make sure of the following before leaving Japan, in the country of stay and after coming back to Japan. Before Leaving Japan To use your FOMA handset outside Japan, make sure of the following before leaving Japan. 1Subscription A subscription to WORLD WING is required.
WORLD WING is an optional service that requires a separate subscription. No monthly charges apply.
A UIM (green) made available for WORLD WING must be attached to the FOMA handset for overseas use. 1Battery charging Check the power supply voltage available in the country or region of stay and use the FOMA international AC adapter 01 (separately provided).
The AC adapter that comes with the handset is for domestic use only (100 VAC). An AC adapter suited to the voltage available in the place of stay is required.
Notes on use of AC adapter 3 P24
Charging the battery 3 P54 1Network services Network services may not be set/checked depending on the overseas network operator used. Some network services can be set/checked only in Japan. Whether network service operations can be performed or not is as described below:
Name of service Setting operation Voicemail Service Call Waiting Service Call Forwarding Service Nuisance Call Blocking Service Dual Network Service Can be set.*
Can be set. Can be set.*
Can be set.*
Cannot be set. Caller ID Display Request Service Caller IDs may not be sent correctly.*
English Announcement Caller ID Notification Drive Mode English Announcement Roaming (roaming guidance) Roaming (incoming call barring when roaming)
*: May not be set in some service areas. Can be set.*
Can be set.*
Can be set but no voice guidance available. Can be set.*
Can be set.*
Can be set.
For details, see "Network Service Operation Guide".
To perform voicemail or call forwarding operation from overseas, remote operation must be enabled in Japan in advance. 3 P516
Services that can be set may not be available depending on the network operator used or the region. O v e r s e a s U s e 484 00M1000EN.book 485 Viewing Information from Place of Stay 1Display view An available network is automatically found and set, and available services such as voice or video call can be checked with icons that indicate the status of the network. Display Description
$$ (Orange) Voice data can be exchanged through roaming.
$$ (Orange)
$$ (Orange) Voice data and still images can be exchanged through roaming. Voice data and images can be exchanged through roaming. NOTE
The indications are in green when the handset is in FOMA network service area.
The indications are in gray when the handset is outside of the area covered by the network.
The network can be manually selected for use. 3 P515 1Inquiries For inquiries about lost or stolen handsets, settlement of total charges or failure of handsets outside Japan, contact DoCoMo at the numbers shown in "For Inquires about Lost or Stolen Handsets or Settlement of Total Charges" or "About Failure" on the back cover of the manual.
The contact numbers must be prefixed with the code as shown in "International Phone Code for Universal Number (Table 1)" or "International Access Code (Table 2)" assigned to the place of stay. 3 P510 The codes to prefix the contact numbers are as shown in the tables below: "International Phone Code for Universal Number (Table 1)" and "International Access Code (Table 2)."
International Phone Code for Universal Number (Table 1) Area Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada China Columbia Denmark France Germany Hong Kong A B C D F G H International phone code 00 0011 00 00 0021 011 00 009 00 00 00 001 Area Luxemburg Malaysia New Zealand Norway Philippines Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand L M N P S T International phone code 00 00 00 00 00 001 001 00 00 00 00 001 O v e r s e a s U s e 485 00M1000EN.book 486 Area International phone code I Ireland Israel Italy 00 014 00 Major International Access Codes (Table 2) Area Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Luxemburg Macao Malaysia A B C D F G H I L M International phone code 0011 00 00 011 00 00 00 00/990 00 00 00 001 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 Area U.K. U.S.A. Area Monaco Netherlands New Zealand Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey U.A.E. U.K. U.S.A. Vietnam U M N P R S T U V International phone code 00 011 International phone code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 810 001 001 00 00 00 002 001 00 00 00 011 00 After Coming Back to Japan After you come back to Japan, your handset will automatically select to use the FOMA network. If your handset is set to use manual network selection, you must manually reset the handset to use the FOMA network.
The network can be manually selected for use. 3 P515 NOTE
For overseas use, refer to "International Service Roaming Guide (XXX)" and "Network Service Operation Guide" together with this manual.
The Quick Reference Manual useful for referring to operations is provided on P000, which provides a convenient reference for overseas use of your FOMA handset.
Charges for overseas use will be added to the bill for monthly services. Be informed that the billing may be delayed about one month for reasons of overseas network operators. O v e r s e a s U s e 486 00M1000EN.book 487
If you have any problem about overseas use of your FOMA handset, see "Troubleshooting (for Overseas Use)". 3 P53 Making Calls Phone calls from overseas to Japan or to other countries are international calls to Japan, etc. To make a call, prefix the phone number with "+" and the country code of the destination and enter the other party's phone number. When entering the phone number, remove "0" at the beginning of the area code. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar The following operations can be performed:
[0]~[9], [*], [#] : Use these keys to enter the phone number.
[$$]
: Deletes a digit in the phone number from the right. Pointing for 1+ seconds deletes all of the phone number entered. b Enter the other party's phone number The FOMA handset vibrates every time a key on the Enter phone number screen is tapped.
Point to [0] for 1+ seconds to enter "+".
Pause ("P"), Wait ("W"), "#" and "*" can be entered. 3 P73 1To call landline phones
+ Country code - Area code with 0 removed - City code - Number
If the other party is a landline phone in Italy, "0" is required. 1To call mobile phones
+ Country code - 90 - XXXX - XXXX
+ Country code - 80 - XXXX - XXXX 1To call PHS phones
+ Country code - 70 - XXXX - XXXX c Tap [$$]
Tap [$$] to make a video call. 3 P86 1If you hear a busy signal The line is busy. Press e and try again at a later time. O v e r s e a s U s e 487 00M1000EN.book 488 d Talk on the phone The call duration is displayed. The following operations can be performed:
[Mute]/[Unmute]
: Tap this to switch between the mute and unmute settings. When the mute setting is active, the other party cannot hear your voice but you can hear the other party's voice.
: Tap this to set/release the touch screen lock. When the lock is active, all tapping operations other than $$ are disabled.
[$$]/[$$]
[Hold]/[Resume]
s
: Tap this to place a call on/off hold. The mute/
unmute setting cannot be changed while a call is on hold.
: Press to enable/disable the speakerphone function. e Press e when you have finished your call The line is cleared. O v e r s e a s U s e 488 00M1000EN.book 489 Country code Country codes are as shown below:
Country Code A B C D F G H I J L M Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Japan Luxemburg Macao 61 43 32 55 1 86 420 45 358 33 49 30 852 36 91 62 353 39 81 352 853 M N P Country Malaysia Monaco Netherlands New Zealand Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia S Singapore South Korea Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey U.A.E. U.K. U.S.A. Vietnam T U V Code 60 377 31 64 47 63 48 351 7 65 82 34 46 41 886 66 90 971 44 1 84 Making Calls within Country of Stay To make a call to a party in the country of stay, enter the other party's phone number and call in the same way as calls within Japan.
If the other party is also using international roaming, make a call in the same way as calls from overseas, even if the other party is in the same country. NOTE
Storing phone numbers including the other parties' country codes, etc. in the contact list will simplify the procedure of making international calls. If your call did not get through, tap [$$Retry] on the screen to make another attempt to call the same number.
The Enter phone number screen can also be displayed by pressing e in idle state.
The view of the Enter phone number screen fields can be changed. 3 P139
The handset can be set not to show the call duration on the screen displayed while talking. 3 P135
An audible timer to notify you of the elapsed call time is available. 3 P128
The handset can be set not to answer incoming calls during international roaming. 3 P516
The handset can be set to play to a party who has attempted to call you during international roaming a message informing the caller that the call is being forwarded overseas 3 P517
Caller IDs may not be sent correctly. O v e r s e a s U s e 489 00M1000EN.book 490
Some overseas network operators may charge you for calls that did not get through due to communication conditions.
Some overseas network operators may charge you for calls to toll-free numbers.
When you use international videophone, the image of the other party displayed may be distorted or connection may not be established depending on the other party's handset. For details, visit the DoCoMo website. Answering Calls Answer incoming phone calls with your FOMA handset when you are outside Japan. a A call arrives The ring tone sounds and the status LED flashes.
The vibrator can be enabled instead of the ring tone. 3 P126 b Tap [Answer]
The call is answered.
If a video call arrives, tap [Answer] to answer the call with the camera image enabled. Tap
[Privacy] to answer the call with the camera image disabled.
Tap [Reject] to hang up without answering the incoming call.
Operations during conversation are the same as described in Step 4 of "Making calls."
c Press e when you have finished your call The line is cleared. 1To access your FOMA handset overseas from Japan Entering your phone number in the same way as usual domestic calls allows a caller in Japan to make a call to your handset outside Japan, which you can answer. Enter "090-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key Or Enter "080-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key 1To access your FOMA handset overseas from countries other than Japan Regardless of the place of stay, entering your phone number prefixed with "+" and "81"
(country code for Japan) and without the "0" at the beginning of the area code allows a caller to make a call to your handset, in the same way as overseas calls to Japan. Enter "+81-90-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key Or Enter "+81-80-XXXX-XXXX" and press the Start key In some countries, you may be charged for calls that arrive during international roaming. NOTE
Calls that arrive while the line is busy can be automatically diverted to the Voicemail Service Center. 3 P375
Calls that arrive during international roaming are forwarded from Japan, regardless of the places of origin. The callers are charged for calls to Japan and the receivers for international forwarding. O v e r s e a s U s e 490 00M1000EN.book 491 Switching Networks Default setting Band: WCDMA Registration preference: Auto Search frequency: Medium To use your FOMA handset overseas, it is necessary to switch to a network available in the place of stay. By default, a network available will be automatically found and set. You can also select a network manually.
Network switching must take place in a country where you use your FOMA handset.
Network cannot be switched while Self mode is active. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Network on the Menu bar on the Phone number entry screen Band
: Select a frequency band suited for the Registration preference country of stay. Search frequency : Set the frequency of searching for a
: Set the network automatically or manually. Find new network : Starts a search for a new network. network. b Tap Band and select a frequency band c Tap Registration preference, and tap Auto/Manual
If Auto has been tapped, the network found will be automatically set. If Manual has been tapped, select from the networks found to set the network. d Tap Search frequency and select the frequency of search e Tap [Find new network]
A network is found. If Registration preference is set to Auto, the network found will be automatically registered. 1If Registration preference is set to Manual The screen as shown below is displayed after a network has been found. Tap the network to set, and tap [Register]. The selected network will be registered. f Tap [Done]
Setting Operations in Roaming Set operations for handling calls that arrive while you are using international roaming outside Japan.
For details about network services, see "Network Service Operation Guide". O v e r s e a s U s e 491 00M1000EN.book 492 Making available Remote Operation of Network Services during Roaming Set your handset to allow remote operation of Voicemail and Call Forwarding Services from overseas.
This operation can be performed only by subscribers of Voicemail or Call Forwarding Service. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming in the Menu bar b Tap $$ in the Remote access control field, and tap [Yes]
Remote access is enabled.
Tap $$ to disable remote access. Avoiding Calls Arriving during Roaming Your handset can be set to restrict incoming calls or data communications during roaming. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming in the Menu bar on the Phone number entry screen b Tap $$ in the Incoming call barring when roaming field, and enter the network security code on the Enter network security code screen Incoming call barring is set.
Tap $$ to remove incoming call barring when roaming. NOTE
The operation cannot be performed outside the service area or in an area with no radio wave. Enabling Guidance in Roaming The handset can be set to play to a party who has attempted to call you during international roaming a message informing the caller that you are in international roaming.
If the guidance function is not set, a message "Connecting your call. Please hold." is played to the caller. O v e r s e a s U s e 492 00M1000EN.book 493
Even if you have not enabled the guidance, a message in a foreign language may play depending on the conditions of the overseas network operator. The ringing tone may be different from that in Japan. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Roaming on the Menu bar on the Contact entry screen b Tap $$ in the Roaming Guidance field on the Roaming screen The guidance function is enabled. To a caller, a message "The receiver is in international roaming. Please hold while your call is being connected." is played.
Tap $$ to disable the guidance. NOTE
The operation cannot be performed outside the service area or in an area with no radio wave. O v e r s e a s U s e 493 00M1000EN.book 494 00M1000EN.book 495 Appendix Menu List . 496 List of Symbols and Special Characters. 497 List of Fixed Phrases . 498 List of Roman Character Entries . 499 Combination of Functions during Multiaccess . 501 Services Available for FOMA Handset . 501 Options and Related Devices. 503 Desktop Suite and SyncML . 503 1When Troubled Troubleshooting . 510 Error Message List . 511 Warranty and After-sales Service . 515 Protecting the Handset from Data that can Cause Damage . 516 495 00M1000EN.book 496 Menu List Tap $$ (Application launcher) on Application Selector bar to display. Application Description Reference
$$
Browse
$$ Calculator
$$ Calendar
$$ Camera
$$ Contacts
$$ Control panel Handset tab Accesses Internet and a homepage can be viewed. A calculator can be used. Displays a calendar, and schedules can be registered. Takes still images/videos. Registration of contacts and searching contacts are performed. P193 P350 P322 P169 P99 Certificate manager Displays User certificates/CA certificates. P220 Text input Details of text input are set up. P467, 480, 484, 486, 490, 499 P126 P345 Sound Shortcut key Password Sound such as Ringers are set. Sets the menu launched by a home/shortcut key. Sets a Security code and a Phone Lock. P147, 154 Master Clear/Master Reset Performs Master Clear/Master Reset. Manner Mode Memory card Sets the operation of the Manner Mode. Formats a memory card, or changes its name. P360 P129 P302 Memory manager Displays application memory. P306, 308, Screen Settings for cars Power Handset information Connection tab Bluetooth Desktop Suite Internet account Adjusts brightness and tap location of the screen. Sets the operation for connecting FOMA handset to a Carkit. Sets the operation of the Power save mode and Status LED. Displays system information of the FOMA handset. Sets the detail of Bluetooth. Sets the connection type of Desktop Suite. Sets the necessary settings for connecting to an internet. Messaging accounts Sets messaging accounts. Byte Counter Displays the amount of data transmitted. 310 P134 P75 P136 P350 P382 P529 P183 P227 P348 A p p e n d i x 496 00M1000EN.book 497 Application Description Reference
$$ Connection tab Find Wireless LAN Access Point General tab Select Language International Ringtune Manager Searches an access point of a wireless LAN. Changes the language displayed on the screen. Sets present country and currency unit. P398 P142 P140 Installation of ringtones and Vibrator Setting is performed. P124, 127 Time & date Sets the date, time and display format.
$$ Desktop Suite
$$ Home
$$ Message
$$ Music
$$ Notes
$$ Handset
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
Picsel Viewer Pictures SyncML Time To Do Video Voice
$$ movianVPN
$$
Virus scan Synchronizes PC and data. Displays the Home screen. Sends and receives messages. Plays music. Registers texts and Free draw notes. Displays a phone number entry screen. Displays various files. Manages pictures such as still pictures taken. Synchronizes data with a specific server with wireless. P59 P530 P57 P234 P285 P351 P66 P289 P274 P530 Sets a display of time and alarm. P319, 358 Registers what needs to be done. Manages videos taken. Records a speech with the voice recorder. Connects with such as intranet, by utilizing VPN. Checks for a virus in FOMA handset or Trans Flash memory card. P336 P280 P313 P400 P540 List of Symbols and Special Characters
Entering symbols and special characters 3P473 Double-
byte Single-
byte
! " # $ % & ' ( ) + , . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ] \
^ _ ` { } A p p e n d i x 497 00M1000EN.book 498 Porticular List of Fixed Phrases
Entering fixed phrases 3 P472 Category Greeting Reply Business Private English OK TEL Thank you I'm late. I'll be back soon. It sounds great!
Good luck!
Fixed phrases NG Call me back!
Where are you now?
Let's meet at Congratulations!
I love you. A p p e n d i x 498 00M1000EN.book 499 Category Fixed phrases Internet
@docomo.ne.jp
.or.jp http://
www. jp
.co.jp
.ac.jp https://
.org
.html
.ne.jp
.com ftp://
.net List of Roman Character Entries Hiragana/Kanji entry is performed by Roman character input, when the input method is set to Qwerty Keyboard and input mode is set to kanji mode. 3P471 Line line Entering character a la xa wha line line ka ca ga kya gya qwa qa kwa qya gwa sa za sya sha zya ja jya swa Keys to tap u wu lu xu ku cu qu gu kyu gyu qwu qyu gwu su zu syu shu zyu ju jyu swu e le xe lye xye whe we ye ke ge kye gye qwe qe qye gwe se ce ze sye she zye je jye swe o lo xo who ko co go kyo gyo qwo qo qyo gwo so zo syo sho zyo jo jyo swo i yi li xi lyi xyi whi wi ki gi kyi gyi qwi qi qyi gwi si ci shi zi ji syi zyi jyi swi A p p e n d i x 499 00M1000EN.book 500 Line line Entering character Keys to tap ta line line line line line line A p p e n d i x 500 ti chi tyi cyi tsi thi twi di dyi dhi dwi ni nyi hi hyi fwi fi fyi bi byi vi vyi pi pyi mi tu thu tyu chu cyu thu twu du dyu dhu dwu itu xtu nu nyu hu fu hyu fwu fyu bu byu vu vyu pu pyu mu te to tye che cye tse the twe de dye dhe dwe ne nye he hye fwe fe fye be bye ve vye pe pye me tyo cho cyo tso tho two do dyo dho dwo no nyo ho hyo fwo fo fyo bo byo vo vyo po pyo mo tya cha cya tsa tha twa da dya dha dwa na nya ha hya fwa fa fya ba bya va vya pa pya ma mya myi myu mye myo yu lyu xyu ru ryu wo re rye ri ryi yo lyo xyo ro ryo n nn n'
xn ya lya xya ra rya wa iwa xwa 00M1000EN.book 501 Combination of Functions during Multiaccess The available combination of operations for Multiaccess is as shown below:
Operation to be Making/
Making/
Connecting to receiving a voice call receiving a video call Internet Sending/
receiving a message Sending/
receiving SMS used Current status While on a voice call While on a video call a a b b
-
c c While connected to Internet
: Available
: Not available.
: The combination is functionally not possible. a : Internet connection not available via CSD in overseas. b : Not available to send/receive messages via CSD in overseas. c : A call cannot be made or received during an internet connection via CSD in overseas. Services Available for FOMA Handset Available service Phone number Collect call (reversed charge calls) Directory assistance for general subscriber phones and DoCoMo's mobile phones (charges apply).
(Unlisted phone numbers cannot be given.) Telegrams (charges apply) 8 a.m. - 10 p.m. Time (charges apply) Weather report (charges apply) Police emergencies Fire and ambulance Marine emergencies and accident reports Message Dial for a disaster (charges apply) 106 (no area code) 104 (no area code) 115 (no area code) 117 (no area code) Area code + 177 110 (no area code) 119 (no area code) 118 (no area code) 171 (no area code) NOTE
If you use the collect call service (106), the call charge is billed to the receiver together with a commission of 90 yen (94.5 yen with tax included) per call. (as of XX 2004) If you use the directory assistance service (104), a service charge of 100 yen (105 yen with tax included) is billed together with the call charge. Note that this service is available without charge for those visually impaired or physically disabled in the upper body. For further information, inquire at 116 (NTT sales center) from a general subscriber phone. (as of XX 2004) A p p e n d i x 501 00M1000EN.book 502
Note that calls to 110, 119 or 118 from the FOMA handset cannot be located. Since the police or fire department authorities may call you to confirm, inform them that you are calling from a mobile phone, give your number and detailed information of your whereabouts. To make sure that you are not cut off during the call, stay in one place when you make the call and do not turn off the phone after the call, but keep it on for about 10 minutes so that a call can be received.
Depending on the area you are calling from you may not be connected to the local police or fire department. Use a public payphone or general subscriber phone if you cannot get in touch with the local authorities.
Customers who use "Call Forwarding" and "Voice Warp" from a general subscriber phone whose forwarding destination is a mobile or carphone (mobile phone), may still hear the ring tone even when the mobile phone is busy, is outside the service area or is turned OFF due to the setting of the general subscriber/mobile phone.
You may not be able to call 116 (NTT sales center), Dial Q2, Message Dial and make credit card calls. (Credit card calls can be made from a general subscriber or a public phone to a FOMA handset.) A p p e n d i x 502 00M1000EN.book 503 Options and Related Devices Combining the FOMA handset with optional devices supports a wide variety uses from personal use to business use. Some products are unavailable depending on the region. For details, contact our sales office. For details about the optional devices, refer to the instruction manual for each device.
AC adapter MXX
Battery pack MXX
Carrying case MXX
USB cable MXX International FOMA AC adapter 01
Flat type stereo earphone set P01
Stereo earphone set P001*
*:
Earphone jack converter adapter P001 is needed.
Desktop holder MXX
Rear cover MXX
Stylus MXX
FOMA USB cable
Earphone/microphone with flat switch P01/P02
Earphone/microphone with switch P001/P002*
Desktop Suite and SyncML FOMA handset has two types of software in order to synchronize data. 1Desktop suite A FOMA handset connected to a personal computer with USB, or via Bluetooth, can transmit and synchronize data such as Contacts, Calendar, To do list, and messages. With Desktop suite, installation and transmission of applications and files to a FOMA handset can be performed in addition to transmission and synchronization of data. 1SyncML A FOMA handset connected to a personal computer via a wireless LAN, can transmit and synchronize data such as Contacts, Calendar, and To do list. Please see the following homepage or the help of Desktop suite/SyncML about details on such as download method, data which can be transmitted/synchronized, a hardware requirement, the operation method, and restrictions.
<XXXXXMaker site name> http://www.XXXXXX Hardware Requirements Please use in the operational environments shown below. Item Required environment OS CPU Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows 98SE A processor with XX or higher performance is recommended. Required memory*
Free hard disk space*
XXMB or higher XXMB or higher Display
*: Required memory and hard disk space may vary depending on system environments. High Color (16bit) or higher is recommended. A p p e n d i x 503 00M1000EN.book 504 Before Using
<Qualification>
Please see the above homepage or the help of Desktop suite/SyncML about details on such as download method, data which can be transmitted/synchronized, a hardware requirement, the operation method, and restrictions. For inquiries on Desktop suite and SyncML XXXXSupport Center 0120-XXX-XXX Office hours: Week days from XX:XX to XX:XX a.m. and XX:XX to XX:XX p.m.
(Saturdays, Sundays, public holidays, and predetermined holidays are excluded) Using Desktop Suite By using Desktop Suite, following operations can be performed between a personal computer linked to a FOMA handset. Installing Desktop Suite PC a Set the attached CD-ROM to a personal computer b Click in the order of [ ] (Start) menu y
(Execute by specifying a file name) c Specify "The drive name of CD-ROM: \XXX\setup.exe" and click
[OK]
From here on, please follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Starting Desktop Suite PC Please connect a FOMA handset and a personal computer beforehand, after they are powered on. 3 P416 a Select in the order of [ ] (Start) menu y
(All Programs) ([Programs] for OS other than WindowsXP) A p p e n d i x 504 00M1000EN.book 505 y "Motorola Desktop Suite", and click on "Motorola Desktop Suite"
Starting of Desktop Suite PC will display the above screen. 1About detailed operation method of Desktop Suite PC Please refer to the help file. The display method is as follows:
Select in the order of [] (Start) menu y (All Programs)
([Programs] for OS other than WindowsXP) y "Motorola Desktop Suite", and click on
"Motorola Desktop Help"
Uninstalling Desktop Suite PC Uninstalls Desktop Suite PC
Before uninstalling, please end Desktop Suite PC.
The display on the screen differs when an OS other than Windows XP is used.
< Example: When uninstalling form Windows XP >
a Click on the icons in the order of [ ] (Start) menu y
(Control Panel) y
(Add or Remove Programs) The (Add or Remove Programs) screen is displayed. 1For Windows 2000 Professional, Me Click on [] (Start) menu, and select in the order of [ ] (Setting) y
(Control Panel) and double click on
(Add or Remove Programs)
(Add or Remove Programs) screen (for Windows Me,
(Property of Add or Remove Programs) ) is displayed. b Select "Motorola Desktop Suite" and click on
(Change or Delete)
From here on, please follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Setting the Connection Method of Desktop Suite The method for connecting to Desktop Suite (USB cable connection/Bluetooth communication) is set. A p p e n d i x 505 00M1000EN.book 506 a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, tap Connect tab from Control Panel screen y tap Desktop Suite When the connection method is USB When the connection method is Bluetooth 1Changing the precedence of apparatus when connection method is set to Bluetooth Tap [Change]
Display
: Tap and select when displaying the Bluetooth apparatus by types. Device list
: The apparatus by which Bluetooth connection was made (above the line), and the apparatus being searched (below the line) are displayed.
Tap [Update] to start a search for apparatus available for Bluetooth connection starts.3P383 b Tap Connection Drop Box, set connection method y tap [Done]
Operating Desktop Suite Desktop Suite is operated and data is transmitted. The connection starts with the method set at
"Setting the connection method of Desktop Suite" (3 P529)
When connecting via USB, this operation is performed after connecting a personal computer with a FOMA handset with an USB cable beforehand. 3 P414
When connecting via Bluetooth, it is recommended to register the connecting Bluetooth apparatus beforehand. 3 P382 A p p e n d i x 506 00M1000EN.book 507 a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar When connecting via USB b Tap [Connect]
1When disconnecting Tap [Disconnect]
When connecting via Bluetooth Synchronizing a Personal Computer with a Data by Using SyncML Setting up SyncML Performs a server setup in order to use SyncML.
Information necessary for the setting will be supplied by the provider of SyncML. a Tap $$ y $$ at the Application Selector bar b Tap in the order from Edit y Settings in the Menu bar Server address Username Password
: Enter a server address.
: Enter a username.
: Enter a password. A p p e n d i x 507 00M1000EN.book 508 c Tap a column to set up, and enter information 1When performing a setting for a transport login
Please perform this when needed. Information necessary for the setting will be supplied by the provider of SyncML. a Tap Protocol tab Transport protocol
: Transport protocol is displayed. Use transport login
: Sets enable/disable of transport login. Username : The user name for transport login is entered. This can be entered only when transport login is enabled. Password : The password for transport login is entered. This can be entered only when transport login is enabled. b Tap $$ at Use transport login column
Tap $$ to disable Transport Login. c Tap the Username column, and enter a user name d Tap the Password column, and enter a password d Tap [Done]
The server is set. Setting the Task to Synchronize Sets the task to synchronize by SyncML. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar The task to synchronize is displayed. A p p e n d i x 508 00M1000EN.book 509 b Tap a task to set Enable task Task name
: Sets enable/disable of the task.
: The task name acquired beforehand is displayed. Server database
: The path to the server database acquired beforehand is displayed. c Tap $$ of Enable task
Tap $$ to disable the task. d Tap Task name column, and enter a task name
Make a change as needed. e Tap Server database column and enter a path
Make a change as needed. f Tap [Done]
The task is set.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the task setting. Synchronizing Data Connects to the SyncML server, and synchronizes the data. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar The task to synchronize is displayed. The tasks with synchronization disabled are displayed 3 P532 A p p e n d i x 509 00M1000EN.book 510 b Tap [Sync]
The progress of synchronization is displayed. Condition of the task is displayed.
Tap [Stop] to cancel the performing synchronization.
Tap SyncML 3 Disconnect on the Menu bar to disconnect the communication. c Synchronization Troubleshooting Symptom Check FOMA handset cannot be turned ON (the handset cannot be used). A message "UIM selection failed" is displayed when the FOMA handset is powered on. Is the battery connected properly? 3 P52 Is the battery depleted? 3 P55
When the mova handset is ON in a dual network service, the FOMA service is not available. Check whether or not FOMA handset is ON. Please see
"Network Service Operation Guide" for further information. 3 P373
The UIM may not be properly attached or may be damaged. Check to see if the UIM is properly attached. 3 P49 Screen does not change when a key is pressed or the touch screen is tapped while the display is turned off. The display gets dark, and indication disappeared.
Is All lock set? 3 P153 Is the handset in power saving mode? 3 P42
"Battery Status: Very Low Recharge Battery" is displayed, and alarm is heard.
The battery is almost discharged. Charge the battery. 3 P54 Calls cannot be made by entering a phone number.
Is Self-mode set? 3 P155 After dialling a number, you hear a busy tone and cannot establish your call. Mail reception is announced by other than the set ring tone. The image/melody set in each function does not display/play, and operates in default setting.
Have you dialed the area code? 3 P66
Did you hear the dial tone before dialling? 3 P66
Is "No service" indicated? 3 P41
Is the mail from the partner whom you registered the ringer tone in the phonebook? 3 P104 Is the same UIM as the one acquired the picture or the melody attached? 3 P50 A p p e n d i x 510 00M1000EN.book 511 The icon indicating the network state shows the handset is out of network coverage, and you cannot use the global roaming service.
You are outside the service area of global roaming service, or in an area with poor signal strength.
Please check with "Network Service Operation Guide" or the homepage of WORLD WING to see whether the service area or the operator is the one you can use.
Please switch to a corresponding network. 3 P515
Please check with "Network Service Operation Guide" or the homepage of WORLD WING to see whether the service area or the operator is the one you can use.
Please switch to a corresponding network. 3 P515
Is Incoming call barring when roaming set? 3 P516 Is the network set for GSM/GPRS system? 3 P515 Neither a Video Call, a short message service (SMS), nor a packet communication can be used. Cannot receive either a voice call or a video call. After returning from overseas, the icon indicating the network state remains displaying no service. Error Message List Displayed Messaget This software cannot be installed as the installation file is corrupt Application was not able to install since there is insufficient memory in the handset. Please delete an unnecessary file and try again Cannot find specified memory card. Check if the memory card is properly inserted The download was aborted due to an error Delete or move internal files to the memory card Move or delete some files Captured file could not be stored Description The application was not able to install, since the file is corrupt. Reference P362 There is insufficient memory for the specified installation. Delete some files and restart the installation. P363 Application was not able to uninstall due to an error. P363 Was not able to download due to an error. P211 A photograph cannot be taken since the memory in the FOMA handset is full. Please either move to the external memory, or delete unnecessary picture/video. A photograph cannot be taken since the memory in the FOMA handset is full. Please either move to the external memory, or delete unnecessary picture/video. P307, 308 P307, 308 The picture/video taken was not able to save due to an error. P169, 170 Folder changed to default external folder The specified folder was not correct, so the default external folder is opened. Camera could not be accessed. The application will close The camera application is closed due to an error. P303 P169 A p p e n d i x 511 00M1000EN.book 512 Displayed Messaget Not all contacts were deleted successfully Not all contacts were copied successfully Not all contacts were moved successfully Contact can't be saved. Please enter name. Illegal characters. Contact was updated. USB cable not connected. Failed to connect to PC via USB. Check the settings on the PC. Do you want to enable Bluetooth?
Your preferred device cannot be found. Make sure it is turned on and in-range. Alternatively change your preferred device. Description Reference Certain contacts were not able to delete. Certain contacts were not able to copy. Certain contacts were not able to move. This message displays when you attempt to save a contact without entering a name. Please try saving again after entering a name. When you attempt to save a contact that includes characters that cannot be saved to UIM, the data will be changed and then saved. P113 P115 P115 P99 P105 Since the USB cable is not connected to the FOMA handset, it cannot connect to a PC. P414 FOMA handset cannot be connected to a PC via USB. P417 This message is displayed when attempting to connect FOMA handset with a PC using Bluetooth, and an available device is not set. Please tap [Yes], and set the available device. This message is displayed when attempting to connect FOMA handset with a PC using Bluetooth, and an available device is not set. Please tap [Update], and you can select another device from the list of available devices. Check Failed The check on a short message (SMS) failed. A handset is trying to connect in order to transfer an entry. Other handset is trying to connect to the FOMA handset in order to transmit data. Tap [Accept] to receive the data with Bluetooth. The file name already exists This message is displayed when you attempt to change a file P304 Enter a name for the track This application's file is damaged and has been deleted TV Phone is not available Failed to connect Video call cannot be dialed in an active audio call name to the one already exist. Please use other file name. This message displays when you attempt to change a music file name without entering anything. Please enter a file name. P304 The dameaged data in notes is deleted. You are not in an area where a Video Call can be used. You can make a voice call by tapping [Voice]. Video call cannot be made due to an error. You can make a voice call by tapping [$$Voice]. This message displays when attempting to make a video call during a voice call. You can make a voice call by tapping
[$$Voice]. Failed A setup of network service failed due to an error. Failure Network failure Failed a network search for setting up a network, due to an error. P382 P382 P263 P385
-
P89 P89 P89
-
-
A p p e n d i x 512 00M1000EN.book 513 Displayed Messaget Description Reference Failure Other Phone is Busy The other phone is busy when switching Dual Network. Failure Invalid Network Password The password for the network is incorrect. Network password incorrect The password for the network is incorrect. Not Subscribed The network service is not subscribed. Failure Network already exists The network attempted to be registered already exists in the preferred list. List full Please delete an entry first Failure Emergency only The preferred list is full. Either network cannot be found, or manual network selection is cancelled. Failure No Service The network cannot be used, Incorrect password PIN is not correct. Incorrect password PIN will be blocked if next attempt fails Reentered PIN is not correct. PIN is blocked PIN is locked. None of UIMs is selected UIM is not selected. UIM selection failed An error occurred with the UIM. Unknown document file type It is a file not supported. The document is faulty, and could not be converted An error occurred with the file. Image could not be loaded Image could not be loaded due to an error. Image is too large to operate The image is too large to display or edit. Image could not be moved Image could not be moved due to an error. Image could not be renamed Image could not be renamed due to an error. Image could not be deleted Image could not be deleted due to an error. Unable to play clip. Unable to play clip due to an error. Enter a name for the clip. This message displays when you attempt to change a clip file name without entering anything. Please enter a file name. Unable to update pattern definitions. Failed to update pattern definitions of virus scan due to an error. Cannot use pattern scanner. Initialization of virus scan failed due to an error The total data amount exceeds the specified threshold. A certificate must be selected. Client certificates are not available. Network authentication cannot be configured. The total packet data sent and received exceeded the specified threshold. A certificate needs to be selected. Either a certificate does not exist, or the certificate has expired, so it cannot be used. P373 P146 P146
-
-
-
-
-
P147 P147 P151
-
-
P289 P289
-
P275
-
-
-
-
P304
-
-
P349 P220 P220 A p p e n d i x 513 00M1000EN.book 514 Displayed Messaget A problem occurred during the automatic settings update Failure Device settings not reset Failure User data not cleared Device settings not reset Bad name Switch off light must be less than or equal to the time to Power down screen It will be adjusted accordingly Battery Status: Very Low Recharge Battery You cannot delete the folder because it still has items in it. Description Reference Downloading quickstart failed due to an error. Master Reset failed due to an error. Master Clear failed due to an error. It is a name that cannot be registered in TransFlash memory card. The time for Power down screen in power saving mode cannot be set up shorter than the time for switch off light. Please reset the time again. Low battery. Please charge.
-
-
-
P302 P136 P54 The folder could not be deleted since it has data in it. P303 Your handset is low on memory. Do you want to create some space now?
The memory capacity of FOMA handset is insufficient. Tap
[Yes] to display the screen for deleting unnecessary files, or the memory manager. P311 Disk is full The memory is full. Delete unnecessary files. P311 This file is damaged and can't be used. This application's file is damaged and has been deleted. Failed to read the user dictionary. Are you sure you want to initialize?
Failed to read the learning dictionary. Are you sure you want to initialize?
The file is damaged, so it cannot be used. The file is damaged, so it has been deleted.
-
-
Failed to read the user dictionary. Tap [OK] to initialize and activate. P484 Failed to read the learning dictionary. Tap [OK] to initialize and activate. P490 Invalid Battery Unable to Charge Battery An invalid battery pack is used. Please use an appropriate battery pack. No viewer can be found on your device to open this file. It is a file type that cannot be supported. Tap [Save] to be saved in FOMA handset. P52 P250 A p p e n d i x 514 00M1000EN.book 515 Warranty and After-sales Service Warranty
A written warranty is provided with every FOMA handset; make sure that you receive it. Store the warranty in a safe place when you have read it and checked that it contains the "shop name/date" you purchased it. If it does not contain the necessary information, contact the shop where you bought it. The warranty is valid for a period of one year from the date of purchase.
This product and all accessories are subject to change, in part or whole, for the sake of improvement without prior notice. After-sales Service When Problems Occur Before requesting service, read the section "Troubleshooting". If the problem still persists, contact one of the numbers described in "Contacts" at the back cover of this manual. If the Result of Inquiries Indicates that a Repair is Required Take your FOMA handset to a service center designated by DoCoMo. Be sure to check the opening hours of the service center. Note that you must present the warranty. 1In the warranty period
The FOMA handset will be repaired at no charge subject to the conditions of the warranty.
The warranty must be presented to receive warranty service. The subscriber will be charged for the repair of items not covered in the warranty or repairs of defects resulting from misuse, accident or neglect even during the warranty period.
The subscriber is charged even during the warranty period for the repair of failures caused by the use of devices or consumable items that are not DoCoMo-specified. 1Repairs may not be possible in the following cases:
Repair is not possible when corrosion due exposure to moisture, condensation or perspiration is detected in a moisture seal reaction or test, or if any of the internal boards are damaged or deformed. Since these conditions are outside the scope of the warranty, a repair, if at all possible, will be charged. 1After expiration of the warranty
All repairs that are requested are charged. 1Replacement parts
Replacement parts (parts required to maintain product function) will be kept in stock for at least 6 years after termination of production. The product can be repaired during this period. Depending on the nature of the required repair, it may still be possible to repair your phone even after this period, so please contact one of the numbers described in "Contacts" at the back cover of this manual. A p p e n d i x Notes
Do not modify the FOMA handset, the UIM or its accessories. 515 00M1000EN.book 516
- Fire, injury or damage may result.
- In order to prevent interference of radio waves or network breakdown, the FOMA handset and UIM are manufactured according to technical standards stipulated by law. Do not use FOMA handsets or UIMs that do not meet these standards.
- If the FOMA handset is modified (part replacement, modification, painting, etc.) it will be repaired only after the modified parts have been restored to the condition at the time of purchase. However, repair may be refused depending on the nature of modification.
- Repair of failures or damage caused by modification are charged even during the warranty period.
Do not remove any inscription stickers attached to the FOMA handset. The inscription stickers certify that the FOMA handset satisfies specific technical standards. Note that if stickers are removed intentionally or are reattached in such a way that confirmation of the sticker's contents is impossible, repair or servicing may be refused because confirmation of whether or not the phone conforms to relevant technical standards cannot be made.
The ON/OFF function settings and stored data may be cleared (reset) by failure, repair or handling processes. Should this happen, set up the functions again.
Magnetic components are used in the earpiece and speaker of the FOMA handset. Do not allow cash cards
or other devices that are vulnerable to magnetism to come into contact with the phone. If the handset becomes wet or moist, turn the power off and remove the battery pack immediately and bring the handset to our repair office as soon as possible. However, repair may not be possible depending on the condition of the handset. Phonebook, Downloaded Data and IC Card Data
Maintain a separate record of the data you register in your FOMA handset. DoCoMo will not accept any liability and responsibility whatsoever for changes of information or loss of information.
Data created, imported or downloaded by the subscriber may be lost or become corrupted when changing the model or repairing mobile phone or carphone. DoCoMo may, at its option, repair a mobile carphone by replacing it. In such an event, it will not be possible, to transfer the data (except some data) to the new handset. DoCoMo will not accept any responsibility. Scan Function Protecting the Handset from Data that can Cause Damage By using the Scan Function, FOMA handset can perform a virus scan in FOMA handset or a TransFlash memory card. When it is found infected from a result of a virus scan, the virus can be cleansed immediately.
The scan cannot be performed when another application is in use. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar Last Scan Last Update
: Displays the date of the last scan.
: Displays the date of the last update of the pattern file. A p p e n d i x 516 00M1000EN.book 517 b Tap [$$Start scanning]
All media
: Scans both FOMA handset and TransFlash memory card. Internal memory
: Scans FOMA handset.
: Scans TransFlash memory card. Card name
When a TransFlash memory card is not attached, the selection screen for the media would not be displayed. It will skip to Step 4. c Tap $$ y [OK] of the media you are scanning
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the start of scanning. d Tap [OK]
The scan starts, and the result is displayed when the scan completes.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the start of scanning.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the scan during a scan. Updating the Virus Pattern File Virus scan uses the virus pattern file in order to distinguish viruses. By updating the virus pattern file, it would make it possible to scan new viruses. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap [Update]
from the virus scan screen A p p e n d i x 517 00M1000EN.book 518 b Tap [OK]
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the update. c Tap [OK]
The phone ID is transmitted, and the update starts.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the transmission of the phone ID.
Tap [Cancel] y [OK] to cancel the update. d Tap [OK]
The update completes. NOTE
When the pattern data is updated, SSL communication is performed to the server (the site of our company). Please enable the SSL certificate. 3P195
When the pattern data is updated, the unique information (model, serial number, etc.) of your handset is automatically transmitted to our server (the server that our company manages for the scanning function). We do not use the transmitted information for any purposes other than the scanning function.
Please set the date (year, month, and day) of your FOMA handset correctly.
In case an update of a virus pattern file fails, please redo the update from the beginning. If the virus pattern file in the handset is the latest one, a message is displayed indicating that the pattern file is the newest. A p p e n d i x 518 00M1000EN.book 519 1Functions and data that can be scanned
[Since the specification is not decided yet, detail is omitted.]
1When infected with a virus If a virus is detected during a scan, the confirmation screen for deleting the virus will be displayed.
Tap [Delete] or [OK] to delete the detected virus, and to resume the scan.
Tap [Skip] to resume the scan without deleting the detected virus. 1When the scan completes When the scan completes, a screen with the result of the scan is displayed. No virus Virus deleted Virus not deleted A p p e n d i x 519 00M1000EN.book 520 Tap [Details] in the result screen shown at virus detection to display details on the scan.
$$ : The virus has been deleted.
$$ : The virus has not been deleted.
Select a file name and tap [Details] to notify the infected file, name of the virus, and the status of the virus (deleted/deleted or not) . The name of infected file Checking the Version of the Virus Pattern File The detailed information on virus scan application is displayed, and the version of a virus pattern file can be checked. a Tap in the sequence of $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Virus Scan on the Menu bar y About Virus Scan Application name and the version of the virus pattern file are displayed. A p p e n d i x 520 00M1000EN.book 522 00M1000EN.book 523 About Proper Telephone Etiquette Do not disturb people around you when using your FOMA handset. Always turn OFF your FOMA handset in the following situations:
1In a location where use of handsets is prohibited There are places where you cannot use a handset. Always turn OFF your FOMA handset when:
In an airplane In a hospital
* Be aware that patients use electronic medical equipment in many areas in hospitals. Your FOMA handset must be switched off even in lobbies or waiting rooms. 1While driving Using your FOMA handset while driving could affect safe driving and cause danger.
* Stop your car in a safe place before using your FOMA handset or use Drive Mode. 1While in a crowded train where there may be a person who uses an implanted cardiac pacemaker or cardioverter defibrillator near you. 1Use of the handset could adversely affect the operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or cardioverter defibrillator. 1While in public places such as a concert hall, movie theater or art museum Using your FOMA handset in quiet public places will likely bother other people. Match the volume of your voice and your FOMA handset's ring tone to your location 1In a quiet location like a restaurant or hotel lobby, pay attention to the volume of your voice and ring tones, etc. when using your FOMA handset. 1In town areas, while using your FOMA handset, be sure not to block foot or vehicular traffic. Consider privacy Give consideration to privacy before shooting or sending images with a mobile phone with a built-in camera.
"Silent" functions designed for public use Your FOMA handset has a number of useful "silent" functions designed for public use, such as a setting that instructs your handset not to answer incoming calls and the ability to set the handset for silent operation. 2Manner Mode Mutes all sounds your FOMA handset makes, such as keypad sound and ring tones. 3P160 2Drive Mode Plays a guidance to notify that you cannot answer the call because you are driving a car, then disconnects the call. This mode ensures your safety while driving because no ring tone sounds when a call is received. 3P79 2Vibrator Vibrates when there is an incoming call. 3P155 2Voice message Allows the caller to leave a message when you cannot answer the phone. 3P81 In addition to the above functions, optional services such as Voice Mail Service and Call Forwarding Service are also available. 3P483, P488
1 2 | Exhibit 8A Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.73 MiB | / February 05 2005 |
APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT6EY1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows in four parts (Exhibit 8A through Exhibit 8D):
EXHIBIT 8A 00M1000EN.book 0 DoCoMo W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS Systems Thank you for purchasing FOMA M1000 handset. Both before and during use of your FOMA M1000 handset, be sure to thoroughly read this manual and those supplied together with the individual devices such as the battery pack to ensure correct use of your FOMA M1000 handset. For more information, you may also contact us at the numbers shown in "Contact Information" on the back cover. Treated with care, your FOMA M1000 handset will be your able partner. Before Using Your FOMA Handset Because your FOMA handset uses radio waves, it may not function in locations where it is difficult for radio waves to penetrate, such as tunnels, underground passages and some buildings, in areas where radio wave signals are weak, or when outside the service area. Even when you are high up in a tall building or condominium and nothing blocks your view outside, your FOMA handset may not be able to receive or transmit signals. Also, communication may be interrupted even when the signal meter on your FOMA handset indicates there is a strong signal and you are not moving (traveling).
Use your FOMA handset in a way that does not disturb others in public spaces, crowded locations or quiet places.
Because your FOMA handset uses radio waves to communicate, there is a possibility that third parties may attempt to listen in on your calls. The W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS systems automatically support a confidential communication function for all calls so even if someone should somehow be able to tap a call, the signals are modified so that the eavesdropping party will hear only noise.
Your FOMA handset encodes voice communication as digital data. When you are operating your FOMA handset while moving to a location subject to weaker radio wave signals, the transmitted digital data may not be correctly decoded and as a result the decoded voice may differ somewhat from the actual voice.
Maintain a separate record of the data you register in your FOMA handset. If the data should be erased, DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for the loss of any data. Using this Operation Manual Information of interest may be found in the following ways:
Refer to the Contents Select to look at intended applications. 3P2
Refer to the Index Select to look at terms or application names of the Index. 3P000
Refer to title pages and indexes Select to look at application names or titles.
Refer to the title page Select to look at titles.
Refer to features Select to look at FOMA handset features and operations. 3P4, P6 In the FOMA M1000 Operation Manual text, FOMA M1000 is referred to as FOMA handset.
Reprinting all or part of this manual without approval by DoCoMo is prohibited.
Information contained in this manual is subject to change without prior notice.
* Be sure to read "Safety Instructions" on P8 before using your FOMA handset. 00M1000EN.book 1 How to Use this Manual Quick Reference Manual 3 P000 In this manual, operations of your FOMA handset are explained in the structure as shown below:
Title/application name Shows the title or application name. Index Shows the chapter title/title or application name. Default settings Function description Supplementary description of function Operation description Provides the operation numbers and instructions. Screen Shows the screen displayed in the process of or after an operation. Supplementary description of operation NOTE Gives necessary information, notes, and supplementary explanation. Description of Instructions In this manual, instructions are given as touch operations using a stylus. Touch operations are described in the manner as follows:
<Example>: Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the data in the Image screen
If operation of any of the FOMA handset keys is required, the operation is described using key symbols. 3P32
<Example>: Press 9 to select an image If more than one operation is available, the simpler one is described.
For how to select an application from the menu, see "Selecting the Menu". 3P43 Overseas Use For how to use your FOMA handset outside Japan, see "Overseas Use". 3P505 NOTE
Illustrations of screens contained in this manual are for the purpose of simplifying description and may differ from the actual views. 1 M1000 Format1 (PANTONE362U) 00M1000EN.book 2 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s Contents Before Using Your FOMA Handset . Back of the cover Using this Operation Manual . Back of the cover How to Use this Manual . 1 FOMA M1000 Features . 5 Making Full Use of FOMA M1000 . 7 Safety Instructions (ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE DIRECTIONS) . 9 Handling and Care. 23 Intellectual Property Issues . 28 Checking Purchased Product . 30 Before Using the Handset . 31 Contact List . 95
Help Function
Names of Parts and Functions
The Stylus
Operating the Touch Screen
Viewing the Display
Selecting the Menu
Entering Text
Using the UIM
Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack
Charging the Battery Pack
Battery Status
Initialization Language Selection
Date and time setup Caller ID
Phone Number Display
Power ON/OFF Making/Answering Calls. 65
186/184
Redial
Making a Voice Call
WORLD CALL In-Car Handsfree
Answering a Voice Call
Answered Call History
Earpiece Volume Drive Mode
Missed Calls etc. Making/Answering Video Calls . 83
Making a Video Call
Answering a Video Call
Setting an Outgoing Image
Setting Images Display during a Video Call etc. 2
Contact registration Contact search
Contact modification Contact deletion
Setting Owner Information
Copying/Moving Contact Information
Sending Contact Information etc. Tone/Screen/Light Settings . 119
Manner Mode
Keypad Tones
Adjust Volume
Tone Settings
Vibrator
Audible Timer
Home Screen
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Clock Settings etc. Safety Settings . 139
All Lock
Security Codes Used for FOMA handset
Handset Security Code Setting PIN
About Lock Functions
Self Mode Reject Call
Call Setting w/o ID
Ringless Timer Setting Reject Unknown
About Other Safety Settings etc.
Fixed Dialling Camera . 155
Before Using Camera
Taking Still Pictures M1000 Format1 (PANTONE362U) 00M1000EN.book 3
Recording Video Clips
Changing Shot Settings
Changing the Camera Settings Internet. 169
Setting up the Internet
About the Internet
Opening Web Pages
Viewing Web Pages Information
Finding Text in Web Pages
Opening Web Pages from History
Saving Web Pages Information
Downloading Data from Web Pages
Using Phone To/Mail To/Web To Functions
Using Certificates etc. Messaging . 206
About Short Message Services (SMS)
Viewing Messaging Account List
Composing and Sending Email
Attaching Files
Saving Unfinished Emails for Sending Later
Replying to Emails
Forwarding Emails
Managing Sender Email Addresses and Phone Numbers
Searching Emails etc.
Setting Messaging Application . 249
Application Installing an Application
Launching an Application
Uninstalling an Application Displaying/Editing/Managing Data . 255
Displaying a Stored Image
Editing an Image
Playing a Stored Video
Playing a Stored Music
Displaying Word, Excel and PDF Files
Using the TransFlash Memory Card
Managing Files
Using the Voice Recorder Other Convenient Functions . 293
Alarm time
Multiaccess
Calendar/Schedule
To do View duration Calculator
Entering Notes
Earphone/microphone with switch
Reset settings etc.
Installing an Application Network Services . 343
Voice Mail Service
Call Waiting Service
Call Forwarding Service
Nuisance Call Blocking Service
Caller ID Display Request Service
Dual Network Service
English Announcement Service
Service Dailling
Selecting Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call
Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call
Remote Operations
Added Service (Register USSD) Bluetooth . 355
About Bluetooth Before Using Bluetooth
Using Bluetooth Using Wireless LAN . 367
Wireless LAN
Setting up Wireless LAN
Searching Available Access Points Movian VPN . 377
VPN VPN Connection
Checking Connection Settings Using Data Communication . 389
Data Communication from FOMA Handsets
Before Using Data Communication
FOMA PC Setup Software
Setting up Data Communication
Executing the Set Connection C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 3 M1000 Format1 (PANTONE362U) 00M1000EN.book 4 Appendix . 495
Menu List
List of Symbols and Special Characters
Combination of Functions during Multiaccess
Desktop Suite and SyncML
Troubleshooting
Warranty and After-sales Service
Scan Function etc. Index/Quick Manual. 521
Index
Quik Manual
W-TCP Setting Setting up APN
Setting up Dial-up Networking
AT Commands etc. Entering Characters . 441
Direct Input Method
Character copy
Character lnput
Save Phrases
Save word
Using Electronic Dictionary
Setting the Detail of Character Entry
Indirect input method Oversea Use. 481
"WORLD WING" International Roaming Service
Services Available Outside Japan
Before Use
Making Calls
Answering Calls
Switching Networks
Setting Operations in Roaming C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 4 00M1000EN.book 5 FOMA M1000 Features FOMA (Freedom of Mobile multimedia Access) is the name of a service provided by DoCoMo based on the W-CDMA system, which is specified as one of the global standards of the third-generation mobile communication system (IMT-2000). 1Dual systems FOMA M1000 supports dual systems (W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS), which allows use of your FOMA handset for phone and data communications in foreign countries that have adopted the GSM/GPRS system, in addition to use within the FOMA network provided by DoCoMo. 3P60
* Using your FOMA handset overseas requires a subscription to "WORLD WING", DoCoMo's international roaming service. 1UIM A UIM saves information including your phone number and can store contact data, etc. If you have more than one FOMA handset, you can attach the UIM to different handset to use for different purposes such as business and private. 3P49 1Touch screen Simply touching the display (touch screen) with the Stylus allows easy and quick operation of your FOMA handset. You can also write and draw freehand in the same manner as drawing on paper with a pencil. 3P37 1Internet connection The integrated web browser "Opera" allows web pages of large view sizes to be displayed on your FOMA handset without any change to the layout. SSR (Small Screen Rendering) allows you to view web pages without the need for horizontal scrolling. 3P179 1Virus scanning function The virus scanning function prevents your FOMA handset from being infected by malicious files (computer viruses, etc.) through the use of the Internet or incoming emails. 3P540 1Wireless LAN function The Internet or email can be used via wireless LAN in your office, etc. 3P389 1Twin stereo speakers Music in MP3 files, etc. can be played in powerful sounds with the stereo speakers. 1Large screen display The big 2.9-inch TFT LCD provides vivid views of web pages browsed or video clips shot with your handset. 1Bluetooth function Wireless connection with Bluetooth-enabled devices allows data communication and handsfree telephone communication. Contact data or files can be exchanged between Bluetooth-enabled devices. 3P377 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 5 00M1000EN.book 6 1Multiaccess function With the Multiaccess function, which makes voice calls and packet communication available at the same time, you can communicate by voice calls while being connected to the Internet or send emails during voice call conversations. 3P316 1TransFlash memory card TransFlash memory card, which is the world's smallest detachable memory card, can be used to store data such as images shot with your FOMA handset and contact information, or to copy data saved from other devices such as PCs into the memory card to your FOMA handset. 3P297 1Application addition function Installation of applications for Symbian OS or Java applications allows more convenient use of your FOMA handset. 3P268, P362 1Document viewer function PC document files such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint and PDF files can be taken from attachments to emails or memory cards into your FOMA handset to view. 3P289 1Data synchronization function Data such as contact information stored in your FOMA handset can be synchronized with data in a PC, etc. connected with the provided USB cable for making a backup by using the Desktop Suite or SyncML. 3P526 1VPN (Virtual Private Network) function Safe and secured connection from your FOMA handset to intranet (company network, etc.) is available by using a virtual security network (VPN) via the Internet. 3P399 1Free draw input function The integrated Decuma Japanese, a free draw input application that supports Japanese, allows characters written in the input area with the stylus to be recognized for inputting. Using the function in combination with text input prediction allows you to smoothly input sentences containing mixtures of kanji, hiragana, and alphanumeric characters. 3P478 t Whole Range of Network Services 1Voicemail Service
(charged) 1Dual Network Service
(charged) 2A separate subscription required. 3P366 2A separate subscription required. 3P373 1Call Waiting Service
(charged) 1Short Message Service
(SMS) (non-charged) 2A separate subscription required. 3P368 2No separate subscription required. 3P261 1Call Forwarding Service
(non-charged) 2A separate subscription required. 3P370 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 6 00M1000EN.book 7 Making Full Use of FOMA M1000 FOMA M1000 communication functions Overseas use Bringing your FOMA handset with you when you travel to a country where W-CDMA or GSM/GPRS system is adopted allows you to use the phone number you use in Japan to make/answer calls and exchange data. If the receiver of your call uses a handset that supports video calls, international videophone communication is available. 3P505 Videophone communication while looking at the other party's face You can talk with the party at the other end of the line while looking at each other's faces. You can switch between two cameras according to the purpose to send your own image by using the front camera or the image such as a landscape you want to show to the other party by using the rear camera. You can choose to disable the cameras if you do not want to send images to the other party. 3P85 FOMA M1000 access functions Connection via wireless LAN Wireless connection to the Internet or intranet (company network, etc.) is available, which allows you to use the Internet or email. 3P389 Connection via Bluetooth Wireless connection to Bluetooth-enabled PCs, etc. is available for data communication. Connecting to Bluetooth-
enabled handsfree devices or headsets allows you to talk without holding your FOMA handset in your hand. 3P377 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 7 00M1000EN.book 8 Voicenote The voice memo function can be used to record conversations in meetings, etc. If a situation suddenly comes up where you want to record a conversation, simply pressing one key allows you to start recording. 3P312 Digital still/video camera You can switch between two cameras on the front and back sides according to the situation to take still and video pictures. The rear camera is capable of shooting high-quality still images of recording pixel count of 1.23 million (effective pixel count: 1.31 million) and digital zooming of up to 4x. 3P163 Data viewing with document viewer function You can view PC document files such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint and PDF files attached to incoming emails with your FOMA handset while you are not home. 3P289 Still image/video/music player function Various files downloaded into your FOMA handset or TransFlash memory cards from the Internet, etc. or still images and video clips shot with the camera can be viewed/played. Detailed information is available while files are being viewed/played with the respective players. Management and editing of files such as renaming and deletion of files is possible. 3P274, P280, P285 Key arrangement convenient for playing games The navigation key and two other keys can be used to play games as if with a dedicated portable game console. 3P33 Videomail Video clips shot with the camera or downloaded from the Internet can be attached to outgoing emails. -3P240 Versatile information management with the PIM function The versatile PIM function (contact list, schedule, To do) is provided, which allows the management of contacts, personal scheduling and To do list just with a FOMA handset. 3P97, P322, P336 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 8 00M1000EN.book 9 Safety Instructions (ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE DIRECTIONS) 2Before using your FOMA handset, please read the following Safety Instructions, and be sure to follow them in order to ensure safe usage. 2These precautions are intended to protect you and others around you. Read and follow them carefully to avoid injury, damage to the product or damage to property. 1The following signs differentiate between the levels of danger that can occur if the product is not used within the specified guidelines:
DANGER WARNING CAUTION This sign denotes that there can be an immediate danger of death or serious injury as a result of improper use. This sign denotes that death or serious injury may result from improper use. This sign denotes that bodily injury or damage to property may result from improper use. 1The following symbols indicate special warnings regarding product usage. Indicates improper usage Indicates not to disassemle the device. No liquids Indicates not to use the device near water, and not get it wet. Indicates not to handle the device with wet hands. No disassembly No wet hands Indicates an instruction that must be obeyed at all times. Indicates that equipment should be unplugged from electrical sockets. 1Precautions contain the description below;
Handling Instructions for the FOMA handset, Battery Pack, AC Adapter, Desktop Holder and Bluetooth Headset . 10 FOMA Handset. 11 Battery Pack . 13 Stylus . 15 AC Adapter and Desktop Holder . 16 UIM . 17 TransFlash Memory Cards and TransFlash Memory Card Adapters . 18 Bluetooth Headset . 19 Handset near Electronic Medical Equipment . 22 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 9 00M1000EN.book 10 Handling Instructions for the FOMA handset, Battery Pack, AC Adapter, Desktop Holder and Bluetooth Headset DANGER Use equipment specified by DoCoMo Group companies with your FOMA handset. 2Use of equipment not specified by DoCoMo Group can cause the FOMA handset and Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or catch fire. AC adopter MXX Bluetooth headset MXX
* Contact our sales office for information on other compatible products. AC adapter for Bluetooth headset MXX Desktop holder MXX Battery pack MXX WARNING Do not use the equipment in an environment liable to cause it to explode or catch fire, such as a gas station. 2Explosions or fire may result if the equipment is used in areas where dust or flammable gases such as propane or gasoline vapors are generated. Do not throw device or subject to physical shock. 2May cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. May cause equipment to malfunction or catch fire. Do not put the Battery pack, FOMA handset, Bluetooth headset, AC adapter or Desktop holder in microwave ovens or other heating appliances or high-pressure containers. 2May cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. May cause FOMA handset, Bluetooth headset or adapter to heat, smoke, ignite, or for circuits to be damaged. CAUTION Store equipment out of reach of small children. 2Can be accidentally swallowed or cause injuries. Children using the device should be instructed in proper operation by an adult. Do not allow them to use device without adult supervision. 2May cause injuries. Do not use or leave device in hot areas, or in areas exposed to direct sunlight, such as inside a vehicle. 2May cause the Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite, or may cause equipment to deform or malfunction. Parts of the case may grow hot, causing burns or injuries. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 10 00M1000EN.book 11 CAUTION Do not store in extremely humid, dusty or hot areas. 2Malfunction may result. Do not leave device on unstable or sloping surfaces. 2Malfunction or injuries may result. FOMA Handset WARNING Turn the FOMA handset off in areas where use is prohibited, such as in airplanes and hospitals. 2Use in these areas can cause medical and other electrical or electronic equipment to malfunction or fail. If automatic power-on function has been enabled, cancel this setting before turning the power off. When using the handset in a medical facility, be sure to observe the regulations of the facility. Prohibited conduct, such as using the handset in an airplane, may lead to punishment of user according to law. Turn the FOMA handset off near high-precision electronic control equipment or electronic equipment using low-power signals. 2Using the handset near this type of equipment can cause the equipment to fail or malfunction.
* Examples of electronic equipment to avoid:
Hearing aids, implanted pacemakers or defibrillators, other electrical medical equipment, fire alarms, automatic doors, other automatic control equipment. Users wearing implanted pacemakers or defibrillators or other electrical medical equipment should check with the manufacturer or sales outlet about the effect of radio frequencies on the equipment. When using near medical electrical equipment, do not keep the handset in chest pocket or inside pocket. 2Using your FOMA handset near medical electronic equipment could cause equipment failure. Do not use or leave Battery pack near flames, stoves or other hot areas. 2Heating, ignition or malfunction may result. Do not disassemble or remodel the handset. 2Fire, injury, electric shock or malfunction may result. No disassembly When you talking with the speakerphone function activated, always keep FOMA handset away from your ear. 2May cause hearing loss. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 11 00M1000EN.book 12 WARNING Do not place the FOMA handset over an air bag safety device, or in an air bag deployment area. 2If the airbag inflates, your FOMA handset can strike you or other people, causing bodily harm and other damage. If you have a weak heart, be careful when setting the incoming call vibration or ring volume setting. 2Could affect heart function. Do not use the handset while operating a vehicle. 2Driving while using the handset is dangerous and can cause an accident. First park the car in a safe place before using your FOMA handset, or use it in Drive Mode. Due to a revision in the Road Traffic Law, from November 1, 2004 you can now be penalized for the use of mobile phones while driving. CAUTION If lightning strikes while using the handset outside, turn the power off immediately, and move to a safe location. 2May be subject to lightning strike and could cause electric shock. Do not swing your FOMA handset around by its strap. 2Your FOMA handset can strike you or other people, causing bodily harm and other damage. Handsets can give some users skin problems such as itching, allergic reactions or rashes. If you develop skin problems, stop using the handset immediately, and see a doctor. 2The following parts contain metal materials. Place of use Material Do not let FOMA handset get wet. 2Contact with water, pet urine or other liquids can cause heating, injuries or electric shock. Take care not to use the handset in areas where it could get wet. No liquids C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 12 00M1000EN.book 13 CAUTION Do not put liquids such as water, other liquids, pieces of metal or flammable materials inside FOMA handset, UIM holder, or TransFlash memory card holder. 2May cause fire, equipment failure or electric shock. In rare cases, using the handset in some vehicle models can cause the vehicle's electronic equipment to malfunction or fail. 2In this case, do not use the FOMA handset because it may hamper safe driving. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s Do not place magnetic disks or cards with magnetic stripes near the handset or place inside and fold the handset. 2Data stored on media such as cash cards, credit cards, telephone cards and floppy disks may be erased if the storage medium is placed near the handset. Be careful when inserting/
removing TransFlash memory card. 2Can cause harm to hand or fingers. Be careful of broken glass when the display or camera lens is accidentally broken. 2Glass display and camera lens surfaces include a plastic cover panel to keep glass from breaking into pieces. However, touching sharp edges may cause injury. Battery Pack 1Check that the battery type matches the type displayed on the Battery pack label. Display Battery type Lithium ion Lithium ion battery DANGER If Battery pack liquid contacts eyes, immediately wash the eyes with clean water and see a doctor right away. Do not rub the eyes. 2Battery fluid in the eyes may cause blindness. Do not throw Battery pack into contact with open flames. 2May cause the Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. 13 00M1000EN.book 14 DANGER Do not connect the Battery pack terminals to wire or other metal objects. Do not carry or store Battery pack together with a necklace or other metal object. 2May cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. Do not pierce Battery pack with a nail, hit with a hammer or step on it. 2May cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. Do not try to force Battery pack onto FOMA handset or Battery pack charger if you are having trouble connecting it. Always connect it after confirming that it is correctly oriented. 2May cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. Do not use or leave Battery pack near flames, stoves or other hot areas. 2May cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. Do not let Battery pack get wet. 2Contact with water or other liquids can cause heating, malfunctions, electric shock or injuries. Take care not to use the handset in areas where it could get wet. No liquids No disassembly Do not disassemble or remodel the Battery pack, and do not solder items directly onto it. 2May cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. WARNING If Battery pack fluid contacts skin or clothes, immediately flush the contacted area thoroughly with clean water. 2Battery pack fluid may damage the skin. If Battery pack does not reach full charge after being charged for the specified time, stop charging it. 2Exceeding the specified charging time may cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. If Battery pack starts giving off a strange smell, overheats, becomes discolored or deformed during use, charging or in storage, immediately disconnect it from the FOMA handset or Battery pack charger. 2Continued use may cause Battery pack to leak, heat, burst or ignite. If Battery pack leaks or gives off a strange smell, immediately remove it from the vicinity of open flames. 2The vapors from leaking Battery pack fluid may ignite or explode. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 14 00M1000EN.book 15 WARNING Do not use or leave device in hot areas, or in areas of strong direct sunlight such as inside a vehicle. 2May cause leaks, heating or deterioration in performance and service life. CAUTION Do not discard old Battery pack together with other garbage. 2Ignition or environmental destruction results. Tape the terminals of old Battery packs to insulate them, and then bring them to a DoCoMo sales outlet. If your local municipality has a battery recycling program, dispose of them as insstructed. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s Stylus WARNING Store device out of reach of small children. 2Stylus can be accidentally swallowed or cause injuries. Never point a stylus at another person. 2Can cause irreparable damage if poked into the eyes. Do not use stylus with other equipment. 2May cause equipment damage or failure. When using a stylus with a FOMA handset, use only a stylus recommended by a NTT DoCoMo Group company. 2Damaged or murky displays may result when using a stylus other than those recommended. Stylus MXX Be careful when inserting/
removing stylus. 2Can cause harm to hand or fingers. 15 00M1000EN.book 16 AC Adapter and Desktop Holder WARNING Do not short-circuit charger terminal while it is connected to an outlet. Do not touch charger terminal with a part of your body such as your hand or finger. 2Fire, malfunction, electric shock, or injuries may result. Do not use the AC adapter, Desktop holder or Battery pack charger in bathrooms or highly humid areas. 2Electric shock may result. Do not touch AC adapter cord or wall outlet with wet hands. 2Electric shock may result. No wet hands When connecting AC adapter to an electrical outlet, do not touch it to metal objects such as metal straps. Be sure to firmly connect to outlet. 2Could cause electric shock, short circuit or fire. Do not let AC adapter, Desktop holder or Bluetooth headset get wet. 2Contact with water or other liquids can cause heating, electric shock or malfunction. Take care not to use the handset in areas where it could get wet. No liquids Always remove electrical plug from wall outlet when not using the AC adapter for an extended period. 2Electric shock, fire or malfunction may result. Do not use AC adapter electrical cord or power cable if it gets damaged. 2Electric shock, heat or fire may result. Immediately remove AC adapter plug from the wall outlet if water or other fluids enter the adapter. 2Electric shock, smoke or fire may result. Do not disassemble or remodel AC adapter. 2Electric shock, fire, or malfunction may result. No disassembly Only use with specified power source and voltage. 2Usage with incorrect voltage may result in fire or failure. AC adapter
: 100V-240VAC AC adapter for Bluetooth Headset
: 100V-240VAC Wipe off any dust that accumulates on the plug. 2Fire may result. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 16 00M1000EN.book 17 WARNING Place Desktop holder on a stable surface during charging. Do not cover or wrap Desktop holder with a cloth or blanket. 2May cause the FOMA handset to become unseated from Desktop holder. Heating can result in fire or failure. CAUTION Always remove AC adapter plug from wall outlet when cleaning device. 2Electric shock may result. Do not place heavy objects on the AC adapter cord or power cable. 2Electric shock or fire may result. When you disconnect AC adapter from wall outlet, do not pull AC adapter cord or power cable. Instead, hold plug and pull out to disconnect. 2Pulling on cords can damage them, possibly leading to electric shock or fire. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s UIM WARNING Do not put UIM into microwave ovens, other heating appliances or high-
pressure containers. 2May cause melting, heating, smoking, loss of data or malfunction. CAUTION Do not use or leave UIM near flames, stoves or other hot areas. 2May cause melting, heating, smoke, loss of data or malfunction. Store the UIM out of reach of small children. 2Can be swallowed and cause serious injury. Be careful when removing the UIM (IC portion). 2Hands or fingers may be injured. Do not bring UIM into contact with open flames or heat it. 2May cause melting, heating, smoke, loss of data or malfunction. 17 00M1000EN.book 18 CAUTION Do not scratch ICs. 2Malfunction may result. Be careful not to touch or short-circuit ICs accidentally. 2Data loss or malfunction may result. Do not drop UIM or subject to physical shock. 2Malfunction may result. Do not bend UIM or place heavy objects on it. 2Malfunction may result. Do not let UIM get wet. 2Contact with water or other No liquids liquids can cause malfunctions. Do not disassemble or remodel UIM or place heavy objects on it. 2Malfunction may result. No disassembly When storing UIM, do not place in direct sunlight or in environments of high temperature or high humidity. 2Malfunction may result. Do not store UIM in extremely dusty areas. 2Malfunction may result. Only use UIM with devices specified by NTT DoCoMo. 2Use with other devices may cause data loss or malfunction. Contact a DoCoMo sales outlet for the list of specified devices. TransFlash Memory Cards and TransFlash Memory Card Adapters WARNING Do not put the card and adapter in microwave ovens or other heating appliances or high-pressure containers. 2May cause melting, heating, smoking, loss of data or malfunction. Store the card and adapter out of reach of small children. 2The card or adapter can be accidentally swallowed or cause injuries.
* Call a doctor immediately if there is cause to suspect that a child has swallowed a part. CAUTION Do not disassemble or remodel card or adapter. 2Data loss or malfunction may No disassembly result. Do not bend the card or adapter, or place heavy objects on them. 2Malfunction may result. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 18 00M1000EN.book 19 CAUTION Do not drop the card and adapter or subject them to shocks. 2Malfunction may result. Take care not to touch or short-
circuit metal terminals accidentally. 2Data loss or malfunction may result. Do not let card or adapter get wet. 2Contact with water or other liquids can cause malfunctions. No liquids Do not scratch metal terminals. 2Malfunction may result. Do not bring card or adapter into contact with open flames or heat them. 2May cause melting, heating, smoking, loss of data or malfunction. Bluetooth Headset C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s Do not use or leave card or adapter near flames, stoves or other hot areas. 2May cause melting, heating, smoking, loss of data or malfunction. Children using card or adapter should be instructed in proper operation by an adult. Do not allow children to use card or adapter without adult supervision. 2May cause injuries. Do not use or keep card or adapter in the following places:
Inside the car, under hot sunlight,
or other places subject to high temperature
Areas exposed to direct sunlight
High humidity environments
Areas where corrosive gas, etc. is generated
Highly dusty environment 2Malfunction may result. DANGER Use only specified AC adapter when recharging this device. 2Otherwise liquid leak, heating, explosion or ignition may result. Bluetooth headset AC adapter XX
* For other compatible products, call our contact. Do not pierce Battery pack with nails, hit with a hammer or step on it. 2May cause built-in battery to leak, heat, burst or ignite. 19 00M1000EN.book 20 DANGER Avoid using this device or leaving it near high temperatures such as fire or stove. 2Liquid leakage, heating, ignition, short circuit or other problems may result. No disassembly Do not disassemble or remodel headset, or replace the built-in battery. 2Fire, injury, electrical shock, short circuit or other problems may result. Do not bring Battery pack into contact with open flames. 2May cause built-in battery to leak, heat, burst or ignite. WARNING Do not use Bluetooth headset in the event of an offensive odor being generated, or in cases of heating, discoloration, deformation or other anomalous situation. 2Liquid leakage, heating, explosion or ignition of the built-in battery may result if usage is continued. Do not use headset while driving. 2Safe driving no longer is possible and a traffic accident may occur. Use headset only after car is parked in a safe place. Be sure to maintain volume at appropriate levels while walking. 2Excessively high volume levels will prevent external sounds from being heard, which can lead to traffic accidents at railroad crossings or crosswalks. People with heart trouble should take special care when setting the volume level of the Bluetooth headset. 2Otherwise the heart may be adversely affected. If full charge is not reached after being charged for the recommended time, stop charging. 2Liquid leakage, heating, explosion or ignition may result if continued. Turn Bluetooth headset off near high-precision electronic control equipment or electronic equipment using low-power signals. 2Malfunction of the electronic apparatus may result.
* Examples of such electronic apparatus Hearing aids, implantable heart pacemakers and implantable defibrillation equipment, other medical electrical devices, fire alarms, automatic doors, other automatic controllers. When using an implantable heart pacemaker, implantable defibrillation equipment, or other medical electrical devices, consult the manufacturer or distributor of the device to understand the effects of radio waves on device operation. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 20 00M1000EN.book 21 WARNING Turn Bluetooth headset off in areas where use of such devices is prohibited, such as in aircraft or hospitals. 2Use of device may adversely affect electronic devices and medical electrical devices. In case automatic power-on is enabled for your headset, disable the setting and then turn it off. For use in a medical facility, follow instructions from the medical institution. 2Any violation of prohibitions such as use of this device in aircraft may subject user to punishment according to applicable laws and regulations. CAUTION If you hear a lightening while using this device outdoors, turn off this device and escape to a safe place. 2Otherwise a lightening strike or an electric shock may result. Do not dispose of device with general garbage. 2Ignition or environmental destruction will result. If device becomes unnecessary, bring it to a DoCoMo shop, or follow the instructions of your local waste reclamation bureau. s Depending on physical predisposition or condition, itching, irritation or eczema may result. In the event of such abnormal effects, stop using device and consult a doctor. 2This device uses metals in the following parts:
Part Material No liquids Keep Bluetooth headset away from water. 2Contact with water or other liquids can cause heating, injuries or electric shock. Do not use the handset in areas where it could get wet. Avoid raising the volume of the Bluetooth headset too high. 2Damage to your hearing may result. Minimize volume levels of FOMA handset and Bluetooth headset before listening to voice with this handset. 2Otherwise, sudden loud sounds may damage your hearing. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 21 00M1000EN.book 22 Handset near Electronic Medical Equipment 1The following precautions are based on the guidelines drawn up during the Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference, Japan, regarding the protection of electronic medical equipment from radio waves emitted by mobile phone units. WARNING Wearers of implanted pacemakers or defibrillators must carry and use FOMA handset and Bluetooth headset at least 22 cm away from implanted device. 2Signals from FOMA handset may affect the operation of implanted pacemakers or defibrillators. When electrical medical devices other than implanted pacemakers or defibrillators are in use outside of medical facilities (such as in home care settings), check with the device manufacturer to determine how the device is affected by electrical signals. 2Signals from FOMA handset may affect the operation of implanted pacemakers or defibrillators, and other devices. Turn FOMA handset and Bluetooth headset off when in crowded trains or other public places where pacemaker or defibrillator wearers could be nearby. 2Signals from the FOMA handset may affect the operation of implanted pacemakers or defibrillators. Be sure to adhere to the following rules inside medical facilities:
2Do not bring FOMA handset or Bluetooth headset into operating rooms (ORs), intensive care units
(ICUs) or coronary care units
(CCUs). 2Turn FOMA handset and Bluetooth headset off in hospital wards. 2Turn FOMA handset and Bluetooth headset off in hospital lobbies and corridors if electrical medical devices could be nearby. 2If medical facility has specific zones where use or possession of mobile devices is prohibited, follow those rules. 2If automatic power-on is enabled, disable this setting before turning the power off. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 22 00M1000EN.book 23 Handling and Care General Usage Guidelines 1Keep FOMA handset away from water.
FOMA handset, Battery pack, and AC adapter are not waterproof. Do not use FOMA handset in bathrooms or other high-humidity areas, or in the rain. When carrying FOMA handset in a pocket near your body, sweat may corrode the inner components, causing malfunction. Note that malfunctions deemed to be caused by water are not covered by the warranty, and may be impossible to repair. Since these malfunctions are not under warranty, when repair is possible, it will be done at the user's expense. If your FOMA handset gets wet or moist, immediately turn off the power. After removing Battery pack, contact the sales representative for repair as soon as possible. Note, however, that the FOMA handset may not be repairable, depending on its condition.
1Clean FOMA handset with a soft, dry cloth.
To make the color LC display easy to read, some FOMA handset models use a special coating on the display. When cleaning FOMA handset, rubbing it roughly with a dry cloth can scratch the display. Take care when handling the unit, and use a soft, dry cloth for cleaning (such as a cloth for eyeglasses). Drops of water or dirt left on the display can cause stains or remove the coating. If FOMA handset is wiped with alcohol, paint thinner, benzine or detergent, the printing may disappear or color may fade.
1Clean jack occasionally with a dry cotton swab.
If jack is dirty, electrical contact may grow poor, data communications errors may occur when using the Desktop holder, or the power may shut off. A dirty jack can also result in poor charging, so clean it with a dry cloth or cotton swab. 1Do not place FOMA handset near air conditioner outlets.
Rapid changes in humidity can cause condensation, leading to internal corrosion and malfunction. 1Do not place FOMA handset where excessive force will be applied to it.
If FOMA handset is inserted into a full bag, or placed in a pocket and sat on, its LC display or internal PCBs may be damaged or malfunction. Such damage is not covered by warranty. 1Please carefully read pages X to Y and Z to W of the manual for care and handling information regarding the Battery pack and AC Adapter. FOMA handset 1Avoid temperature extremes.
Use FOMA handset in an ambient temperature range of between X and Y degrees Celsius, and in a humidity range of between Z% and W%. 1FOMA handset may affect fixed telephones, televisions or radios in use nearby. Use as far as possible from such appliances. 1Maintain a separate record of data you register in your FOMA handset.
NTT DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for accidentally erased data. 1Do not place FOMA handset on surfaces where potentially damaging objects are placed.
The Rear-camera may be damaged. If display is open with the panel facing out, it can be damaged. 1Do not sit down while FOMA handset is in the back pocket of your pants. Also, do not place it at the bottom of a full bag, or where it will encounter excessive force.
Malfunction or damage may result. 1It is normal for FOMA handset to grow warm during use or charging. You can continue to use it while warm. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 23 00M1000EN.book 24 1In normal use, please keep the earphone/mic jacks capped, and the external connection jack covered. Battery pack 1The Battery pack is a consumable part.
Replace Battery pack when operation time of FOMA handset on a full charge has grown extremely short
(amount of time will vary depending on type of use). Purchase a new Battery pack of the specified type. 1Charge Battery pack in an environment that is within the acceptable ambient temperature range (X to Y degrees Celsius) 1Always charge FOMA handset before using it for the first time, or after extended disuse. 1Operation time provided by Battery pack will depend on operating environment, and on remaining Battery pack performance level. 1Do not discard old Battery pack with general household garbage.
Tape the terminals of old Battery packs to insulate, and then bring into our sales outlet. If your local municipality has a battery recycling program, dispose of as instructed. AC Adapter 1Do not charge Battery pack in the following areas:
Where the ambient temperature is less than XX degrees Celsius or more than XX degrees Celsius.
Near fixed telephones, televisions or radios. In environment with excessive humidity, dust or vibrations. 1It is normal for the adapter to become warm during charging. You can continue charging with a warm adapter. 1When using an electrical outlet equipped with a mechanism that prevents unplugging, follow the handling instructions for that outlet. UIM 1Do not use excessive force to remove the card's IC. 1Do not put excessive force on the card when inserting it into the handset. 1It is normal for the UIM to become warm during use. You can continue using a warm card. 1Note that NTT DoCoMo will not be responsible for malfunctions occurring as the result of inserting and using a UIM with unrecommended IC card reader/writer. 1Always keep UIM ICs clean. 1Clean UIM with a soft, dry cloth. 1Maintain a separate record of the data you register on the UIM.
Under no circumstance shall NTT DoCoMo be held liable for any loss or damage to the data stored in the UIM. 1To protect the environment, please bring the old UIM to a DoCoMo sales outlet. 1Avoid extreme temperature. Display (Touch Panel) 1Do not paste on protective sheets or seals.
Functionality may be degraded, or display may be damaged. 1Do not rub or push the display surface with hard tool.
The display may be destroyed. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 24 00M1000EN.book 25 1If display is being operated as a touch panel, always use the attached stylus.
Operation with sharply pointed tools such as nails, pens, pins, etc. may damage the display. Stylus 1Stylus (touch panel pens) are consumables.
If a stylus is lost or damaged, you can order a new one for the appropriate model. For detailed information, contact a DoCoMo sales office. 1If stylus can no longer be smoothly slid across screen, or display response slows down, use a soft, dry cloth (such as a glass wipe) to wipe the display surface. Handling and care 3 P23 Wireless LANs 1Do not place FOMA handset near magnetic devices such as electric appliances, audiovisual or office automation equipment, or in places where a large amount of electromagnetic waves are emitted.
Under the influence of strong magnetic or electrical fields noise may become louder, or calls may become
unavailable. (In particular, microwave oven usage can adversely affect the handset.) If FOMA handset is positioned near televisions or radios, the handset may cause reception to fail, or television images may be distorted. If you are near a broadcasting or radio station and getting a lot of noise, try moving the FOMA handset. If the signals from the station are too strong, the handset may not work. 1The wireless LAN function of the FOMA handset transmits at 2.4GHz. Please note the following warnings.
Before using the handset, check that wireless stations, specified low-power radio stations and amateur radio
stations are not being used. If the handset causes harmful radio interference to a microwave tracking systems, immediately change the frequency or stop emission of radio waves to avoid the radio interference. 1If multiple wireless LAN access points exist that use the same channel, the wireless LAN may not be searched correctly. Bluetooth Bluetooth is a technology that connects Bluetooth-compatible devices such as mobile phones and PCs wirelessly. 3 P377 1Passkey A password that prevents unauthorized use of a Bluetooth device. Usually, you can set a passkey by choosing up to 16 alphanumeric characters. However, on some devices passkeys are preset and cannot be changed. To enable authorized access, you can enter the same designated passkey in both your FOMA handset and the target Bluetooth device, or you can enter the designated passkey in your FOMA handset alone. For better security, it is recommended that passkeys be set using as many digits as possible (up to 16 characters), and that you do not create a passkey using your name, birthday, or other information that is easy to guess. 1For better connection, keep the following points in mind:
The distance between your handset and another Bluetooth device must be about 10 meters or less, and within a direct line of sight. The maximum distance under which connections are possible may shorten depending on the environment (i.e. blocked by a wall or furniture) or building structure. This distance also will shorten if there is an obstruction between the FOMA handset and other Bluetooth devices. In particular, if there is an intervening wall or floor of reinforced concrete between Bluetooth devices, they may be unable to connect with each other. Note that the abovementioned connection distance is not guaranteed. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 25 00M1000EN.book 26 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s
During connection, keep Bluetooth devices more than 2 meters away from other electrical devices, such as home electric appliances, audiovisual devices, office automation devices, digital cordless telephones, and facsimile machines. In particular, when using a microwave oven, be sure to keep Bluetooth devices more than 3m away from it to prevent interference. Normal connections may fail to be established when electric devices are powered on. Also, Bluetooth devices may cause noise or reception failure on televisions or radios
(television images may be degraded on certain UHF or satellite broadcasting channels). If there is a broadcast station or radio near a Bluetooth device to which you want to connect, your FOMA handset may be unable to connect with the Bluetooth device. In such a situation, move the Bluetooth device to another location from which connection is possible.
1Radio interference with wireless LANs Bluetooth devices use the same frequency band (2.4 GHz) as do wireless LANs (IEEE 802.11b/
g). Therefore, if a Bluetooth device is used near a wireless LAN device, radio interference may cause the communication to slow down, generate noise or completely fail. If this occurs, take the following measures:
Keep your FOMA handset and the Bluetooth device to which you wish to connect wirelessly, 10 meters or more away from the wireless LAN device.
When it is impossible to separate the devices by more than 10m, power down the wireless LAN or Bluetooth device. 1With regard to Bluetooth communication security, while FOMA handsets support Bluetooth standard security provisions. However, some settings have inadequate security, so be careful when using Bluetooth for communications. 1Please note that NTT DoCoMo is not responsible even in the case that information may leak from Bluetooth communications. 1With FOMA handsets, you can use the services compatible with the following version and profiles:
Supported Bluetooth version Bluetooth Specification Ver. 1.1 *1 Supported Bluetooth profiles *2
Generic Object Exchange Profile
Object Push Profile
Serial Port Profile
Dial-up Networking Profile
Headset Profile
Service Discovery Application Profile
Hands-Free Profile
*1:
*2:
All Bluetooth-compatible devices including FOMA handsets and headset devices are compliant with the Bluetooth Specification defined by the Bluetooth SIG, and have been authorized by the Bluetooth SIG. However, depending on the characteristics or specifications of the device, methods of operation may differ, or data exchange after connection may not be possible. The profiles are the standardized Bluetooth connection procedures for each product feature. 1When replacing the battery in a Bluetooth headset, send or bring the Bluetooth headset to NTT DoCoMo Customer Support.
For safety, do not disassemble the Bluetooth headset by yourself. 26 00M1000EN.book 27 1Frequency band The frequency band used by your FOMA handset is indicated in a label on the entry for the Battery pack of the FOMA handset. Following is an explanation of how to read the label.
(2)
(3)
(1) 2.4FH1
(4)
(1) 2.4
(2) FH
(3) 1
(4)
: Indicates radio device that uses the 2,400 MHz band.
: Indicates device uses the FH-SS modulation.
: Indicates device is assumed to interfere with other devices within 10m.
: Indicates device fully uses the bandwidth between 2,400.0MHz and 2,483.5MHz, and that it cannot be set to avoid the frequencies used by microwave tracking systems. Precautions for using Bluetooth devices The frequency band used by this product is also used by microwave ovens and other industrial, scientific, and medical devices, licensed private radio stations such as those for mobile identification in factory production lines, specified low power radio stations that do not require any licenses, and amateur radio stations. Hereafter, these are called Other Radio Stations. 1. Before using this product, make sure that there are no Other Radio Stations operating nearby. 2. If radio interference occurs between this product and Other Radio Stations, immediately move this product to another place or stop radio wave emission from this product to avoid radio interference. 3. For other points you are concerned about, or if a trouble occurs, contact us on:
Inquiries:
0120-005-250 (in English)
* Can be called from DoCoMo mobile phones or FOMA handsets, and PHSs. Camera Handling When using the FOMA handset if you seriously annoy others, you may be liable for prosecution under applicable laws or regulation (such as Public Nuisance Laws). Please be considerate of other people's privacy when taking and sending pictures using camera-equipped mobile phones. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 27 00M1000EN.book 28 Intellectual Property Issues About Copyright and Ownership of Likenesses You may not without permission of the copyright owner duplicate, modify, transmit over public communication lines, etc. any document, image, music, software, or other content owned by a third party that you have used this product to photograph or download from an Internet homepage, etc., except for private uses such as duplication and indexing that are allowed by copyright law. With regard to performance, recital, exhibition, etc., please take care as even if for private use, photography and audio recording are restricted. In addition, please refrain from using this product to photograph another person without their permission, post such photographed likeness of another person on an Internet homepage without their permission, or otherwise publish it to an unknown number of people, as there is a danger that the subject's right to ownership of their own likeness may be violated. Trademarks
The "FOMA" and "i-mode" logos, and the following are trademarks or registered brand names of NTT DoCoMo: "FOMA", "mova", "Freedom Of Mobile multimedia Access", "i-mode", "i-Appli", "i-Appli DX", "i-
Melody", "mopera", "business mopera", "mopera access", "WORLD CALL", "Drive Mode", "Quickcast",
"Multiaccess", "i-Shot", "i-Area", "i-Motion", "i-Motion Mail", "chaku-Motion", "deco-Mail", "i-Anime", "Dual Network", "M-stage V Live", "musea", "FirstPass", "i-Appli Search".
Java and all trademarks/logos related to Java in the U.S. and elsewhere, are the trademarks of U.S. based Sun Microsystems, Inc. or its registered brand name.
"Catch Phone" is a registered brand name of the Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corp.
Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are trademarks of Bluetooth SIG, INC., and used under license to NTT DoCoMo.
Opera is a trademark of Opera Software ASA.
MovianVPN is a trademark of Lerticom.
$$ The Document Viewer was created by Picsel Powered. Picsel, PicselPowered and the Picsel cube logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Picsel Technologies Ltd and/or its affiliates.
Microsoft, MS, and Windows are in the U.S. and other countries registered brand names of U.S. based Microsoft Corporation.
Windows XP is an abbreviation of "Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system", or of
"Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system".
Windows 2000 Professional is an abbreviation of "Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system".
Windows Me is an abbreviation of "Microsoft Windows Millenium Edition operating system".
Windows 98 is an abbreviation of "Microsoft Windows 98 operating system".
Windows 98SE is an abbreviation of "Microsoft Windows 98 operating system SECOND EDITION".
The above brand names may be written side-by-side in the following manner: Windows XP, 2000 Professional, Me, 98SE, 98.
Windows 98 and Windows 98SE are referred to together as Windows 98.
Other company names or product names mentioned in this work are the trademarks or registered brand names of their respective owners. C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 28 00M1000EN.book 29 Other Notices
Modules developed by the Independent JPEG Group are included in part of this product's software.
This product is licensed based on the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License. Only personal and non-
commercial use in the following situations is allowed:
- When recording moving images meeting the MPEG-4 Visual standard (hereafter, "MPEG-4 Video").
- When playing MPEG-4 Video recorded by a user for personal and non-commercial use.
- When playing MPEG-4 Video provided by a provider that has been licensed by MPEG-LA.
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations;
4,901,307 5,600,754 5,267,261 5,506,865 5,710,784 5,504,773 5,416,797 5,568,483 5,228,054 5,778,338 5,109,390 5,490,165 5,414,796 5,544,196 5,535,239 5,101,501 5,659,569 5,337,338 5,267,262 5,511,073 5,056,109 5,657,420 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 29 00M1000EN.book 30 Checking Purchased Product 1Purchased product FOMA M1000
(includes Warranty, stylus, rear cover XXX) FOMA M1000 Operation Manual
(this manual) TransFlash Memory Card (32MB)
(with soft case)
[Illustration of main unit to be inserted here]
[Illustration of Operation Manual to be inserted here]
[Illustration of TransFlash Memory Card to be inserted here]
* A quick manual is displayed on P000. FOMA M1000 CD-ROM
[Illustration of CD-ROM to be inserted here]
AC Adapter XXX
(with warranty) Desktop Holder XXX Battery pack XXX
[Illustration of AC Adapter to be inserted here]
[Illustration of Desktop Holder to be inserted here]
[Illustration of Battery pack to be inserted here]
Other optional items 3 P526 C o n t e n t s
/
S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s 30 00M1000EN.book 31 Before Using the Handset Names of Parts and Functions. 32 The Stylus . 36 Operating the Touch Screen . 37 Viewing the Display. 38 Selecting the Menu . 44 Entering Text . 47 When Forgetting a Function <Help Function> . 48 Using the UIM . 49 Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack . 51 Charging the Battery Pack . 54 Checking the Battery Status <Battery Status>. 55 Turning the Power On/Off <Power ON/OFF>. 57 Setting Up the Handset for the First Time <Initialization>. 58 Switching Languages Displayed on Screen <Language Selection> . 59 Adjusting the Date and Time <Date and time setup> . 60 Transmission Mode. 61 Notifying Your Phone Number to the other party <Caller ID> . 62 Verifying Your Own Phone Number <Phone Number Display> . 63 31 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 00M1000EN.book 32 Names of Parts and Functions Left Side View Right Side View Front View a b c d e c f g Bottom Surface Rear View TM YM v w x Connecting the Ear/Microphone Illustration Size (mm) : Height XXX Width XX Thickness XX Weight (g) : Approx. XXX (*When Battery pack is inserted) aStrap Fixing Hole Place to install the strap bm Camera/Shutter Key This key is used to launch the camera, and to capture still images/videos P34 cSpeaker You can hear ring tunes, alarm tones, and keypad tones from here. You can also hear the voice of the other party when the speakerphone feature is used. P87 P67, dud Volume/Zoom Key This is used to adjust volumes, and enlarge/reduce image/video being captured. P34 es Speakerphone/Voice Record Key fp Power/Lock Switch This is used to turn on/off the power, and to set/release the All Lock feature. P34, P57 gEar/Microphone Interface This is used to connect the Ear/
Microphone with power switch (sold separately) P359 hRecharging Interface iExternal Interface P54 This allows connection to the AC adapter or to a USB cable (bundled accessory). jStylus/Stylus Holder Remove the Stylus from the Stylus holder when operating the FOMA handset. P36 This is used to set/release the speakerphone feature while calling, and to launch the voice recorder. P34 32 00M1000EN.book 33 kEarpiece rFront Camera The voice on the other line can be heard from here. la Application A/Drive Mode Key This is used to display the menu from the menu bar, or to set/release the drive mode. This is also used to control game applications. mStatus LED P79 The status of the FOMA handset such as receipt of calls and emails, network connection status, battery charge status, etc. are notified with the illumination/
flashing of this light. P34 nDisplay (Touch screen) o0 Navigation Key P37, P38 This is used to control games or to select/
confirm functions, etc. below described pc Start Key This is used to make/receive calls or to display redial numbers. P66, P69, P76 qh Home Key This is used to revert to the Home screen. This also launches a preset application by holding down for 3 seconds or longer, or displays the Tap Position Tuning screen of the touch screen by holding down for 10 seconds or longer. P45, P57, P134 This is used to send your video image when making a video call, or to capture a still image/video of yourself. P274, P280 P85, sb Application B/Manner Mode Key This is used to set up/release manner mode. This is also used for controlling applications such as games. P128 te End Key This is used to hang up a call or to display the number input screen. uMouthpiece/Microphone This is used to send your voice to the handset on the other end when calling. This is also used to record voice data while capturing video.
If you block the mouthpiece, your voice may not be sent/recorded while calling or capturing video. vCamera Lamp This will emit a red illumination when capturing still images/videos. wRear Camera This is used when sending videos of scenery, etc via video call, or capturing still images/videos of scenery, etc. P85, P274, P280 xRear Cover Lock P52 Navigation Key The following operations can be performed using the navigation key 7
Moving the cursor, selecting an item, scrolling a screen
Displaying the Brightness/Contrast/Zoom setup screen while making a video call or using the camera
Moving a character or cursor up and down while controlling a game, etc. 6
Selecting an item, soft key or menu
Switching tabs
Changing settings in video calls/camera brightness/contrast/zoom setup screens
Moving the cursor or character from side to side while playing a game, etc. ikjl
Moving the cursor to the upper left/upper right/lower left/lower right directions in the image thumbnail display screen
Moving the character/cursor to the upper left/upper right/lower left/lower right directions to play games B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 33 00M1000EN.book 34 Sidekey Operations On either side of the FOMA handset, you can find 3 sidekeys and 1 switch. Various operations can be performed by pressing/sliding each key. The following operations can be performed using the sidekeys and switch. The operation status of the FOMA handset is also described below.
Most operations using the sidekeys are disabled when the FOMA handset is locked. 3 P153 Side key/switch Performing Operations m Camera/Shutter Key Activating the Camera Start capturing still image/video Operation Status of the FOMA handset Displaying the screen other than the still image/video capture screen Displaying the still image/video capture screen B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t ud Volume/Zoom Key Canceling video capture Capturing video Storing the still image/video Controlling the receive volume*1 Cancel ring tone Enlarge/reduce captured image Capture of still image/video completed Talking Receiving call Displaying the still image/video capture screen s Speakerphone/voice record key Launching/releasing the speakerphone function*1 Talking Recording/canceling voice memo using the voice recorder Other than talking*2 Setting up All lock Power ON/OFF
*3
-
r Power/lock switch(Up) p Power/lock switch(Down)
*1:
*2:
*3:
Operation can be performed when FOMA handset is locked. Recording starts when pressed for 1+ second (s), and records while pressed. Setup completes when the handset pin number is changed 3 P147 Status LED You can find the status LED in the upper section of the front surface of the FOMA handset. The status LED notifies the status of the FOMA handset with motions of the light. The status and various motions of the status LED are described below. Status LED
The status light illuminates/flashes when the status LED setting is turned ON. 3 P136
When conflicting status occured simultaneously, motion of the light reacts to the status with higher priority. 34 00M1000EN.book 35 1When power of FOMA handset is ON*
Motion (illumination/flashing patterns) Status Priority Red and green flash alternately Receiving voice call or video call Fast flashing of green light Within the service area. Fast alternate flashing of green and red lights Within the service area, and new email or short message (SMS) received. Slow flashing of red light Fast flashing of red light Outside the service area. Outside service area, and new email or short message (SMS) received. Fast flashing of orange light Roaming service in use. Roaming service in use, and new email or Fast alternate flashing of orange and red short message (SMS) received. lights
*: Motions are similar when FOMA handset is switched ON and charged. 1When FOMA handset is switched OFF High Low B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t Motion (illumination/flashing patterns) Status Priority Red illumination Green illumination FOMA handset is charged via an AC adapter. High Charge for FOMA handset is completed via an AC adapter. Low NOTE
When Battery pack level drops while using the FOMA handset, a pattern notifying low voltage (light goes off for 4 seconds after each illumination/flashing pattern) is added.
When Drive Mode is in effect, the status LED does not illuminate/flash.
The status LED illuminates when capturing still image or video. The status LED flashes when using the self timer. 3 P274, P280
When status LED function is turned off, all motions are canceled except for the flashing that notifies data processing within the FOMA handset. Either the orange and green lights alternately flash or the green light slowly flashes when data is processed within the FOMA handset. 3 P40 35 00M1000EN.book 36 The Stylus The Stylus is a pointing device used to directly tap the display (touch screen). To operate the FOMA handset, the Stylus is used by taking out the pen from the Stylus holder located on the lower right spot of the front side of the FOMA handset. Removing/Affixing the Stylus The Stylus can be stretched, and retracted when affixed to the FOMA handset.
Hold the FOMA handset to remove/affix the Stylus. a Pinch the protruding portion of the Stylus using your fingers, and pull out the pen from the FOMA handset and stretch Illustration
To affix the Stylus, retract it before inserting it back in the Stylus holder. NOTE
Do not forcibly overstretch the Stylus. The pen may not retract thereafter.
Pay attention to the direction of the Stylus when affixing it to Stylus holder of the FOMA handset.
Always affix the Stylus to the Stylus holder to avoid misplacing the pen.
Always use the accompanying Stylus to operate the touch screen. Using a sharp edged pen may cause the touch screen to be damaged.
Pay attention not to damage the tip of the Stylus. Using a damaged Stylus may cause the touch screen to be damaged. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 36 00M1000EN.book 37 Operating the Touch Screen The FOMA handset display is a touch screen. You can operate the FOMA handset by directly tapping the displayed icons and functions using the Stylus.
Functions can also be selected using the navigation key. 3 P33 Tapping the Touch Screen Using the Stylus to lightly touch the touch screen once and release is called "tapping". You can launch an application or select a function by tapping the position of the displayed icon or function. Illustration Pointing the Touch Screen Using the Stylus to touch and hold down a spot on the touch screen is called "pointing". You can point $$ in the telephone number entry screen, and delete all entered digits, or scroll by pointing the up/down arrow on the scroll bar. Illustration B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 37 00M1000EN.book 38 Dragging the Touch Screen Sliding the Stylus on the touch screen is called "dragging". You can handwrite/draw text or illustrations, or scroll the screen by dragging the scroll bar up and down. Illustration NOTE
Do not operate the touch screen with your fingernails or with any sharp edged object such as a pen or pin.
Adjust the tap position of the touch screen if the position to tap with the Stylus is misaligned. 3 P134 Viewing the Display The display consists of the following components, and displays necessary information in each screen.
The make up of components vary with each screen. Application Selector bar 3 P39 Menu bar 3 P39 Display area 3 P40 Status bar 3 P40 Home screen NOTE
The display is manufactured employing highly advanced technologies. Non-illuminating dots or continuously illuminating dots may, however, exist on the display. Be acknowledged that this is by no means a failure. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 38 00M1000EN.book 39 Application Selector Bar The Application Selector bar displays 6 icons. You can launch an application by tapping the corresponding icon. The bar is always displayed allowing you to easily switch between applications.
You can modify all applications except Application launcher. 3 P345 Item Description Reference a $$ Home Displays Home screen. b $$ Handset Displays Phone number entry screen. Dialing and network services can be set up. c $$ Browse Launches the browser. d $$ Email Displays Email account selection screen e $$ Contacts Displays Contact list. f $$ Application Launches the Application from Menu list. Launcher Menu Bar P57 P66 P193 P234 P107 P345 The Menu bar is displayed underneath the Application Selector bar in each application screen. You can tap the item displayed on the Menu bar to display items to be registered or set up. Folder options are displayed on the right side of the Menu bar when applications enabling the use of folders are displayed. 3 P303 Menu bar B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 39 00M1000EN.book 40 Display Area The screens of each application are displayed in the display area, and can be operated here. According to the conditions set up, the following items are displayed while the Home screen is displayed. a Wallpaper b Calendar
: Displays still image
: Displays calendar for current month, and displays schedule registration screen when tapped. 3 P324 c Time
: Current time is displayed, and date and time setup screen is displayed when tapped. 3 P59 f Message
: Displays notifications of newly received emails, voice mail messages, and area registration status of schedules and To Do list 3 P42 e Shortcut key: Displays 3 icons, and applications registered with the corresponding icons are launched when tapped. NOTE
You can modify the Home screen wallpaper. 3 P132
You can set the calendar or time on the Home screen to be displayed/hidden. 3 P133
You can change the icons registered with the shortcut key. 3 P345 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 40 00M1000EN.book 41 Status Bar The status bar displays the icon that shows the state of the FOMA handset. The bar is always displayed on screen allowing you to check the state of your FOMA handset. a Displays the current time. Displays the current date for approximately 3 seconds when tapped. b Displays the keyboard when tapped while the cursor is positioned in the text entry field. 3 P468, P495 c Displays the current settings of the alert mode. When set to drive mode or manner mode, the corresponding states are displayed. 3 P79, P125, P126, P128 Displays the setup screens of alert mode, drive mode or manner mode when tapped.
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
*:
: Setting up voice mode
: Setting up vibrator mode
: Setting up silent mode
: Setting up manner mode*
: Setting up drive mode*
The manner mode icon is displayed while setting up manner mode. The drive mode icon is given priority and displayed when both the manner mode and drive mode are set simultaneously. d Displays the current state of Bluetooth. Displays the ON/OFF setup screen of Bluetooth when tapped. 3 P377
$$(White)
$$(Gray)
$$(Green)
: Bluetooth is ON
: Bluetooth is OFF
: Bluetooth connected e Displays the connection status/radio signal level of Wireless LAN. 3 P389
$$
$$~$$
: Wireless LAN is OFF
: Signal level good ~ signal level poor f Displays state of handset while talking. Displays state of voice mail recorded or video mail received while in idle state. 3 P67, P252, P368
$$
$$
$$
$$
: Talking on voice/video call
: Talking on voice/video call in mute mode
: New message received in voice mail
: New video mail received B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 41 00M1000EN.book 42 g Displays the state of newly received emails. Displays the Receive box when tapped. 3 P252
$$(White)
: New email received from a sender registered in the Contact list via a mobile phone
$$(Orange)
: New email received from an unregistered sender in the Contact list via a mobile phone
$$(White)
$$(White)
: New email received
: Short message (SMS) received from a sender whose address is identical to a phone number registered in the Contact list
$$(Orange)
: Short message (SMS) received from a sender whose address is not registered in the Contact list
$$
: The number of short messages (SMS) on your UIM has reached the maximum capacity h Displays the network status. Displays the setup screen of self mode when tapped. 3 P155
$$(Green)
$$(Orange)
$$(Green)*
$$(Orange)*
$$(Green)*
$$(Orange)*
$$
$$(Red)
$$(Gray)
*: Connected when a point ($$) is displayed in the middle of the circle. Data transmission in
: Voice communication is enabled
: Voice communication using roaming is enabled
: Transmission of voice and still images is enabled
: Transmission of voice and still images using roaming is enabled
: Transmission of voice and images is enabled
: Transmission of voice and images using roaming is enabled
: Setting self mode
: Only emergency calling is enabled
: Outside the service area progress when the point is flashing. i Displays signal reception level.
$$$$$$
$$
: Signal reception level good signal reception level poor
: Outside the service area j Displays remaining battery level. Displays remaining battery level checking screen when tapped. 3 P56
$$$$$$$$(White)* : Battery full battery needs recharging
$$
$$
*:
: Battery charge in progress
: Cannot charge non-FOMA compliant Battery pack The icon turns orange when video call is in use. 1Power saving mode When the FOMA handset is left in idle state for a given period of time, the screen backlight turns off in order to save battery power. When left in idle state for a further extended period of time, the display of the screen turns off, and switches to power saving mode. At time of purchase, the backlight is set to turn off after approximately 30 seconds, and the screen display to turn off after approximately 1 minute and then to switch to power saving mode. Tap screen or press key on handset to recover from power saving mode.
You can change the power saving settings. 3 P136 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 42 00M1000EN.book 43 1About message area In the message area of the Home screen, information such as number of new emails received or schedules registered are displayed. Details of each can be checked by tapping the item. Item Description Reference a Number of new emails received Displays number of new emails received. Displays Inbox when tapped. b Number of new voice mails recorded Displays number of messages recorded in voice mail service. Connects to network and plays the message when tapped. c Number of new short messages (SMS) received Displays number of new short messages (SMS) received. Displays Inbox when tapped. d Number of scheduled events registered Displays number of scheduled events registered for the day. Displays calendar when tapped. e Number of tasks registered in To Do list Items as per default setting. Items to display can be changed.3P130
*
Displays number of active tasks in To Do list. Displays To Do list screen when tapped. P252 P368 P252 P322 P336 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 43 00M1000EN.book 44 Selecting the Menu Tap $$ (Application launcher) on Application Selector bar to display the application menu list. Tap relevant icons and items until you get to the target screen from the menu list.
<Example: when displaying video capturing screen>
a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar Vertical arrow Icon display List display
You can change the display on your screen. 3 P137 b Tap $$ to scroll screen y Tap $$
NOTE
Menu list 3 P520
When an icon or item is tapped by mistake, tap $$ again to perform the operation from Menu list again. 1Launching an Application To launch an application, you can either select an application from the application launcher menu list, press a key, or tap a shortcut key, etc. In this manual, operational procedures are explained using the easiest or the most appropriate procedures at the time of purchase. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 44 00M1000EN.book 45 1Scrolling a screen A scroll bar or arrow for scrolling the screen is displayed enabling you to display out of range portions of screens with tabs or list screens. If you need to select items mentioned in the operational descriptions but not displayed on screen, tap/drag the screen and scroll the entire screen to continue the operation. Example of a scroll bar Example of an arrow Selecting a Function from a Shortcut On the FOMA handset, besides tapping icons or items from the Menu list to launch an application, you can also use shortcuts to launch an application with a single tap of a screen or a single push of a key.
Shortcut operations can be performed in the following manners.
- Tapping an icon other than $$ on the Application Selector bar
- Tapping the Shortcut key on the Home screen
- Pressing the Home key for 3+ seconds NOTE
You can change applications registered with any shortcut key or home key on the home screen or icon except the $$ icon on the Application Selector bar. 3 P131, P343 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 45 08BEF01_1col_EN.fm 46 Selecting a Function from a Menu Bar You can activate registration and setup screens by tapping an item on the Menu bar and then tapping an item in the menu. With some applications, menus are displayed and various operations can be performed by tapping an area other than the Menu bar. Items displayed varies with each screen.
<Example: when displaying the wallpaper setup screen in the Home screen>
a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar Menu bar b Tap Home on the Menu bar c Tap Wallpaper setup from the menu Displays the Wallpaper setup screen. Perform wallpaper modification from the setup screen.
How to operate 3 P132 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 46 00M1000EN.book 47 Entering Text To enter text on your FOMA handset, tap the characters on the keyboard displayed on the screen. This section explains how to display the keyboard and how to enter basic text. For more information on Inputting Text, refer to Text Input. 3 P465
The default text input option is set to Japanese kana keyboard at time of purchase. 3 P467
<Example: when inputting "" to register the name to Contacts>
a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Phone y New on the Menu bar Keyboard icon b Tap Name and tap $$ on the Status bar Japanese kana keyboard c Tap [ ] y [ ] y [ ]
Displays the conversion options of the entered text.
Tap [], [ ], [ ] to convert the character type. 3 P467 47 00M1000EN.book 48 d Select " " from the conversion options and tap Entered text is converted.
Drag the scroll bar and display when you have multiple conversion options.
When conversion assistant function is turned ON, the projected text string options following the converted characters are displayed. 3 P491 NOTE
You can change the input method. 3 P467 Help Function When Forgetting a Function On your FOMA handset, you can find applications and functions that possess a help feature to display descriptive methods of various actions and operations.
The following applications and functions can display Help.
- Notepad edit screen
- Document viewer list/display screen
- Freehand text entry screen a Tap Edit y Help on the Menu bar in each application screen
Tap $$ to display Help on the Freehand text entry screen. As viewed on a Document viewer B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 48 00M1000EN.book 49 Using the UIM The UIM is an IC card that stores customer information such as your telephone number. By inserting it in the FOMA handset, you can utilize voice calls, video calls, email communication, packet transmission, etc. If you possess multiple FOMA handsets, you can swap the UIM between handsets to meet varying purposes.
You can store Contacts and Short messages (SMS).
For more information about the UIM, refer to the UIM manual. Inserting/Removing the UIM
Turn off the power of your FOMA handset before inserting/removing the UIM.
Do not touch or damage the IC portion when inserting/removing the UIM.
The UIM may break if you apply excessive force on the card while inserting.
Take cautions to avoid misplacing the UIM after removal. How to Insert aTake off the rear cover by sliding it bSlide the cover of the UIM tray towards towards the direction of the arrow while applying pressure on the rear cover lock
Remove the Battery pack if it is attached. 3 P52 the direction of Arrow 1, and lift towards the direction of Arrow 2 Illustration Illustration UIM tray Rear cover lock cPlace the UIM on the UIM tray with the IC side facing down dClose the cover of the UIM tray. Slide it towards the direction of the arrow and lock Illustration Illustration B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 49 00M1000EN.book 50 eAttach the Battery pack and rear cover
How to attach 3 P52 How to Remove aRemove the rear cover and the Battery bOpen the cover of the UIM tray and pack
How to remove 3 P52 remove the UIM
How to open the cover of the UIM tray 3 P49 Illustration Illustration The UIM PIN number You can set up 2 PIN numbers "PIN1 code" and "PIN2 code" to the UIM. 3 P147 Both are set to "0000" at time of purchase but they can be changed later. 3 P150 UIM Action Limitation Function The UIM action limitation function protects your data/files.
When data/files are downloaded from websites, or when email attachments are accessed while the UIM is inserted to your FOMA handset, the UIM action limitation function is automatically set up to such data/files.
You cannot display or play data/files set up with the UIM action limitation function when no UIM is inserted or when a UIM different from the one used to initially obtain data/files is inserted.
The following data/files are subject to being protected by the action limitation function.
- Images/melodies/Java applications downloaded from websites.
- Saved websites
- Downloaded dictionaries
- Email attachments NOTE
Home screens or ring tones set up with data/files that have been set up with the UIM action limitation function will be reverted to default setting when the original UIM is removed or replaced by a separate UIM. To recover the setting, reinsert the UIM used to obtain the data/file.
The UIM action limitation function is not set up to data/files obtained via the TransFlash memory card/
Bluetooth, or images captured with the FOMA handset. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 50 00M1000EN.book 51 Functional Differences in UIMs Functions vary between the 2 types of UIMs available: the green type and the blue type. Pay close attention when using each of the functions described below. Function UIM (Green) UIM (Blue) Reference Maximum digits allowed to register to UIM contact list User authentication procedure to use FirstPass 26 digits maximum 20 digits maximum Available for use Not available for use Use of WORLD WING Available for use Service Dial
"DoCoMo Support Outlet",
"DoCoMo General Services Desk" available for use Not available for use Not available for use P106 P505 P374 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 1WORLD WING WORLD WING is a FOMA International Roaming Service from DoCoMo made available for use by inserting the UIM (Green) to GSM phones deploying this service or to FOMA handsets compatible with the GSM standard allowing overseas use with the same phone number used domestically. 3 P505 You need to apply in order to use WORLD WING. For more information, contact "General Inquiries Service" listed in the reverse side of this manual. Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack You can insert the Battery pack to your FOMA handset.
Turn the FOMA handset power off when changing the Battery pack. How to Insert aTake off the rear cover by sliding it bInsert the Battery pack underneath the towards the direction of the arrow while applying pressure on the rear cover lock protruding portion, and attach it by pushing it towards the direction of the arrow Illustration Illustration Rear cover lock 51 00M1000EN.book 52 cFit in the 4 hooks located in the rear cover to the corresponding holes on the FOMA handset, and attach by sliding it towards the direction of the arrow Illustration How to Remove aTake off the rear cover by sliding it bHold the hooks on both ends of the towards the direction of the arrow while applying pressure on the rear cover lock Battery pack, and remove by lifting it towards the direction of the arrow Illustration Illustration Rear cover lock NOTE
Forcing the Battery pack onto the handset may cause the FOMA handset to break if the UIM is not properly attached.
Forcing the Battery pack onto the handset may cause the interface of the FOMA handset to break. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 52 00M1000EN.book 53 Effectively Using the Battery Pack Always use a FOMA designated Battery pack in order to get the most out of your FOMA handset. 1Life of Battery Pack
The Battery pack is an expendable item. No matter how you charge it, the operation time per use gradually decreases. The life of the Battery pack will have expired when the operation time per use is approximately halved compared to the original operation time (The normal life of the Battery pack is approximately 1 year, however, it is generally shorter depending on the frequency of use). In order to conserve the environment, please take the old batteries to NTT DoCoMo or to a reseller, recycle cooperative. 1Avoid charging for long hours (a few days) without turning the power off.
When the FOMA handset is turned on and neglected for long hours while being charged, the Battery pack continues to supply power to the FOMA handset after charging is complete. The FOMA handset can hence be used for a shorter period of time compared to use immediately after charging is complete, causing the battery alarm to set off momentarily. Properly charge the battery when this happens. Take out the FOMA handset from the AC adapter (or the Desktop holder) and set it again when recharging. 1Estimated battery usage duration The battery usage duration varies depending on the usage environment and the degradation of the battery. Continuous standby duration Motionless: Approx. 200 hours In motion: Approx. 110 hours Continuous call duration Voice call: Approx. 120 minutes Video call: Approx. XXX minutes
Continuous call duration is an estimated call duration in a location where radio waves can be transmitted normally.
Continuous standby duration is an estimated standby duration in a location where radio waves can be transmitted normally. The standby duration can be halved depending on charge level of battery, function settings, surrounding environments such as temperature, radio wave conditions of location (out of range, weak signals), etc. The call (or data transmission)/standby time is shortened when connecting to the Internet. The call (or data transmission)/standby time is also shortened when composing emails or launching Java applications.
Continuous standby duration during motionless state is an estimated standby duration in a motionless location where radio waves can be transmitted normally.
Continuous standby duration in motion is an estimated standby duration in a location where radio waves can be transmitted normally and a combination of "Motionless" "In motion" "Out of range" states take turn.
The call (or data transmission)/standby time is shortened when the multiaccess function is enabled or when the camera is used. 1Estimated charge time of Battery pack AC adapter XXX Approx. XXX minutes
The estimated charge time is the period of time needed to charge the FOMA handset while turned off and when Battery pack is empty. The charge time is longer when charged with the FOMA handset turned on. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 53 00M1000EN.book 54 Charging the Battery Pack At the time of purchase, your Battery pack is not charged sufficiently. Always charge using the accompanying AC adapter.
The Battery pack cannot be charged on its own. Always insert the Battery pack to the FOMA handset before charging.
When charged with the FOMA handset turned on, you can make or receive calls. This, however, extends the charge time.
Even when the FOMA handset is turned off, a corresponding screen notifying the battery charge is displayed on the display.
When charging is complete, an alarm is set off notifying the completion of battery charge. Using the AC adapter to charge aOpen the interface cap of the external interface on your FOMA handset bPlug in the connector of the AC adapter to the external interface of your FOMA handset cPlug the power plug of the AC adapter to the outlet The charge start tone is sounded and the charge is started.
While charging, the icon on the status bar is changed to $$. When charging is complete, the icon on the status bar is reverted to $$.
When charged with the power turned off, a red status LED illuminates. When charging is complete, a charge end tone is sounded and a green status LED illuminates. 3 P34 dWhen charging is complete, unplug the AC adapter from the outlet and detach the connector from the FOMA handset by pressing the release button eClose the interface cap of the external interface on your FOMA handset Illustration B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 54 00M1000EN.book 55 Using the Desktop Holder to Charge By combining the AC adapter with the Desktop holder, you can charge without opening the terminal cap of the FOMA handset.
For more information, refer to the Desktop holder manual. aConnect the AC adapter connector to the Desktop holder bPlug the AC adapter to the outlet cAttach the FOMA handset to the Desktop holder The charge start tone is sounded and charging begins.
While charging, the icon on the status bar changes to $$. When charging is complete, the charge end tone is sounded and the status bar icon is reverted to $$.
When charged with the power turned off, a red status LED illuminates. When charging is complete, a charge end tone is sounded and a green status LED illuminates. 3 P34 dWhen charging is complete, detach the FOMA handset from the Desktop holder. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t Illustration Battery Status Checking the Battery Status An icon showing the battery status is always displayed on the status bar.
Use the battery level sign as the battery status indicator.
$$
$$
$$
$$
: Full
: Falling
: Low
: Empty Charging recommended. 55 00M1000EN.book 56 Using the Screen to Check The battery level can be displayed in text and checked. a Tap $$ on the status bar
: Full High Medium : Falling Low None
: Low
: Empty Charging recommended. When Battery Runs Out The battery level warning screen is displayed and the out-of-
battery alarm is set off.
Tap [Continue] to close the battery level warning screen. NOTE
You will be notified via vibration when the alert mode is set to Vibrate. The out-of-battery alarm is not set off when set to Silent. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 56 00M1000EN.book 57 Power ON/OFF Turning the Power On/Off
Perform initialization when using for the first time. 3 P58
Hold the FOMA handset when turning the power on/off. Turning the Power On a Slide p down for 1+ second(s) Illuminates status LED and displays launch screen after sounding the start tone. Displays Home screen when the UIM is verified.
Move to an appropriate location when the icon ($$) indicating the signal level is not displayed. Insert the correct FOMA card when the network status icon is either $$ red or $$ gray. 3 P41
Displays PIN1 code entry screen when setup is configured to enter PIN1 code. 3 P150 Home screen Turning the Power Off a Slide p down for 1+ second(s) Displays end screen and turns the power off after sounding the end tone. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 57 00M1000EN.book 58 Initialization Setting Up the Handset for the First Time When turning the FOMA handset on for the first time, the initialization screen is displayed. In the initialization screen, you can adjust the tapping position and sensing position of the touch screen as well as set up the date and time. a Turning the power of your FOMA handset on
How to turn power on 3 P57 b Tap [Restart]
Restarts the FOMA handset to automatically perform language setup, and displays the tap position adjust screen on the touch screen. c Adjusting the tap position of touch screen
How to adjust 3 P134 d Set up date and time
How to set up 3 P59 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 58 00M1000EN.book 59 Language Selection Switching Languages Displayed on Screen Default setting Japanese You can change the screen language into one of preinstalled languages in your FOMA handset.
English and Japanese are installed in your FOMA handset by default. You can set other languages by installing the language data compatible with the FOMA handset. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap
(General) tab y Language Selection tab on the Control panel screen b Tap (Select language) and select the language c Tap [Done]
d Tap (Yes) on the Restart handset screen Your FOMA handset restarts with the selected language set.
Tap [No] to cancel the language setting. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 59 00M1000EN.book 60 Date and time setup Adjusting the Date and Time You can set up the date and time.
When turning the FOMA handset on for the first time, the initialization screen is displayed. In the initialization screen, you can set up the date and time. 3 P58 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap General tab y Date and time on the Control panel screen b Tap Date field Year Month Date c Tap Year $$ y $$ and select year to set up
You can also tap $$$$ on either side of the year to switch the year. d Tap month and select month to set up
You can also tap $$$$ on either side of the month to switch the month. e Tap date to set up B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 60 00M1000EN.book 61 f Tap Time field to set up time Tap to enlarge size of digit. Tap to switch between (am) and (pm). Tap to reduce size of digit. g Tap $$
h Tap [Done]
Date and time are set up. 1When setting Summer time zones You can select the zones to change to Summertime a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap General tab y Date and time on the Control Panel screen. Tap [Summer time] on the Date and time screen Europe : All countries in Europe are set to Summer time Northern zone
: All countries in the northern hemisphere are set to Summer time. Southern zone
: All countries in the southern hemisphere are set to Summer time. b Tap $$ on the zone to set up Summer time, and tap [Done]
Transmission Mode You can switch between transmission modes within the following networks by utilizing the dual system of your FOMA handset. W-CDMA mode : Available for domestic use within the FOMA network, or in some parts of Asia. GSM mode
: Available for use in Europe or Asia by utilizing the International Roaming service Your FOMA handset is also compatible with the Wireless LAN. You can connect to the Internet via the Wireless LAN.
You can only use Wireless LAN when the UIM is not attached.
Switch between networks if you are not selected to be in the desired network. 3 P515
Wireless LAN needs to be set up in advance. 3 P392 B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 61 00M1000EN.book 62
You need to apply to WORLD WING (DoCoMo International Roaming Service) when using the FOMA handset overseas. For more information, contact a General Inquiries outlet listed in the back side of this manual. B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t Caller ID Notifying Your Phone Number to the other party You can choose to display your phone number (Caller ID) to the handset of the other party when calling.
You can use this feature only when the handset of the other party is a digital terminal and capable of displaying Caller ID.
Caller ID is your personal information. Pay attention when notifying your Caller ID to others.
You cannot display Caller ID information when outside the service area or out of range. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Phone y Caller ID on the Menu bar Always Hide : Your Caller ID is hidden. Always Display
: Your Caller ID is displayed. b Tap Always Hide/Always Display and input network authentication number from the network authentication number screen y tap
[Done]
Displays a message notifying that your Caller ID has been set to display.
Network authentication number 3 P146 c Tap [Done]
NOTE
You can also choose to display or hide your Caller ID for each call that you make. 3 P71
When you hear a guidance requesting you to send your Caller ID while making a call, set up to display your Caller ID and then call again. 62 00M1000EN.book 63 Verify Setup a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Phone y Caller ID y Check status on the Menu bar Displays setup details. b Tap [Done]
Phone Number Display Verifying Your Own Phone Number You can display and verify the phone number of your FOMA handset. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Phone y My Line on the Menu bar Displays the phone number. b Tap [Done]
B e f o r e U s i n g t h e H a n d s e t 63 00M1000EN.book 64 00M1000EN.book 65 Making/Answering Calls 1Making Voice Calls Making a Voice Call . 66 Redialing Phone Numbers You Have Dialed <Redial>. 68 Showing/Hiding Caller ID per Call <186/184> . 70 Sending Tone Signals (DTMF) Quickly <Pause/Wait> . 72 Using International Calls <WORLD CALL>. 73 Talking without Holding the Handset while Driving <In-Car Handsfree>. 74 Setting In-Car Handsfree Operation Features . 74 1Answering Voice Calls Answering a Voice Call . 75 Using Answered Call History <Answered Call History> . 77 Adjusting Earpiece Volume during a Call <Earpiece Volume> . 77 1When You Are Unable to Answer Calls Rejecting Incoming Calls while Driving <Drive Mode> . 78 Checking Missed Calls <Missed Calls> . 79 65 00M1000EN.book 66 Making a Voice Call You can make a voice call with your FOMA handset.
You cannot make calls to internal phones and other phones that do not support the entry of area codes from your FOMA handset. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar The following operations can be performed.
[0]~[9], [4], [#]
[$$]
: Enter a phone number.
: Deletes from the last digit entered. Pointing for 1+
seconds deletes all the digits entered.
[History] : Displays Redial/Answered call history. 3P69, P78, P81 Phone number entry screen b Enter the phone number including the area code Tap the key on the phone number entry screen to vibrate your FOMA handset.
You can enter a pause ([P]), wait ([W]), [+], [#] and [*]. 3P73 1To make calls to a fixed line Area code - city code - subscriber number
Always include the area code even when you are dialing within the same area. 1To make calls to a mobile phone 090-XXXX-XXXX 080-XXXX-XXXX 1To make calls to a PHS 070-XXXX-XXXX c Tap [$$]
You will hear the dial tone and then the call tone. 1If you hear the busy tone The other party is busy. Press e and wait a while before dialing again. 1If you hear a message that your call cannot be connected The other party's mobile phone or PHS is turned off or in an area with no radio waves. Press e and wait a while before dialing again. 1If you hear a message requesting your Caller ID Press e to turn Set caller ID on and then dial again. 3P62
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 66 00M1000EN.book 67 d Start talking Displays Call Duration. The following operations can be performed.
[Mute]/[Unmute]
: Tap to switch between Mute/Unmute. When Mute is set, the person on the other end cannot hear your voice, but you can hear the other person's voice.
[$$]/[$$]
: Tap to set/cancel Touch screen Lock. When Touch screen Lock is set, you can tap [$$] only.
[Hold]/[Resume]
: Tap to set/cancel On-hold. While a call is on hold, you cannot set/cancel Mute.
[$$ Keypad] : Displays the phone number entry screen. s
: Press to set/cancel Speakerphone. Talking screen e Press e to end the call The call ends. 1Menu Bar From the Menu bar on the Phone number entry/Talking screen, tap Phone or Settings to display the following items:
Phone Settings My line(s) . P63 Voicemail . P366 Caller ID . P62, P71 Nuisance Calls . P371 Additional Service. P376 Copy number . P482 Add to Contacts* . P99 Paste* . P483 Call control . P70, P156, P368, P370, P372, P375 Call tracking . P128, P135, P347 Display . P68, P71, P95, P139 Guidance . P374 Network . P373, P515 Roaming . P516 Security . P150, P158 Tones . P122, P127, P160
: Not displayed while displaying the Talking screen.
*
Some items cannot be performed depending on operations. NOTE
Pressing e in idle state also displays the Phone number entry screen.
If a voice call fails, tap [$$ Retry] to redial the call. If the caller is stored as a contact, the caller's name and still picture (if included when you added the contact) is displayed on the Talking screen. Tap [$$] to display the caller's contact information.
When you end a call, [$$ Redial] is displayed on the screen. Tap [$$] to redial the call.
You can make calls with a Bluetooth headset.
You can change the design of the Phone number entry screen. 3P139
You can set your FOMA handset not to display Call Duration on the Talking screen. 3P135
You can sound the Audible timer to inform yourself the call duration lapsed. 3P128
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 67 00M1000EN.book 68 Auto-Locking the Touch Screen before Talking You can set your phone to automatically lock the touch screen when the Talking screen is displayed so that the touch screen does not unintentionally operate during a call. a On the Phone number entry screen, tap Settings y Show on the Menu bar
How to operate 3P66
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s b Tap $$ of Auto touch screen lock
Tap $$ again to cancel Auto touch screen lock. c Tap [Done]
Auto touch screen lock is set. Redial Redialing Phone Numbers You Have Dialed Your FOMA handset stores a history of dialed phone numbers to enable you to check or redial from Redial call list. You can also check dialed phone numbers and names if you have stored the callers as contacts.
Up to 100 phone numbers including the numbers in Answered and Missed calls can be stored.
If the date and time are set in Set date and time, the date and time of redial will also be stored. 3P59 a Press c in idle state, and tap the Call history tab in the Call history screen
: Shows that you have made a video call.
$$
[$$ Keypad]
: Displays the phone number entry screen. 3P66 Date and time you have dialed 68 00M1000EN.book 69 b Tap the number to redial The following operations can be performed. Voice Dial Video Call Details Send text message
: Makes a voice call.
: Makes a video call.
: Displays the details of a redial.
: Composes and sends an SMS (Short Message Service) message. 3P261 Add to Contacts
: Stores a phone number to Contacts. 3P99 Go to Contact : If the number is stored as a contact, you can display the contact information. c Tap Voice Dial/Video Call A call is made in the selected mode. NOTE
In Step 2, press 7 to select a number then press c to redial in the same mode as the selected redial call mode (voice call/video call). To change the call mode, press 7 to select a number, and then press 5. On the Phone number entry screen, select the call mode and make a call. 3P72 If a voice call fails (busy or not answered), tap [$$ Retry] to redial.
Press c twice in idle state to redial the last call dialed (Quick Redial).
When the phone numbers stored in Redial exceed 100, the oldest number is automatically deleted.
You can set your FOMA handset not to display the date and time of redial. 3P71
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s Clearing Call History You can use this function to delete the entire redial history.
This also deletes the calls in Answered and Missed call history. a Press c in idle state, and tap Phone y Clear call history on the Menu bar in the Call history screen The entire history is deleted. Automatic Redial Using Automatic Redial Default setting Automatic Redial: $$ (OFF) You can set your FOMA handset to automatically redial failed voice calls (busy or not answered). a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar and tap Settings y Call control in the Menu bar, and then tap the Basic tab in the Call control screen b Tap $$ of Auto Redial
Tap $$ again to cancel Auto Redial. 69 00M1000EN.book 70 c Tap [Done]
Auto Redial is set. Showing Date and Time Data of Call History Default setting Show time: $$(ON) Show date: $$ (ON) You can use this function to display the date and time of calls you have dialed when you view Redial. You can display one or the other of the date and time.
This also displays the date and time of calls in Answered and Missed call history in a similar manner. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Show on the Menu bar
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s b Tap $$ of the item to display Show time: Shows the time you have dialed. Show date: Shows the date you have dialed.
Tap $$ again to cancel the settings. c Tap [Done]
The date and/or time will be displayed. 186/184 Showing/Hiding Caller ID per Call You can select to notify or hide your phone number (Caller ID) to the other party for each call.
This function works when the intended party's phone is a digital handset and able to display the Caller ID.
Your phone number is valuable information, so take extra care when notifying your number.
To notify your Caller ID, use any of the following:
Operation Select this option from the Menu before dialing Prefix 186/184 to a phone number before dialing Set this function in advance by using the network services Reference P72 P72 P62 70 00M1000EN.book 71 Prefixing 186/184 to a Phone Number You can select to notify or hide your Caller ID to the other party by prefixing a specific number to the phone number to call. 1To show the Caller ID Enter 186 + the other party's phone number, and tap [$$]
Tap [$$] to make a video call. 1To hide the Caller ID Enter 184 + the other party's phone number, and tap [$$]
Tap [$$] to make a video call. NOTE
When you hear a message requesting your Caller ID upon dialing, set your FOMA handset to show your Instead of "186/184", entering "*31#/#31#" also shows/hides the Caller ID. Caller ID and redial. Showing/Hiding Caller ID when Dialing Enter the phone number first, and then set your FOMA handset to show/hide your Caller ID. You can also set this option by displaying a phone number from Redial, Answered or Contacts. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and enter a phone number b On the Menu bar, tap Phone y Caller ID y Hide Next/Show Next Hide Next
: Hides your Caller ID. Show Next : Shows your Caller ID. c Tap [$$]
A call is made.
Tap [$$] to make a video call.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 71
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 00M1000EN.book 72 Pause/Wait Sending Tone Signals (DTMF) Quickly By suffixing "P" or "W" and digits to a phone number, you can send subsequent numbers [P] or
[W] as tone signals (DTMF). a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and enter a phone number and tone signals
Point [*] to insert "P".
Point [#] to insert "W". b Tap [$$]
A call is made to the entered phone number. 1When "P" is inserted When the call is connected, the screen shown on the left is displayed. When the call is connected and after a lapse of 3 seconds, the tone signals following [P] are sent automatically.
Tap [Cancel] to stop sending the tone signals. 1When "W" is inserted When the call is connected, the screen shown on the left is displayed. Tap [Continue] to send the tone signals.
Tap [Cancel] to stop sending the tone signals. 72 00M1000EN.book 73 NOTE
To send tone signals during a call, tap [## Keypad] to display the Phone number entry screen and tap the numbers to send. The numbers you have tapped are sent directly as tone signals. Tap [## Active] to return to the Talking screen.
Some devices on the recipient side cannot receive tone signals.
You can also send tone signals during a video call. 3P89 WORLD CALL Using International Calls DoCoMo International Call Service "WORLD CALL"
This international call service is available for DoCoMo mobile phones. 1How to make calls Enter 009130 + 010 + Country code + Area code + phone number, and then tap [$$]
* You can store the procedure above in Contacts of your FOMA handset.
* When the area code begins with "0", omit it when dialing. (However, include "0" to call fixed lines in Italy.)
You can call approximately 220 countries and regions.
The "WORLD CALL" charges are added to your monthly FOMA bill.
No subscription/monthly fees are needed.
* You need not to subscribe this service if you are signed up for the FOMA service.
Changes in international call dialing procedure
"MY LINE" service is not applicable to mobile phone communications, including WORLD CALL service. Along with the introduction of "MY LINE" service, the dialing procedure for international communications using a mobile phone has been changed. Consequently, note that the previous dialing procedure (without the prefix "010") can no longer be used.
For more information, please contact "General contact" on the back of this manual.
* When using international carriers other than DoCoMo, please contact each of the carriers.
If you are using a specific foreign 3G mobile phone*1, International Video Call is available by dialing in the video call mode after following the dialing procedure described above* 2.
*1
: As of XX, 2004, you can connect to Hutchison 3G UK (Great Britain) or Hutchison 3G HK (Hong Kong).
*2
: You may not be able to connect, or you may see distorted images sent from the intended party on your FOMA handset depending on the connected end of the international video call line.
*1/2 : For details, visit the DoCoMo website.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 73
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 00M1000EN.book 74 In-Car Handsfree Talking without Holding the Handset while Driving By connecting a commercially available in-car handsfree device to your FOMA, you can make or answer calls without holding the handset. To operate in-car handsfree devices, see the operation manual for each devices.
When making or answering video calls by using an in-car handsfree device, images cannot be sent to the intended party. Setting In-Car Handsfree Operation Features Default setting Auto answer: OFF Power-Off time: 15 minutes Charge time: OFF Backlight on:## (ON) You can set how your FOMA handset functions when In-Car Handsfree feature is ON such as launching the Auto answer or Power saving mode. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab y Car settings tab on the Control panel screen The following settings can be configured. Auto answer: Selects duration to automatically answer calls. Power-Off time
: Selects duration to activate Power saving mode. Charge time : Selects the charge time. Backlight on: Sets the FOMA handset to always illuminate the backlight. b Tap Auto answer and select the option
Tap OFF not to automatically answer calls. c Tap Power-Off time and select the option
Tap Continuous not to activate Power saving mode. d Tap Charge time and select the option
Tap Full charge to fully charge the battery. e Tap $$ of Backlight on
Tap $$ again to cancel the illumination of backlight. f Tap [Done]
Car settings are set. 74 00M1000EN.book 75 Answering a Voice Call You can answer a call with your FOMA handset. a Receive a call The FOMA handset rings and the Status LED blinks.
You can set your FOMA handset to vibrate instead of playing a ring tone. 3P126 b Tap [Answer]
The call is connected.
You can perform the same operations as Step 4 in "Making a If you tap [Reject], the incoming call is disconnected. Voice Call".
Press u/d to stop the ring tone. c Press e to end the call The call ends. NOTE
You can automatically forward incoming calls to the Voice Mail Center during a call. 3P375
You can answer a call with a Bluetooth headset.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 75
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 00M1000EN.book 76 Displaying Incoming Calls Display for incoming calls varies depending on the dialing settings of the caller or your FOMA handset's settings. 1When the other party's Caller ID is sent The caller's phone number appears on the display. If you have stored the caller as a contact, the caller's name and still picture
(if included when you added the contact) are also displayed. 1When the other party's Caller ID is not sent The reason for hiding Caller ID is displayed on the display. 3P159 NOTE
If you subscribe to and set up the Call Waiting Service, you will hear beeps (call waiting ring tone) when another call is received during a call. In this situation, you can switch to the other call by any of the following:
- Put your current call on hold and take the incoming call.
- Reject the incoming call. Incoming video calls during a voice call are rejected and recorded in Answered call history.
You cannot make calls from internal phones and other phones that do not support the entry of area codes to FOMA handsets. 76 00M1000EN.book 77 Answered Call History Using Answered Call History The FOMA handset records information on received calls in Answered. You can check the callers' phone numbers and names if you have stored the callers as contacts.
Up to 100 phone numbers including the numbers in Redial and Missed can be stored.
If the date and time are set in Set date and time, the date and time of Answered will also be stored. 3P59 a Press c in idle state, and tap the Answered tab in the Call history screen
: Shows that you have received a video call.
$$
[$$ Keypad] : Displays the phone number entry screen. 3P66 If the caller has sent the Caller ID, the phone number is displayed. If you have stored the caller as a contact, the caller's name is also displayed.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s Received date NOTE
As with Redial, you can also make calls, send messages as well as store callers as contacts from Answered. 3P69
When the phone numbers stored in Answered exceed 100, the oldest number is automatically deleted.
Clearing Call History 3P70 Earpiece Volume Adjusting Earpiece Volume during a Call You can adjust the earpiece volume to any of 8 levels.
You cannot adjust the volume in idle state. a Press u or d during talking
Press u to raise the volume.
Press d to lower the volume.
Press u/d continuosly to change the volume by multiple levels. 77 00M1000EN.book 78 Drive Mode Rejecting Incoming Calls while Driving Drive Mode is an automatic answering service to encourage safe driving. When Drive Mode is ON, callers will hear a message that you are unable to answer calls while driving, and be disconnected.
You can set/cancel Drive Mode only in idle state.
You can set/cancel Drive Mode even when you are in out of the service area.
You can make calls even during Drive Mode. a Press a for 1+ seconds during the Home screen is displayed Drive Mode is set.
$$ is displayed on the Status bar. 1To cancel Drive Mode Press a for 1+ seconds during the Home screen is displayed. Drive Mode is canceled. 1Incoming calls during Drive Mode The FOMA handset does not ring while incoming voice/video calls are received. Incoming calls are recorded in Answered and the Missed call screen is displayed. 3P82 Callers will hear a message that you are unable to answer while driving, and be disconnected. However when the power is off or when you are in out of the service area, callers will hear the out of service area message instead of Drive mode guidance. 1Relationship between incoming calls during Drive Mode and network services Network Service Response to Incoming Voice Calls Response to Incoming Video Calls Voice Mail Service Call Forwarding Service Nuisance Call Blocking Service Caller ID Display Request Service Plays the drive mode guidance to the caller, and forwards to the Voice Mail Center. If you set the voicemail ringing time to
"0 sec.", no message is played. The Drive Mode message is displayed on the caller's phone and the call is disconnected. Plays the drive mode guidance to the caller, and forwards the call to the forwarding number. If you set the Call Forwarding ringing time to "0 sec.", no message is played. Forwards the call to the forwarding number. However, you cannot forward incoming video calls to a forwarding destination incompatible with the 3G-
324M standard. 3P86 Plays the guidance to the caller that the call cannot be accepted when a call is received from a phone number stored in the Call Reject List. Plays the guidance requesting the Caller ID to be sent if the caller sends no Caller ID, and the call is disconnected. The Drive Mode message is displayed on the caller's phone, and the call is and disconnected. The Drive Mode message is displayed on the caller's phone, and the call is disconnected.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 78 00M1000EN.book 79 NOTE
To set Drive Mode from screens other than the Home screen, tap $$ on the Status bar to display the Alert Mode screen. Tap $$ y [OK] on the Drive Mode tab. Missed Calls Checking Missed Calls The FOMA handset records information on missed calls in Missed. You can check the callers'
phone numbers and names if you have stored the callers as contacts.
Up to 100 phone numbers including the numbers in Redial and Answered can be stored.
If the date and time are set in Set date and time, the date and time of missed calls will also be stored. 3P59 a Press c in idle state, and tap the Missed tab in the Call history screen
$$
[$$ Keypad] : The phone number entry screen is displayed.
: Shows that you have received a video call. 3P66
If the caller has sent the Caller ID, the phone number of the caller is displayed. If you have stored the caller as a contact, the caller's name is also displayed. Received date and time NOTE
As with Redial, you can also make calls, send messages as well as store callers as contacts from Missed. 3P69
When the phone numbers stored in Missed exceed 100, the oldest number is automatically deleted.
Clearing Call History 3P70
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 79
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 00M1000EN.book 80 Missed Calls while in Idle State When you were unable to answer an incoming call, the Missed call screen is displayed. From the Missed call screen, you can easily make a call to the caller and can display the Missed call history. Voice call Video call Multiple missed calls The following operations can be performed.
[Call]
: Makes a voice call to the caller.
[Video call] : Makes a video call to the caller.
[Yes]
: Displays the Missed call history.
[No]
: Closes the Missed call screen.
If the caller has sent the Caller ID, the phone number is displayed. If you have stored the caller as a contact, the caller's name is also displayed. Showing Missed Calls Received when Ringless Incoming Call Time is Set Default setting Ringless missed call display: $$ (OFF) When the ringless incoming call time is set, you can set your FOMA handset to display missed calls with no arrival call act in Missed.
You can set this function only when the ringless incoming call time is set. 3P160 a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Tones on the Menu bar 80 00M1000EN.book 81 b Tap $$ of Ringless missed call display
Tap $$ again to cancel the settings. c Tap [Done]
Ringless missed call display is set.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 81 00M1000EN.book 82 00M1000EN.book 83 Making/Answering Video Calls About Video Calls . 84 Making a Video Call. 84 Answering a Video Call. 87 Setting an Outgoing Image. 89 Setting Images Displayed during a Video Call . 92 Changing Video Call Settings . 93 83 00M1000EN.book 84 About Video Calls The video call function is available between handsets supporting DoCoMo video calls. The camera function enables you to talk while viewing each other on display or sending an image of the surrounding scenery.
DoCoMo video phones conform to 3G-324M*1, which is the international standard specified by 3GPP*2. You cannot connect your FOMA handset to phones that are employing different specifications.
*1:
*2:
3G-324M The international standard for the third-generation mobile video phones. 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) The regional standards organization for developing common technological specifications for the third-generation mobile telecommunication system (IMT-2000). Display during Video Calls
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s abcdefghij Indication Icon Description a Main window b Child window c Other party's phone number/
name d Duration e Speakerphone f Mute g Camera image h Switch cameras i Keypad j Keypad for DTMF
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
Displays the remote camera image. Displays the local camera image. Displays the phone number if the other party has sent the Caller ID. If you have stored the caller as a contact, the other party's name is also displayed. Displays Call duration. 3 P135 Displays Settings for the speakerphone. 3 P87 Displays Settings for Mute. 3 P87 Displays Settings for the camera image. 3 P91 Switches between the Front-Camera and Rear-Camera. 3 P91 Displays the phone number entry screen. 3 P66 Displays the DTMF entry screen. 3 P89 Making a Video Call You can make a video call with your FOMA handset.
To view each other while talking, use the speakerphone function or earphone/microphone set with a switch. 3 P87, P358
You can make international video calls by using the DoCoMo's international call service "WORLD CALL". 3 P74 a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar Displays the phone number entry screen. 84 00M1000EN.book 85 b Enter the phone number including the area code c Tap [$$]
Digital communication charges are billed when Connecting is displayed. Video call engaged screen d Start talking The following operations can be performed.
[$$]/[$$]
: Every tapping swithes Mute and Unmute. When Mute is set, the person on the other end cannot hear your voice, but you can hear the other person's voice.
[$$]/[$$]
: Tap to send/cancel the camera image. 3 P91
: Tap to switch between the Front/Rear camera. 3 P91
[$$]
[$$ Keypad]
Video call talking screen
: Displays the phone number entry screen.
: Displays the DTMF entry screen. 3 P89
: Every pressing sets/cancels Speakerphone.
[$$]
s e Press e to end the call The call ends. 1Menu Bar From the Menu bar on the Phone number entry/Video call talking screen, tap Phone or Settings to display the following items:
Phone Settings My line . P63 Voicemail . P366 Caller ID . P62, P71 Nuisance Calls . P371 Additional Service. P376 Copy number . P482 Add to Contacts . P99 Paste . P483 Call control . P70, P156, P368, P370, P372, P375 Call tracking . P128, P135, P347 Show . P68, P71, P95, P139 Guidance . P374 Network . P373, P515 Roaming . P516 Security . P150, P158 Tones . P122, P127, P160 Mirroring off . P94
* Not shown while displaying the Talking screen.
Some items cannot be performed depending on the operations.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 85 00M1000EN.book 86 NOTE
When you make a video call by setting Camera off, you will still be charged for a video call.
If a video call fails, the following messages are displayed on the display. However, depending on the other party's phone model and subscription to network services the displayed message may not correspond to the actual conditions. Message Reason The number you have dialed is not in service. Check the number and try again. You have dialed a phone number not in use. The number you have dialed is busy. The line is currently engaged. The number you have dialed is in area with no radio wave or the phone may be switched off. The number you have dialed is in an area with no radio wave or the power may be turned off. Connection failed. Reasons other than the above.
Video calls fail when you dial to phones that do not support the video call function, are in area with no radio wave, or are switched off. If you make a video call to phones that do not support the video call function, the call will be cut off and a "Connection Failed" message is displayed. Tap [$$ Voice] to redial as a voice call. However, this redialing may not work if you call an ISDN synchronous 64K or PIAFS access point or an ISDN video phone incompatible with 3G-324M (as of XX, 2004), or if you dial a wrong number. Note that you may be charged for the call. If you dial 110, 119, or 118 using the video call function, the call will automatically be connected as a voice call.
During a video call, you cannot make another voice/video call.
During a video call, incoming call/video calls are rejected, and the Missed call screen is displayed when the
call ends. If you receive an SMS/email message during a video call, the FOMA handset rings and displays an icon ($$
etc.) on the Status bar. Tap the icon to check the message while talking. However, you cannot receive a message sent via data communication. 3 P316
When talking with the speakerphone, always keep the FOMA handset away from your ear. Sending Tone Signals (DTMF) You can send tone signals (DTMF) during a video call. a Tap [$$] during talking Displays the DTMF entry screen. b Tap the numbers to send The numbers you tapped are sent as tone signals.
Tap [$$] to close the DTMF entry screen.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 86 00M1000EN.book 87 NOTE
Some devices on the recipient side cannot receive tone signals. Redialing Failed Video Calls as Voice Calls If a video call fails due to a lack of video call compatibility at the recipient side, you can redial as a voice call. a The video call is disconnected The connection failed screen b Tap [$$ Voice]
The FOMA handset redials as a voice call.
Tap [Cancel] to stop redialing. Answering a Video Call You can receive an incoming video call. a A video call is received The FOMA handset rings and the Status LED flashes.
You can set your FOMA handset to vibrate instead of playing a ring tone. 3 P126
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 87 00M1000EN.book 88 b Tap [Answer]
The call is connected.
Tap [Privacy] to prevent from sending your image to the other party.
Tap [Reject] to reject the incoming call.
During talking, you can perform the same operations as Step 4 in "Making a Video Call". c Press e to end the call The call ends. NOTE
The Voice Mail Service does not take incoming video calls. Incoming video calls are received on your handset, even when the Voice Mail Service has been set. 3 P366
Even if the Call Forwarding Service is set, incoming video calls cannot be forwarded to phones incompatible with the 3G-324M standard. Check the specifications of the device at the forwarding destination before setting up the forwarding settings. 3 P370 If a video call is received from a phone number stored in the Nuisance Calls Blocking Service, the call is disconnected without playing the incoming call reject message .3 P371
The Caller ID Display Request Service does not cover video calls. The FOMA handset does not play the Caller ID request message to incoming video calls with no Caller ID. 3 P372
When a video call is received while an earphone/microphone set with a switch is connected, you can answer the call by pressing the earphone switch with the camera image turned OFF. 3 P358
During a video call, incoming call/video calls are rejected and are not stored in answered call history.
If you receive an SMS/email message during a video call, the FOMA handset rings and displays an icon ($$
etc.) on the Status bar. Tap the icon to check the message while talking. However, you cannot receive a message sent via data communication. 3 P316
When talking with the speakerphone function, always keep the FOMA handset away from your ear.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 88 00M1000EN.book 89 Setting an Outgoing Image You can change the settings for an outgoing image during a video call.
The modified settings are reverted to the default settings when the video call ends. Turning the Camera Image ON/OFF During a video call, you can set your FOMA handset to send or not to send the camera image. a Tap [$$] during talking Default setting ON The camera image is turned OFF.
Tap [$$] to turn the camera image ON. NOTE
You can receive video calls with the camera image turned OFF. 3 P90 Switching Cameras You can switch between the Front-Camera and Rear-Camera during talking. a Tap [$$] during talking The image of the Rear-Camera is sent.
Tap [$$] again to send the image of the Front-Camera. Default setting Front camera
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 89 00M1000EN.book 90 NOTE
You can set the default camera for video calls in advance. 3 P95
While using the Rear-Camera, you can zoom the camera image. 3 Below
While using the Front-Camera, you can turn Mirroring ON. 3 P94 Zooming the Camera Image You can enlarge the outgoing camera image during a video call.
You can control zooming in 3 levels.
This function is available only when using the Rear-Camera. a Press 7 during talking
Press 5 to switch the setting screens in order from Zoom 3 Brightness 3 Contrast. Press 5 to reverse the order.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i b Tap $$ or $$
Tap $$ to raise the zoom magnification.
Tap $$ to lower the zoom magnification. NOTE
The zoom magnification is retained until the call ends. Even if you switch cameras, the zoom magnification is retained. l l s 90 00M1000EN.book 91 Adjusting the Camera Image Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the outgoing camera image during a video call.
You can adjust in 5 levels. a Press 7 during talking
Press 4 to switch the setting screens in order from Zoom 3 Brightness 3 Contrast. Press 5 to reverse the order. b Tap $$ or $$
Tap $$ to darken the camera image.
Tap $$ to brighten the camera image. Adjusting the Camera Image Contrast You can adjust the contrast of the outgoing camera image during a video call.
You can adjust in 5 levels. a Press 7 during talking
Press 4 to switch the setting screens in order from Zoom 3 Brightness 3 Contrast. Press 5 to reverse the order. b Tap $$ or $$
Tap $$ to sharpen the contrast.
Tap $$ to blur the contrast.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 91 00M1000EN.book 92 Setting Images Displayed during a Video Call You can change the settings for images displayed on the FOMA handset during a video call.
The modified settings are reverted to default settings when the video call ends. Changing Image Display Default setting Main window: Other party's image Child window: Your image You can switch the screens between the main window (incoming image) and the child window
(outgoing image) during a call. a Tap the child window during talking The screens switch.
Tap the child window to switch the screens. Turning Mirroring OFF You can cancel the mirroring of the Front-Camera image.
This function is available only when using the Front-Camera. a Tap Settings y Mirroring OFF on the Menu bar during talking Default setting Mirroring ON Mirroring is canceled.
To set the mirroring, Tap Settings y Mirroring ON on the Menu bar.
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 92 00M1000EN.book 93 Changing Video Call Settings You can change the video call settings in idle state. Setting Default Camera for Video Calls Default setting Default camera for video calls: Front-Camera You can select either the Front-Camera or the Rear-Camera as the default camera when making/
answering video calls. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Show on the Menu bar b Tap $$ of Default camera for video call
Tap $$ of Front to use the Front-Camera.
Tap $$ of Rear to use the Rear-Camera. c Tap [Done]
The default camera is set. NOTE
Regardless of the settings of this function, you can switch between the Front-Camera and Rear-Camera during talking. 3 P91
/
M a k i n g A n s w e r i n g V d e o C a i l l s 93 00M1000EN.book 94 00M1000EN.book 95 Contact List Contact Lists Supported by FOMA Handset. 96 Storing Entries in FOMA Handset Contact List <Contact registration> . 97 Storing Entries in UIM Contact List <UIM contact registration>. 103 Storing Phone Numbers from Redial or Dialled List . 105 Using Contact List to Make Calls <Contact search> . 106 Making Changes to Contacts <Contact modification> . 110 Deleting Contacts <Contact deletion> . 112 Setting Owner Information . 113 Copying/Moving Contact Information . 114 Sending Contact Information . 116 Listing Phone Numbers . 118 95 11PHA_1col_EN.fm 96 Contact Lists Supported by FOMA Handset Two types of FOMA contact lists are available: FOMA handset contact list stored in the handset and UIM contact list stored in UIM. Information can be stored in each type of contact list as shown below. Information stored in the UIM contact list is also available when the UIM is inserted to another FOMA handset. Item Number of entries FOMA handset (Handset) contact list Depends on the memory available*2 Up to 50 UIM contact list Name First and last names stored separately First and last names stored together Furigana First and last names stored separately First and last names stored together I t e m s s t o r e d
*
1 Job title Phone number Phone number type Email address Email address type URL Ring tone settings Birthday Company information 3 *3 3 *3 1 *3 Company name, address, etc. can be stored Personal information Remarks Still image Address, etc. can be stored 1 1
*1:
*2:
*3:
Items that can be stored for a single contact. The maximum number of entries depends on the available FOMA handset memory. The number of items that can be stored for one contact with the default setting. The number of items depends on the change of type or addition of fields.3P101, P112 NOTE
It is recommended that you back up the information stored in the contact list by writing it down or using the TransFlash memory card. PC users can use the accompanying USB cable or Bluetooth to connect the FOMA handset with the PC to store information using the Desktop Suite or SyncML. 3 P526 Please be informed that DoCoMo will not be responsible for any loss of information stored in the contact list, etc.
When you switch to a new model, data saved in your FOMA handset may or may not be copied to the new model at DoCoMo information desk depending on the specification of the new model. C o n t a c t L i s t 96 00M1000EN.book 97 Contact registration Storing Entries in FOMA Handset Contact List Follow the steps below to store entries in the FOMA handset contact list. Enter name (last and first names) and furigana 3 P100 Enter job title 3 P100 Enter phone number and type 3 P101 Enter email address and type 3 P101 Enter URL 3 P101 Assign ring tone 3 P102 Enter the birthday 3 P102 Enter company and personal information 3 P102 Enter remarks 3 P103 Assign a still image 3 P103
Items to enter or the order of entry can be left to the user's option as required. Entries can be stored in the contact list at any time of the process by entering the necessary information and tapping $$. However, either the last or the first name must be entered to save any information in the contact list.
On how to enter characters, see "Text input". 3 P466 C o n t a c t L i s t 97 00M1000EN.book 98 Enter Name (Last and First Names) and Furigana Enter the last and first names and their furigana of the contact to store in the list a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar C o n t a c t L i s t 98 Contact list screen b Tap Contact list y New on the Menu bar
To specify a destination folder, tap All in the Menu bar and select the folder. When the folder has been selected, the contact data can be stored in the folder. 3 P303 Edit screen c Tap First name y Enter the first name y Check the furigana of the first name
Up to 16 double-byte or 32 single-byte characters can be entered for the first and last names combined.
When the first name has been entered, the Furigana field is automatically populated with a corresponding furigana. Tap Furigana to make any necessary correction.
Up to 32 single-byte characters can be entered for the furigana of the first and last names combined. d Tap Last name y Enter the last name y Check the furigana of the last name
Up to 16 double-byte or 32 single-byte characters can be entered for the first and last names combined.
When the last name has been entered, the Furigana field is automatically populated with a corresponding furigana. Tap Furigana to make any necessary correction.
Up to 32 single-byte characters can be entered for the furigana of the first and last names combined. 00M1000EN.book 99 Enter Job Title Enter the job title, job description, etc. of the contact to store in the list. e Tap Job title y Enter the job title
Up to 127 double- or single-byte characters can be entered. Enter Phone Number and Type f Tap $$ in the Phone field and select the type of the phone number Phone Phone (m) Phone (w) Phone (h) VideoPhone : Enter the phone number for video calls.
: No type is specified.
: Enter the mobile phone number.
: Enter the company phone number.
: Enter the home phone number.
The type can be changed to Email or Web to enter an email address or URL. g Tap Phone y Enter the phone number To store more addresses, repeat Steps 6 and 7.
Up to 26 digits can be entered.
Enter the phone number including the area code.
Pause ("P"), Wait ("W"), "+", "#" and "*" can be entered. 3 P73
Phone number fields can be added. 3 P112
A phone number can be specified as the preferred phone number. 3 P112 Enter Email Address and Type h Tap $$ in the Email field and select the type of email Email (m) Email (w) Email (h)
: enter the mobile phone email address.
: enter the company email address.
: enter the home email address.
The type can be changed to Phone or Web to enter a phone number or URL. i Tap Email y Enter the email address To store more addresses, repeat Steps 8 and 9.
Up to 50 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols in total can be entered.
Be sure to store full email addresses correctly including the domain names.
Email address fields can be added. 3 P112 Enter URL You can store URLs related to the contact such as company and personal website URLs. j Tap Web y Enter the URL
Up to 256 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols in total can be entered.
The type can be changed to Phone or Email by tapping $$ to enter a phone number or email address.
URL fields can be added. 3 P112 C o n t a c t L i s t 99 00M1000EN.book 100 Assign Ring Tone You can assign ring tones to play when calls or emails arrive from stored contacts. This allows you to find out who the callers or senders are without checking the display. k Tap Ring tone and select a ring tone
Tap $$ to play the selected tone, allowing you to check the tone. The ring tone does not play when the Manner or Drive Mode is active. Enter the Birthday l Tap $$ in the Birthday field C o n t a c t L i s t m Enter the birthday
How to operate 3 P59 Enter Company and Personal Information You can enter information on the contact such as the company name, address and home address. Separate fields are provided, allowing you to enter company and home information separately. n Tap the relevant field y Enter the information Company Postcode Region City Address Building P.O.B. Country
: Enter the company name.
: Enter the company or home postcode.
: Enter the name of the region where the company or home is located.
: Enter the name of the city where the company or home is located.
: Enter the company or home street address.
: Enter the name of the building where the company or home is located.
: Enter the company or home Post Office Box.
: Enter the name of the country where the company or home is located.
For any of the items, up to 127 double- or single-byte characters can be entered. 100 00M1000EN.book 101 Enter Remarks Remarks related to the contact can be entered. Remarks can be marked as Private. Private remarks are not included when you send contact information as an attachment to an email, or synchronize contact details with your PC. o Tap the $$ tab y Enter remarks p Tap $$ in Private The remarks are marked as Private. Assign a Still Image A still image of a stored contact can be set to appear on the Incoming screen when a call arrives from the contact. q Tap the $$ tab C o n t a c t L i s t 101 00M1000EN.book 102 r Assign a still image 1To select from stored still images a Tap $$
b Tap a still image y Tap [Select]
The assigned still image is displayed.
You can also select a folder by tapping Folder. 1To use the camera to take a still image to assign a Tap $$
The still image capture screen is displayed. b Take a picture The assigned still image is displayed.
How to operate 3 P169 1To replace/recapture/delete the assigned still image a Tap the specified still image Replace picture : Select from stored still images to replace Take picture Delete image with the assigned image.
: Recapture a still image.
: Delete the still image. b Tap the intended operation
Tap Replace picture to display the Select still image screen.
Tap Take picture to display the still image capturing screen.
Tap Delete image to return to the Image unassigned screen. s Tap $$
The contact is stored. C o n t a c t L i s t 102 00M1000EN.book 103 UIM contact registration Storing Entries in UIM Contact List Follow the steps below to store entries in the FOMA handset UIM contact list. Enter name and furigana 3 see below Enter phone number 3 P106 Enter email address 3 P106
Items to enter and the order of entry operations can be changed as required. Entries can be stored in the contact list at any time of the process by entering the necessary information and tapping $$. However, the name must be entered to save any information in the contact list. NOTE
On how to enter characters, see "Text input". 3 P466 Enter Name and Furigana Enter the name and furigana of the contact to store in the list. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap All y UIM on the Menu bar The UIM contact list screen is displayed.
If a folder other than All has been previously displayed, the contact list stored in that folder is displayed. 3 P303 b Tap Contact list y New on the Menu bar c Tap First name y Enter the name y Check the furigana of the name C o n t a c t L i s t 103 00M1000EN.book 104
Up to 10 double-byte characters or 21 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered for a name.
When the name has been entered, the Furigana field is automatically populated with a corresponding furigana. Tap Furigana to make any necessary correction.
Up to 12 double-byte characters or 25 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered for a furigana. Enter Phone Number Only one phone number can be stored per contact. d Tap Phone y Enter the phone number C o n t a c t L i s t
Up to 26 digits can be entered when a UIM (green) is used, and up to 20 digits can be entered when a UIM (blue) is used. 3 P51
Enter the phone number including the area code.
Pause ("P"), "+", "#" and "4" can be entered. 3 P73 Enter Email Address Only one email address can be stored per contact. e Tap Email y Enter the email address
Up to 50 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols in total can be entered.
Be sure to store full email addresses correctly including the domain names. 1Menu bar For the FOMA handset (Handset) contact list as well as the UIM contact list, tap Contacts or Edit on the Menu bar in the Edit screen to display the following items:
Contacts Edit New . P100, P105 Search . P108 Send as vCard . P117 Send as Text . P118 Set as owner card . P114 Delete contact . P113 Edit contact . P111 Copy contact to UIM . P115 Copy contact . P117 Cut . P482 Paste . P483 Add field. P112 Preferred phone number . P112 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P119
Some items may not be available depending on the operation.
The Menu bar on the Details screen shows similar items. 104 00M1000EN.book 105 Storing Phone Numbers from Redial or Dialled List Phone numbers recorded on the Redial, Dialled or Missed calls list can be stored in the contact list. Phone numbers being entered on the Enter phone number screen or email addresses of incoming emails can also be stored in the contact list.
<Example: To store from the Redial list>
a Press c while in idle state
Displaying the Enter phone number screen 3 P66
Displaying the Answered list 3 P78
Displaying the Missed calls list 3 P81
Displaying emails 3 P252 b Tap the contact to store c Tap Add to Contacts
On the Enter phone number screen, enter the phone number, and tap Phone y Add to Contacts on the Menu bar.
For an email, open the Email details screen, tap the email address y Tap Add to Contacts d Store in the contact list
How to operate 3 P99, P105 C o n t a c t L i s t 105 00M1000EN.book 106 Contact search Using Contact List to Make Calls Finding a Contact Based on the First Syllable Find the intended contact data based on the syllable set that contains the first syllables of the last names stored in the contact list. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar When a folder has been selected, the list of contact data stored in the folder is displayed. 3 P303 b Tap the tab of the intended syllable set The cursor moves to the contact data that contain the syllables in the tapped set as their first syllables of the last names. c Tap the intended contact data The contact data details screen is displayed. 3 P109
Pressing c makes a voice call to the first phone number stored.
To dial another number stored, select a number from the details screen. 3 P109 Searching by Entering a Keyword Simply entering a name, phone number, address, etc. stored in the contact list as a keyword allows you to find the intended data from the list. a Tap Contact list y Find on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100 C o n t a c t L i s t 106 00M1000EN.book 107 b Tap the keyword field y Enter a keyword
Up to 30 double- or single-byte characters can be entered.
For a keyword, only part of a text string of an item stored in the contact data can be entered to search the contact.
Tap $$ to display up to 5 keywords previously entered, from which you can make a selection. c Tap in all fields in Where?/$$ in in Names & Company y [Find]
Tap $$ in in all fields to search all item fields stored in the contact list.
Tap $$ in in Names & Company to search the name and company fields in the contact list. d Tap the intended contact data The contact data details screen is displayed. 3 P109
Pressing c makes a voice call to the first phone number stored.
To dial another number stored, select the number from the details screen. 3 P109 C o n t a c t L i s t 107 00M1000EN.book 108 Verifying Contact Information Information stored as contact data can be displayed for selecting phone numbers to make calls or sending emails. If a URL is stored, the corresponding Web page can be displayed. a Tap the contact data to display on the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100
Contact data stored in the UIM contact list are marked with $$
1FOMA handset (Handset) contact list details C o n t a c t L i s t Information screen Information screen
(continued) Remarks screen Still image screen Item/Icon Description a Name b Furigana c Job title d $$/$$
e Phone number and type f $$
g $$
h $$
108 The first and last names are displayed. Displays the Edit screen, allowing you to make corrections as required when tapped. 3 P100 The furigana of the first and last names are displayed. The job title is displayed. Indicates the type (land-line phone/mobile phone) of phone number. Makes a voice call when tapped. The phone number is displayed together with its type. Displays the Enter phone number screen populated with the selected phone number when tapped. 3 P66 Displays the Compose short message (SMS) screen with the selected phone number entered as the destination address when tapped. 3 P261 Makes a video call to the selected phone number when tapped. Displays the Create email screen with the selected email address entered as the destination address when tapped. 3 P235 00M1000EN.book 109 Item/Icon i Email address and type j Ring tone k Birthday Description The email address is displayed together with its type. Displays the Compose email screen with the selected email address entered as the destination address when tapped. 3 P235 Displays the ring tone to play when a call or email is received. The birthday is displayed. l Company/personal The company/personal information is displayed. information m Remarks n Still image Displays remarks. Displays the still image when a call is received. 1UIM contact list details screen Item/Icon Description a Name b Furigana c $$/$$
d Phone number e $$
f $$
g Email address The first and last names are displayed. The furigana of the first and last names are displayed. Indicates the type (land-line phone/mobile phone) of phone number. Makes a voice call when tapped. The phone number is displayed. Displays the Enter phone number screen populated with the selected phone number when tapped. 3 P66 Displays the Create short message (SMS) screen with the selected phone number entered as the destination address when tapped. 3 P261 Displays the Compose email screen with the selected email address entered as the destination address when tapped. 3 P235 The email address is displayed. Displays the Compose email screen with the selected email address entered as the destination address when tapped. 3 P235 C o n t a c t L i s t 109 00M1000EN.book 110 1Menu bar Tap Contacts or Edit on the Menu Bar in the contact list screen to display the following items:
Contacts Edit New . P100, P105 Find . P108 Delete All . P113 Copy All to UIM * . P116 Move All to UIM * . P116 Send this folder . P118 Send owner card . P114 View owner card. P114 Edit Undo delete . P113 Paste contact . P117 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P119
*: While the UIM folder is displayed, Copy All to Unfiled/Move All to Unfiled is displayed. 3 P116
Some items may not be available depending on the operation.
The Menu bar items on the details screen are identical to those on the Edit screen. 3 P106 NOTE
The items displayed on the contact data details screen correspond to the information stored. C o n t a c t L i s t Contact modification Making Changes to Contacts Changes can be made to the contact data stored. a Tap the contact data to correct on the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap Edit y Edit contact on the Menu bar
The Edit screen is displayed. c Tap the item to correct y Correct the information as required
Correct the items in the same way as storing. 3 P99, P105
Tap $$ to store the contact data and return to the contact list screen. 110 00M1000EN.book 111 Adding Phone Number/Email Address/URL Fields If all of the phone number, email address or URL fields have been used and you need more, new fields can be added. a Tap Edit y Add field on the Menu bar in the Edit screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap New field and select the type y Tap [Add]
A field is added on the Edit screen. The added field is populated with "(new field)". Specifying a Phone Number as the Preferred Phone Number Specify the phone number displayed on the contact list screen (preferred number). Once the preferred phone number has been specified, a call can be made to that number simply by displaying the contact list or contact data details screen and pressing c.
No preferred number can be specified if no phone number is entered.
You can set the preferred phone number to display on the contact list screen. 3 P119 a Tap Edit y Preferred phone number on the Menu bar in the Edit screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap Preferred phone number and select the phone number y Tap
[Done]
The preferred number is specified. C o n t a c t L i s t 111 00M1000EN.book 112 Contact deletion Deleting Contacts You can delete contact data stored in the contact list. Contact data in a folder can be deleted collectively. Deleting a single contact data Delete contact data by first displaying the data. a Tap the contact data to delete on the contact list screen, and tap Contact list y Delete contact on the Menu bar in the Edit screen Deletes the selected contact data.
How to operate 3 P100 C o n t a c t L i s t Deleting All Data Stored in a Folder You can collectively delete all contact data stored in a folder. a Tap All on the Menu bar in the contact list screen y tap the folder containing the contact data to delete The contact data list in the selected folder is displayed.
How to operate 3 P100
If a folder other than All has been previously displayed, the contact list stored in that folder is displayed. 3 P303 b Tap Contact list y Delete all on the Menu bar The Confirm delete all screen is displayed. c Tap [Yes]
All contact data in the selected folder are deleted.
Tap [No] to cancel deletion. Restoring Deleted Contact Data Deleted contact data can be restored.
Collectively deleted contact data in a folder cannot be restored. a Delete contact data
How to operate 3 see above b Tap Edit y Undo delete on the Menu bar in the contact list screen Restores the deleted contact data and displays them on the contact list screen. 112 00M1000EN.book 113 Setting Owner Information Specifying the contact data containing your personal information as the "owner information"
allows you to provide the other party with your information when you exchange contact information.
The owner information can be set to always accompany emails you send. 3 P260 a Tap the contact data to specify as the owner information on the contact list screen, and tap Contacts y Set as owner card on the Menu bar in the details screen The selected contact data are specified as the owner information.
How to operate 3 P100 Displaying Owner Information Check the contact data specified as the owner information. a Tap Contacts y View owner card on the Menu bar in the contact list Displays the details screen for the contact data specified as the owner information.
How to operate 3 P100 C o n t a c t L i s t Sending Owner Information You can send the contact data specified as the owner information via email or Bluetooth. a Tap Contacts y Send owner card on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap Send as and select the sending method on the Send as screen y Tap [Done]
: Attach the owner information to an email to send the information. Go to Step 3. Text message
: Insert the owner information in an SMS message to send the Bluetooth
: Send the owner information via Bluetooth. 3 P384 information. Go to Step 3. c Compose and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 113 00M1000EN.book 114 Copying/Moving Contact Information You can copy/move contact data stored in the contact list to a UIM or another folder. You can also copy/move contact data stored in a UIM to the FOMA handset. Copying from FOMA Handset to UIM You can copy the contact data being displayed to a UIM.
Only one phone number and one email address per contact data can be copied to the UIM contact list. a Tap the contact data to send on the contact list screen, and tap Edit y Copy contact to UIM on the Menu bar in the details screen
How to operate 3 P100 C o n t a c t L i s t b Tap Select name and select the name to copy c Tap Select furigana and select the furigana to copy d Tap Select phone number and select the phone number to copy
If no phone number is stored, Select phone number is not available for selection. e Tap Select email address and select the email address to copy
If no email address is stored, Select email address is not available for selection. f Tap [Done]
Copies contact data to the UIM contact list. 114 00M1000EN.book 115 Copying/Moving from Folder to UIM All contact data in a folder can be copied/moved to the UIM contact list. a Tap All y the folder containing the contact data to send on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100
If a folder other than All has been previously displayed, the contact list stored in that folder is displayed. 3 P303 b Tap Contacts y Copy All to UIM/Move All to UIM on the Menu bar Copy All to UIM Move All to UIM
: Copies to the UIM contact list.
: Moves to the UIM contact list. c Tap [Yes]
The contact data in the folder are copied/moved to the UIM contact list. C o n t a c t L i s t Copying/Moving from UIM Contact List to Unfiled Folder You can copy/move all contact data in a UIM contact to the Unfiled folder of the FOMA handset
(Handset) contact list. a Tap All y UIM on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100
If a folder other than All has been previously displayed, the contact list stored in that folder is displayed. 3 P303 b Tap Contacts y Copy All to Unfiled/Move All to Unfiled on the Menu bar Copy All to Unfiled
: Copies to the unified folder of the FOMA handset (Handset) Move All to Unfiled
: Moves to the unified folder of the FOMA handset (Handset) contact list. contact list. c Tap [Yes]
The contact data in the UIM contact list are copied/moved to the Unfiled folder of the FOMA handset (Handset) contact list. 115 00M1000EN.book 116 Copying Contact Data to Another Folder Contact data can be copied to another folder. a Tap the contact data to copy on the contact list screen, and tap Edit y Copy contact on the Menu bar in the details screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap All y destination folder on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100
If a folder other than All has been previously displayed, the contact list stored in that folder is displayed. 3 P303 c Tap Edit y Paste contact on the Menu bar The contact is copied. Sending Contact Information Contact data can be sent via email or Bluetooth. Sending Contact Information as vCard Contact data can be sent as a file in the vCard (electronic directory) format via email or Bluetooth. a Tap the contact data to send on the contact list screen, and tap Contacts y Send as vCard on the Menu bar in the details screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap Send as on the Send as screen, and select the sending method y Tap [Done]
: Attach the contact information to an email to send the information. Go to Step 3. Text message
: Insert the contact information to an SMS message to send the Bluetooth
: Send the contact information via Bluetooth. 3 P384 information. Go to Step 3. c Compose and send an email How to operate 3 P235, P261 C o n t a c t L i s t 116 00M1000EN.book 117 Sending Contact Information as Text You can insert contact data to an email message and send as text. a Tap the contact data to send on the details screen, tap Contacts y Send as Text on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap the item to insert as text y [Done]
Tap $$ in Select all to select all items. c Tap Send as on the Send as screen and select the sending method y Tap [Done]
: Insert the contact information as text to an email message to send the information. Go to Step 4. Text message
: Insert the contact information as text to an SMS message to send the information. Go to Step 4. d Compose and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 Sending Contact Information in Folder All contact data in a folder can be sent. a Tap All y The folder containing the contact data to send on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100
If a folder other than All has been previously displayed, the contact list stored in that folder is displayed. 3 P303 b Tap Contacts y Send this folder on the Menu bar c Tap Send as on the Send as screen, and select the sending method y Tap [Done]
: Attach the contact information to an email to send the information. Go to Step 4. Text message Bluetooth
: Insert the contact information to an SMS message. Go to Step 4.
: Send the contact information via Bluetooth. 3 P384 d Compose and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 C o n t a c t L i s t 117 00M1000EN.book 118 Listing Phone Numbers You can set the phone numbers specified as the preferred numbers in the contact data to display in the contact list. a Tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar in the contact list screen
How to operate 3 P100 b Tap $$ in Show preferred phone number You can set the preferred numbers to be displayed.
Tap $$ again to reset the display of preferred phone numbers. c Tap [Done]
You are reverted to the contact list. NOTE
The first phone number is displayed when contact data possesses no preferred phone number. C o n t a c t L i s t 118
1 2 | Exhibit 8B Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.85 MiB | / February 05 2005 |
APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT6EY1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows in four parts (Exhibit 8A through Exhibit 8D):
EXHIBIT 8B 00M1000EN.book 119 Tone/Screen/Light Settings 1Tone Settings Changing Ring Tones <Tone Settings>. 120 Adjusting the Volume for Ring Tones <Adjust Volume> . 123 Vibrating Your FOMA Handset for Incoming Calls or Alarm <Vibrator> . 124 Setting Keypad Tones <Keypad Tones> . 125 Sounding the Audible Timer during a Call <Audible Timer>. 126 Muting Sounds Made by Your FOMA Handset <Manner Mode> . 126 Personalizing Manner Mode <Original Manner Mode> . 127 1Screen/Light Settings Personalizing Home Screen <Home Screen> . 127 Adjusting the Screen Brightness. 131 Adjusting the Touch Screen Calibration . 131 Displaying Call Duration <Call tracking> . 132 Setting the Power Saving Options. 132 Switching the Application Launcher View . 133 Changing the Phone Number Entry Screen Settings . 135 Setting Display for Numerical Values . 136 Zooming in/out the Display . 137 Setting the Time and Date <Clock Settings> . 138 119 00M1000EN.book 120 Tone Settings Changing Ring Tones You can set ring tones for incoming voice/video calls and email messages.
You can also set ring tones individually for incoming calls/messages from contacts stored in FOMA handset
(Handset) Contact.3 P102 Setting Ring Tones for Calls Default setting Voice call: Bells Video call: Harmonics Voicemail: Interlude You can select a ring tone type for incoming voice/video calls as well as for new voicemails. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Tones on the Menu bar Voice call Video call Voicemail
: Select a ring tone for incoming voice calls.
: Select a ring tone for incoming video calls.
: Select a ring tone when new voice message is recorded. b Tap the field to set and select the ring tone
Tap $$ to hear the selected ring tone. c Tap [Done]
The ring tone is set.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the ring tone setting. NOTE
When an incoming voice/video call is received from a caller stored in FOMA handset (Handset Contacts), the ring tone assigned to the contact rings. However, if the caller does not send the Caller ID, the ring tone assigned in this section rings instead.
When you set Alert Mode to other than Audio, no ring tone rings. T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 120 00M1000EN.book 121 Setting Ring Tones for Email Default setting Email: Random SMS: Bits_n_Bytes You can select a type of ring tone for incoming SMS/email messages. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar
(Your subscribed email account ID)
: Select a ring tone for incoming email messages. SMS : Select a ring tone for incoming SMS messages.
If you have stored multiple email accounts, all account IDs are displayed. b Tap the field to set and select the ring tone
Tap $$ to hear the selected ring tone. c Tap [Done]
The ring tone for incoming messages is set.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the ring tone setting. NOTE
When an incoming email/SMS message is received from a caller stored in Contacts (FOMA handset), the ring tone assigned to the contact rings.
When you set Alert Mode to other than Audio, no ring tone rings. Ring Tone List In your FOMA handset, the following ring tones for incoming calls/messages are preinstalled.
You can install new ring tones for incoming calls/messages.
File names that are too long to display end in "...". 1812_Overture.mid Alert.mid Also_Sprach_Zarathustra.mid Bells.mid Big_Brass.mid Bits_n_Bytes.mid Blues.mid Boogie_Swing.mid Clair_de_Lune.mp3 Cosmic.mid Interlude.mid Mandolin_Concerto.mid Moonlight_Sonata.mid Polonaise_in_A_Flat.mid Provincial.mid Random.mid Rondo_ala_Turca.mid Snaggle.mid Sonata_in_C.mid Standard.mid T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 121 00M1000EN.book 122 Cumparsita.mid Ding.mid Door_Bell.mid Flight_of_Bumblebee.mid Harmonics.mid Symphony_in_G_Minor.mid The_Islands.mp3 Triads.mid Up_and_Down.mid Wind_Chimes.mid Installing Melodies as Ring Tones To set downloaded melodies as ring tones for incoming calls/messages, you need to store the melodies in Ringtune Manager as ring tones. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap General tab y Ringtune Manager tab on the Control panel screen Ring tone File size Available space Ringtune Manager screen b Tap [Install]
Displays the name of the melody folder. Displays melodies available for ring tones.
Tap [Send] to send the ring tone via email or Bluetooth. 3 P235, P261, P384 T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s c Tap the melody to store The melody is selected.
Tap Folder to select a folder.
Tap a melody 3 $$ to hear the selected melody. Tap $$ to stop. d Tap [Select]
The melody is stored.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel storing. 122 00M1000EN.book 123 Deleting Ring Tones You can delete a ring tone. a Tap the ring tone y [Delete] on the Ringtune Manager screen
How to operate 3 P124 b Tap [Yes]
Deletes the selected ring tone.
Tap [No] to cancel deleting. Muting Ring Tones Default setting Alert Mode: Audible When you set Alert Mode to Silent, your FOMA handset makes no ring tones for incoming calls/
messages. a Tap $$ on the Status bar, and tap $$ of Silent on the Alert mode screen The Alert Mode is set to Silent and $$ is displayed on the Status bar.
Tap $$ of Vibrator to vibrate the FOMA handset for incoming calls/messages as you tap
$$ of Audio to ring the ring tones. Adjust Volume Adjusting the Volume for Ring Tones You can adjust the volume of ring tones for incoming calls/messages to any of 8 levels. You can also set the volume to silent mode. Default setting 4 T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 123 00M1000EN.book 124 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab y Sound tab on the Control panel screen b Tap Ringer and select the volume
You can select from 0 (Silent) to 8 (Maximum). c Tap [Done]
The ring tone volume is set. Vibrator Vibrating Your FOMA Handset for Incoming Calls or Alarm Default setting Alert Mode: Audio When you set Alert Mode to Vibrate, your FOMA handset vibrates to indicate incoming calls/
messages.
Do not leave your FOMA handset on the desk when the vibrator is set. The FOMA handset may fall off when it vibrates. a Tap $$ on the Status bar, and tap $$ of Vibrate on the Alert mode screen The Alert Mode is set to Vibrate, and $$ is displayed on the Status bar.
Tap $$ of Silent to mute the FOMA handset for incoming calls/messages as you tap $$
of Audio to ring the ring tones. T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 124 00M1000EN.book 125 Setting a Vibrate Pattern You can select from the different vibrate patterns provided. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the General tab y Ringtune Manager tab on the Control panel screen, and then on the Ringtune Manager screen, tap the Vibrate tab b Tap the vibrate pattern to use
Tap the vibrate pattern and tap $$ to test the pattern. Tap $$ to stop vibration. c Tap [Done]
The vibrate pattern is set. Keypad Tones Setting Keypad Tones You can select keypad sound in the Phone number entry screen. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Tones on the Menu bar Default setting Normal Normal: Normal keypad tone. Beep : Beep tone. Silent
: Keypad tone is muted. T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s b Tap $$ of the sound to set on the Keypad tones c Tap [Done]
125 00M1000EN.book 126 The keypad tone is set.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the keypad tone setting. Audible Timer Sounding the Audible Timer during a Call You can set your FOMA handset to alert you with the Audible timer when the set time has elapsed during a call. You can also use the repetitive alarm function. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Call tracking on the Menu bar Default setting Audible Timer: OFF Audible Timer : Sets the time to play the Audible timer. Repetitive
: Plays the repetitive alarm for all recurring times you set. T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s b Tap Audible timer and select the time
Tap [OFF] to mute the Audible timer. c Tap $$ of Repetitive
If you do not tap $$, the alarm plays only once at a set time. d Tap [Done]
The Audible timer is set. Manner Mode Muting Sounds Made by Your FOMA Handset You can set this function to avoid disturbing people around you by muting the sounds made by your FOMA handset such as ring tones, keypad tones and tap tones.
You can customize operations during Manner Mode. 3 P129 a Press b for 1+ seconds in idle state The Manner Mode is set.
$$ is displayed on the Status bar. 1To cancel Manner Mode Press b for 1+ seconds in idle state The Manner Mode is canceled and $$ is displayed on the Status bar. 126 00M1000EN.book 127 Original Manner Mode Personalizing Manner Mode You can customize operations while Manner Mode is set. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab y Manner Mode tab on the Control panel screen Default setting All items: $$
: Disables ring tones.
: Disables the vibrator. Mute Ring tone Mute Vibrator Increase Microphone gain: Sensitizes the microphone so that the other party can hear you easily even when you talk in a small voice. Mute Keypad tones Mute Low Battery alert
: Disables keypad tones.
: Disables the low battery alert. b Tap $$ of the item to set c Tap [Done]
The operations during Manner Mode are set.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the settings. Home Screen Personalizing Home Screen You can customize the display of the Home screen to show new messages and application shortcuts. To view the Home screen, tap $$ on the Application Selector bar. Wallpaper Calendar Time Message Area Application Shortcuts Home screen T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 127 T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 00M1000EN.book 128 Setting Message Area View You can display information you want in your Message Area such as the number of new messages and tasks you have in the To do list 3 P42 a Tap Home y Preferences on the Menu bar on the Home screen Default setting All items: $$
Email Voice SMS Calendar To do list
: Shows the number of unread Email messages.
: Shows the number of new voice messages.
: Shows the number of unread SMS messages.
: Shows the number of appointments of the day.
: Shows the number of active tasks in your To do list.
How to operate 3 P129 b Tap $$ of the item to set c Tap [Done]
The Message Area in the Home screen shows the items you set.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the settings NOTE
Tap an item on the Message Area on the Home screen to activate the corresponding application. Setting Applications to Shortcut Key Default setting Application 1:Video Application 2:Image Application 3:Music You can set your favorite applications to the shortcut keys on the Home screen. a Tap Home y Preferences on the Menu bar on the Home screen, and tap the Application tab on the Preferences screen Application 1 : Creates a shortcut to an application on the left icon. Application 2 : Creates a shortcut to an application on the middle icon. Application 3 : Creates a shortcut to an application on the right icon.
How to operate 3 P129 128 00M1000EN.book 129 b Tap any of Applications 1, 2 or 3 and select the application to be linked to the shortcut c Tap [Done]
The application is linked to the shortcut key and the corresponding icon is displayed.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the settings. NOTE
When you set an application you installed to the shortcut key, $$ appears as the shortcut key icon on the Home screen.
Tap the shortcut key on the Home screen to activate the application you linked. Setting the Wallpaper You can set an image you captured or downloaded to display in the background of the Home screen. a Tap Home y Wallpaper on the Home screen on the Menu bar
How to operate 3 P129 T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s b Tap [Change]
The name of the image folder is displayed. Images available for the wallpaper are displayed.
Tap [Default] to reset to the default image. c Tap the image you want to set as the wallpaper The image is selected.
Tap Folder to select a folder.
Tap $$ of List to switch to list display. Tap $$ of Thumbnail to switch to thumbnail display. d Tap [Select]
The wallpaper is set. 129 T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 00M1000EN.book 130 NOTE
You can set the following images for the wallpaper:
: GIF, JPEG, BMP, WBMP, PNG
: 1280 x 1280 pixels
: Up to 4.6 MB File format Image size File size If size varies between the selected image and the wallpaper, the image is automatically adjusted to the wallpaper size.
The CD-ROM accompanying your FOMA handset contains images for the wallpaper. To set the images to the wallpaper, install them to the FOMA handset. Setting the Calendar Default setting Turn calendar off You can display the Calendar on the Home screen. a Tap Home y Turn calendar on on the Home screen on the Menu bar The Calendar is displayed on the Home screen.
How to operate 3 P129
To hide the Calendar, tap Home 3 Turn calendar off on the Menu bar. NOTE
You can see your Calendar entries in several views. 3 P334
Tap Calendar on the Home screen to open the calendar screen and add a Calendar entry. Showing the Time and Date You can display the time on the Home screen. a Tap Home y Turn time on on the Home screen on the Menu bar The time appears on the Home screen.
How to operate 3 P129
To hide the time, tap Home y Turn time off on the Menu bar. Default setting Hide time NOTE
You can see your clock in several views. 3 P142
Tap Time on the Home screen to open the Date and time screen. You can set various clock settings including the Date and time, clock views and alarm. 130 00M1000EN.book 131 Adjusting the Screen Brightness You can adjust the backlight brightness for the display. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab on the Control panel screen y Screen b Drag the slider to the desired brightness c Tap [Done]
The screen brightness is adjusted. Adjusting the Touch Screen Calibration You can set the calibration between the tapping position of the stylus and the area recognized by the touch screen.
When you turn on your FOMA handset for the first time, the calibration screen is displayed. 3 P58 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Handset y Screen y Calibrate on the Control panel screen T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s b Tap the center of the circles from 1 to 3 in sequence
Press 9 to stop calibration.
Press 1 to reset to the default settings. 131 00M1000EN.book 132 c Tap [Done]
The screen calibration is set. NOTE
When calibrating, avoid tapping a point far from the center of the circle. Applications may not operate accurately. Adjust the screen calibration again.
Pressing h for 10 seconds also opens the calibration screen. Call tracking Displaying Call Duration You can display the duration of a call on the talking screen. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Call tracking on the Menu bar Default setting Show: time Show : Shows/hides the duration on the talking screen. b Tap Show, and then tap OFF/Time The Call tracking is set. Setting the Power Saving Options Default setting Power down screen: After 1 minute Switch off light: After 30 seconds Display on: ON Status LED: $$
You can set the options of Power saving mode such as the time to turn off the backlight or screen display. You can also configure to cancel Power saving mode by tapping the touch screen. T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 132 00M1000EN.book 133 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Handset tab y Power on the Control panel screen Power down screen
: Selects the time to turn off the display. Switch off light: Selects the time to turn off the backlight. Display on
: Configure to enable tap operation to cancel Power saving mode. Status LED
: Sets the Status LED to turn ON/OFF. b Tap Power down screen to select the time to turn off c Tap Switch off light to select the time to turn off d Tap $$ of Display on
If you tap $$, tapping the touch screen does not cancel Power saving mode. However, pressing a key cancels the mode. e Tap $$ of Status LED
Tap $$ to turn the Status LED on, tap $$ to turn it off. f Tap [Done]
The Power saving mode options are set. NOTE
About Power saving mode P42
The time for Switch off light must occur before Power down screen. Set the same time as Power down screen or shorter time. Switching the Application Launcher View You can change the views and background of the Application Launcher. Changing an Application Launcher View Style You can see applications to be displayed on the Application Launcher as icons or as a list. Default setting View as icons T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 133 00M1000EN.book 134 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap View on the Menu bar b Tap $$ of View as icons/Show as list T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s View as icons Show as list
The view of the Application Launcher is set. Setting the Background for Application Launcher You can set an image you captured or downloaded to display as the background of the Application Launcher. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap View y Appearance on the Menu bar b On the display setting screen, tap Background and then tap Find image The name of the image folder is displayed. Images available for the background are displayed.
Tap [None] to display no background.
If you have previously set an image as the background, this image is also displayed. 134 00M1000EN.book 135 c Tap the image you want to set as the background
Tap Folder to select a folder.
Tap $$ of List to display as a list, tap $$ of Thumbnail to display thumbnails. d Tap [Select]
The selected image is displayed. Slider e Adjust the image display The following operations can be performed.
Drag the slider up/down to enlarge/reduce the image.
If the image is larger than the screen, drag the image up/down or left/right to adjust its position.
Tap $$ of Tile to tile and display images smaller than the screen. f Tap [Done]
The background is set. NOTE
You can set the following images for the background:
File format Image size File size
: GIF, JPEG, BMP, WBMP, PNG
: 1280 x 1280 pixels
: Up to 4.6 MB Changing the Phone Number Entry Screen Settings You can change the design (skin) of the Phone number entry screen.
Your FOMA handset contains Default only. To change the skin, you have to obtain your desired skin by downloading it from the Internet. Default setting Skin: Default T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 135 T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 00M1000EN.book 136 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Show on the Menu bar b Tap Skin to select the skin c Tap [Done]
The design of Phone number entry screen is changed. Setting Display for Numerical Values You can set how your FOMA handset shows numerical information such as distance, currency and decimal points.
The FOMA handset shows numerical information in the format set here only with compatible applications. Your FOMA handset contains no compatible applications at time of purchase. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the General tab y International tab on the Control panel screen, and then tap the Numbers tab on the International screen Long distance : Selects the unit for long distance between the yard-pound and metric systems. Short distance : Selects the unit for short distance between the yard-pound and metric systems. Decimal separator
: Selects how to show decimals. Thousands separator
: Selects how to separate thousands.
: Enters the name/symbol of the currency. Currency Symbol position
: Positions the currency (name/symbol) set in Currency. b Tap Set and select the display format The unit and display format are set.
When you tap Currency, enter the name/symbol of the currency. 136 00M1000EN.book 137 Zooming in/out the Display You can enlarge/reduce the display size of characters and icons on the screen for the following applications:
You can change the display size for the following application:
Default setting Zoom: Middle
- Browser (Only for bookmarks and while displaying stored pages)
- Music (Not available while displaying details)
- Video (Only while displaying list)
- Contacts
- Calendar (Only for Day view)
- Notes
- To do list (Only while displaying list)
- SyncML
<Example: Changing the display size of the Contact list screen>
a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Edit y Zoom on the Menu bar
: Zooms out. Small Middle : Normal display. Large : Zooms in.
To zoom in/out from the other applications, tap Edit y Zoom on the Menu bar. b Tap $$ of the desired size, and then tap [Done]
Display size is set. NOTE
Turning the power off does not reset the configured display size setting you set.
The size of characters is changed only when the Language Selection is set to English. T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 137 00M1000EN.book 138 Clock Settings Setting the Time and Date You can change the display format of date and time for the Home screen. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the General tab y Date and Time on the Control panel screen, and then tap the Format tab on the Date and Time screen
: Sets the date format. Date format Date separator: Selects how to delimit months and days. Time format Time separator
: Selects from the 12-hour and 24-hour format.
: Selects how to delimit hours, minutes and seconds. b Tap the field to set and select the display format The display format is set.
When you tap Time format, tap $$ of the desired display format. T o n e
/
S c r e e n L g h t
/
i S e t t i n g s 138 00M1000EN.book 139 Safety Settings 1Security Codes Security Codes Used for FOMA handset . 140 Changing Handset Security Code <Handset Security Code>. 141 Setting PIN . 143 Unblocking PIN . 145 1Restricting Mobile Phone Operations About Lock Functions . 147 Preventing Unauthorized Use <All Lock> . 147 Preventing Incoming/Outgoing Calls and Messages <Self Mode> . 149 1Restricting Calls/Messages/Data Transfer Rejecting Calls from Specified Numbers <Reject Call>. 149 Making Calls to Specified Numbers Only <Fixed Dialling> . 151 Rejecting Calls with No Caller ID <Call Setting w/o ID> . 152 Muting Ring Tone for Calls from Callers Not Stored in Contacts
<Ringless Time Setting>. 153 Rejecting Calls from Callers Not Stored in Contacts
<Reject Unknown> . 153 1About Other "Safety Settings"
About Other Safety Settings . 154 139 00M1000EN.book 140 Security Codes Used for FOMA handset Some FOMA handset functions require security codes. Use appropriate functions or service passwords for safe use of your FOMA handset.
If you forget these security codes, you are required to bring your FOMA handset and ID (your driver's license, etc.) to a DoCoMo shop.
Change the security codes to prevent tampering. Also, keep a separate record of your security codes. Handset Security Code There are 2 security codes for the FOMA handset. 1Handset Security Code The 1- to 16-digit password set to the FOMA handset to be entered when using the following functions:
- Unlocking All lock
- Reject Call
- Call Setting w/o ID
- Reject Unknown You can change Handset Security Code as you desire. 3 P147 1Authentication Password The 1- to 16-digit password to be entered when using Master Reset/Master Clear. You can change Authentication Pasword as you desire. 3 P148 Network Security Code The 4-digit password to be entered when using the Network services or DoCoMo e-sites. You can specify it at the time of purchase. Be careful never to reveal your Network Security Code to others. If you forget your Network Security Code, please contact "General contact" on the back of this manual. At a DoCoMo shop, your ID such as your driver's license is required for password renewal. If you already have "User ID" or "Password", you can renew your password at the DoCoMo e-site via a PC.
* For details on the "DoCoMo e-sites," see the back of this manual. PIN1/PIN2 PIN1 The 4- to 8-digit password set to the UIM to be entered when using the following functions:
: Enter the PIN1 every time when you turn your FOMA handset on for user authentication. If entered incorrectly, you cannot make or answer calls or operate communication functions. Your FOMA handset is set to enable operations without entering the PIN1 by default. 3 P149 PIN2
: Enter the PIN2 when restricting incoming or outgoing calls such as Fixed Dialling. 3 P158 You can change the PIN (PIN1/PIN2) as you desire. 3 P150 S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 140 00M1000EN.book 141 Handset Security Code Changing Handset Security Code You can change the 2 types of passwords of your FOMA handset: "Handset Security Code" and
"Authentication Password". Changing Handset Security Code No Handset Security Code is set to your FOMA handset by default. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab y Password on the Control panel screen, and then tap the Security tab y Set Security Code on the Password screen b Enter a new Handset Security Code y tap [Done]
The screen with the new Handset Security Code entered appears. c Enter again the new Handset Security Code y tap [Done]
The Handset Security Code is changed. NOTE
You can also set the Handset Security Code during function settings such as Reject Call. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 141 00M1000EN.book 142 Changing Authentication Password a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab y Password on the Control panel screen, and then tap the Security tab ySet Authentication Password on the Password screen Default setting 000000 b Enter your current Authentication Password y tap [Done]
The New password entry screen appears. c Enter a new Authentication Password y tap [Done]
The screen with the new Authentication Password entered appears. d Enter again the new Authentication Password y tap [Done]
The Authentication Password is changed. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 142 00M1000EN.book 143 Setting PIN Enabling PIN You can enable PIN1/PIN2. Default setting PIN1: $$ (OFF) PIN2: $$ (OFF) a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Security on the Menu bar b On the Security screen, tap $$ of PIN1/PIN2 PIN1 entry screen c Enter the PIN y tap [Done]
The PIN is set.
Entering an incorrect PIN 3 times in succession, the PIN will be blocked. 3 P151 Entering PIN1 When the PIN1 is enabled, the PIN1 entry for user authentication is required every time you turn your FOMA handset on. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 143 00M1000EN.book 144 a Turn on your FOMA handset
How to operate 3 P124 b Enter the PIN1 y tap [Done]
The Home screen appears.
Entering an incorrect PIN1 3 times in succession, the PIN1 will be blocked. 3 P151 NOTE
When the PIN2 is enabled, the PIN2 entry for user authentication is required when restricting calls such as Fixed Dialling. 3 P158 S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 144 00M1000EN.book 145 Changing PIN Default setting PIN1: 0000 PIN2: 0000 You can change PIN1/PIN2.
To change the PIN1, you have to enable the PIN1. 3 P149 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Security on the Menu bar b On the Security screen, tap [Change] on PIN1/PIN2 PIN1 entry screen c Enter the current PIN y tap [Done]
The New PIN1 entry screen appears.
Entering an incorrect PIN 3 times in succession, the PIN will be locked. 3 See below d Enter a new PIN y tap [Done]
The screen with the new PIN entered appears. e Enter again the new PIN y tap [Done]
The PIN is changed. Unblocking PIN If you enter an incorrect PIN (PIN1/PIN2) 3 times in succession, the PIN is locked. In this case, enter the PUK (PUK1/PUK2) to unblock the PIN. The PUK is the 8-digit number specified at the time of purchase and cannot be changed.
After unblocking PIN, enter a new PIN to use your FOMA handset. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 145 00M1000EN.book 146 a With PIN locked, tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and enter * * 05 * /* * 052 * y [Done] on the Phone number entry screen
To unblock PIN1, enter * * 05 * .
To unblock PIN2, enter * * 052 *. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s b Enter the PUK y tap [Done]
The New PIN1 entry screen appears. c Enter a new PIN code y tap [Done]
The screen with the new PIN entered appears. d Enter again the new PIN y tap [Done]
The PIN is unblocked. 1PIN Lock and PUK If you enter an incorrect PIN (PIN1/PIN2) 3 times in succession, the PIN is locked. In this case, the PUK (PUK1/PUK2) entry is required for unblocking PIN. If you enter an incorrect PUK 10 times in succession, the UIM is locked and your FOMA handset is disabled. Note that you keep a separate record of these codes just in case you forget them. If you forget the codes, contact one of DoCoMo shops. Authentication OK FOMA handset is enabled Enter PIN Wrong entry 3 times in succession Enter PUK Authentication OK Wrong entry 10 times in succession Set new PIN code to enable FOMA handset UIM is locked (Contact one of DoCoMo shops) 146 00M1000EN.book 147 About Lock Functions The FOMA handset provides lock functions to prevent unauthorized use by third person or disable communication functions. Use an appropriate lock function from the following:
Lock function Description Reference All Lock Self Mode Disables FOMA handset operations to prevent unauthorized use by third person. When this function is set, the Handset Security Code is required to use your FOMA handset when you turn the handset on or cancel Power saving mode. Disables all communication and transmission functions. Use this function when playing a game with no communication function in locations where talking and exchanging messages are prohibited/restricted. P153 P155 NOTE
Note that you keep a separate record of your Handset Security Code just in case you forget them. All Lock Preventing Unauthorized Use Default setting Handset Security Code: Not set Use this function to lock all operations of your FOMA handset.
When All Lock is set, you can make/answer no call. a Set the Handset Security Code
How to operate 3 P147 b Slide p upward until it locks All Lock is set. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 147 00M1000EN.book 148 Unlocking All Lock a Slide p downward to its original position S a f e t y S e t t i n g s b Tap [Unlock], and enter the code y tap [Done] on the Handset Security Code entry screen All Lock is unlocked.
Tap [Owner] to show the owner information.
Tap [Emergency Call] to open the emergency call entry screen to make an emergency call. Saving Owner Information You can store your owner information to be displayed on the All lock cancel screen.
You can view the owner information on the All lock cancel screen. 3 P153 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab y Password on the Control panel screen Default setting None b Enter the owner y tap [Done]
Your owner information is stored.
Up to 128 double- or single-byte characters can be entered. 148 00M1000EN.book 149 Self Mode Preventing Incoming/Outgoing Calls and Messages Default setting Signal strength: Handset ON You can disable all communication and transmission functions such as making/answering calls, exchanging messages, packet/data/Bluetooth communications by stopping transmitting radio signals. Useful when using an application with no communication function in locations where talking and exchanging messages are prohibited/restricted. a Tap $$ on the Status bar b Tap Self Mode y [OK]
Self Mode is set and $$ appears on the Status bar.
Tap Handset ON y [OK] to cancel Self Mode. NOTE
When Self Mode is ON, callers will hear a message that you are in an area with no radio wave or the power is turned off. If you are contracting the Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, these services are available.
You can dial emergency call numbers (110, 119 and 118) even during Self Mode. In this case, Self Mode is automatically canceled. Reject Call Rejecting Calls from Specified Numbers Default setting Call Reject List: $$ (OFF) Edit Call reject Number: None You can reject calls from callers you do not want to talk by storing their numbers.
In addition to this function, setting the "Caller ID Display Request Service" and the "Call Setting w/o ID" is recommended.
The callers will hear the busy tone. Your FOMA handset performs no arrival call acts and the calls are recorded in Missed call history. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 149 00M1000EN.book 150 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar and tap Settings y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Reject tab on the Call control screen b Tap $$ of Call Reject List, and enter the code y tap [Done] on the Handset Security Code entry screen
If you have not set a Handset Security Code, the New Handset Security Code entry screen appears. Set the code. 3 P147 c Tap [Edit Call reject Number], and enter the code y tap [Done] on the Handset Security Code entry screen Call reject list screen d Tap the number y [Edit], and enter the number to reject y tap
[Done] on the Call reject list screen
Up to 20 numbers can be stored in the Call reject list.
To store another number, repeat Step 4. e Tap [Done]
Reject Call is set. NOTE
Calls with no Caller ID are not rejected.
Even when the "Voice Mail Service" or "Call Forwarding Service" is set to ON, these services are enabled if you set the ringing time to 0 second. If the caller has sent no Caller ID, your FOMA handset acts according to the "Call Setting w/o ID" settings.
You can receive SMS/email messages regardless of this setting. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 150 00M1000EN.book 151
You can make calls to the number stored in the Call reject list. Deleting the Registered Callers You can delete the numbers stored in the Call reject list. a Tap the number to delete on the Call reject list screen
How to operate 3 See above b Tap [Clear] y [Done]
The selected number is deleted. Fixed Dialling Making Calls to Specified Numbers Only Default setting Fixed Dialling: $$ (OFF) Call Permitted List: None You can allow your FOMA handset to make calls only to specified numbers. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and Tap Settings y Security on the Menu bar, and then tap the Fixed Dialling tab on the Security screen S a f e t y S e t t i n g s b Tap $$ of Fixed Dialling, and enter the code y tap [Done] on the PIN2 entry screen
PIN2 3 P147 c Select the number y tap [Edit], and on the PIN2 entry screen, enter the code y tap [Done], and then enter the number y tap
[Done] on the Fixed dialling entry screen The Fixed dialling is set.
Up to XX numbers can be stored in the Fixed dialling list.
To store another number, repeat Step 3. 151 00M1000EN.book 152 NOTE
You can receive calls from numbers not stored in the Fixed dialling list. Call Setting w/o ID Rejecting Calls with No Caller ID Default setting From Public Phones: $$ (OFF) Private ID: $$ (OFF) With Unknown ID: $$ (OFF) You can reject calls with no Caller ID depending on the reason for no ID.
There are 3 reasons for no Caller ID as follows:
Reason for no ID Reason S a f e t y S e t t i n g s User unsent Public Phone Not supported When the caller selected not to send the Caller ID Calls from public phones Calls from parties who cannot send the Caller ID such as from overseas or from land lines via call forwarding services. (However, some phone companies may send the Caller ID.)
The callers will hear the busy tone. Your FOMA handset performs no arrival call acts and the calls are recorded in Missed call history. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Reject tab on the Call control screen From Public Phones
: Rejects calls with Reason for no ID is set to
"Public Phone"
Private ID
: Rejects calls with Reason for no ID is set to
"User unsent"
With Unknown ID
: Rejects calls with Reason for no ID is set to
"Not supported"
b Tap $$ of one of the Reasons for no ID, and enter the code y tap
[Done] on the Handset Security Code entry screen The Call Setting w/o ID is set.
If you have not set a Handset Security Code, the New Handset Security Code entry screen appears. Set the code. 3 P147
You can reject calls with any of these reasons for no Caller ID. NOTE
Even when the "Voice Mail Service" or "Call Forwarding Service" is set to ON, these services are enabled if you set the ringing time to 0 second.
You can receive SMS/email messages regardless of this setting. 152 00M1000EN.book 153 Ringless Time Setting Muting Ring Tone for Calls from Callers Not Stored in Contacts Default setting 0 second For calls from callers not stored in Contacts, you can set the start time of ringer actions (such as the ring alert, vibrator, and incoming Status LED actions) not to start immediately.
Calls disconnected before the ringer actions start are recorded as missed calls with no ring alert , and by default will not be shown in Missed call history. You can set to display them in Missed call history. 3 P82 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Tones on the Menu bar b Tap Ring start time (Seconds), and enter the start time y tap [Done]
on the Ringing time entry screen The ringless time is set.
Enter 0 to 99 seconds for the start time. NOTE
If the caller stored in Contacts sends no Caller ID and ends the call before the ringer actions start, your FOMA handset acts no ringer actions. However, when the "Call Setting w/o ID" or "Reject Unknown" is set to ON, your FOMA handset acts according to these settings.
When the "Voice Mail Service" or "Call Forwarding Service" is set to ON, these services are activated at their start time regardless of this setting. Reject Unknown Rejecting Calls from Callers Not Stored in Contacts You can reject calls from anyone whose phone number is not stored in Contacts.
In addition to this function, setting the "Caller ID Display Request Service" and the "Call Setting w/o ID" is recommended.
The callers will hear the busy tone. Your FOMA handset performs no arrival call acts and the calls are recorded in Missed call history. S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 153 00M1000EN.book 154 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Reject tab on the Call control screen b Tap $$ of Not In Contacts, and enter the code y tap [Done] on the Handset Security Code entry screen Reject Unknown is set.
If you have not set a Handset Security Code, the New Handset Security Code entry screen appears. Set the code. 3 P147 NOTE
Calls with no Caller ID are not rejected. However, when the "Call Setting w/o ID" or "Ringless Time Setting"
is set to ON, your FOMA handset acts according to these settings.
Even when the "Voice Mail Service" or "Call Forwarding Service" is set to ON, these services are enabled if you set the ringing time to 0 second. If the caller has sent no Caller ID, your FOMA handset acts according to the "Call Setting w/o ID" settings.
You can receive SMS/email messages regardless of this setting. About Other Safety Settings In addition, you can use the following safety settings:
Purpose Function/Service name Reference To block "nuisance calls" such as mischievous calls or frequent malicious calls Nuisance Call Blocking Service To protect your FOMA handset from vicious files
(virus) Virus scan function P371 P540 S a f e t y S e t t i n g s 154 00M1000EN.book 155 Camera Before Using Camera . 156 Taking Still Pictures . 160 Recording Video Clips . 161 Changing Shot Settings . 163 Changing the Camera Settings . 166 155 00M1000EN.book 156 Before Using Camera Using Still Pictures and Video Clips Shot You can display or play back still pictures and video clips you shot with the camera as well as using them for the following various usages:
Viewing pictures continuously as a slide show 3 P276
Editing images 3 P277
Attaching images to email 3 P310
Storing images in TransFlash memory card 3 P177
Sending images via Bluetooth 3 P310
Storing images in PC with Desktop Suite 3 P527 C a m e r a Notes When Using Camera
Clean images cannot be obtained if the lens is stained with fingerprints or grease. Wipe the lens with a soft
clean cloth before shooting an image. If the FOMA handset is left in a warm place for a long period prior to shooting/saving images, image quality may be deteriorated.
Hold your FOMA handset firmly or place it on a stable place and use the self-timer when shooting. Otherwise, the image may be blurred.
Note that if you attempt to take a picture of a strong light source such as the sun or a lamp, the image may become dark or may be degraded.
Although the camera is manufactured using extremely precise technology, it may contain black and bright pixels and lines appearing constantly on the display. Also, shooting in poor lighting conditions may cause noises such as white lines to appear in a picture. Images shot by the camera may differ from actual subjects in color and brightness.
Copyrights and Portrait Rights You are not allowed, by the Copyright Act, to reproduce, modify or edit the information recorded by FOMA handset without consent of the copyright holders except for personal use. Also, please refrain from unauthorized use of portraits or names of other persons without permission that may infringe on the portrait rights. Please be aware of copyrights and portrait rights when posing recorded data on Web pages. Note that filming or recording plays, entertainment, and exhibitions may be prohibited even if for personal use. Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when taking and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. 156 00M1000EN.book 157 Using the Camera You can use the cameras to take still pictures or record video clips as follows:
1Shooting in landscape view Back-Camera is suitable for taking persons or landscapes. Illustration 1Shooting in portrait view Front-Camera is suitable for taking yourself. Illustration The cameras are located at the front (Front-camera) and back (Rear-camera). You can switch between these cameras during shooting. Front-camera Rear-camera Your image appears horizontally reversed
(mirror image) on the display. Still pictures and video clips shoot and saved appear as normal images. C a m e r a 157 00M1000EN.book 158 Shot Screen and Saving Format Still mode screen Icon name Icon Video mode screen Description C a m e r a a Shot mode b Still picture shot size c Self-timer ON d Audio OFF e Creating new picture f REC g Savable number of pictures h Recordable number of video clips i Shutter j REC/STOP k Recording progress indicator l Image viewer*
m Video player n Switch camera o Still mode*
p Video mode*
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
Appears when Still mode is set. Appears when Video mode is set. Rear-
camera Front-
camera Shot size: XL (1280 x 960) Shot size: L (640 x 480) Shot size: M (320 x 240) Shot size: S (160 x 120) Shot size: L (640 x 480) Shot size: M (320 x 240) Shot size: S (160 x 120) Appears when Self-timer is activated. Appears when recording video with audio set to OFF. Appears when camera is starting up. Appears when recording video. Displays the maximum number of still pictures you can take. Displays the maximum number of video clips you can record. Tap $$ to shoot an image.
$$/$$
Tap $$/$$ to start/stop recording.
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
Displays the estimated remaining time. Tap $$ to view stored images. Tap $$ to play video. Tap $$ to switch between Front-camera and Rear-camera. Tap $$ to switch to Still mode. Tap $$ to switch to Video mode.
*: Does not appear if you open the still mode screen from Contacts (3 P103). 158 00M1000EN.book 159 Still Picture Files File format Picture size Extension File name JPEG XL (1280 x 960), L (640 x 480), M (320 X 240), S (160 x 120)
.jpg
"PICXXXXXX" (X is a 6-digit number.)
The picture file you took first is named "PIC000001". Then the picture file name increases by one in the order of "PIC000002" 3 "PIC000003". The file that comes after "PIC999999" is named "PIC000001". If the file having the same file name is already saved in the FOMA handset/
TransFlash memory card, the new file name is automatically changed to the next larger number. C a m e r a Estimated Savable Number of Still Pictures The savable number of still pictures varies depending on the setting values of Picture size/Picture quality and shooting conditions. Estimated capacity of FOMA handset (Number of pictures) Picture size Picture quality XL (1280 x 960) L (640 x 480) M (320 x 240) S (160 x 120) Best 34 148 805 3220 High 43 183 1022 4130 Estimated capacity of TransFlash memory card (Number of pictures) Picture size Picture quality XL (1280 x 960) L (640 x 480) M (320 x 240) S (160 x 120) Best 57 249 1356 5424 High 72 308 1720 6957 Normal 51 226 1111 5278 Normal 85 380 1871 8889
The table above shows the estimation when using the attached TransFlash memory card (sample). Video Clip Files File format MP4 (MobileMP4) Coding system Video: MPEG4 Voice: AMR Video size Extension QCIF (176 x 144)
.3gp 159 00M1000EN.book 160 File name
"MOVXXXXXX" (X is a 6-digit number.)
The video file you recorded first is named "MOV000001". Then the video file name increases by one in the order of "MOV000002" 3 "MOV000003". The file that comes after "MOV999999" is named "MOV000001". If the file having the same file name is already saved in the FOMA handset/
TransFlash memory card, the new file name is automatically changed to the next larger number. Estimated Recordable Number of Videos The recordable number of videos varies depending on the setting values of Audio ON/OFF and shooting conditions. Estimated capacity of FOMA handset (Number of videos) Recordable time (seconds) Audio 300 12 ON 6 163 C a m e r a
The number of videos when recording up to the maximum recordable time. Estimated capacity of TransFlash memory card (Number of videos) Recordable time (seconds) Audio 300 12 ON 10 275 OFF 7 204 OFF 13 344
The number of videos when recording up to the maximum recordable time.
The table above shows the estimation when using the attached TransFlash memory card (sample). Taking Still Pictures You can take still pictures with the camera. Still pictures you took are saved in "$$ Picture" (3 P274) or the TransFlash memory card (3 P301). You can select the storage location (3 P177). a Press m The camera starts up and the still mode screen appears.
The image of camera previously used appears. How to switch cameras. 3 P172
If the video mode screen appears, tap $$ to switch the screen. 160 00M1000EN.book 161 b Point the camera at the object y press m/tap $$
The shutter sounds and the FOMA handset takes the still picture.
$$:Tap $$ to display the Send as screen to send the still picture you took. 3 P310
$$:Tap $$ to display the Delete file screen to delete the still picture you took. a Press m/Tap $$
The still picture you took is saved.
Tap $$ to view the still pictures you saved. 3 P274 1Menu bar Tap Camera on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Camera settings . P176 Self-timer ON/OFF . P174 Mirroring ON/OFF . P175 Low light ON/OFF . P174
Some items cannot be performed depending on operations. C a m e r a NOTE
The shutter sound cannot be muted or changed.
Moving into Power saving mode (3 P136) during shooting stand-by automatically ends the camera.
$$ indicates that there is not enough space in the FOMA handset. Delete or move unnecessary files. 3 P307, P308 Recording Video Clips You can record video clips with the camera. Video clips you record are saved in "$$ Video" (3 P280) or the TransFlash memory card (3 P301). You can select the storage location (3 P177). a Press m The camera starts up and the still mode screen appears.
The image of camera previously used appears. How to switch cameras. 3 P172
If the video mode screen appears, go to Step 3. 161 00M1000EN.book 162 b Tap $$
The video mode screen appears. 1To record video with audio set to OFF Tap Camera y Audio OFF on the Menu bar
To turn Audio ON, Tap Camera y Audio ON on the Menu bar. c Press m/Tap $$
The shutter sounds and the FOMA handset starts recording.
During recording, the camera light flashes in red. d Press m/Tap $$
The shutter sounds and the FOMA handset ends recording.
$$
: Tap $$ to open the Send as screen to send the video you recorded. 3 P310
$$
: Tap $$ to open the Delete file screen to delete the video you recorded.
$$/$$ : Tap $$/$$ to start/stop playing back the video you recorded. e Press m/Tap $$
The video you recorded is saved.
Tap $$ to view the video you saved. 3 P280 C a m e r a 162 00M1000EN.book 163 1Menu bar Tap Camera on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Camera settings . P176 Self-timer ON/OFF . P174 Low light ON/OFF . P174 Mirroring ON/OFF . P175 Audio ON/OFF . P170 NOTE
The shutter sound cannot be muted or changed.
Moving into Power saving mode (3 P136) during shooting stand-by automatically ends the camera.
When a call arrives during video recording, the video being recorded is automatically saved. However, if you change into another application during recording, the video being recorded will not be saved.
$$ indicates that there is not enough space in the FOMA handset. Delete or move unnecessary files. 3 P307, P308 Changing Shot Settings You can change the camera settings for shooting with the camera activated. C a m e r a Switching Cameras You can switch between the Front-camera and Rear-camera. a Tap $$ on the still/video mode screen Zooming You can zoom in an object in the distance when shooting. The table below lists the available magnifications depend on the image shot size. Shot mode Image size Still pictures XL (1280 x 960) L (640 x 480) M (320 x 240) S (160 x 120) Videos
-
Zoom magnification 2x 3x 1x
You cannot use the zoom function when using the Front-camera. 163 00M1000EN.book 164 a Press u d on the still/video mode screen
Tapping $$/$$ also changes the zoom magnification. NOTE
Ending the camera cancels the zooming you adjusted. Adjusting the Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the display to any of 5 levels (-2/-1/0/1/2). a Press 7 on the still/video mode screen y press 6
Tapping $$/$$ also changes the brightness level. Default setting 0 NOTE
Ending the camera cancels the brightness you adjusted. Setting the Contrast You can set the contrast of the display to any of 5 levels (2/-1/0/1/2). a Press 7 on the still/video mode screen y press 6
Tapping $$/$$ also changes the contrast level. Default setting 0 C a m e r a 164 00M1000EN.book 165 NOTE
Ending the camera cancels the contrast you adjusted. Using Self Timer If you set Self timer to ON, images are automatically shot about 10 seconds later. a Tap Camera y Self timer ON on the Menu bar on the still/video mode screen b Press m/tap $$/$$
The counter sounds and the image is shot about 10 seconds later.
To stop Self timer, press m/tap $$. NOTE
When the shot by Self timer ends, Self timer setting is automatically canceled. Using Low Light Mode Use this function when shooting in poor light conditions. a Tap Camera y Low light ON on the Menu bar on the still/video mode screen
Tap Camera y Low light OFF on the Menu bar to turn Low light OFF. Default setting Low light OFF Turning Mirroring ON/OFF You can display an image horizontally reversed (Mirroring ON) or display as a normal image
(Mirroring OFF).
You can turn Mirroring On/OFF only when using the Front-camera. Default setting Mirroring ON C a m e r a 165 00M1000EN.book 166 a Tap Camera y Mirroring OFF on the Menu bar on the still/video mode screen
Tap Camera y Mirroring ON on the Menu bar to turn Mirroring ON.
Still pictures/video clips you shot are saved as normal images (Mirroring OFF) regardless of this setting. Changing the Camera Settings Default setting Image size: Middle Image quality: Best Maximum duration: 300 seconds Ambient lighting: Auto Flicker correction: 50Hz You can change the camera settings such as the size and quality of still pictures/video clips to be shot with the camera. a Tap Camera y Camera settings on the Menu bar on the still/video mode screen, and tap the item to set, and tap [Done] after setting 1 C a m e r a 166 Camera settings screen for still pictures Camera settings screen for video clips Image size Extra large Large Middle Small Image quality
: SXGA (1280 x 960 dots)
: VGA (640 x 480 dots)
: QVGA (320 x 240 dots)
: QQVGA (160 x 120 dots) Best High Normal
: Best quality. The maximum number of shots you can take decreases.
: High quality.
: Standard quality. The maximum number of shots you can take increases. Maximum duration 300 seconds : Shooting is available up to about 300 seconds. 12 seconds
: Shooting is available up to about 12 seconds. The file size of images you Ambient lighting shot is about 100 Kbytes. Auto Sunny Indoor Home : When shooting under bulb/incandescent lighting.
: Adjusts white balance automatically.
: When shooting outdoors in fine weather. 00M1000EN.book 167 Indoor Office : When shooting under fluorescent lighting. Flicker correction 50Hz 60Hz
: If flicker occurs when shooting under fluorescent lighting at 50 Hz.
: If flicker occurs when shooting under fluorescent lighting at 60 Hz. Setting Saving Destination You can select the storage destination for still pictures/video clips you shot. a Tap Unfiled* y the destination folder name on the Menu bar on the still/video mode screen
*: The name of folder previously selected appears. C a m e r a 167 00M1000EN.book 168 00M1000EN.book 169 Internet About the Internet . 170 Setting up the Internet . 172 1Opening Web Pages via the Internet Opening Web Pages . 180 Operations When Opening Web Pages . 183 Opening Web Pages by Entering URL. 187 Viewing Web Page Information . 188 Finding Text in Web Pages . 190 Opening Web Pages from History . 190 Opening Web Pages Quickly by Adding Bookmarks. 191 Saving Web Pages Information . 193 Copying/Cutting and Pasting Text in Web Pages. 195 1Downloading Data from Web Pages Downloading Data from Web Pages . 196 1Useful Functions Using Phone To/Mail To/Web To Functions . 197 1Setting Web Browser Preferences Setting Web Browser Preferences. 199 When an Incoming Call Arrives during Internet Connection . 203 1Using Certificates Using Certificates . 203 169 00M1000EN.book 170 About the Internet You can browse Web pages via the Internet. 2Opening Web Paves 3 P192 You can access to the Internet easily to browse Web pages created for PCs. 2Adding Bookmarks 3 P204 You can open Web pages you frequently view quickly by adding bookmarks for the pages. 2Saving Web Page Information 2Downloading Data from Web Pages 3 P207 You can save Web pages you might want to refer to later. 3 P211 You can download various applications from the Internet and save them in your FOMA handset. Using the Internet I n t e r n e t To use the Internet, you need to use mopera (3 P182), subscribe to an Internet service provider that supports FOMA, and make the Internet connection setting (3 P185). For details, see
"Preparation Flow for Using the Internet" (3 P182). Available Communication Functions Your FOMA handset supports the following 3 communication methods: 64K data communications, packet communications and wireless LAN. 164K data communications and packet communications You can choose between packet and 64K data communications for accessing the Internet. Each communication method differs in the following points:
Communication Data rate Communication Access point method 64K data communications 64 Kbps charge Charges based on connection time. Packet communications Sending at up to 64 Kbps*
Receiving at up to 384 Kbps*
FOMA/mopera 64K data communication access points/ISDN synchronized 64K access points Charges based on the volume of data transmitted.FOMA packet communication access points (mopera, etc.)
*: Data rate may decrease depending on the communication environment and network conditions. 1Wireless LAN You can access the Internet via LAN. To do this, you have to make the wireless LAN setting. 3 P392 Before Using the Internet
When you use an Internet service provider other than mopera, monthly fee for the provider is required, in addition to the FOMA monthly fee. For more information on monthly fee, contact your Internet service provider. 170 00M1000EN.book 171
Please be aware that communications charges will be high when you use 64K data communications for long duration.
Please be aware that communications charges will be high when you use packet communications to transmit large volumes of data such as when viewing websites with images and downloading data.
Even when the connection conditions are satisfied, if the base station is congested or the radio wave status is wrong, you may not carry out communications. 1Internet Glossary Cache The place where the FOMA handset temporarily stores data such as Web pages that you have displayed. You can easily return to previously viewed Web pages because their data is held in the cache for quick retrieval. Gateway A server that converts different communications protocols so that information can be passed between heterogeneous devices on networks. Subnet mask A number that identifies the subnetwork where an IP address is shared by multiple networks. Primary DNS/Secondary DNS A server address for searching domain names. "Primary" is a main server and "secondary"
is a secondary server. Plain text authentication The authentication method that identifies a user through plain text without encrypting data for network communications. Proxy server A server that receives reguest from a browser and accesses to the Web server instead of the browser. cookies The function that stores information in the FOMA handset memory and retrieves it when necessary. For example, when you do shopping on the Internet, your fixed information such as name or email address is stored in cookies for the first time. When you return to the same Web site for shopping, the stored information appears automatically as the default values. DNS (Domain Name System) The database system that translates a domain name address into an IP address. For example, a numerical value "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is translated into "XXX.com". IP (Internet Protocol) address A numerical value such as "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" that identifies a device connected to the Internet, and is translated into a domain name by the DNS server. An IP address is uniquely assigned to all devices connected to the Internet. JavaScript A program written in Java programming language. Generally, it is used for placing emphasis on images. PPP (Point to Point Protocol) A protocol for transmitting data between 2 points. VPN (Virtual Private Network) A virtual private network that uses the Internet. I n t e r n e t 171 00M1000EN.book 172 Setting up the Internet Before using the Internet, you have to set up the following connection settings. Preparation Flow for Using the Internet You are subscribing to an Internet service provider Use mopera (no application required) 3 See below Yes No Subscribe to other Internet service provider Store your ID and password in your FOMA handset in the
"Using an Internet Service Provider"3 P185 Internet is available Using mopera DoCoMo's Internet connection service "mopera" allows you to use the Internet with a few simple procedures. 1mopera Services The following services are available:
mopera Net Surfing You can easily access the Internet with no application and only pay communications charges. It is ideally suited for users who want to browse Web pages quickly through your FOMA handset. mopera mail This service enables you to use email as well as various mail optional services. After making an application for this service at a DoCoMo shop or by phone, you can easily make the mail settings with your FOMA handset. 3 P226 mopera Quick Start Settings With mopera Quick Start, you can store the connection information to mopera via packet or 64K data communications in your FOMA handset. I n t e r n e t 172 00M1000EN.book 173 a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Connections tab y Internet account on the Control panel screen b Tap Quick Start tab 1To check the Quick Start settings
* Usually, you do not have to change the settings. Tap [Edit]. On the screen below, make necessary settings 3 tap [DONE]. Name : The profile name for Quick Start appears. URL
: Enter the URL for connecting to the Quick Start server.
Tap [Advanced] to view the Quick Start settings. 3 P187 to P190
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the setting. c Tap [Auto Setting]
d Tap [Auto Setting], and tap [Yes] on the confirmation screen
Tap [No] to cancel the setting. e Tap [Done]
I n t e r n e t 173 00M1000EN.book 174 Using an Internet Service Provider To use the Internet without using mopera, you need to subscribe to an Internet service provider. Please sign up for an Internet service provider in advance.
For your FOMA handset, the mopera connection information (packet/64K data communications) are set by default. If you use mopera Net Surfing only, no application or settings are required. Default setting Account name: mopera Bearer: Packet 1Preparation for setting Check the following information that your provider provides. Bearer The type of line (packet/64K data communications). Account name A name such as a provider name for confirmation. The official name is not required. APN (Phone number) A phone number used to establish the dial-up connection (Connection to the Internet by dialling to an access point through a telephone line). Selecting an access point that supports FOMA is required. User name A user name used to establish the dial-up connection to the Internet service provider. Called differently by some providers. Password A password used to establish the dial-up connection to the Internet service provider. Called differently by some providers. Caller ID The setting whether notify or not notify the Caller ID.
The information necessary for connecting to the Internet such as items to set, item names or the value may differ. For details on the information, contact your Internet service provider. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and on the Control panel screen, tap the Connections tab y Internet account. 1To edit the information you have set Tap the account name y [Edit]
Perform the operation from Step 2 as needed. 1To delete the information you have set Tap the account name y [Delete], and tap [Yes] on the confirmation screen. I n t e r n e t 174 00M1000EN.book 175 b Tap [New]
Account name : Enter a provider name, etc. to set.
Up to 50 double- or single-byte characters can be entered. Bearer FOMA CSD
: Select this when using FOMA 64K data communications. GSM CSD
: Select this when using data communications in a GSM area. Packet
: Select this when using FOMA packet communications. WLAN
: Select this when using a wireless LAN. c Tap Account name and enter a provider name, etc. d Tap Bearer and select between FOMA CSD/PACKET 1When selecting FOMA CSD New items are added below Bearer. Enter these items. User name : Enter the user name used to connect to your Internet service provider.
Up to 256 double- or single-byte characters can be entered. Password : Enter the password used to connect to your Internet I n t e r n e t service provider. Entered password is masked by asterisks ("4").
Up to 256 single-byte characters can be entered.
: Enter a phone number of an access point of your Internet service provider.
Up to 50 single-byte characters can be entered. Phone number e Tap [Advanced], and tap the tab to set on the Advanced setting screen
For each tab settings, see pages 187 to 190. Modem Tab Default setting User name: /Password: $$Username: -Password: -APN: -PDP TYPE: IP You can make the settings for the IP (Internet Protocol) address and DNS (Domain Name Server). Set necessary items according to the information provided by your Internet service provider. 175 00M1000EN.book 176 a In Step 5 on P186, tap Modem tab y tap the item to set, and tap
[Done] after setting, and then tap [Done] on the Internet account screen User name and password
: Check when entering the User name/Password. Before checking, the settings for User name/
Password are required.
$$ to enter, $$ not to enter. User name
: Enter the user name used to connect to your Internet service provider.
Up to 256 double- or single-byte characters can be entered Password : Enter the password used to connect to your APN Internet service provider. Entered password is masked by asterisks ("4").
Up to 256 single-byte characters can be entered.
: Enter the name of an access point of your Internet service provider.
Up to 32 double- or single-byte characters can be entered PDP TYPE : Set the protocol used to establish communications. I n t e r n e t IP/DNS Tab Default setting Get IP address automatically: $$IP address: 0.0.0.0Subnet mask: 0.0.0.0Gateway address: 0.0.0.0Get DNS address automatically: $$Primary DNS address:
0.0.0.0Secondary DNS address: 0.0.0.0 You can make the settings for the IP (Internet Protocol) address and DNS (Domain Name Server). Set necessary items according to the information provided by your Internet service provider. 176 00M1000EN.book 177 a In Step 5 on P186, tap IP/DNS tab y tap the item to set, and tap
[Done] after setting, and then tap [Done] on the Internet account screen Get IP address automatically
: Check when you assign the IP address to your FOMA handset automatically on the network. If you do not check this, the settings for IP address/Subnet mask/Gateway address are required.
$$ to assign, $$not to assign. IP address
: Enter the IP address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Subnet mask : Enter the subnet mask.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Gateway address
: Enter the gateway address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Get DNS address automatically
: Check when you assign the DNS address to your FOMA handset automatically on the network. If you do not check this, the settings for Primary DNS address/Secondary DNS address are required. I n t e r n e t Primary DNS address
: Enter the main DNS address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Secondary DNS address
: Enter the sub DNS address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Proxy Tab Default setting Use proxy server: $$Auto proxy: $$Auto proxy server address: -Proxy server address: -Proxy server port: 0Exclude proxy: -
You can set the proxy server used to connect to the Internet via an intranet. Set necessary items according to the information provided by your Internet service provider. 177 00M1000EN.book 178 a In Step 5 on P186, tap Proxy taby tap the item to set, and tap
[Done] after setting, and then tap [Done] on the Internet account screen Use proxy server
: Check when using the proxy server.
$$ to use, $$ not to use. Auto proxy setting
: Check when getting the proxy settings automatically.
$$ to get, $$ not to get. Auto proxy server address
: When Use proxy server/Auto proxy is set to $$, enter the address of the auto proxy server.
Up to 50 single-byte characters can be entered. Proxy server address
: When Use proxy server is set to $$ and Auto proxy is set to $$, enter the address of the proxy server.
Up to 50 single-byte characters can be entered. Proxy server port
: When Use proxy server is set to $$ and Auto proxy is set to $$, enter the address of the proxy server.
The effective port is 0 to 65535. Proxy exclusion
: When Use proxy server is set to $$ and Auto proxy is set to $$, enter an URL requiring no connection to the proxy server.
Up to 256 single-byte characters can be entered. Other Tab Default setting PPP Compression: $$Plain text authentication: $$Caller ID: OFF (FOMA CSD) ON
(PACKET)Auto launch VPN: $$VPN policy: -
You can make other settings required to connect to the Internet. Set necessary items according to the information provided by your Internet service provider. I n t e r n e t 178 00M1000EN.book 179 a In Step 5 on P186, tap Other taby tap the item to set, and tap
[Done] after setting, and then tap [Done] on the Internet account screen PPP Compression
: Check when executing PPP (Point to Point Protocol) compression.
$$ to compress, $$ not to compress. Plain text authentication
: Check when executing the plain text authentication.
$$ to authenticate, $$ not to authenticate. Caller number identification
: Set the Caller ID. ON prefixes 186 and OFF prefixes 184 automatically. System setting is according to the Caller ID setting (3 P62).
Auto launch VPN In FOMA CSD setting, no System appears.
: Check if you enable VPN policy automatically when starting connection. If you check this, the settings for VPN policy are required.
$$ to enable, $$ to disable.
When no VPN is installed or no VPN policy is provided, you cannot set this item. I n t e r n e t VPN policy
: Select VPN policy that is enabled automatically when starting connection. Setting Timeout You can set the time to automatically disconnect the Internet. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Connection tab y Internet account on the Control panel screen, and then tap Other tab to make the settings on the Internet account screen Dial-up timeout
: Selects the duration between the dial-up connection and automatic disconnection.
If you do not automatically disconnect the Internet, select [Never]. Packet timeout: Selects the duration between the packet connection and automatic disconnection.
If you do not automatically disconnect the Internet, select [Never]. b Tap the item to set and tap [Done]after setting
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the setting. 179 00M1000EN.book 180 Opening Web Pages You can open Web pages with simple operations. Before you can open Web pages, you have to set up the Internet connection. 3P182 Web Page Screen Menu Bar Content View Area Scroll Bar Icon name Icon Description a Tab b Back c Forward
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
d Stop/Refresh
$$/$$
Completed downloading all Web page data. Downloading Web page data. Completed downloading all SSL-enabled Web page data. Downloading SSL-enabled Web page data. Returns to the previously displayed page (address). After returning to the previous page by "Back", goes to the next page
(address). When loading a page, stops reloading. When not loading, updates the current page to the latest. e Progress Bar
$$
$$
$$
$$
Appears during URL searching. Total data amount to download is unclear. Completed downloading. Total data amount to download is clear. Completed downloading. Downloading multiple data."Total number of data items/Number of downloaded items" - "Downloaded data amount". I n t e r n e t 180 00M1000EN.book 181 1Menu bar Tap Browse or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Browse Edit Open page . P201 Close tab. P201 Page information. P202 Find. P203 Bookmarks . P204 Saved pages . P208 History . P204 Downloads . P211 Disconnect . P195 Copy . P210 Paste . P210 Cut . P210 Select all. P210 Full-Screen . P199 Landscape . P199 Fit-to-Screen. P199 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P214
Some items might not be available depending on the operation. 1Popup menu Point a blank part in the Content view area to display the following items:
Link . P202 Image . P203 Back . P197 Forward. P197 Reload . P198 Tab . P198 Show. P199 I n t e r n e t Opening Web Pages via the Internet a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar
If your FOMA handset has already connected to the Internet, the left screen does not appear. 181 00M1000EN.book 182 b Tap Account name and select the account y Tap Connections c Tap the item (linked page) Repeat Step 3 to open your desired Web page. Disconnecting the Internet a While viewing the Web page, tap Browsey Disconnect y Yes on the Menu bar The Internet is disconnected. 1Security communications You can open Web pages compatible with SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). SSL-enabled pages use data encryption for data transmission to prevent hacking or impersonation so that you can more safely exchange personal information such as addresses, phone numbers and credit card numbers.
To connect to SSL pages, the CA certificate is required. You can check the content of the certificate as well as enable/disable it. 3P220 I n t e r n e t 182 00M1000EN.book 183 Operations When Opening Web Pages Basic operations when opening Web pages are as follows:
Selecting Linked pages/Items 1Link An item used to go to related pages from the current Web page. Tap your desired item to open the linked Web page. 1Text box A box where you can enter characters. Tap a text box to enter characters. I n t e r n e t 1Radio button Radio buttons are for selecting one of multiple options. Tap $$ to change $$ to $$. 183 00M1000EN.book 184 1Check box Check boxes are for selecting one or more items from multiple options. Tap $$ to change $$ to $$.
If you tap a marked box again, it becomes unmarked. 1Pull down menu With pull down menus, you cannot see the choices until you select a menu. Once selected, a list appears for further selection. Tap a pull down menu. From a list, tap the item. Opening the Previous/Next Page You can return to the last Web page viewed or go to the next page.
$$
$$
: The FOMA handset saves the last page you viewed. Tap to return to the previous page.
: The FOMA handset saves the next page. Tap to go to the next page. I n t e r n e t 184 00M1000EN.book 185 Scrolling the Display While viewing Web pages, if the content of the page is larger than the display, you can scroll the display to see the entire information. 1To scroll by dragging the Scroll bar Drag the scroll bar to display the hidden part. 1To scroll by dragging the screen Drag the screen to display the hidden part. I n t e r n e t NOTE
You can also scroll the screen with the Navigation key. Changing Tabs When multiple tabs appear, you switch the tab. a While viewing the Web page, point a blank part in the Content view area, and tap Tab y the desired tab on the Popup menu 185 00M1000EN.book 186 Reloading Information You can update the Web page information to the latest. If the Web page cannot appear due to disconnection, etc., you may display the page by this operation.
$$ : Tap to reload the information.
During reloading, tap $$ to stop reloading. Changing a Web Page View You can change the Web page view. Select one of the following 4 views:
Full-Screen Fit-to-Screen Landscape Zoom I n t e r n e t 186 00M1000EN.book 187 a While viewing the Web page, tap Edit on the Menu bar Full-Screen
: Displays a Web page in the original size. The content of the Web page exceeds the display area.
When displaying in Landscape, you cannot select this. Landscape
: Displays a Web page in the original size with 90-degree rotated to the right. The content of the Web page exceeds the display area.
You can set the rotation direction. 3P218 Fit-to-Screen : Displays a Web page to fit on the display size. The content of the Web page is fixed to the width of the display. Zoom
: Set the desired zoom level to change the display size. b Tap a view 1To cancel the view you set While viewing the Web page, tap Edit y the view with $$ on the Menu bar. 1When selecting Zoom Drag $$ to change the zoom level3 tap [Done]
Set AutoZoom to $$ to automatically adjust the Web page size when displaying, if the page supports this function. 1To display the Menu bar in Full-Screen/Landscape view Point the screen and tap Menu bar in the Popup menu/press a. NOTE
Pressing b also changes into Landscape view. Press b again to return to the previous view.
If you change a view, some Web pages may not appear. Opening Web Pages by Entering URL You can enter the URL to open your desired Web pages. You can also open the Web pages by adding a new tab. I n t e r n e t 187 00M1000EN.book 188 a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Open page on the Menu bar
Tap $$ on the right end of Location to list recently accessed URLs (up to 10 URLs). You can open the Web page by selecting the URL from the list.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operations. 1To open Web pages by adding a new tab Check [Open page in new window $$].
$$ to add, $$ not to add. b Tap Location, and enter an URL y tap [Open]
Up to XX single-byte characters can be entered for an URL. 1To close the tab you added While viewing the Web page of the tab, tap Browse y Close tab on the Menu bar Viewing Web Page Information a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Page information on the Menu bar Title Location Size of page Security
: Displays the title of the Web page.
: Displays the URL of the Web page.
: Displays the size of the Web page.
: Displays whether the Web page supports data encryption. 1To copy the URL of the current Web page Tap [Copy URL]
How to paste. 3 P210 1To add a bookmark for the current Web page Tap [Bookmark]
Subsequent operations 3 P204 1To save the current Web page Tap [Save]
Subsequent operations 3 P207 b Check the information and tap [Done]
I n t e r n e t 188 00M1000EN.book 189 Viewing Link Information a While viewing the Web page, use 9 to select the link, and point a blank part in the Content view area and tap Link on the Popup menu 1To view the linked page Tap [Open]
Set [New tab] to $$ to view the linked page on the new tab. 1To copy the URL of the linked page Tap [Copy URL]
Subsequent operations 3 P210 1To add a bookmark for the linked page Tap [Bookmark]
Subsequent operations 3 P204 b Check the information ant tap [Done]
Viewing Image Information a While viewing the Web page, point an image and tap Image on the Popup menu 1To view an image with the Image viewer Tap [Open]
Subsequent operations 3 P274 1To save an image in the FOMA handset Tap [Save]
Storage destination 3 P274 1To send an image Tap [send]
Subsequent operations 3 P310 b Check the information ant tap [Done]
I n t e r n e t 189 00M1000EN.book 190 Finding Text in Web Pages a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Find on the Menu bar
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operations. b Enter the characters to find, and tap [Direction] ([$$ Up]/[$$
Down]) y tap [Find]
I n t e r n e t Opening Web Pages from History Web pages you viewed are saved in History. You can directly view the Web pages from History. a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y History on the Menu bar 1To clear History Tap [Clear]
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operations.
Tap [Open] to view the highlighted Web page. b Tap the Web page to view 190 00M1000EN.book 191 Opening Web Pages Quickly by Adding Bookmarks Adding Bookmarks for Web Pages To return to Web pages you frequently view quickly, add bookmarks for the pages. Up to XXX bookmarks can be added. a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Page information on the Menu bar and tap [Bookmarks] on the Page information screen
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operations. b Tap Title and enter a title y tap [Add]
Up to XX double- or single-byte characters can be entered for a title. Opening Web Pages from Bookmarks You can easily open Web pages from bookmarks you added. a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Bookmarks on the Menu bar b Tap the bookmark for the Web page to view I n t e r n e t 191 00M1000EN.book 192 Editing Bookmarks You can select and edit bookmarks you added. a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Bookmarks on the Menu bar b Tap $$ of the bookmark to edit Location 1To change the title of a bookmark
: Displays the URL of a bookmark to edit. Tap Title and enter a new title
Up to XX double- or singly-byte characters can be entered. 1To send the URL of a bookmark Tap [send]
Subsequent operations 3 P310 1To delete a bookmark Tap [Delete], and tap [Yes] on the Delete confirmation screen I n t e r n e t c Tap [DONE]
Deleting Bookmarks You can select and delete bookmarks you added. a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Bookmarks on the Menu bar b Tap $$ of the bookmark to delete c On the Menu bar, tap Browsey Delete, and tap [Yes] on the delete
$$ changes into $$. confirmation screen
Tap [No] to cancel deleting. d Tap [Yes]
192 00M1000EN.book 193 Saving Web Pages Information Saving Web Pages You can save Web pages you might want to refer to later. Up to XXX pages can be saved. (The maximum number of savable pages varies depending on the amount of data of the pages.) a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Page information on the Menu bar, and then tap [Save] on the Page information screen
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operations. b Enter the title y tap [Save]
Up to XX double- or single-byte characters can be entered for a title. Opening Web Pages You Saved You can select and open Web pages you saved. a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Saved pages on the Menu bar
]
b Tap the Web page name to view I n t e r n e t 193 00M1000EN.book 194 Editing Web Pages You Saved You can select and edit Web pages you saved. a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Saved pages on the Menu bar b Tap $$ of the Web page to edit Size of page
: Displays the file size of the Web pages you saved. Last modified : Displays the date when you saved the pages. 1To change the title Tap Title and enter a new title
Up to XX double- or single-byte characters can be entered for a title. 1To delete the Web page Tap [Delete], and tap [Yes] on the Delete confirmation screen c Tap [Done]
Deleting Web Pages You Saved You can select and delete Web pages you saved. I n t e r n e t 194 00M1000EN.book 195 a While viewing the Web page, tap Browse y Saved pages on the Menu bar b Tap $$ of the Web page to delete c On the Menu bar, tap Browsey Delete, and tap [Yes] on the delete
$$ changes into $$. confirmation screen
Tap [No] to cancel the operations. Copying/Cutting and Pasting Text in Web Pages You can copy, cut and paste characters you entered or the content of Web pages into other entry screens. Copying/Cutting a Drag the area to copy y tap Edity Copy/Cut on the Menu bar, The copied/cut information is stored in the clipboard. 1To copy/cut all information on a page a Tap Edit y Select all on the Menu bar The all information on the screen is selected. b Tap Edity Copy/Cut on the Menu bar, The copied/cut information is stored in the clipboard. NOTE
A memory area where copied/cut information is stored. The clipboard stores a copy of the last information that was copied or cut. Copying/cutting other information overwrites the data stored in the clipboard. Turning the FOMA handset off or resetting the settings also clears the data in the clipboard. I n t e r n e t 195 00M1000EN.book 196 Pasting a Tap the position to paste the data, and tap Edit y Paste on the Menu bar Downloading Data from Web Pages You can download various applications from the Internet. You can also delete data you downloaded later. a While viewing the Web page, tap the item to download
$$ : Data being downloaded.
$$ : Data that is suspended during downloading.
$$ : Data that has been downloaded. I n t e r n e t b Downloading completes NOTE
Installing data you downloaded 3 P268 Installing Ring Tone Files You can install downloaded ring tone files as ring tones. a Tap the ring tone file to install on the Download data list screen
$$ : Stops audio
$$ : Plays back audio. 1To delete a ring tone file Tap [Delete]
1To save a ring tone file in the FOMA handset Tap [Save]
b Tap [Install ring tone]
196 00M1000EN.book 197 Viewing Downloaded Data Information You can view details on data you downloaded. a Gap $$ of data to view on the Download data list screen
: Displays a name of the data. name Current size : Displays the size of the current file. Total size Location Date
: Displays the total size of the files.
: Displays the URL of the source file.
: Displays the date of the data created. b Check the information and tap [Done]
Deleting Downloaded Data You can select and delete data you downloaded. a On the Download data list screen, tap $$ of data to delete b Tap Browsey Delete on the Menu bar, and tap [Yes] on the delete
$$ changes into $$. confirmation screen
Tap [No] to cancel deleting. Using Phone To/Mail To/Web To Functions By tapping highlighted information (a phone number, email address, or URL) on a Web page/
email screen, you can make a call, send a message or open a Web page. Using Phone To Function By tapping a phone number, etc. on a Web page/email, you can make a call. I n t e r n e t 197 00M1000EN.book 198 a Tap a displayed phone number, etc. b Tap [Dial]/[Video Call]
Subsequent operations 3 P66, P86 NOTE
Phone To function may not be available depending on Web pages. I n t e r n e t Using Mail To Function By tapping an email address, etc. on a Web page/email, you can send an email message. a Tap a displayed email address, etc. The email composing screen with the email address entered appears.
Subsequent operations 3 Step 3 on P235 NOTE
Mail To function may not be available depending on Web pages. Using Web To Function By tapping an URL, etc. on a Web page/email, you can open a Web page. a Tap a displayed URL, etc. NOTE
Web To function may not be available depending on Web pages. 198 00M1000EN.book 199 Setting Web Browser Preferences You can make various browser settings. a While viewing the Web page, tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar b Tap the tab to set
For each tab settings, see pages 215 to 219. General Tab Default setting Choose encoding: Automatic selection Fallback: Shift-JIS HTTP Timeout: 60 seconds Homepage: Blank On the General tab, you can set various browser settings including the character code for the browser, the time to connect, and the default homepage. a In Step 2 on P214, tap General tab y tap the item to set, and tap
[Done] after setting Choose encoding
: Set the normal character code.
: Set the spare character code. Fallback HTTP Timeout
: Some Web pages require a while to open. Set the time before the FOMA handset stops opening the Web page. Homepage
: Enter the URL for the default home page.
Tap [Use current] to set the current Web page to the default.
Tap [Blank] to set the blank page to the default. NOTE
Usually, Choose encoding should be set to Automatic selection. However, some Web pages may display characters in correctly. In this case, changing into other option may display characters correctly. I n t e r n e t 199 00M1000EN.book 200 Cache Tab Default setting Cache size: $$ Small Use cookies: Always On the Cache tab, you can set cache and cookies for the browser. a In Step 2 on P214, tap Cache tab y tap the item to set, and tap
[Done] after setting Cache size:
$$ Small
$$ Large Use cookies:
Always
: Allocates the small cache size.
: Allocates the large cache size.
:
: You can use cookies when viewing cookie-
enabled Web pages. Never
: You can never use cookies when viewing Ask cookie-enabled Web pages.
: You can select how to use cookies on the confirmation screen when viewing cookie-
enabled Web pages. Cache [Clear]
: Tap to clear the cache data. Cookies [Clear]: Tap to clear the cookie data. I n t e r n e t 200 00M1000EN.book 201 Multimedia Tab On the Multimedia tab, you can set the operations of images, animations and sound effects. a In Step 2 on P214, tap Multimedia tab y tap the item to set, and tap [DONE] after setting Default setting All $$
Load all images$$
: Set whether display images or not when viewing Web pages with images.
$$ to display, $$ not to display. Enable animations$$
: Set whether play back animations or not when viewing Web pages with animations.
$$ to play back, $$ not to play back. Enable javascript $$
: Set whether enable JavaScript or not when viewing Web pages with JavaScript. $$ to enable, $$ to disable. Ignore refresh $$
: Set whether enable the automatic refresh of Web pages or not.
$$ to enable, $$ to disable. Enable BGSound $$
: Set whether enable sound effects or not when viewing Web pages.
$$ to enable, $$ to disable. I n t e r n e t 201 00M1000EN.book 202 Display Tab Default setting Landscape Rotation:Righthand Show frames as:All frames Horizontal scrollbar:Auto Vertical scrollbar:Auto Block popups:Allow user requested popups On the Display tab, you can set how to show frames and popups. a In Step 2 on P214, tap Display tab y tap the item to set, and tap
[Done] after setting Landscape Rotation Lefthand
: Rotates the Web page to the left in
"Landscape" view (3 P199). Righthand
: Rotates the Web page to the right in
"Landscape" view (3 P199). Show frames as All frames
: Displays all frames when viewing frame-
enabled Web pages. List of frames: Displays a list of frames when viewing frame-
enabled Web pages. No frames
: Displays no frames even when viewing frame-
enabled Web pages. Horizontal scrollbar Auto ON OFF
: Displays the Horizontal scrollbar when viewing the Web page larger than the display screen.
: Always displays the Horizontal scrollbar.
: Displays no Horizontal scrollbar. Vertical scrollbar Auto ON OFF
: Displays the Vertical scrollbar when viewing the Web page larger than the display screen.
: Always displays the Vertical scrollbar.
: Displays no Vertical scrollbar. Block popups Don't block
: Displays popup windows when viewing popup-
enabled Web pages. Block all
: Displays no popup windows when viewing popup-enabled Web pages. Allow user requested popups
: You can select whether display popup windows on the confirmation screen when viewing popup-enabled Web pages. Plug-ins Tab You can check plug-ins installed in the browser. I n t e r n e t 202 00M1000EN.book 203 a In Step 2 on P214, tap Plug-instab, and tap [Done] after checking The list of installed plug-ins appears.
Tap the plug-in name to view the plug-in information. NOTE
What is cache, cookies, and JavaScript? 3 P181 When an Incoming Call Arrives during Internet Connection
<<Comment>> <Insert later >
Using Certificates Checking User/CA Certificates You can check the certificates required for establishing security communications. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Handset tab y Certificate manager on the Control panel screen, and then tap the User tab/Certificates tab on the Certificate list screen List of user certificates List of CA certificates b Tap the certificate name y tap [Details]
I n t e r n e t 203 00M1000EN.book 204 1About the Certificate User certificates CA (Certification Authority) certificates
: Digital data that identifies users. Using user certificates provides you easier and more secure user authentication than normal one that requires the entry of user ID and password.
: The certificate issued by the certifier. It is stored in your FOMA handset by default. Deleting Certificates You can delete User certificates.
You cannot delete CA certificates. a Tap the certificate name on the User certificate list screen y Tap
[Delete]
NOTE
If you delete a user certificate, the corresponding Web pages no longer appear. I n t e r n e t 204 00M1000EN.book 205 00M1000EN.book 206 Messaging Email. 208 About Short Message Service (SMS) . 209 Using Mopera Email Service . 210 Settings Required for Using Email . 212 Viewing Messaging Account List . 218 1Composing Emails Composing and Sending Email . 219 Attaching Files. 223 Saving Unfinished Emails for Sending Later . 225 1Receiving/Managing Emails Connecting to Mail Server to Receive Emails . 226 Replying to Emails . 227 Forwarding Emails . 228 Managing Sender Email Addresses and Phone Numbers. 228 Searching Emails . 230 Searching Text Strings in Emails. 231 Copying/Cutting and Pasting Strings in Emails . 231 Copying/Cutting . 231 1Managing on Mailbox Managing Files Attached to Emails . 232 1Messaging Settings Viewing Messages on Email/SMS Message List Screen . 234 206 00M1000EN.book 207 1Creating Short Message Service (SMS) Messages Creating/Editing/Deleting Messaging Folders . 239 Setting Messaging. 243 1Receiving/Managing SMS Messages Creating and Sending SMS Messages . 244 Saving Unfinished SMS Messages for Sending Later . 245 Automatically Receiving SMS Messages . 246 Checking for Incoming SMS Messages. 246 Viewing SMS Messages Received . 247 Saving SMS Messages in UIM . 247 1SMS Settings Performing SMS settings . 248 207 00M1000EN.book 208 Email
"Internet mail (hereafter "email") via general network service providers is available on FOMA handset. To use email, you are required to subscribe the mopera email service (3 P226) or network service providers supported by FOMA, and to set Internet connection (3 P185) and email account (3 P228). 2Files can be attached to outgoing 2Emails can be automatically emails 3 P246 Files saved in your FOMA handset can be attached to outgoing emails. received 3 P231, P243 You can set your FOMA handset to receive incoming emails automatically or at a specified time. 2Incoming emails can be sorted to 2Messages can be sent/received specified folders 3 P257 Incoming emails can be sorted to specified folders by using the sender's email address or subject of the message as a sorting key. using Short Message Service (SMS) 3 P261, P263 SMS messages can be exchanged among other FOMA handsets. Number of Characters/Attachments that can be Sent/Received Item Send Destination address Up to XX addresses including To, Cc, and Bcc (up to 1000 single-byte characters per email) Receive Subject Body text Attachment Up to 1000 characters regardless of double- or single-byte Up to XXXX characters regardless of double- or single-byte Up to 65536 characters regardless of double- or single-byte Up to XXXX characters regardless of double- or single-byte Up to XX files, less than (or equal to) XX bytes in total Up to XX files, less than (or equal to) XX bytes in total Receiving Emails Receiving emails with your FOMA handset requires connection to the mail server of your network service provider. You can set your FOMA handset to automatically receive emails.
Connecting to mail server to receive emails 3 P243 NOTE
Deco-mail/HTML messages can be received except the messages that contain JavaScript or Flash images. M e s s a g n g i 208 00M1000EN.book 209 About Short Message Service (SMS) Short Message Service (SMS) allows you to exchange text messages among other FOMA handsets. Subscription to network service providers is not required for this service.
Sending/receiving SMS messages 3 P261, P263 NOTE
Text messages cannot be sent/received from overseas by using Short Message Service (SMS).
The received SMS messages in your FOMA handset can be saved to a UIM. 3 P265 SMS Message Destination Address A "subscriber's mobile phone number" is used as the destination address for sending a SMS message. Number of Characters That can be Sent/Received The number of characters that can be sent/received using Short Message Service (SMS) is as shown below:
Item Double-byte characters (kanji, Single-byte characters (alphanumeric Destination address hiragana, etc.) characters, etc.) 20 (numerals only) Body text
*: When only single-byte alphanumeric characters or symbols (excluding { } [ ] - ` ) are 160*
70 used When FOMA handset fails to receive SMS Messages SMS messages that arrive at the Short Message Center are immediately sent to your FOMA handsets. However, in case of your FOMA handset is powered off, out of the service area, etc., the messages are stored at the Center. NOTE
The maximum time of SMS messages to be stored at the Short Message Center is 72 hours. You can specify the retention time in "SMS retention time" (3 P266).
SMS messages are deleted when the retention time has elapsed.
SMS messages stored at the Short Message Center can be received by Check for new SMS (3 P263).
When FOMA handset received SMS messages, the SMS messages stored at the Short Message Center are deleted. The received SMS messages are saved in FOMA handset. 3 P264 M e s s a g n g i 209 00M1000EN.book 210 1Terminology for email IMAP IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) is a protocol for receiving emails from storage servers. In this method, emails are managed in a mailbox on the servers and recipients can determine to receive or discard the emails after checking subjects and senders. POP POP (Post Office Protocol) is a protocol for receiving emails from storage servers. This method is widely used in pair with the protocol for sending emails called SMTP. Unlike IMAP, recipients receives all emails and unable to check the lists of senders or subjects before mail reception. SMTP SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is a protocol for sending emails, which allows email exchange between servers or sending of emails by users. Using Mopera Email Service This service requires a separate subscription. Once you make a subscription at a DoCoMo shop or by phone, you can make email settings easily with the handset. Either of the following services can be selected according to your need:
M e s s a g n g i mopera POP Mail (400 yen/month (420 yen including tax))
* Separate communication charges apply. This standard email service allows you to enjoy full-fledged messaging at reasonable charges. mopera IMAP Mail (1400 yen/month (1470 yen including tax))
* Separate communication charges apply. This high-end service is recommended to users who exchange many emails, frequently exchange large emails, or use the same email address from different handsets. The subjects of emails can be checked to allow users to select and retrieve only emails they want to read, which makes the service convenient for mobile use. Quick Start Quick Start automates the setting of connection required for mopera email service for easy messaging setup. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, tap Connect tab y Internet account in the Control panel screen, and tap Quick Start tab in the Internet account screen 210 00M1000EN.book 211 b Tap [Auto Configure]
c Tap [Yes], and tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen M e s s a g n g i 211 00M1000EN.book 212 Settings Required for Using Email Internet access point setting (3 P182) and email account setting (see below) are required to use email. For setting information, see documents provided by your network operator. You have an email address
: Yes
: No You are already using mopera email service 3 P226 Subscribe to mopera email service 3 P226 Use Quick Start for setting You are subscribing to another network operator Subscribe to another network operator Use Quick Start for setting Perform Internet access point settings 3 P182 Perform email account settings 3 See below Email is available Performing Email Account Settings Settings are required for sending/receiving emails. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Connect tab y Messaging account in the Control panel screen 1To edit an email account Tap the account to edit y Tap [Edit]
Perform Step 3 and operations that follow as required. 1To delete an email account Tap [Delete], and tap [Yes] in the Confirm delete screen M e s s a g n g i 212 00M1000EN.book 213 b Tap [New]
c Tap the tab to set
On how to set the individual tabs, see P229 to P234. Basic Tab The account name, email address, Internet account used for connection, etc. are set up. Default setting Account name: - Owner name: - Email address:
Connection type: POP3 Internet account: -
a Tap Basic tab in Step 3 on P229 y Tap the field for the item to set up y Tap [Done] after setting Account name
: Set the account name to be displayed on the messaging account list.
Up to 90 double-or single-byte characters can be entered. Owner
: Set the name, etc. of the person who uses the account.
Up to 90 double-or single-byte characters can be entered. Email address: Set the email address to be used for this account.
Up to 90 single-byte characters can be Connection type entered. IMAP
: Specify settings to connect to a mail server that supports IMAP. POP3
: Specify settings to connect to a mail server that supports POP3. Internet account
: Set up the Internet account to use for sending/
receiving emails. M e s s a g n g i 213 00M1000EN.book 214 Password Tab Default setting Inbox username: -
Inbox password: - Use SMTP authentication: $$
Use inbox login details: $$ Outbox username: - Outbox password: -
Set the username, password, etc. a Tap Password tab in Step 3 on P229 y Tap the field for the item to set up yTap [Done] after setting Inbox Inbox username : Set the username for this email account.
Up to 90 single-byte characters can be entered. Inbox password : Set up the password for this email account. The entered password is masked with "4."
Outbox Use SMTP authentication
: Select if SMTP server authentication is required. To select this, Inbox username and Inbox password must be set.
$$ indicates use of SMTP authentication and $$ non-use. Use inbox login details
: Select this to use the username and password for inbox SMTP authentication also for outbox.
$$ indicates use of the same username and password and $$ non-use. Outbox username
: Set the username for inbox SMTP authentication.
Up to XX single-byte characters can be Outbox password entered.
: Set up the password for inbox SMTP authentication. The entered password is masked with "4". M e s s a g n g i 214 00M1000EN.book 215 Inbox Tab Default setting Incoming server address: - Download: Only headers Size: 1KB No. of lines: 0 Set the incoming server address and the method of receiving emails. a In Step 3 on P229, tap Inbox tab y Tap the field for the item to set up y Tap [Done] after setting Incoming server address
: Set the address of the incoming mail server (POP3/
IMAP).
Up to 90 single-byte characters can be entered. Download Only headers
: Set this to receive only the subjects of emails. Body text or attachments are not received. Size : Specify the size of an email to receive. Size must be set. No. of lines
: Specify the number of lines in an email to receive. No. of lines must be set. No restrictions
: Set this up to receive emails as they are.
: Set up the size of an email. Size
Any size in the range of 1 to 99999 KB can be used for setup. No. of lines
: Set the number of lines in an email.
Any number can be set within the range of 0 to 999. M e s s a g n g i 215 00M1000EN.book 216 1Scheduling email checking Set your handset to automatically connect to the mail server to check for any incoming email at scheduled timings. Tap [Schedule]
Schedule download
: Select this to use the schedule to receive emails.
$$ indicates use of the schedule and $$ non-use.
$$ Set time: Select this to specify the time to receive emails. To set this, Check email at must be set.
$$ indicates use of time specification to receive emails and $$ non-use.
$$Set interval
: Select this to specify the interval to receive emails. To set this, Check email every must be set.
$$ indicates use of interval specification to receive emails and $$ non-use. Check email at
: Up to 3 different times of the day can be specified to automatically check any incoming email. Check email every
: The interval can be specified for automatically check any incoming email. Outbox Tab Set the outgoing server address. a Tap the Outbox tab in Step 3 on P229 y Tap the field for the item to set upy Tap [Done] after setting Default setting Outgoing server address:
Outgoing server address: Set up the SMTP server address.
Up to 90 single-byte characters can be entered. M e s s a g n g i 216 00M1000EN.book 217 Advanced Tab Default setting Outgoing security: not specified Outgoing mail port: 25 Use MIME encryption: $$
Incoming security: Not specified Incoming mail port: 110 Secure password authentication: $$
Delete from server: $$
Perform settings related to mail server security, etc. a Tap the Advanced tab in Step 3 on P229 y Tap the field for the item to set up y Tap [Done] after setting Outgoing security : Specify the use of SSL communication for Outgoing mail port: Set the outgoing mail port number. sending emails.
Any number within the range of 0 to 65535 can be used for set up. Use MIME encryption
: Select this to use MIME encryption to send emails.
$$ indicates use of MIME and $$ non-use. Incoming security : Specify the use of SSL communication for receiving emails. Incoming mail port: Set up the incoming mail port number.
Any number within the range of 0 to Secure password authentication 65535.
: Select this to encrypt the password to send to the server.
$$ indicates use of encryption and $$ non-
use. Delete from server: Select this to delete emails from the server when they have been delivered. M e s s a g n g i 217 00M1000EN.book 218 Email notification Tab Default setting Automatic download: XXX Specify the use of email notification before receiving when any email has been delivered to the specified account. a Tap the Email notification tab in Step 3 on P229 y Tap the field for the item to set up y Tap [Done] after setting Automatic download
: Select this to get notified of an incoming email before receiving it.
$$ indicates use of notification before receiving and $$ non-use. IAP selection: Use this function to specify the account for receiving emails. M e s s a g n g i Viewing Messaging Account List This screen lists the email accounts that have been set up and allows you to use various messaging functions. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar a Messaging service type
$$ : Short Message Service (SMS) b Account name c No. of unread emails d No. of unsent emails 1Items available from the Menu bar on the messaging account list screen Tap Message or Edit on the Menu bar to display items as shown below:
Browse Edit Find . P247 Receive & send . P243 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P260
Some items may not be available depending on the operation. 218 00M1000EN.book 219 Composing and Sending Email Compose and send a new email. a Tap $$ y account name to use in the Application Selector bar, and tap [New] in the message list screen
$$
$$
: Tap to enter the destination address (Cc, Bcc), etc. 3 P239
: Tap to attach a file 3 P240 b Tap To and enter the destination address
Up to 1000 double - or single-byte characters can be entered.
Specifying a recipient from the contact list 3 P238
More than one recipient can be specified by separating email addresses with ", (commas)". c Tap Subject and enter the subject
Up to 1000 double - or single-byte characters can be entered. M e s s a g n g i 219 00M1000EN.book 220 d Tap the text field and enter text
Up to 65536 double or single byte characters can be entered.
Adding contact 3 P239 e Tap [Send]
Tap $$Save to outbox to save the composed message in outbox without sending it. M e s s a g n g i f Tap $$Send immediately y [Done]
The Connect to mail server screen is displayed and the email is sent after connection has been established.
Tap [Cancel] in the Connect to mail server screen to cancel sending. However, sending may not be canceled depending on the timing. 1Items available from the Menu bar Tapping Message or Edit in the Menu bar in the Create email screen displays items as shown below:
Message Edit New . P235 Attach your card. P242 Find . P247, P248 Find next . P248 Delete message . P259 Disconnect . P195 Cut . P249 Copy . P249 Paste . P249 Select all . P249 Select contact . P239 Set zoom level . P141 Preferences . P260
Some items may not be available depending on the operation. NOTE
Text input method 3 P466 220 00M1000EN.book 221 Specifying a Recipient from the Contact List From the Create email screen, search for an email address stored in the contact list and insert it. A recipient whose email address is not stored cannot be specified. a Tap To in the Create email screen, and tap $$ of the recipient to search for y [Done] in the Select contact screen
If you have selected contact data containing more than one email address, go on to select another email address.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. Displaying Contact List to Create Emails The Create email screen can be displayed from the contact list screen. This operation cannot be performed for a contact whose email address is not stored. a Tap an email address in the contact list screen M e s s a g n g i
Displaying the contact list screen 3 P107 221 00M1000EN.book 222 Adding Destination Address (Cc, Bcc) Adding one or more destination address allows you to send an email containing the same message to more than one recipient at one time. a Tap the $$ tab in the Create email screen To Cc
: Enter the recipient's email address. A message with no destination address specified in To cannot be sent.
: Enter a destination address to send the message to in addition to To. Bcc
: Enter an intended recipient whom you want to hide from the recipient specified in To or Cc. The entered email address will not be visible to the other recipients. b Tap To/Cc/Bcc and enter the destination address
Up to 1000 single-byte characters can be entered.
Specifying a recipient from the contact list 3 P238 NOTE
Text input method 3 P466
In the To/Cc/Bcc field, more than one recipient can be specified by separating email addresses with ",
(commas)". M e s s a g n g i Inserting Contact Data to Email Body Text Information stored in the contact list can be inserted to email body text. This function is useful for sending contact information by email, etc. a Tap Edit y Select contact on the Menu bar in the Create email screen, and check $$ of the recipient to add in the Select contact screen y Tap [Text]
Tap Select all $$ to check all items. b Check $$ of the item to send y Tap [Done]
The contact data are inserted to the email body text. 222 00M1000EN.book 223 Setting Priority for Email Outgoing emails can be assigned priorities according to their contents. a Tap the $$ tab y Priority in the Create email screen High
: Assign this to emails containing important messages that you want the recipients to read without fail. Normal: Assign this to emails containing messages of average importance not much affected by priority. Low
: Assign this to emails containing messages of no particular importance that may be read later. b Select a priority Attaching Files Voice, video, image and document files, etc. saved in your FOMA handset can be attached to outgoing emails. a Tap the $$ tab y [Add] in the Create email screen, and tap Type in the Add attachment screen Voice : Select from voice memos, etc., recorded on the FOMA handset. Video : Select from video clips captured with the FOMA handset or downloaded from websites, etc. Image : Select from still images captured with the FOMA handset or downloaded from websites, etc. Document
: Select from document files (Word or Excel files, etc.).
: Select from all stored files. Other M e s s a g n g i 223 00M1000EN.book 224 b Select the type of the file to attach y Tap [Execute]
1If Voice has been selected Select the folder containing the intended file. Files available as attachments are listed. A file can be selected and played/stopped. 1If Video has been selected Select the folder containing the intended file. Files available as attachments are listed. 1If Image has been selected M e s s a g n g i Select the folder containing the intended file. Files available as attachments are listed. The view of the list can be changed. 1If Document has been selected Select the folder containing the intended file. Files available as attachments are listed. 1If Other has been selected Select the folder containing the intended file. Files available as attachments are listed. c Tap the file to attach y Tap [Select]
224 00M1000EN.book 225 1To delete attachment a Tap the $$ tab in the Create email screen y Tap $$ of the attachment to delete
$$ is switched to $$. b Tap [Delete]
Attaching vCard Contact data can be attached as they are to outgoing emails. a Tap Message y Attach your card on the Menu bar in the Create email screen
Tap the $$ tab in the Create email screen to display the vCard attached for confirmation. Saving Unfinished Emails for Sending Later Saving Unfinished Emails Emails in the process of creation or editing can be saved to unsent box. a Create an email in the Create email screen y Tap $$
M e s s a g n g i Editing/Sending Saved Emails Unsent emails saved in the handset can be edited for sending. a Tap Inbox* y Outbox/Unsent box on the Menu bar in the Create email screen
*: The name of the previously selected mailbox is displayed. Unsent email list screen 225 00M1000EN.book 226 b Tap the email to edit Go to Step 2 on P235. 1Selecting and sending an email If you have more than one email to send, you can select from them for sending. Select $$ of the email to send on the message list screen y Tap [Receive & send]
Connecting to Mail Server to Receive Emails You can connect to the mail server of your network operator to receive emails. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Message y Receive
& send on the Menu bar Connect to the mail servers of all messaging accounts beginning with the first one displayed on the messaging account list screen to check for any incoming emails.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel receiving emails. However, receiving may not be canceled depending on the timing. M e s s a g n g i 226 b Receiving email 1To select an account before receiving emails Tap the name of the account for which you want to retrieve emails on the account list screen, and tap [Receive & send] on the message list screen.
[Receive & send] is not displayed on the unsent email list. 1To disconnect Tap Message y Disconnect on the Menu bar in the menu list screen. 00M1000EN.book 227 1If you are using an account with Email notification (3 P234) set up When any email is delivered to the server, notification is sent automatically to your FOMA handset and the email is retrieved without explicit connection to the mail server. 1If you are using an account with Schedule (3 P232) set Connection is automatically made to the mail server at the specified time/interval for retrieving emails. Replying to Emails You can reply to the sender of an incoming email or SMS message. a Tap Reply in the incoming email details screen 1To reply to an email with more than one address aTap Message y Reply to all on the Menu bar in the incoming email details screen bEnter the subject and send an email Go to Step 3 on P235. NOTE
You cannot reply to an SMS message showing User unset, Payphone, Not supported as the sender.
A Short Mail message sent from a mova i-mode handset to a FOMA handset is received as a SMS message but it is not possible to reply to it. M e s s a g n g i 227 00M1000EN.book 228 Forwarding Emails Incoming emails or SMS messages can be forwarded to other people. a Tap Message y Forward on the Menu bar in the incoming email details screen b Enter the destination address and send an email Go to Step 3 on P235. Managing Sender Email Addresses and Phone Numbers Storing in Contact List Senders of incoming emails or SMS messages can be stored in the contact list. a Tap Sender in the incoming email details/outgoing email details screen M e s s a g n g i 228 00M1000EN.book 229 b Tap [Save contact]
c Tap First name/Last name and enter the names
Entering other information 3 P99 Making a Call to Sender You can make a call to the sender of an incoming SMS message. a Tap Sender in the incoming email details/outgoing email details screen b Tap [Call]/[VideoPhone]
For operations that follow 3 P66, P86 M e s s a g n g i 229 00M1000EN.book 230 Searching Emails Search the emails/SMS messages stored in the FOMA handset for any email/SMS message that contains the specified keyword, and list the messages. a Tap Message y Find on the Menu bar in the account list/message list screen Enter a keyword. You can select an account for the search.
Up to 128 double or single byte characters can be entered as a keyword. b Tap a text input field and enter a keyword y Tap Where? and select the account to search y Tap [Find]
c Tap the email to view M e s s a g n g i 230 00M1000EN.book 231 Searching Text Strings in Emails a Tap Message y Find on the Menu bar in the message details/
Create email screen b Tap a text input field and enter a text string to search for y Tap the direction (4/5) y Tap [Find]
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the search. 1To search for the same text string successively Tap Message y Find next on the Menu bar in the message details/Create email screen Copying/Cutting and Pasting Strings in Emails You can copy or cut text strings entered or body text of emails and paste on other entry screens, etc. Copying/Cutting a Drag to select the text to copy y Tap Edit y Copy/Cut in the Menu bar The specified text is saved on the clipboard. 1To select all to copy/cut a Tap Edit y Select all in the Menu bar All strings in the selected item are selected. b Tap Edit y Copy/Cut in the Menu bar The strings are saved on the clipboard. M e s s a g n g i 231 00M1000EN.book 232 Pasting a Tap the area you want to paste to, and tap Edit y Paste in the Menu bar The copied/cut text is pasted. NOTE
The clipboard is a memory area for temporarily holding what you have copied/cut. Only one piece of information can be held, which is overwritten when another has been copied/cut. Information held on the clipboard is erased when the handset has been switched off or settings have been reset. Managing Files Attached to Emails Attachments can be viewed/played and saved. a Tap the $$ tab in the message details screen M e s s a g n g i 232 00M1000EN.book 233 b Tap the attachment 1Audio file 1Image file 1Video file 1Document file M e s s a g n g i 233 00M1000EN.book 234 1Saving attachments Tap [Save] on the screen in Step 2 1Audio file 1Image file 1Video file 1Document file NOTE
Tap an unreceived attachment to display the confirmation screen. 3 P254 Viewing Messages on Email/SMS Message List Screen You can view messages saved in inbox/unsent box/outbox/sent box for each accounts. Up to XX messages can be saved in inbox, XX messages in unsent box, XX in outbox, and XX in sent box.
<Example: incoming message>
M e s s a g n g i 234 00M1000EN.book 235 a Tap the messaging account for which you want to view messages on the account list screen List screen (subject not displayed) a Account name: No. of messages in folder b Checkbox to use for deletion 3 P259 c Message type List screen (subject displayed) Details screen
$$ : Standard message
$$ : Message with attachment
$$ : Only the number of messages received/messages including unreceived data d Sender phone number/email address (inbox), recipient phone number/email address (outbox/unsent box/sent box) If the phone number or email address is stored in the contact list, the name is displayed. e Subject For a SMS message, the beginning of the body text is displayed. SMS is displayed on the details screen. f Time/date sent/received Time is displayed for emails or SMS messages sent/received on the day, and date is displayed for those sent/received prior to the current day. M e s s a g n g i g Size of message h Body Text (SMS) i Create new message Tapping this allows you to create a message. 3 P235 j Receive & send (inbox/unsent box/sent box)/Send (outbox) Tapping this allows you to receive and send/send a message. 3 P243 235 00M1000EN.book 236 1To switch between mailboxes to view Tap Inbox* y mailbox to view on the Menu bar The name of mailbox previously viewed is displayed.
*:
b Tap the message to view on the email/SMS message list screen Tap the $$, $$, or $$ tab to switch between views.
On the unsent mail/SMS message list screen, the Edit screen (3 P243, P262) is displayed. Text screen Recipient details screen Attachment screen a Subject b Sender c Body text d Destination other than sender e Time/date received f Size of message g Message priority h Checkbox to use for deletion i Attachment file type
$$ : Audio file
$$ : Image file
$$ : Video file
$$ : Document file j Sender phone number/email address (incoming message), recipient phone number/email address (outgoing/unsent/sent message) If the phone number or email address is stored in the contact list, the name is displayed. k Subject For a SMS message, the beginning of the body text is displayed. SMS is displayed on the details screen. l Time/date sent/received Time is displayed for emails or SMS messages sent/received on the day and date is displayed for those sent/received prior to the current day. m Body text M e s s a g n g i 236 00M1000EN.book 237 1Viewing the details screen for messages with unreceived data for a POP3 account Tap [Yes]
All unreceived data will be received. 1Viewing the details screen for messages with unreceived data for an IMAP account Tap [Yes]
Unreceived message data will be received. Download attachment $$
: Select to receive attachment together with the message.
$$ indicates receiving of attachment and $$ non-receiving.
[
1Receiving unreceived attachments to messages for an IMAP account Tap the attachments to display the screen as shown below:
Tap [Yes]
Attachments will be received. M e s s a g n g i 237 00M1000EN.book 238 1Items available on the Menu bar in the message list screen Tapping Message or Edit in the Menu bar displays items as shown below:
Message Edit New . P235 Find . P247, P248 Copy to. P256 Move . P256 Delete message . P259 Disconnect . P195 Select all . P249 Sort by date . P258 Sort by sender/recipient. P258 Show subject . P259 Email filters*. P257 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P260
Some items may not be available depending on the operation.
*: Displayed when a POP3 account is used. 1Items available from the Menu bar on the message details screen Tapping Message or Edit in the Menu bar displays items as shown below:
Message Edit New . P235 Reply . P245 Reply to all . P245 Forward . P245 Send attachment . P250 Find . P247, P248 Find next . P247, P248 Delete message . P259 Disconnect . P195 M e s s a g n g i Copy . P249 Select all . P249 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P260
Some items may not be available depending on the operation. NOTE
Tapping information in message text (phone numbers, email addresses and URLs) allows you to easily make phone calls, send messages or view websites. 238 00M1000EN.book 239 Creating/Editing/Deleting Messaging Folders Creating Mailboxes Mailboxes can be created for managing messages, etc. a Tap Inbox* y Edit folders on the Menu bar in the message list screen
*: The name of mailbox previously viewed is displayed.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Tap Name and enter a name y Tap [Done]
Up to XX double - or single-byte characters can be entered. M e s s a g n g i 239 00M1000EN.book 240 Copying/Moving Messages to Another Mailbox Messages can be copied/moved to newly created mailboxes with limitations as shown below.
: copying/moving allowed : only copying allowed : copying/moving not allowed Source folder Destination folder Inbox Unsent box Outbox Sent box Created folder Inbox Unsent box Outbox Sent box Created folder
If an IMAP account is used, messages of which all data have not been received cannot be copied/moved. a Select $$ of the message to copy/move on the message list screen
$$ is switched to $$. b Tap Message y Copy to/Move to in the Menu bar
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. c Tap Folder and select the destination folder y Tap [Done]
NOTE
If an IMAP email account is used/if the Delete from server (3 P233) setting is enabled and a POP3 email account is used
- If an email has been moved from the folder used when it was received, a screen is displayed to confirm the deletion of the email with the identical contents that is on the mail server when connection is made to the mail server on the next occasion. Be informed that tapping [Yes] makes the email unavailable for retrieval. M e s s a g n g i 240 00M1000EN.book 241 Automatically Sorting Incoming Emails This function is available when a POP3 is used. You can set rules for automatically sorting incoming mails into different folders. a Tap Edit y Email filters on the message list screen Priority: High Priority: Low
Tap $$/$$ to change the priority.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Tap the name of the filter to change rules M e s s a g n g i Filter name: Specify the filter name.
Up to 128 double or single byte characters can Move to Condition Sender be entered.
: Specify the destination folder.
: Set this to sort emails by Sender. The sorting conditions must be entered in Contains. Subject
: Set this to sort emails by Subject. The sorting conditions must be entered in Contains. Contains : Enter a text string as the sorting condition.
Up to 256 double or single byte characters can be entered. Operations None
: Select this to sort using one condition. The second condition cannot be entered. OR
: Use this to sort emails that meet either of the two conditions. AND
: Set this to sort emails that meet both conditions.
Tap $$ to select them from the contacts.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. c Tap the field for the item to set up y Tap [Done] after setting 241 00M1000EN.book 242 Rearranging Messages on List Screen You can rearrange the messages displayed on the message list screen. a Tap Edit y Sort by date/Sort by sender on the Menu bar in the message list screen Sort by date Sort by sender: Sort messages in the order of name shown on the recipient/sender
: Sort messages in chronological order. address. NOTE
The sort order for Sort by sender is as described below:
Kanji (in the order of the JIS code) 3 hiragana 3 katakana *1 3 single-byte katakana 3 double-byte alphabetical character *2 3 single-byte alphabetical character *2 3 double-byte numerals 3 single-byte numerals 3 symbol (in the order of the JIS code)
*1:
If both hiragana and katakana are used, the order of the Japanese syllabary is given priority (ex.:
, etc.) If both upper- and lower-case characters are used, lower-case characters come before upper-case characters and the alphabetical order is given priority (ex.: aAbB, etc.)
*2:
M e s s a g n g i Switching Message List Screen View The message list screen view can be switched to subject display. a Tap Edit y Show subject on the Menu bar in the message list screen The message list screen view is switched from a list to subject display.
To restore the previous view, repeat the same operation. Deleting Messages Emails/SMS messages in inbox, outbox, unsent box, sent box, and created mailboxes can be deleted. You can delete messages by selecting them in the email list/SMS message list screen or delete emails/SMS messages being displayed on the message details/SMS details screen. a Select $$ of the email/SMS message to delete in the email/SMS message list screen
$$ is switched to $$. b Tap Message y Delete message in the Menu bar, and tap [Yes] on the Confirm delete screen The email/SMS message is deleted.
Tap [No] to cancel deletion. 242 00M1000EN.book 243 1To delete emails/SMS messages being displayed Tap Message y Delete message on the Menu bar in the email details/SMS details screen, and tap [Yes] on the Confirm delete screen
Tap [No] to cancel deletion. NOTE
If the Delete from server (3 P233) setting is enabled, on a POP 3 account, and an email has been deleted from the folder used when it was received, a screen is displayed to confirm the deletion of the email with the identical contents that is on the mail server when connection is made to the mail server on the next occasion. Setting Messaging Setting Automatic Sending of Owner Card/Reply Quoted/Signature You can specify whether or not to automatically attach the owner card (3 P114) and quote body text to reply to messages, and what to append to message text as the signature. These settings only function for the specified account.
These settings are not available for Short Message Service (SMS). a Tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar in the message list screen Always attach your card
: Specify whether or not to always attach your card to messages.
$$ indicates use of automatic sending and $$ non-
use. Always reply with history
: Specify whether or not to always quote body text of the received messages to reply.
$$ indicates use of automatic quoting and $$ non-
use. Signature : The entry made in this field is automatically appended to the bottom of the body text of outgoing messages.
Up to 1024 double or single byte characters can be entered. b Tap the field for the item to set up y Tap [Done]
NOTE
Setting message ring tone 3 P123 M e s s a g n g i 243 00M1000EN.book 244 Creating and Sending SMS Messages Create and send new SMS messages can be sent by FOMA handsets only. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap [New] in the SMS message list screen
$$
$$
$$
: Set this up to receive receipts to show that messages have been delivered to the recipients.
$$ Indicates receiving of receipts and $$ non-receiving.
: Shows the size of SMS message
: Brings you back to the account list screen. b Tap To and enter the recipient destination address
Up to 20 single-byte characters can be entered.
Specifying a recipient from the contact list 3 P238 M e s s a g n g i 244 c Tap the text field and enter text
Up to 70 double- or 160 single-byte characters can be entered.
Adding contact 3 P239 d Tap [Send]
The SMS message is sent. NOTE
Text input method 3 P466
Characters unavailable for use 3 P225 00M1000EN.book 245 Saving Unfinished SMS Messages for Sending Later Saving SMS Messages SMS messages in the process of creation or editing can be saved to unsent box. a Create a SMS message on the Create SMS screen y Tap $$
Editing and Sending Saved SMS Messages Unsent SMS messages that have been saved can be sent. a Tap Inbox* y Outbox/Unsent box in the menu list on the SMS message list screen
*: The name of mailbox previously viewed is displayed. Unsent SMS message list screen b Tap the SMS message to edit Go to Step 2 on P261. M e s s a g n g i 245 00M1000EN.book 246 Automatically Receiving SMS Messages When your FOMA handset is in-range, SMS messages are automatically delivered from the Short Message Center. a A SMS message is delivered The ring tone plays and the screen as shown on the left is displayed. Tapping the circled area displays the SMS message list screen, allowing you to view received SMS messages. Home screen Other than Home screen NOTE
A Short Mail message sent from a mova i-mode handset is received as an SMS message on your FOMA handset. Checking for Incoming SMS Messages SMS messages delivered to the Short Message Center are automatically sent to the FOMA handset. However, they are stored at the Center if the handset is switched off out of range. Explicitly retrieving them delivers the SMS messages stored at the Center. a Tap Message y Check for new SMS on the Menu bar in the SMS message list screen
Tap [Cancel] to cancel retrieval. b Tap [Done]
M e s s a g n g i 246 00M1000EN.book 247 Viewing SMS Messages Received View received SMS messages and receipts of delivery (3P266). a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar b Tap the account name ($$SMS) c Tap the SMS message to view NOTE
Any unviewable character (3 P225) contained in a received SMS message is displayed as a space.
A Short Mail message sent from a mova i-mode handset is received by a FOMA handset as an SMS message. If the sender's phone number is not displayed, the reason for non-display is displayed. Saving SMS Messages in UIM SMS messages stored in the FOMA handset can be moved and saved to UIM. SMS messages stored in the UIM can be moved to the handset. a Tap the SMS message to move on the UIM ($$)/SMS message to move from the UIM ($$) on the SMS message list
$$ is switched to $$. b Tap Message y Move message to UIM/Move message from UIM on the Menu bar
$$ indicates a SMS message in the FOMA handset.
$$ indicates a SMS message in the UIM. M e s s a g n g i 247 00M1000EN.book 248 Performing SMS settings Default setting Request acceptance: $$ SMS destination: Phone Memory Profile: SMS profile Normally, the Profile name and SMSC address settings of Profile and Edit profile need not be changed. Set up conditions for using Short Message Service (SMS). a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Connect tab y Messaging account in the Control panel screen, and tap the SMS tab in the messaging account screen. Request acceptance
: Select this to request the sender to receive the notification of delivery of a SMS message.
$$ indicates requesting and $$ not requesting. SMS destination
: Select the destination of incoming SMS messages. Profile: Select a profile. 1To edit a profile Tap [Edit profile], tap the field for the item to set up in the SMS profile screen y Tap
[Done] after setting
: Set the profile name. Profile name SMSC address: Set up the address of the SMS Center to connect to. (If Profile name is SMS profile1, +81903101652 is set.) Save message : Specify how long sent SMS messages that are undelivered will be stored at the Short Message Center. b Tap the field for the item to set up y Tap [Done] after setting
Tap [Cancel] to cancel setting. M e s s a g n g i 248 00M1000EN.book 249 Application Application. 250 Installing an Application. 250 Launching an Application . 252 Uninstalling an Application . 252 249 00M1000EN.book 250 Application Applications such as games can be installed and used on a FOMA handset. Applications to be installed can be obtained via the following methods.
Obtaining applications from the Internet 3 P211 You can access the Internet and download compatible applications from websites before installing them.
Obtaining applications from a TransFlash memory card 3 P301 You can save applications to a TransFlash memory card in advance using a PC, etc., before installing them by inserting it to a FOMA handset.
Obtaining from a PC 3 P527 You can install the "Desktop Suite" to a PC from the accompanying CD-ROM and then install by connecting the FOMA handset to the PC using a USB cable. Installing an Application Downloaded applications and applications saved to a TransFlash memory card can be installed and be made available for use on a FOMA handset. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar and then tap Launcher y Install on the menu bar
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. Displays the name of the software. Displays the location of the installation data. b Tap the application to be installed y tap Install
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the installation.
Tap [Details] to display Signature information.3 P269 A p p l i c a t i o n 250 00M1000EN.book 251 c Tap [Install] and then tap [Done] in the Installation confirmation screen Displays the application icon of the installed application on the Application Launcher. 1When an identical application is already installed
Tap [Overwrite] to overwrite the existing application by the new application.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. 1Application signature details Tap [Details] in the Step 2 screen or Step 3 screen to verify Application signature information. NOTE
The confirmation screen is displayed when unwarranted software for use in FOMA handset is installed. Warranty is not guaranteed once installed. A p p l i c a t i o n 251 00M1000EN.book 252 Launching an Application You can launch an installed application from the Application Launcher screen. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar The icon of the installed application is added. b Tap the icon of the application to be launched Uninstalling an Application This operation uninstalls an already installed application. Be cautioned that software once uninstalled cannot be used thereafter. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar and then tap Launcher y Uninstall on the menu bar
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the uninstall. A p p l i c a t i o n 252 00M1000EN.book 253 b Tap [Uninstall]
c Tap [Yes] and then tap [Done] on the Uninstall confirmation screen The application is uninstalled. A p p l i c a t i o n 253 00M1000EN.book 254
1 2 | Exhibit 8C Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.84 MiB | / February 05 2005 |
APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT6EY1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows in four parts (Exhibit 8A through Exhibit 8D):
EXHIBIT 8C 00M1000EN.book 255 Displaying/Editing/
Managing Data 1Utilizing a Still Image Displaying a Stored Image . 256 Editing an Image . 260 1Utilizing a Video Clip Playing a Stored Video . 262 1Utilizing Music Playing a Stored Music . 266 1Utilizing the Document Viewer Displaying Word, Excel and PDF Files . 270 1Utilizing the TransFlash Memory Card TransFlash Memory Card . 277 Using the TransFlash Memory Card . 281 1Managing Data Managing Files . 282 1Utilizing the Voice Recorder Using the Voice Recorder . 290 255 00M1000EN.book 256 Displaying a Stored Image You can display a captured still image (3 P169), a downloaded still image (3 P203), an image received via email (3 P250), or an image saved in the TransFlash memory card (3 P303).
Displays the following files. JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg, .jfif, .jpe, .pipeg, .pip) w-bitmap (.XXX) GIF (including animation GIF) bitmap (.bmp) png (.png) a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar
: Launches camera when tapped.
$$
The display can be modified to a list display. 3 P275 b Tap the image to be displayed
: The camera is launched when tapped.
$$
$$ $$ : The preceding image/subsequent image can be displayed when tapped. File name, saved date and time 1Operations from the Menu bar in the image list screen Tap Pictures and Settings on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Pictures Settings View Slide show . P276 Image infor . P275 Slide show interval. P276 List/Thumbnail . P275 Sort by name . P309 Sort by date . P309 Sort by size . P309
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 256 00M1000EN.book 257 1Operations from the Menu bar in the image display screen Tap Pictures and Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Pictures Edit Send as. P310 Delete . P308 Image info . P275 Rename . P304 Fit to screen . P277 Actual size view . P277 Show title/Hide title. P277 Rotate. P278 Add frame. P279 Free draw . P279 Add stamp . P280
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation. NOTE
When an image exceeding the display size 1280 x 1280 (dots), an incompatible file format ($$) or a corrupted file ($$) is tapped, the image cannot be displayed and instead, a message is displayed. Modifying the Display Method of the Image List Screen
]
Default setting Thumbnail Thumbnail Display List Display a Tap Settings y List on the Menu bar in the image list screen
Tap Settings y Thumbnail on the Menu bar in the image list screen when displaying thumbnails. Displaying Image Information This operation displays the information of the displayed image.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 257 00M1000EN.book 258 a Select the image to display the image information from the image list screen with the 9 button and tap Pictures y Image info on the Menu bar
: Displays file name.
: Displays file format.
: Displays file size. File name Type Size Dimensions : Displays display size. Date
: Displays saved date. Time
: Displays saved time. Viewing a Slide show Displays images in the folder from the selected file. a Select the image to start the slide show from the image list screen with the 7 button y tap Pictures y View Slide show on the Menu bar Slide show launches.
When the slide show is played in Automatic mode, the slides are automatically switched at intervals set in Slideshow Intervals.
When the slide show is played in Manual mode, the slides are switched by pressing the 6 button.
When an any area on the screen is tapped, the slide show is canceled and reverted back to the list screen. NOTE
Images that cannot be displayed such as animation GIF files are skipped when the slide show is played. Setting up the Playback Method and Intervals of the Slide show Setting up the playback method (Automatic/Manual), and playback intervals when automatically playing the slide show. Default setting Auto: $$ Manual: $$ Interval: 3 seconds
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 258 00M1000EN.book 259 a Tap Settings y Slide show interval on the Menu bar in the image list screen, and then tap [Done] upon completing the setup procedure
$$ Auto
: Select when playing by automatically switching screens.
$$ Manual
: Select when manually playing and switching screens.
$$ Intervals : Select intervals of slides when viewing the slide show in automatic mode. NOTE
Text entry method 3 P466 Modifying the Display Size of Images The display size of the displayed image is modified. a Tap Picture y Fit to screen/Actuall size view on the Menu bar in the image display screen Fit to screen
: Image is enlarged/reduced to fit the display area of the screen and Actual size view : Displays image in full size. displayed. To view an image larger than the display area of the screen, drag the stylus to the direction of the hidden area. NOTE
A similar operation can be performed by tapping any area within the screen. Displaying the Image Title Displays Title in the Image Display Screen a Tap Edit y Show title on the Menu bar in the image display screen
Tap Edit y Hide title on the Menu bar to hide the title
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 259 00M1000EN.book 260 Editing an Image You can freely edit the displayed image by overlapping frames and stamps, etc. The edited image is saved in the same folder as the source image.
* Excluding cases where the source image is a JPEG file and Rotated.
Images exceeding the display size 1280 x 1280 (dots) cannot be edited. 1Edited Image File The edited image file is saved in the following respective manners depending on the file format of the source image file or the editing method. Source Image File Format Editing Method Edited Image File JPEG Rotate Other Methods Other than JPEG Rotate Other Methods The edited file is saved over the source image file. The edited file is saved as a new image file.
An EDTX extension (X is a digit between 0 and 100) is suffixed to the source image file name. The edited file is saved as a new image file
(JPEG file).
The new file name is "original name".jpg. When an identical file name already exists, however, a ROTX extension (X is a digit between 0 and 100) is suffixed to the file name. The edited file is saved as a new image file
(JPEG file).
The new file name is "original name".jpg. When an identical file name already exists, however, an EDTX extension (X is a digit between 0 and 100) is suffixed to the file name. NOTE
When images exceeding the display size 204 x 155 (dots) are edited and saved, they are saved after being reduced (excluding Rotate) to the display size 204 x 155 (dots).
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 260 00M1000EN.book 261 Rotating an Image a Tap Edit y Rotate on the Menu bar in the image display screen The screen is rotated 90 degrees to the right. Overlapping Frames a Tap Edit y Add frame on the Menu bar in the image display screen
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. The frame can be selected. b Tap the frame to overlap y tap [Done]
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 261 00M1000EN.book 262 Decorating an Image by Hand You can decorate an image using the stylus pen. a Tap Edit y Free draw on the Menu bar in the image display screen
Tap [Undo] to undone a previous decoration can be undone by.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel saving. The freehand color can be selected. b Use the stylus to decorate an image y tap [Done]
Pasting a Marker Stamp a Tap Edit y Add stamp on the Menu bar in the image display screen
Tap [Undo] to undone a previous stamp.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel saving. You can select the stamp. b Tap the stamp to be pasted y tap [Done]
Playing a Stored Video Displays captured video (3 P170), a downloaded video (3P203), a video received via email (3 P250), or a video saved in the TransFlash memory card (3 P303).
Video formats that can be played 3 P283
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 262 00M1000EN.book 263 a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar
$$
: The camera is launched when tapped. b Tap the video to be played Playback bar
: Displays current playback position. Playback volume display
: Displays playback volume in 8 levels.
$$/$$ : Plays or pauses video when tapped.
$$
$$
$$/$$ : Controls volume when tapped.
$$
: Cancels playback when tapped.
: Launches camera when tapped.
: Returns to video list. 1Operations from the Menu bar in the video list screen Tap Video or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Video Edit Find. P282 Sort by title . P309 Sort by date . P309 Sort by size . P309 Sort by type . P309
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation. 1Operations from the Menu bar in the image display screen Tap Video or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Video Edit Send as. P310 Rename . P304 Clip info. P284 Delete . P308 Copy . P305 Full screen . P309
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 263 00M1000EN.book 264 1Specifications of video playback File Format 3GPP, MP4, WMV, ASF Encoding Format Video Voice Display Size Extensions XXX x XXX (dots) or less
.3gp, .mp4, .wmv, .asf MPEG4/H.263/WMV AMR/AAC/WMAv8 Repeating a Video Playback a Tap Video y Repeat on the Menu bar in the video playback screen Searching a Video a Tap Video y Find on the Menu bar in the video list screen
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Enter the text to search y tap [Find]
c Tap video to play
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 264 00M1000EN.book 265 Modifying the Video Quality a Tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar in the video list screen, and then tap the Video Quality window in the user setup screen Default setting High
: Best quality mode. High Medium : Standard quality. Low
: Low quality; image is grainy. b Select Video Quality y Tap [Done]
Modifying the Display Size of the Video You can modify the display size of the video during playback.
This operation cannot be performed when video is stopped. a Tap Edit y Full screen on the Menu bar in the video playback screen
Reverts to the original display by tapping any area within the screen.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 265 00M1000EN.book 266 Displaying the Video Information Displays the video information. a Tap Video y Clip info on the Menu bar in the video playback screen y tap [Done] after confirmation Title Author Performer Copyright Size Created Date and Time
: Displays title.
: Displays information of the author of the file.
: Displays performers.
: Displays copyright information of the file.
: Displays file size. Description
: Displays created date and time of the file.
: Displays file description. Playing a Stored Music Downloaded music is played back.
The following audio file formats can be played back. MP3 (.mp3) AMR ( ) XMF ( ) MIDI (.smf) 3GA ( ) MMA ( ) WAV (.wav) AU ( ) WMA (.wma) a Tap $$y$$ on the Application Selector bar
$$/$$ : Controls the volume when tapped.
$$
: Switches screen to the audio playback screen when tapped.
$$
: Switches screen to the audio playlist screen when tapped.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 266 00M1000EN.book 267 b Tap the music to be played Playback bar : Displays current playback position. Playback Volume Display
$$/$$
$$
$$
$$
: Displays playback volume in 8 levels.
: Plays or cancels audio track when tapped.
: Stops audio track when tapped.
: Rewinds audio track when tapped.
: Fast forwards audio track when tapped. 1Operations from the Menu bar in the audio playlist screen Tap Music or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Music Edit Find. P287 Repeat . P286 Sort by name . P309 Sort by date . P309 Sort by size . P309 Sort by type . P309 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P288
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation.
]
1Operations from the Menu bar in the audio playback screen Tap Music or Edit on the Menu bar to display following items:
Music Edit Find. P287 Repeat . Below Shuffle. Below Edit playlist . Below Zoom . P141 Preferences . P288
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation. Playing Music on Repeat/at Random The same audio track can be played repeatedly or multiple audio tracks can be played randomly. a Tap Music y Repeat/Shuffle on the Menu bar in the audio playback screen
To cancel Repeat/Shuffle, tap Music y Repeat/Shuffle again. Playing Music in Order of Preference The audio tracks can be played in order of preference. The audio tracks are played from the top of the playlist down to the bottom.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 267 00M1000EN.book 268 a Tap Music y Edit y Edit playlist on the Menu bar in the audio playback screen
$$
$$
: Moves up the order of the selected audio track in the playlist.
: Moves down the order of the selected audio track in the playlist.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Select the song to be moved using 7 y $$ to the desired position or tap $$ y tap [Done]
To move the song further up or further down, repeat the operation up to tapping [Done]. Searching Music Enter text and search from the stored music archive. a Tap Music y Find on the Menu bar in the audio playback screen b Enter the text to be searched y tap [Find]
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i c Tap the music to be played 268 00M1000EN.book 269 Displaying Audio Information The audio track information is displayed while playing back. a Tap the song for which the information is displayed in the audio playlist screen y tap $$ after confirmation Title
: Displays title. Artist
: Displays artist name. Album
: Displayed album name. Author
: Displays author. Elapsed Time/Recorded Time Size (KB) Filename Copyright
: Displays elapsed time/recorded time.
: Displays file size.
: Displays file name.
: Displays copyright information. 1Operations from the Menu bar in the audio information screen Tap Music or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Music Edit Rename . P304 Send as. P310 Repeat . P286 Delete . P308 Copy . P305 Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation. Displaying Music by Selecting the Audio File Type Displays audio of the supported file type by selecting the audio file type. a Tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar in the audio playlist screen
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i b Select $$ of the file type to display and then tap [Done]
269 00M1000EN.book 270 Displaying Word, Excel and PDF Files You can display Word, Excel and image files, etc.
You can display the following file formats. Microsoft Word (.doc) PDF (.pdf) JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg) BMP (.bmp) Zip (.zip) Microsoft Excel (.xls) HTML (.html) PNG (.png) Wmf (.wmf) Microsoft Power Point (.ppt) Mhtml (.mht) GIF (.gif) Plain Text (.txt) a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar b Tap the file to display Drag towards the desired direction. Tap the icon to perform various operations. 3 P290 to P292 Displayed vertically 1To close a document file Tap Document y Close on the Menu bar in the document file list screen
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 270 00M1000EN.book 271 1Operations from the Menu bar in the document file list screen Tap Documents or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Documents Edit History . P294 Bookmarks . P293 Close. P289 View as Icons . P292 View as List . P292 Sort by Name . P309 Sort by Date . P309 Preferences . P295 Help . See below
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation. 1Operations from the Menu bar in the document file display screen Tap Documents or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Document Edit Send as. P310 Delete . P308 Rename . P304 History . P294 Bookmarks . P293 Add Bookmark . P293 Priority . P295 Help . See below
Some functions cannot be performed depending on the operation. 1About Help Displays a simple operation manual file of the document viewer when Edit y Help on the Menu bar are tapped in the document file list screen/display screen. NOTE
To view a file, it may take some time depending on the file size. Also, the entire content of the file may not be displayed.
Content unique to PC's may not be displayed depending on the file content.
Some font types may not be displayed correctly. Fonts that can be displayed on the handsets are dissimilar to those that can be displayed on PC's. Enlarging/Reducing the Screen a Tap $$/$$
Repeat this operation when further enlarging or further reducing. Fitting to Screen and Displaying a Tap $$ in the document file display screen
If $$ is selected, then the screen does not toggle when tapped.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 271 00M1000EN.book 272 Fitting to Screen Width and Displaying a Tap $$ in the document file display screen
If $$ is selected, then the screen does not toggle when tapped. Resizing the Displayed Portion to the Size of the Screen a Tap $$ in the document file display screen Switching to Full Screen Display a Tap $$ in the document file display screen
Tap $$ again to revert back to the original screen. Switching between Vertical Display/Horizontal Display a Tap $$ in the document file display screen
Tap $$ again to revert back to the original screen.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 272 00M1000EN.book 273 Displaying Popup Screen a Tap $$ in the document file display screen You can verify the displayed portion using the full screen display. To Scroll, drag the screen. Displays the preceding/subsequent page of the current file when tapped. Displays the first/last page of the current file when tapped.
Tap $$ one more time to hide the popup menu. Modifying the Display Method of the Document File List Screen Default setting XXX List View Icon View a Tap Edit y View as Icons/View as List on the Menu bar in the document file list screen Using the Bookmark You can register frequently used document files for quick displaying. Adding to Bookmark
You can register up to XXX bookmarks.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 273 00M1000EN.book 274 a Tap Documents y Add Bookmark on the Menu bar in the document file display screen
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Enter bookmark name y tap [Add]
Displaying from Bookmark a Tap Documents y Bookmarks on the Menu bar in the document file display screen b Tap the bookmark to display Deleting a Bookmark a Tap $$ of the bookmark to delete in the bookmark list screen b Tap Documents y Delete on the Menu bar
$$ switches to $$. Modifying the Bookmark Name a Tap $$ of bookmark name to be modified in the bookmark list screen
$$ switches to $$. b Tap Documents y Rename on the Menu bar, and then enter the new name from the modify bookmark name screen y tap OK
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 274 00M1000EN.book 275
You can enter up to XX characters of text in either single or double byte characters.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. Modifying the Display Order in the Bookmark List Screen a Tap Edit y Sort Order on the Menu bar in the bookmark list screen Default setting Sorted by XXX Sort by Name : Sort files by alphabetical order of file names. Sort by Date
: Sort files by date saved in reverse chronological order. NOTE
The files are sorted in the following order when Sort by Name is selected. Kanji (JIS Code order) 3 Hiragana 3 Katakana*1 3 Single byte Katakana 3 Double byte Alphabet*2 3 Single byte Alphabet*2 3 Double byte Numerals 3 Single byte Numerals 3 Symbols (JIS Code order)
*1: When Hiragana and Katakana are intermingled, alphabetical order is given priority (e.g. ).
*2: When lower case and upper case characters are intermingled, the lower case is given priority as well as alphabetical order (e.g. aAbB). Displaying Document Files from History Documents and files are displayed from history. a Tap Documents y History from the Menu bar in the document file list screen
Tap [Clear] to clear history.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i b Tap the file to display Setting up the Preferences of the Document Viewer You can set preferences for the document files. a Tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar in the file list screen To perform the following setups, tap the relevant tabs as necessary. 275 00M1000EN.book 276 1Preferences Tab Page flick
: Set up to allow or disallow scrolling in the document file display screen using a stylus. Shows $$ when allowed, and shows $$ when disallowed. Show picture : Set up to allow or disallow displaying of images in the document file display screen. Shows $$ when allowed, and shows $$ when disallowed. Reflow text
: You can switch and display the file content display between S, M, and L depending on the file type displayed. Keep for
: Set up number of days to save history.
Any number between 0 and 30 can be used for setup. Clear history : Clear history by selecting Yes. Store history for the number of days specified in Keep for by selecting No. You can place a $$ to select the file types to be supported by the document viewer. 1Files Tab 1About Tab Displays version information of the document viewer.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i b Setup each function y tap [OK]
Setup is saved.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel saving. 276 00M1000EN.book 277 TransFlash Memory Card You can mount the TransFlash memory card to the FOMA handset and use it as an external memory. The TransFlash memory card is one of the most compact, light, detachable external memory media with a large memory capacity. It can be used with SD memory compatible PC's and printers when the accompanying conversion adaptor is used together.
You can purchase the TransFlash memory card and the TransFlash memory card adaptor from home electric appliance stores. The M1000 supports TransFlash memory cards up to XX bytes. (As of XXX 2005) Cautions When Using the TransFlash Memory Card
TransFlash memory cards formatted with other devices such as PC's may not function properly. Always use the M1000 to format the memory cards.
The TransFlash memory card may become deformed from accidents and failures. It is advised to keep a backup of important data. NTT DoCoMo does not assume responsibility for any damages caused by the loss or alteration of data.
Do not shut off the power of the FOMA handset while reading or writing data.
Do not place labels or stickers on the handset. The thickness of such material is enough to be a possible cause of electrical contact failure or data corruption.
Place the memory card inside the accompanying case when carrying or storing.
Do not touch the metal terminal by hands or metal objects.
Do not subject to high impact, bend, drop or wet the memory card.
Refrain from use or storage in the following areas.
- Inside the car or other locations subject to high temperature
- Locations exposed to direct sunlight
- High humidity locations or locations with corrosive material
- Locations under the influence of substantial static electricity or electrical noise Installation/Removal of the TransFlash Memory Card
Do not install or remove the TransFlash memory card while the power of the FOMA handset is switched on.
* Perform after removing the battery pack or the rear cover of the battery pack. 3 P52
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 277 00M1000EN.book 278 Installation a Slide the cover of the TransFlash memory card in the direction of Arrow a and lift it towards the direction of Arrow b b Install the TransFlash memory card c Bring down the cover of the TransFlash memory card in the direction of Arrow a and slide it towards the direction of Arrow b Removal a Perform the same operation as Step 1 of Installation b Remove the TransFlash memory card c Perform the same operation as Step 3 of Installation
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i NOTE
Check the correct direction of the TransFlash memory card, and close the cover after firmly installing it. The card may get damaged. 278 00M1000EN.book 279 Mounting the TransFlash Memory Card to the Adapter Mount the TransFlash memory card to the TransFlash memory card adapter when using it with a PC that supports SD memory cards.
Check the correct direction to insert when using the card. An incorrect use of the card may cause the device to be damaged. a Insert the TransFlash memory card firmly to the TransFlash memory card adapter
Pull the memory card in the reverse direction when removing. NOTE
Writing and formatting cannot be performed when the write-protect switch of the TransFlash memory card adapter is set to the LOCK side. Folder Structure of the TransFlash Memory Card 1When displaying it on a FOMA handset You can display the file content of the TransFlash memory card using the memory manager. 3 P310 1When displaying it on a PC When writing a file on to the TransFlash memory card from a FOMA handset, the following folder is created within the TransFlash memory card and saved inside the folder. The following folder structure needs to be created when saving a file from a PC to the TransFlash memory card.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 279 00M1000EN.book 280 Media file audio folder................................... folder for saving audio track files unfiled folder......................... folder for saving audio track files saved on the FOMA handset document folder........................... folder for saving document files unfiled folder.......................... folder for saving document files saved on the FOMA handset image folder.................................. folder for saving image files unfiled folder.......................... folder for saving image files saved on the FOMA handset other folder................................... folder for saving XXX files unfiled folder......................... folder for saving XXX files saved on the FOMA handset video folder................................... folder for saving video files unfiled folder......................... folder for saving video files saved on the FOMA handset Number of Files That Can Be Saved on the TransFlash Memory Card The maximum number of files that can be saved or added to a single folder (on a 32MB TransFlash memory card) is described below.
The number of files that can be saved varies depending on the capacity of the TransFlash memory card.
Although you can verify the remaining memory capacity using the memory manager (3 P310), the displayed memory capacity is lower than the actual memory capacity shown on the TransFlash memory card. Folder Name Maximum Number of Maximum Number of Files That Can Be Saved to a Files Single Folder Audio Video Image Document Other XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files XXXX files
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 280 00M1000EN.book 281 Using the TransFlash Memory Card You can save image, video, audio track and document data inside the FOMA handset to the TransFlash memory card, and save data in the TransFlash memory to the FOMA handset. You can also browse inside the TransFlash memory card from the FOMA handset. 1The following operations can be performed on the TransFlash memory card. Refer to reference pages for operation method.
Previewing files in the TransFlash memory card 3 P303
Modifying file names in the TransFlash memory card 3 P304
Copying/moving files between the FOMA handset and the TransFlash memory card 3 P305 , P307
Deleting files in the TransFlash memory card 3 P308 Formatting the TransFlash Memory Card You need to format (initialize) the TransFlash memory card using the FOMA handset when using it for the first time. The memory card may not function normally when formatted using other devices such as a PC. Once formatted, all content in the TransFlash memory card is erased. a Tap $$ y $$ y Memory Card on the Application Selector bar
To modify the name, tap [Modify Name], and proceed to Step 3. b Tap [Format] y [Yes]
You can enter up to XX (single-byte or double-byte) characters.
Tap [No] when not formatting.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i c Tap the [Name] section, and then input name y tap [Done]
281 00M1000EN.book 282 Managing Files You can manage image/video/audio track/document files, and organize files by managing and deleting files/folders in the TransFlash memory card. Displaying Files by Folder Structure You can display by switching between folders from image list screen (3 P274)/video playlist screen (3 P280)/audio playlist screen (3 P285). You can display a list view of the TransFlash memory card from this operation. a Tap All* on the Menu bar from the list view
* Displays a previously selected folder name.
: Displays all files of the same format. All Internal memory
: Displays folders in the FOMA handset. Memory card
: Displays folders in the TransFlash memory card. Organize Folders
: Delets or creates folders. b Tap the folder name to display Creating/Organizing/Deleting Folders You can create/organize/delete folders from image list screen (3 P274)/Video playlist screen (3 P280)/Audio Track screen (3 P285). You can also create/organize/delete folders in the TransFlash memory card with this operation. This operation is performed after displaying the list view of files in the TransFlash memory card. a Tap All* y Organize Folders on the Menu bar in the list view screen
* A previously selected folder name is displayed. 1When deleting a folder Tap folder to delete y tap [Delete]
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 282 00M1000EN.book 283 b Tap Add Name Location : Select location to create folder (FOMA handset/
: Enter folder name to create. TransFlash memory card).
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. c Tap the Name section, enter name y tap the Location section, and then select the location to create the folder y tap [Done]
Modifying a File Name You can modify a file name from the image display screen (3 P274)/video playback screen (3 P280)/audio track details screen (3 P288)/document file display screen (3 P289). You can also modify file names in the TransFlash memory card with this operation. Perform this operation after displaying the files in the TransFlash memory card. a Tap Image/Video/Audio Track/Document y Modify Name on the Menu bar in display file name to modify/playback screen
Displays previous file name.
You can enter up to XX (one byte or two byte) characters.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Tap Modify file name y [Done]
NOTE
Text entry method 3 P466 Copying a File to Another Folder
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 1FOMA handset 3 copy to TransFlash memory card Display the source file to copy in the FOMA handset and select a folder in the TransFlash memory card as the copy (save) destination. 283 00M1000EN.book 284 1TransFlash memory card 3 copy to FOMA handset Display the source file to copy in the TransFlash memory card and select a folder in the FOMA handset as the copy (save) destination. Copying a Single File You can copy a file to another folder from Video playback screen (3 P280)/Audio Track Details screen (3 P288).
You cannot perform this operation when playing a video clip or audio track. a Tap Edit y Copy on the Menu bar in the playback screen of the file to be copied
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Tap the Folder section and select the destination folder to copy y tap [Save]
NOTE
The memory manager is used when copying image files or document files 3 P306 Selecting a File using the Memory Manager and Copying to Another Folder a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Memory Manager on the control panel screen, and tap File in the memory manager screen Location : Select the location of the source file (on the FOMA handset/TransFlash memory card). Type File
: Selects file type of the source file to copy.
: Selects source file to copy.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i b Tap Location, and select the location where the source file to copy is saved 284 00M1000EN.book 285 c Tap Type, and select the file type of the source file to copy d In the File field, tap $$ on the source file to copy y tap [Copy]
Folder : Selects the destination folder to copy (on the FOMA handset/TransFlash memory card)
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. e Tap the Folder section, and select the destination folder to copy y tap Copy Moving a File to Another Folder 1Moving from FOMA handset 3 TransFlash memory card You can select a folder in TransFlash memory card as the destination folder while displaying the source file on the FOMA handset. 1Moving from TransFlash memory card 3 FOMA handset You can select a folder in the FOMA handset as the destination folder while displaying the source file on the TransFlash memory card. Moving a Single File You can move a file inside a folder from the image display screen (3 P274)/video playback screen (3 P280) audio playback screen (3 P285) to another folder. a Tap All* on the Menu bar in the display/playback screen of the file to be moved y the destination folder y and tap $$
*: Displays a previously selected folder name. Moving All Files in Source Folder You can move all files inside a folder from the image list screen (3 P274)/video playlist screen
(3 P280) audio playlist screen (3 P285) between the FOMA handset and the TransFlash memory card.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 285 00M1000EN.book 286 a Tap All* y Edit Folders in the list screen
*: Displays a previously selected folder name. b Tap the source folder y tap Edit To Location : Selects the destination (in the FOMA handset/
: Enters the folder name to create in the destination. TransFlash memory card). c Tap the To field and enter a file name y tap the Location field, and select the destination location y tap [Done]
Deleting a File You can delete a file. With this operation, you can delete files in the TransFlash memory card. You need to display subject files in the TransFlash memory card to perform this operation. Deleting a Single File You can delete a file from the image list screen (3 P274)/video playback screen (3 P280)/audio track details screen (3 P288)/document file display screen (3 P289). a Tap Image/Video/Audio Track/Document y Delete on the Menu bar in the display/playback screen of the subject file to delete, and tap
[Yes] in the confirm delete screen
Tap [No] to cancel the operation.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 286 00M1000EN.book 287 Deleting by Selecting Files using the Memory Manager a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar , and tap Memory Manager in the control screen, and tap [File] in the Memory Manager screen Location : Selects the location storing the file to delete (in the FOMA handset/TransFlash memory card). Type File
: Selects the file type to delete.
: Selects the file to delete. b Tap Location, and select the location storing the file to delete c Tap File and select the file type of the file to delete d Tap $$ of the file to delete in the File field and y tap [Delete], and tap [Yes] in the delete confirmation screen Sort Files You can sort files in the image list screen (3 P274)/video playlist screen (3 P280)/audio playlist screen (3 P285)/document file list screen (3 P289). a Tap Settings/Edit on the Menu bar in the list screen y Sort Method Default setting Sorted by XXX 1When operating in an image list screen Sort by Name Sort by Date Sort by Size
: Sort by file name in alphabetical order.
: Sort by date saved in reverse chronological order.
: Sort by descending order of file size. 1When operating in the video playlist/audio playlist/document file list screen Sort by Title Sort by Date Sort by Size Sort by Type
: Sort by title name in alphabetical order.
: Sort by date saved in reverse chronological order.
: Sort by descending order of file size.
: Sort by file type in order from XXX. NOTE
You can sort files in the following order when using Sort by Name or Sort by Title.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 287 00M1000EN.book 288
Kanji (JIS Code order) 3 Hiragana 3 Katakana*1 3 Single byte Katakana 3 Double byte Alphabet*2 3 Single byte Alphabet*2 3 Double byte Numerals 3 Single byte Numerals 3 Symbols (JIS Code order)
*1: When Hiragana and Katakana are intermingled, alphabetical order is given priority (e.g.:).
*2: When lower case and upper case characters are intermingled, the lower case is given priority as well as alphabetical order (e.g.:aAbB). Sending Files You can send files from the image display screen (3 P274)/video playback screen (3 P280)/
audio playback screen (3 P285)/document file display screen (3 P289). a Tap Image/Video/Audio Track/Document on the Menu bar in the display/playback screen of the file to send y Send As Email
: Displays compose email screen with the image file attached. Bluetooth : Sends with Bluetooth.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. b Tap Send As section, and select send format y tap [Done]
NOTE
Composing an email 3 P235
Bluetooth communication 3 P381 Checking the Memory Capacity You can check the memory capacity of the FOMA handset by application. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Memory Manager in the control panel screen.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i Displays available memory in the FOMA handset 288 00M1000EN.book 289 When Memory is Full or a Maximum Amount of Stored Data is Reached When the number of files or the memory reaches maximum capacity, delete old files, and save new files. When Memory is Low on the FOMA Handset a Displays confirmation screen b Tap Yes 1When there is excess data in the FOMA handset Tap Yes in Step 2 to display the screen on the left. Yes No
: Deletes excess data. When more excess data is found, the screen on the left is displayed.
: Keeps excess data. When more excess data is found, the screen on the left is displayed. Yes to All No to All
: Deletes all excess data.
: Keeps all excess data.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i c Tap Uninstall, and uninstall the application, or tap the application to free up memory, and delete data
Uninstall method 3 P270 289 00M1000EN.book 290
Delete method 3 P308 When Memory to Store Data is Insufficient while Copying/Moving Files When there is insufficient memory to store in the copy destination, the screen on the left is displayed. Tap Yes to display screen preceding the confirmation screen. Launch relevant applications to delete unnecessary files.
Checking the memory capacity of the FOMA handset 3 P310
Uninstall method 3 P270
Delete method 3 P308 Using the Voice Recorder You can readily record voice memos on the FOMA handset using this function. Recording and playing can be conducted with a simple operation. Voice Memo Screen Icon name a Voice Memos/All Memos b Record c Play/Pause d Stop e Cue f Volume g Record Date h Size Icon
$$
$$/$$
$$
$$$$
$$
Description Displays the number of Voice Memos/All Memos. Starts recording when tapped. Starts/pauses playback when tapped. Stops recording/playback when tapped. Cues voice memo when tapped. Controls playback volume by tapping and sliding. Displays recorded date of the voice memo. Displays file size of the voice memo.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 290 00M1000EN.book 291 Recording Voice You can record up to XX minutes. You can either choose to automatically record at the end of the memory, or overwrite an existing voice memo. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar b Tap New y tap $$
c Tap $$
Recording is stopped. 1When overwriting to an existing voice memo Tap $$/$$, and select voice memo to overwrite y tap $$
You cannot tap $$/$$ when there is only one existing voice memo. Playing Back a Voice Memo You can immediately play back and check a recorded voice memo. a Tap $$/$$ in the voice memo screen, and select voice memo to play y tap $$
You cannot tap $$/$$ when there is only one existing voice memo. You can control the playback volume by tapping and sliding. Displays $$ when tapped and paused. Tap $$ to play the memo.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i Quick Launching the Voice Recorder You can record a new voice memo with a simple button operation. It is convenient when you need to record a voice memo quickly. 291 00M1000EN.book 292 a Hold down s b Release s Displays the voice memo screen, and the voice memo is recorded at the end of the memory. Cancels recording. Sending the Voice Memo You can send the recorded voice memo as an email attachment. a Tap $$/$$ in the voice memo screen, and select the voice memo to send b Tap Voice Recorder y Send Method on the Menu bar Email Bluetooth : Send with Bluetooth
: Send as an email attachment.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the operation. c Tap the Send Format section y select the format to send y tap
[Done]
Tap [Cancel] to cancel sending. NOTE
Email Compose 3 P235
Bluetooth communication 3 P381 Deleting a Voice Memo You can delete a recorded voice memo. a Tap $$/$$ in the Voice Memo screen, and select the voice memo to delete y tap [Delete], and tap [Yes] in the delete confirmation screen
Tap [No] to cancel the operation.
/
i l i D s p a y n g E d i t i n g M a n a g n g D a t a
/
i 292 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 293 Other Convenient Functions About Multiaccess <Multiaccess> . 294 Notification by an Alarm at the Specified Time <Alarm time> . 297 Registering a Schedule <Calendar/Schedule> . 300 Registering To Do List <To do> . 315 Quick Execution of Frequently Used Functions. 324 Changing Groups on the Control Panel . 325 Checking Duration <View duration> . 326 Checking Information on Amount of Data at Packet Communication . 327 Displaying Information on the FOMA Handset . 330 Using as a Calculator <Calculator> . 330 Entering Notes. 331 Displaying Time around the World . 337 How to Use an Earphone/Microphone with Switch
<Earphone/microphone with switch> . 338 Putting the Settings of Various Functions Back to Default
<Reset settings> . 340 Installing an Application. 341 293 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 294 Multiaccess About Multiaccess Multiaccess is a function to simultaneously carry out multiple communications, allowing you to receive messaging during a voice call and to receive a voice call while starting the browser. Communications That can be Used Simultaneously The following 3 communications can be carried out simultaneously:
Communication Number of communications Voice call Data communication by CSD*
Packet communication Wireless LAN SMS One of left One of left One
*: CSD (Circuit Switched Data) is a data communication method by a circuit switch in GSM. NOTE About combination of multiaccess 3 P525
During a multiaccess, you will be charged for each communication. Receiving Messaging during a Call You can receive messaging during voice/video call and check it without interrupting the call.
You cannot receive any messaging in CSD a Receive messaging during a call
$$ will be displayed in the status bar, and a ring tone will sound. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 294 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 295 b Tap $$ in the Status bar You can check messaging. c Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar Goes back to the Calling screen. Connecting to the Internet during a Call You can connect to the Internet during a voice/video call and view homepage, etc. without interrupting the call.
You cannot connect to the internet in CSD. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar during a call b Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar Goes back to the Calling screen without being disconnected from the Internet. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 295 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 296 Receiving a Call while Connected to the Internet You can receive a voice/video call while connected to the Internet. If you are connected to the internet in CSD, you cannot receive any call.
a Receive an incoming call while connected to the Internet The Incoming call screen is displayed, and a ring tone sounds. b Tap [Answer]
Answer the call.
Tap [Reject] to reject the call. c Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar Goes back to the Internet screen without interrupting the call. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 296 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 297 Alarm time Notification by an Alarm at the Specified Time You can use the FOMA handset as an alarm.
You can set up to 3 alarms. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar Alarm slot Date/time screen b Tap the alarm slot you want to register Time Operation setup
: Sets the alarm time Once
: An alarm will sound only once at the specified Next 24 hours Every day time on the specified day of the week.
: An alarm will sound only once at the specified time.
: An alarm will sound at the specified time every day. Working days: An alarm will sound at the specified time on working days (week days). Every week : An alarm will sound at the specified time on the specified day every week. Day
: Set a day of the week to sound an alarm. Displayed only if Operation setting is set to Once or Every week. Alarm sound : Sets an alarm sound. Message
: Sets a message to be displayed when an alarm goes off. c Tap the Time column to set the alarm time
How to operate 3 P59 d Tap the When column to select an Alarm Action
If you have tapped Once/Every week, go to Step 5. If you have tapped Next 24 hours/Every day/Working days, go to Step 6. e Tap the Day of the week column to select a day of the week f Tap the Alarm sound column to select an alarm sound O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 297 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 298
Tap $$ to play the selected alarm sound to confirm it. g Tap the Message column to type a message
You can enter up to 128 characters either in two or one byte letters.
Tap $$ to display the previously entered message, allowing you to select it. h Tap [Done]
The alarm is registered
To sound an alarm at the specified time, you need to set it up. 3 See below NOTE
You can set up working days. 3 See below Setting Working Days Setting working days (week days) makes an alarm sound only on working days. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the General tab y Date and time on the Control Panel screen, and then tap Working days on the Date and Time screen Set working days b Tap $$ of the day of the week to be set up as a working day y
[Done]
A working day is set up. Setting up/Canceling the Registered Alarm Setting up/canceling the registered alarm enables/disables alarm operation. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 298 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 299 b Tap $$ for the alarm slot to be set up An alarm is set up
Tap $$ to cancel the alarm. At the Time Set up An alarm sounds as set up, and the Alarm screen appears. The following operations can be performed:
[Snooze]
: The alarm stops and then goes off again after 5 minutes
[Open]
[Silent]
[Complete]
: The Date and Time screen appears
: The alarm stops
: The alarm stops, and the Alarm screen is closed O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 299 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 300 Calendar/Schedule Registering a Schedule You can register a schedule on the calendar. You can check the registered schedule on the calendar and be notified with an alarm at the specified time on the specified date. Displaying the Calendar The calendar screen can be displayed by day, week and month and switched from each screen. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar The Schedule screen for that day is displayed. You can display the View Date screen to select a day to be displayed. Switch days of the week. Switch to display by week or month. 1 Day View screen b Tap $$/$$
Switches displays. You can display the Date Setup screen to select a week and a month to be displayed. Switch to 1 day View Switch displays by week/month Weekly View screen Monthly View screen O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 300 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 301 1Menu bar Tap Calendar and Edit on the Menu bar on the Calendar screen to display the following items:
Calendar Edit New. See below Search . P335 Send this folder. P330 Delete item . P332 Undo delete* . P332 Paste item* . P331 Zoom*. P141 User settings . P333
*: Not displayed while the Weekly/Monthly View screen is displayed
Some items may not be able to be executed depending on the operation. NOTE
You can switch displays by day, week and month 3 P333
You can switch methods to display a day of the week 3 P334 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 301 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 302 Registering a Schedule You can register a schedule and set it up to be notified with an alarm sound at a specified time on a specified date. There are following 3 types of schedule:
Appointment schedule Normal schedule. Start time and End time are to be set up Notification schedule A schedule for which the start time alone is to be set up All day schedule A schedule across the date line. The Start date and the End date are to be set up a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap Calendar y New on the Calendar screen Enter a title, etc. for the schedule to be displayed on the Daily View screen, etc. Type
: Select a type of schedule from Appointment, Notification and All day. Date/Start date, End date Time
: Set up the date of the schedule. The Date entry field is displayed if the type is Appointment or Notification. The Start Date/End Date fields are displayed if the type is All day.
: The Start Time/End Time entry fields are displayed if the type is Appointment. The Notification Time entry filed is displayed if the type is Notification. No Time entry field is displayed if the type is All day. Location Alarm
: Enter a place.
: Set up an alarm. Set up the date and time for the alarm only if it is set up. Repeat
: Set up if the schedule is to be repeated. Can be set up only if the type is Appointment or Notification. Private
: Set the schedule to Private. The contents of the schedule will not be sent when sending mails with the schedule attached and synchronizing data with a PC. b Tap the Title entry field y Enter the title
$$ Tab
: Enter notes.
You can enter up to 200 characters in either single- or double-byte letters. c Tap the Type column to select a type of schedule d Set up the date or start date/end date 1If the type is Appointment or Reminder Tap the Date column to set up the date
How to operate 3 P59 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 302 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 303 1If the type is All day event Tap the Start Date column/End Date column to set up the Start/End date
How to operate 3 P59 e Set up a time 1If the type is Appointment Tap the Time column/until column to set up the start/end time
How to operate 3 P59 1If the type is Reminder Tap the Time column to set up the notification time
How to operate 3 P59 f Tap the Loction column to enter the place
You can enter up to 20 characters in either two or one byte letters.
Tap $$ to display the one previously entered, allowing you to select it. g Tap $$ in the Alarm column A field to enter the date and time when an alarm is to sound under the Alarm column.
Tap $$ to cancel the alarm.
To set up an all day schedule, go to Step 8. 1To set up an alarm date and time Tap the Time/Date entry field to set up the alarm date and time
How to operate 3 P59
It cannot be set to a date and a time after the scheduled start time or date. h Tap the Repeat column None Daily
: Repeat is not be set up.
: The event is repeated every specified number of days under Interval. Weekly
: The event is repeated on the specified day of every specified number of weeks under Interval. Monthly by date : The event is repeated on the same date every Monthly by day : The event is repeated on the same day of the specified number of months in Interval. Yearly by date same week every specified number of months under Interval.
: The event is repeated on the same date in the same month every specified number of years in Interval. Yearly by day
: The event is repeated on the same day of the same week in the same month every specified number of years in Interval. Interval
: The event is set to be repeated by how many days/weeks/years. Forever Due date Cannot be set up if set to permanent.
: Set to be repeated without any due date.
: Set up the due date for repeat. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 303 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 304 i Tap $$ of the action to be set up
Tap $$ of Weekly to select [Select days]. 1To set up a day of the week a Tap [Select days]
b Tap $$ of the day to be set up y [Done]
1To set up the interval Tap $$/$$ in the Interval column to set up the interval to repeat
You can directly enter it in the Interval column. 1To set it to permanent Tap the Forever column 1To set up a due date Tap the Until column to appoint the date
How to operate 3 P59 j Tap $$ in the Private column
Tap $$ to cancel Private. k Tap $$
Notes Entry screen l Enter notes
You can enter up to 1024 characters in either single- or double-byte letters. m Tap $$
The schedule is registered. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 304 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 305 1About items on the menu bar Tap Calendar and Edit on the Menu bar on the Schedule Registration screen to display the following items:
Calendar Edit New. P323 Find. P335 Send as. P329 Move to To do . P330 Remove entry . P331 Undo delete . P332 Cut entry. P331 Copy entry . P331 Cut text . P482 Copy text . P482 Paste text . P483 Preferences . P333
Some items may not be able to be executed depending on the operation.
The items on the Menu bar on the Schedule Details screen are the same as those on the Schedule Registration screen. 3 P328 NOTE
If registered without entering a title of the schedule, the schedule type (Appointment/Reminder/All day event) will automatically entered into the title.
Tapping the time on the 1 Day View screen also displays the Schedule Registration screen.
You can set up the Start Time/End Time, etc. that are automatically displayed on the Schedule Registration screen in advance. 3 P333
You can set up the alarm time that is automatically displayed if an alarm is set in advance. 3 P334
You can change the alarm sound. 3 P334 Checking/Updating the Schedule Select a schedule set up from the Calendar screen to display the Details screen. You can update and register the contents on the Details screen to reregister. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar abcd def def 1 Day View screen Weekly View screen Monthly View screen O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 305 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 306 Item/icon Description a Title b $$
c $$
d $$
Displays the contents of the schedule. An alarm has been set up in the schedule. Notes have been registered in the schedule. A notification schedule has been set up. e All day schedule An all day schedule has been set up. f Appointment schedule An appointment schedule has been set up. b Tap the schedule to check
Tap the schedule on the 1 Day View screen to display the Details screen for the schedule.
Tap the schedule on the Weekly View screen to display the Schedule Details screen. However, if the Notification schedule and the All day schedule have been set to the same date, tapping the schedule displays the Schedule Selector screen at the bottom of the screen. Tapping the schedule you want to display displays the Schedule Detail screen.
Tap the date on the schedule you want to check on the Monthly View screen to display the 1 day View screen. Tap the schedule to display the Schedule Detail screen.
How to display the calendar 3 P322 Details screen c Update the contents and tap $$
The updated schedule is registered.
How to operate 3 P323 1When a repeating schedule is updated Tap $$ to display the screen on the left. Tap $$ of the item to be changed. Only this one : Changes only the edited schedule All repeats All previous : Changes all of the previous repeating schedules All future
: Changes all of the future repeating schedules
: Changes all the repeating schedules O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 306 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 307 At the Scheduled Alarm Time An alarm sounds as set up, and the Alarm screen appears. The following operations can be performed:
[Snooze]
: The alarm stops and then goes off again in 5 minutes.
[Open]
[Silent]
[Done]
: The Schedule Detail screen appears.
: Stops the alarm sound.
: Stops the alarm sound and closes the Alarm screen. NOTE
If no alarm has been set, no operation is performed to notify you of the scheduled event (e.g. displaying a screen) at the scheduled time. Sending Registration Contents You can send a schedule as a file in the vCalendar (electronic scheduler) format by messaging or via Bluetooth. You can also send an entire folder containing schedules as well as one schedule at a time. Sending a Schedule Send a schedule a Tap Calendar y Send as on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the schedule to be sent
How to operate 3 P328 b Tap the Send as column on the Sending Format screen to select a sending method y Tap [Done]
Email Text message : Insert a schedule into a message of Short Message Service (SMS) to
: Send an email with a schedule attached. Go to Step 3. send. Go to Step3. Bluetooth
: Send a schedule via Bluetooth 3 P384 c Create and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 307 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 308 Sending Schedules in a Folder You can send all the schedules in a folder. a Tap All y a folder to send on the Menu bar on the Calendar screen
How to operate 3 P322
If any folder other than All is displayed last time, the Calendar screen registered in that folder will be displayed. 3 P303 b Tap Calendar y Send this folder on the Menu bar c Tap the Send as column on the Sending Format screen to select a sending method y Tap [Done]
Email Text message : Insert a schedule into a message of Short Message Service (SMS) to
: Send an Email with a schedule attached. Go to Step 4. send. Go to Step 4. Bluetooth
: Send a schedule via Bluetooth. 3 P384 d Create and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 Moving the Registered contents to the To Do List You can move the schedule to the To do list. a Tap Calendar y Move to To do on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the schedule to be sent
How to operate 3 P328 b Tap [Yes]
The schedule is moved to the To do list.
Tap [No] to cancel the operation to move. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 308 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 309 Copying/Cutting a Schedule You can copy/cut the registered schedule and paste it onto another date. a Tap Edit y Cut entry/Copy entry in order on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the schedule to copy/cut
How to operate 3 P328 b Display the 1 Day View screen for the day onto which you want paste it y Tap Edit y Paste entry on the Menu bar The schedule copied/cut is pasted.
How to operate 3 P328 Deleting Registered Contents The registered schedule on the calendar is deleted. You can also select a range to collectively delete schedules. Deleting a Single Schedule Display the schedule to delete a Tap Calendar y Delete entry on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the schedule to be deleted The selected schedule is deleted.
How to operate 3 P328 1To delete a repeating schedule Tap $$ to display the screen on the left. Tap $$ for the item to change. Only this one: Only the edited schedule is deleted. All repeats All previous : All the previous repeated schedules are deleted. All future
: All the future repeated schedules are deleted.
: All the repeated schedules are deleted. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 309 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 310 Deleting Schedules Collectively Collectively deletes a selected range of schedules. a Tap Calendar y Delete entry on the Menu bar on the Calendar screen Range to delete Entire calendar
: All the schedules are deleted. From today: Today's schedule and later ones are deleted. Until today : Today's schedule and earlier ones are deleted. This week : This week's schedules are deleted. Last week : The last week's schedules are deleted. This month: This month's schedules are deleted. Last month: The last month's schedules are deleted. This year Last year
: This year's schedules are deleted.
: The last year's schedules are deleted.
How to operate 3 P322 b Tap the Removal range column to select a range to delete c Tap [Done]
The schedule is deleted.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the deletion. NOTE
If you select anything other than Entire calendar to delete schedules, repeated schedules are not deleted. Undoing Deleting Schedules You can recover deleted schedules.
Any schedules collectively deleted cannot be recovered.
Any repeated schedules deleted cannot be recovered. a Delete a schedule
How to operate 3 P331 b Tap Edit y Undo delete on the Menu bar on the 1 Day View screen The schedule deleted is recovered and displayed on the Calendar screen. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 310 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 311 Setting up a Schedule Display Method Default setting View hours in day from: 9:00 To: 17:00 Standard time intervals: 01:00 Standard entry length: 01:00 View hours in week from: 9:00 To: 17:00 Set up a displaying method for the 1 Day View and Weekly View screens for a calendar.
Time, or others displayed on the Schedule Registration screen are also to be set up here. a Tap Edit y Preferneces on the Menu bar on the Calendar screen View hours in day from
: Set up start time displayed on the 1 Day View screen. To
: Set up end time displayed on the 1 Day View screen. Standard time intervals
: Set up intervals to display time for 1 Day/weekly View. Standard entry length
: Set up time intervals for Appointment Schedule. View hours in week from.
: Set up start time displayed on the Weekly View screen. To
: Set up end time displayed on the Weekly View screen.
How to operate 3 P322 b Tap the column you want to set up to enter time
How to operate 3 P59 c Tap [Done]
The schedule displaying method is set up.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the display method setup. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 311 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 312 Setting up the Display and Sound for an alarm Default setting Alarm precedes an event by: 00:10 Alarm sound: Wind_Chimes Set up the time display and sound for an alarm a Tap Edit y Preferences on the Menu bar on the Calendar screen, and then tap the Alarm tab on the User Settings screen Alarm precedes an event by
: Set up how many minutes ahead of the event start time the alarm is to be displayed at registration. Alarm sound : Set up an alarm sound.
How to operate 3 P322 b Tap Alarm precedes an event by column to set up time
To make it the same as the event start time, set it to "00:00".
How to operate 3 P59 c Tap the Alarm sound column to select an alarm sound
Tap $$ to play the selected alarm sound to check. d Tap [Done]
The alarm time display and sound are set up.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the alarm setup. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 312 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 313 Setting up the Day of the Week View for a Calendar You can change arrangements of the day display view on the Calendar screen by setting up the first day of the week. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the General tab y Time & date on the Control Panel screen, and then tap the Workdays tab on the Date and Time screen b Tap the First day of week column to select a day of the week The first day of the week is set up. Searching for Registered Contents You can search for a desired event just by entering the title, place, notes, etc. of the event registered as keywords. a Tap Calendar y Find on the Menu bar on the Calendar screen Keyword entry column Where?
Everywhere: Searches all the schedules. Future Past
: Searches the schedules for today and later.
: Searches the schedules for today and earlier.
How to operate 3 P322 b Tap the keyword entry field to enter a keyword
You can enter up to 30 characters in either two or one byte letters.
To be searched even if you enter a partial string of an item registered on the schedule data as a keyword. c Tap the Where? column to select what is to be searched O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 313 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 314 d Tap [Find]
A list of schedules containing the keyword is displayed. e Tap the desired schedule The Detail screen for the schedule is displayed. 3 P328
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the search. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 314 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 315 To do Registering To Do List You can register a To do, etc. on the To do list and set it up to be notified with an alarm sound at a specified time. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap To do y New on the Menu bar on the To do List screen Enter a title, etc. to be displayed on the To do List screen. Completed:
: Switches incomplete/complete by tapping a To do after registering it. Priority:
Due date:
: Set up a priority of a To do.
: Set up the due date. Set up the date and time for the deadline only when it is set up. Alarm:
: Set up the alarm date and time only if (an alarm is) set up. Todo registration screen Private:
: Set a To do to private. When you send an Email with a To do attached and synchronize data with a PC, the contents of the To do will not be sent. b Tap the title entry field y Enter a title
$$Tab:
: Enter notes.
You can enter up to 200 characters in either two or one byte letters. c Tap the Priority column to select a priority
You can set up 1 through 9. 1 has the highest priority. d Tap $$ in the Due date column The entry field for a deadline is displayed under the Due date column.
Tap $$ to cancel the deadline. 1To set up a deadline Tap the date entry field to set up a deadline.
How to operate 3 P59 e Tap $$ in the Alarm column The entry field for the date and time on when an alarm will sound is displayed underneath the Alarm column.
Tap $$ to cancel the alarm. 1To set up the date and time for an alarm Tap the date and time entry field to set up the alarm date and time.
How to operate 3 P59
You cannot set the alarm to a date and a time on or later than the date and time set in the due date. f Tap $$ in the Private column
Tap $$ to cancel the Private setting. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 315 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 316 g Tap $$
Notes entry screen h Enter notes
You can enter up to 1024 characters either in two or one byte letters. i Tap $$
The To do is registered. 1About items on the Menu bar Tap To do and Edit on the Menu bar on the To do Registration screen to display the following items:
To do Edit New . P326 Find . P344 Send as . P339 Move to Calendar. P341 Delete To do. P342 Undo delete . P342 Cut entry . P341 Copy entry . P341 Cut text . P482 Copy text . P482 Paste text. P483 Preferences . P343 Some item may not be able to be executed depending on the operation. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 316 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 317 Checking/Updating To Do List Select a To do set up on the To do list screen to display the detail screen. You can update and reregister the contents on the Detail screen. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar To do list screen Item/icon a $$
b Priority c Title d $$
e $$
Description Switches incomplete/complete for the To do. The priority of the To do is displayed. The To do is displayed. An alarm has been set in the schedule. Notes have been created in the schedule. f Due date The deadline of the To do is displayed.
The priority, title and deadline of an incomplete To do whose deadline has been passed are displayed in red.
A completed To do is displayed below incomplete ones regardless the date and priority. You can also set it up not to display completed things to do. 3 P343
You can set up not to display the deadline. 3 P343 b Tap the To do you want to check Detail screen c Update the contents and tap $$
The updated To do is registered.
How to operate 3 P336 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 317 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 318 1About items on the Menu bar Tap To do and Edit on the Menu bar on the To do list screen to display the following items:
To do Edit New . P326 Find . P344 Send this folder . P340 Delete completed . P342 Undo delete . P342 Paste entry . P341 Sort on priority . P343 Sort on date. P343 Zoom . P141 Preferences . P343 Some items may not be able to be executed depending on the operation.
The items on the Menu bar on the Detail screen are the same as those on the To do Registration screen. 3 P337 At the Alarm Time for To Do An alarm sounds as set up, and the Alarm screen appears. The following operations can be performed:
[Snooze]:
: The alarm stops, and then goes off again in 5 minutes.
[Open]:
[Silent]:
[Complete]:
: The Detail screen appears.
: Stops the alarm sound.
: Stops the alarm sound and closes the Alarm screen. NOTE
If no alarm has been set, no action is performed to notify you of the To Do at the deadline (e.g. Screen display). O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 318 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 319 Sending To Do List You can send To do as a file in the vCalendar (electronic scheduler) format by messaging or via Bluetooth. You can send a folder containing To do as well as one To do at one time. Sending a To Do Sends a To do. a Tap To do y Send as on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the To do you want to send
How to operate 3 P338 b Tap the Send as column on the Sending Format screen to select a sending method y Tap [Done]
Email Text message : Insert a To do into a message of Short Message (SMS) to send. Go to
: Send an Email with a To do attached. Go to Step 3. Step 3. Bluetooth
: Send a To do via Bluetooth. 3 P384 c Create and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 Sending To Do in a Folder You can send all the To do in a folder. a Tap All on the Menu bar y a folder to be sent on the To do list screen
How to operate 3 P338
If a folder other than All was displayed last time, the To do list screen registered in the folder is displayed. 3 P303 b Tap To do y Send this folder on the Menu bar in order c Tap the Send as column on the Sending Format screen to select a sending method y Tap [Done]
Email Text message : Insert a To do into a message of Short Message Service (SMS) to send.
: Send an Email with a To do attached. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 4. Bluetooth
: Send a To do via Bluetooth. 3 P384 d Create and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 319 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 320 Moving Registered contents to the Calendar You can move To do to the calendar. a Tap To do y Move to calendar on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the To do you want to send
\
How to operate 3 P338 b Tap [Yes]
The To do is moved to the calendar.
Tap [No] to cancel the operation to move. Copying/Cutting a To Do Copy/cut a To do registered and paste it as a new To do. a Tap Edit y Cut entry/Copy entry y $$ on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the To do you want to copy or cut
How to operate 3 P338 b Tap Edit y Paste entry on the Menu bar on the To do list screen The To do copied or cut is pasted.
How to operate 3 P338 Deleting the To Do List To do registered on the To do list are deleted. You can also collectively delete completed To do. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 320 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 321 Deleting a To Do Display the To do to delete. a Tap To do y Delete To do on the Menu bar on the Detail screen for the To do you want to delete The selected To do is deleted.
How to operate 3 P338 Deleting completed To Do Collectively A selected range of To do are collectively deleted. a Tap To do y Deleted completed on the Menu bar on the To do list screen Current folder
: Completed To do in the currently displayed folder are deleted. All folders
How to operate 3 P338
: Completed To do in all the folders are deleted. b Tap $$ of Current folder/All folders c Tap [Yes]
The To do is deleted.
Tap [No] to cancel the operation to delete. Recovering Deleted To do You can recover deleted To do.
Not recovered if completed To do have been collectively deleted. a Delete a To do
How to operate 3 See above b Tap Edit y Undo delete on the Menu bar on the To do list screen The deleted To do is recovered and displayed on the To do list screen.
How to operate 3 P338 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 321 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 322 Sorting the To Do List Switches methods to display To do on the To do list screen between by priority and by date. a Tap Edit y $$ of Sort on priority/Sort on date on the Menu bar on the To do list screen Switches To do displaying methods.
How to operate 3 P338 Sort on priority Sort on date Setting up the To Do List Display Method and Sound Default setting Display due dates: ON Display completed: ON Alarm sound: Door_Bell Set up the view and alarm sound, etc. on the To do list screen. a Tap Edit y Prefernces on the Menu bar on the To do list screen Display due dates
: Set up whether to display the due date on the To do list screen. Display completed
: Set up whether to display completed To do on the To do list screen. Alarm sound : Set up an alarm sound
How to operate 3 P338 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i b Tap $$ in the Display due dates column
Tap $$ to set it up not to display the due date on the To do list screen. c Tap $$ in the Display completed column
Tap $$ to set it up not to display completed To do on the To do list screen. d Tap the Alarm sound column to select an alarm sound
Tap $$ to play the selected alarm sound so that you can check it. e Tap [Done]
322 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 323 The To do list display method and alarm sound are set up. Searching To Do List You can search for a desired To do by just entering contents, texts, etc. registered on the To do list. a Tap To do y Find on the Menu bar on the To do list screen Where?
All folders : Searches all the folders. Current folder
: Searches the currently displayed folder.
How to operate 3 P338 Keyword entry field b Tap the keyword entry field to enter a keyword
You can enter up to 30 characters in either two or one byte letters.
Searched if part of a string in the contents registered for a To do is entered. c Tap the Where? column to select an item to search for All folders Current folder d Tap [Find]
: Searches all the folders.
: Searches the currently displayed folder. A list of To do containing the keyword is displayed. e Tap a desired To do The Detail screen appears. 3 P338
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the search. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 323 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 324 Quick Execution of Frequently Used Functions If you have set up a frequently used application in the Application Selector bar and the home key, it can be quickly started. Registering a Function on the Application Selector Bar Display a different application in the Application Selector bar. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap View y Settings on the Menu bar The currently registered application is displayed. Application setup
: Set up a function to be registered. b Tap the icon you want to change c Tap the Application setup column to select a function to be registered d Tap [Done]
The application is registered in the Application Selector bar. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 324 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 325 Registering a Function on the Home Key Pressing down the home key for about 3 seconds starts the application registered. You can register a different application on the home key. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap Handset tab y Shortcut key on the Control Panel screen Application : A list of applications that can be registered is displayed. b Select an application to be registered c Tap [Done]
The function is registered on the home key. Changing Groups on the Control Panel Items on the Control Panel have been pre-registered in 3 groups and are displayed on the Handset, Connections or General tab. You can register a different group for each item. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap Control panel y Set Groups on the Menu bar on the Control Panel screen The items on the Control Panel are displayed. The groups of the items are displayed. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 325 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 326 b Tap an item to be changed Dialogue Group
: The current group name is displayed.
: Set up a group. c Tap the Group column to select a group d Tap [Done]
Changes groups. View duration Checking Duration Check duration for the last voice/video call and lifetime. You can also reset duration. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Settings y Call tracking on the Menu bar, and then tap Timers on the Call Tracking screen Last call Outgoing Incoming All calls Lifetime
: Duration for the last call you made is displayed.
: Total outgoing call duration is displayed.
: Total incoming call duration is displayed.
: Total duration from the reset to now is displayed.
: Total duration up to now is displayed. Cannot be reset. View Duration screen O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 326 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 327 Resetting Duration Reset duration
All types of duration other than lifetime are reset. a Tap [Reset] on the View Duration screen
How to operate 3 See above b Tap [Yes] on the Call Timer screen Duration is reset.
Tap [No] to cancel the reset. Checking Information on Amount of Data at Packet Communication You can check the number of incoming/outgoing bytes at packet communication using the byte counter. All the packet communications using the FOMA handset (including packets used with the handset connected to a PC, etc.) are included. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap the Connections tab y Byte Counter on the Control panel screen 1To view Total Displays the number of incoming/outgoing bytes for packet communication between the last time number of bytes was reset and the Total tab is displayed. a Tap the Total tab
: Number of outgoing packets
: Number of incoming packets
: Total number of packets Sent Received Sum
Tap [Refresh] to refresh the value.
After tapping [Reset], tap [Yes] on the Reset Confirmation screen to reset the value. b After checking it, tap [Done]
O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 327 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 328 1To view Current Displays the number of incoming/outgoing bytes for packet communication between the time the current connection was made and the time the Current tab is displayed. a Tap the Current tab Sent Received Sum
Tap [Refresh] to refresh the value
: Number of outgoing packets
: Number of incoming packets
: Total number of packets b After checking it, tap [Done]
1To view Last time Display the number of incoming/outgoing bytes for packet communication from the last connection to the last disconnection. a Tap the Current tab Sent Received Sum
: Number of outgoing packets
: Number of incoming packets
: Total number of packets b After checking it, tap [Done]
O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 328 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 329 Setting up the Byte Counter Default setting Byte Counter: $$ Warning display threshold: $$ Warning alarm threshold: $$
Threshold values: XXX (K bytes) Set up settings for the byte counter. a Tap [Settings] on the Byte Counter Display screen Byte Counter
: Check when using the byte counter. Warning display threshold Warning alarm threshold Threshold values
(in Kilobytes)
$$ is to use, and $$ is not to use.
: Set up whether to display the Warning screen if the number of incoming/outgoing packet bytes exceeds the Threshold values.
$$ is to display, and $$ is not to display.
: Set up whether to sound an alarm if the number of incoming/outgoing packet bytes exceeds the Threshold values.
$$ is to sound, and $$ is not to sound.
: Set up a threshold to be used for Warning display threshold and Warning alarm threshold. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 329 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 330 Displaying Information on the FOMA Handset You can check hardware and software information for the FOMA handset. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap the Handset tab y Handset Information on the Control Panel screen Machine RAM Version
: The name of the handset is displayed.
: The memory space is displayed.
: The version of the supporting processor is displayed. Baseband
: The version of the base band processor is displayed. Flex
: The configuration data name of the base band processor is displayed. AP config
: The configuration data name of the supporting processor is displayed. Calculator Using as a Calculator You can display the Calculator screen to use it for calculation. You can make calculations using the memory and calculate percentage using %.
Up to 12 digits can be displayed. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i Calculator screen b Calculate 330 The following operations can be performed:
[0] ~ [9]
[.]
[+/-]
: Enter a number.
: Enters a decimal separator.
: Every time you tap it, the number entered switches signs between + and -.
[<-]
: Deletes a number entered. Pointing deletes all numbers entered.
[C]
[X][][+][-]
[=]
[]
: Cancels the calculation.
: Performs four rules of arithmetic calculation.
: Executes a calculation.
: Displays the square root of the number
[%]
[m+]
[m-]
[mr]
displayed.
: Calculates the percentage of the number displayed.
: Adds the number entered to the number stored in the memory.
: Subtracts the number entered from the number stored in the memory.
: Displays the number stored in the memory. 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 331
Tap [C] to clear the calculation results.
Tap [mr] twice to clear the number stored in the memory. Entering Notes You can use the FOMA handset as a note pad to register texts, handwritten illustrations, etc. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap Notes y New on the Menu bar on the Notes screen The following operations can be performed:
$$
: Dragging the text to specify the range and tapping it
$$
makes the text bold. Tap it again to undo it.
: Tapping a line you want to itemize and tapping after moving the cursor itemizes the selected line with a space inserted on top of it. Tap it again to undo it. Text Notes Registration screen. b Enter texts 1To cancel the last operation Tap Edit y Revert on the Menu bar All texts are deleted. 1To select all texts entered Tap Edit y Select all on the Menu bar All texts are selected. c Tap $$
The text is registered in the Notes. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 331 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 332 1About items on the menu bar Tap Notes and Edit on the Menu bar on the Text Note Registration screen to display the following items:
Notes Edit New . See above Send as . P356 Deleting note . P357 Revert . See above Cut . P482 Copy . P482 Paste . P483 Select all . See above Zoom . P141
Some items may not be able to be executed depending on the operation. NOTE
If a string of the text entered is recognized as a telephone number, an Email address or a URL, the string is underlined and colored. Taping it allows you to perform operations such as making a voice/video call, sending an Email and a short message (SMS), connecting to the Internet and registering it in contact. Entering Handwritten Notes and Illustrations Enter handwritten texts and illustrations and register them in the Notes. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Notes y New on the Menu bar on the Notes screen, and then tap the $$ tab on the Text Note Registration screen The following operations can be performed:
$$
$$
$$
: You can change the color of the line.
: You can change the thickness of the line.
: You can clear the line. Handwritten Note Registration screen O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 332 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 333 b Enter texts and illustrations You can draw characters and illustrations by dragging it. 1To cancel the last operation Tap Edit y Undo on the Menu bar The screen reverts to the original state. 1To redo the operation Tap Edit y Redo on the Menu bar Redoes the cancelled operation. 1To cut a text/illustration Tap Edit y Cut on the Menu bar Cuts the entire text/illustration entered in the handwriting entry area. 1To copy a text/illustration Tap Edit y Copy on the Menu bar Copies the entire text/illustration entered in the handwriting entry area. 1To past the text/illustration Tap Edit y Paste on the Menu bar Pastes the text/illustration cut/copied. 1To clear all texts/illustrations Tap Edit y Clear sketch on the Menu bar Clears the entire text/illustration entered. c Tap $$
The handwritten note is registered in the Notes. 1About items on the Menu Bar Tap Notes and Edit on the Menu bar on the Handwritten Note Registration screen to display the following items:
Notes Edit New. P352 Send as. P356 Delete note . P357 Undo. P352 Redo. P352 Cut . P352 Copy . P352 Paste . See above Clear sketch . See above Zoom . P141
Some items may not be able to be executed depending on the operation. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 333 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 334 Checking/Updating Notes Select notes registered on the Notes screen to display the Details screen. You can also update the contents on the Details screen to reregister. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar Notes screen Item/icon Description a Title of text notes The head of the text notes is displayed. b Title of handwritten notes If handwritten notes alone are registered, Sketch and the registration date and time are displayed. c $$
Handwritten notes are registered. b Tap the notes you want to check Details screen c Update the contents and tap $$
The updated notes are registered.
How to operate 3 P351
Tap Edit 3 Revert on the Menu bar while updating the text notes to put it back to the original text notes registered. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 334 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 335 1About items on the Menu Bar Tap Notes and Edit on the Menu bar on the Notes screen to display the following items:
Notes Edit New. P351 Find. P356 Undo delete . P357 Paste . P355 Zoom . P141
Some items may not be able to be executed depending on the operation.
The items on the Menu bar on the Details screen are the same as those on the Text Note/Handwritten Note Registration screen. 3 P351, P352 Copying/Cutting Contents of Notes Copy/cut text or handwritten registered notes and paste them as new notes. a Tap the notes you want to cut/copy on the Notes screen
How to operate 3 P354
To cut/copy handwritten notes, go to Step 3. Drag it to specify the range. b Specify a range to cut/copy on the Details screen of the notes c Tap Edit y Cut/Copy y $$ on the Menu bar d Tap Edit y Paste on the Menu bar on the Notes screen The note copied/cut is pasted. Sending Notes You can send notes registered by messaging or via Bluetooth. a Tap Notes y Send as on the Menu bar on the Details screen for the notes to be sent
How to operate 3 P354 b Tap the Send as column on the Send as screen to select a sending method y Tap [Done]
Email Text message
: Send an Email with notes attached. Go to Step 3.
: Insert notes into a message of Short Message Service (SMS) to send. Go to Step 3. Bluetooth : Send notes via Bluetooth. 3 P384 c Create and send an email
How to operate 3 P235, P261 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 335 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 336 Searching for Notes You can search for desired notes just by entering contents registered in the note as keywords. a Tap Notes y Find on the Menu bar on the Notes screen
How to operate 3 P354 Keyword entry field b Tap the Keyword entry field to enter a keyword
You can enter up to 30 characters either in single- or double-byte.
Just entering part of a string of the contents registered in the notes carries out a search. c Tap [Find]
A list of notes containing the keyword is displayed. d Tap a desired note The Details screen is displayed. 3 P354
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the search. Deleting Notes Select notes registered to delete. a Tap Notes y Delete Note on the Menu bar on the Details screen for the note you want to delete The selected note is deleted.
How to operate 3 P354 O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 336 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 337 Recovering Deleted Notes You can recover deleted notes. a Delete notes
How to operate 3 See above b Tap Edit y Undo delete on the Menu bar on the Notes screen The deleted note is recovered and displayed on the Notes screen.
How to operate 3 P354 Displaying Time around the World You can check time in the current country and other countries on the Date and Time screen. You can change the current country and other countries. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar The name of the city registered in the Current City is displayed. Tapping it allows you to register a different country and a different city. The date, time and day of the week in the current country are displayed. Tap to set up the date and time. 3 P59 The names of the cities registered in Other Cities and time are displayed. Tap to change contry and city. b Tap the current city display, and then tap Other Current country
: Set up the current country.
: Set up the city of the selected country. Current city Other country : Set up other countries. Other city
Tap the current city display to display the previously selected
: Set up the cities of other countries. cities to select.
Tap the other city display to display the screen on the left. c Tap the column you want to set up to select a country/city d Tap [Done]
The current and other countries/cities are set up, and it goes back to the Date and Time screen. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 337 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 338 Earphone/microphone with switch How to Use an Earphone/Microphone with Switch Connecting an earphone/microphone with switch (optional) to the earphone microphone handset makes you hear the other party's voice. you can also make or answer a call just by pressing the switch.
Do not put the cord of an earphone/microphone with switch around the FOMA handset. Otherwise the
antenna may malfunction to decrease the reception level of radio wave. Insert the plug of an earphone/microphone with switch firmly into the FOMA handset. If not inserted firmly enough, no sound may be heard. Connecting an Earphone/Microphone with Switch Connect an earphone/microphone with switch to the FOMA handset. a Open the cover of the earphone microphone handset and insert the connecting plug of an earphone/microphone with switch into it Illutration O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 338 Making a Call Using the Switch Make a call using the earphone/microphone with switch. a Enter a telephone number
How to operate 3 P66
You can display the telephone number from the contacts and call history. 3 P69, P78, P81, P107 b Press the switch of the earphone/microphone with switch for 1+
seconds A short beep sounds, and the call is connected. c If you finish talking, press the switch for 1+ seconds A short double beep sounds, and the call is disconnected. 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 339 Using the Switch to Answer the Phone Answer the phone using the earphone/microphone with switch. a When a call is received, press the switch of the earphone/
microphone with switch A short beep sounds, and the call is connected. b If you finish talking, press the switch for 1+ seconds A short double beep sounds, and the call is disconnected. Answering Another Call during a Call If you subscribe to and set up the call waiting service, a signal tone sounds if another call is received during a call. You can answer the call and talk to another person. a Receive a call during a call A signal tone is heard during a call. b Press the switch of the earphone/microphone with switch for 1+
seconds Put the call on hold and answer another call.
Every time you press the switch for 1+ seconds, you can talk to a different person. NOTE
You cannot answer a videophone call during a call.
For a call using the call waiting service, you cannot hang up the call using an earphone/microphone with switch. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 339 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 340 Reset settings Putting the Settings of Various Functions Back to Default Put the settings of various functions back to default.
The security code or password changed cannot be put back to default. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap the Handset tab y Master Clear/Master Reset on the Control panel screen b Tap $$ on Master Reset, enter the session number on the Session number screen y tap [Continue]
Session number 3 P146 c Tap [Yes]
The settings revert to default.
Tap [No] to cancel the reset. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 340 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 341 Collective data deletion Deleting Registered Data Collectively Puts the settings of various functions to default and clears the data you have registered (contact data, etc.) and duration.
Data registered on a UIM are not deleted.
Lifetime is not deleted. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then the tap Handset y Master Clear/Master Reset on the Control panel screen b Tap $$ of Master Clear on the Clear/Reset Master screen, and then enter the session number on the Session number entry screen y Tap [Done]
c Tap [Yes]
The settings revert to default, and the registered data are deleted.
Tap [No] to cancel the reset and data deletion. Installing an Application You can install an application on the FOMA handset. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap Launcher y Install on the Menu bar Installable software is displayed with its original stored location. b Tap the software to be installed y [Install]
The name, version and developer are displayed. c Tap [Install]
Installation starts.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the installation.
Tap [Details] to display the detail information about the software. d Tap [Done]
The installation is completed. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 341 19OTH01_1col_EN.fm 342 Uninstalling an Application You can uninstall an application that is no longer needed. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap Launcher y Uninstall on the Menu bar Uninstallable Applications are displayed with their memory space. Total memory
: The total memory space for the handset is displayed. Memory in use Available memory: Currently unused memory space is
: Currently used memory space is displayed. displayed. b Tap the application to be uninstalled y Tap Uninstall The application icon, name, version and developer are displayed. c Tap [Yes]
Uninstallation starts.
Tap [No] to cancel the uninstallation. d Tap [Done]
The uninstallation is completed. O t h e r C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s i 342 00M1000EN.book 343 Network Services Network Services Available. 344 Using Voice Mail Service . 344 Using Call Waiting Service . 346 Using Call Forwarding Service . 348 Using Nuisance Call Blocking Service. 350 Using Caller ID Display Request Service. 350 Using Dual Network Service . 351 Using English Announcement Service . 351 Using Service Dialling . 352 Selecting How to Handle Incoming Calls during Call
<Selecting Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call> . 353 Enabling/Disabling Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call
<Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call> . 353 Setting Remote Operations <Remote Operations> . 353 Registering and Using Services <Added Service (Register USSD)> . 354 343 00M1000EN.book 344 Network Services Available Using Voice Mail Service The following network services are available on your FOMA handset. Service Name Monthly Charge Subscribe Reference Charged Required Charged Required Free Required Charged Required Free Not required Charged Required Free Not required Free Required Voice Mail Service Call Waiting Service Call Forwarding Service Nuisance Call Blocking Service Caller ID Display Request Service Dual Network Service English Announcement Service International Roaming Service Caller ID Notification Service Not required Required Required Free Drive Mode Free Free Short Message Service
(SMS) P366 P368 P370 P371 P372 P373 P374 P506 P62 P79 P225 1Using Network Services For subscriptions or inquiries regarding network services, contact "General Contact" on the back cover this manual. For detailed information, operations and precautions on each service, refer to
"Network Service Operations Guide". When your handset is out of range or switched off, the Voice Mail Service will automatically respond to the call, and receive a message. You can hear the stored message from anywhere within the FOMA service area.
Voice Mail Service is a paid subscription service. Monthly charge will apply.
You can hear voice messages from anywhere in Japan. 1Voice Mail Service
Up to 20 voice messages (approx. 3 minutes per message) can be recorded.
Voice messages are stored in Voice Mail
Service Center for up to 72 hours. It also provides a function that simply announces that you cannot answer the call.
Even if you have enabled Voice Mail Service, you can answer the call while the handset is ringing. The handset ceases to ring when the call is diverted to Voice Mail Service Center. Ringing time can be changed. 3 P367 If voice messages are stored in Voice Mail Service Center, the number of voice messages stored is displayed in the Message area in the Home screen, and $$ is displayed on the Status bar. Missed Call List shows that you had incoming calls.
Even if you also subscribe to Call Forwarding Service, you cannot use the two services at the same time. When you have enabled Call Forwarding Service, Voice Mail Service is automatically disabled. However, if you have disabled Call Forwarding Service, Voice Mail Service will not be automatically enabled.
You can use tap operations to divert an
incoming call to Voice Mail Service Center. You can also divert a second incoming call to Voice Mail Service Center during a call. If Remote Operation has been enabled, you can use a touch-tone landline or a payphone to perform remote operations on Voice Mail Service. 3 P375 If you have enabled Caller ID Display Request Service along with Voice Mail Service, Voice Mail Service will not be activated and the caller ID display request guidance is provided N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 344 00M1000EN.book 345 instead when an incoming call with no caller ID is received.
Even if Voice Mail Service is enabled, an incoming video call is not diverted to Voice Mail Service Center. The video call is received by the FOMA handset.
When your handset is in an area with no radio wave or out of the service area, you cannot access this service. Basic flow of Voice Mail Service You can follow the procedures below to use Voice Mail Service. Step 1
: Enable Voice Mail Service Step 2
: Callers store voice messages*
*: When you are in a hurry to record your voice message, and you want to skip Voice Mail Service's response message, tap # while the response message is playing. Step 3
: Play back messages Voice Mail Service Charges To use Voice Mail Service, call charges apply for playing back voice messages along with monthly charges. Enabling Voice Mail Service a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Voicemail y Activate on the Menu bar Seconds: Enter the ringing time. b Tap $$ in Voicemail Ringing time
If you do not set up the ringing time, proceed to Step 4. c Tap the Seconds field y Enter ringing time y Tap [Done]
The ringing time must be within the range of 0 to 120 seconds. d Tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Voice Mail Service is enabled.
Tap [No] in the confirmation screen to cancel the setting and return to the Phone number entry screen. NOTE
You can also set up or change the ringing time independently. 3 See below Modifying the Ringing Tme You can modify the ringing time from when an incoming call is received until the call is diverted to Voice Mail Service Center. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Voicemail y Edit voicemail ringing time on the Menu bar b Enter the ringing time in the Ringing time entry screen y Tap [Done]
Ringing time is changed.
The ringing time must be within the range of 0 to 120 seconds. NOTE
If the ringing time you set is shorter than the ringless time set up, an incoming call is diverted to Voice Mail Service Center without ringing your handset. Voicemail ringing time
: Select to set up the ringing time. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 345 00M1000EN.book 346 Disabling Voice Mail Service Checking Voice Mail Settings a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Phone y Voicemail y Deactivate on the Menu bar, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Voice Mail Service is disabled.
Tap [No] in the confirmation screen to cancel the setting. Listening to Voice Messages When voice messages are recorded, the number of voice messages stored is displayed in the Messages area in the Home screen, and $$ is displayed on the Status bar. a Tap the Number of recorded messages in the Messages area Plays back voice messages. NOTE
To replay voice messages you have already listened to, tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Voicemail y Play messages y [Yes] on the Menu bar. Checking for New Voice Messages You can inquire Voice Mail Service Center for new voice messages. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Voicemail y Check messages on the Menu bar Makes an inquiry to Voice Mail Service Center. b Tap [Done] in the Check messages screen Ends the inquiry.
If you have new voice messages, the number of voice messages is displayed in the Messages area in the Home screen, and $$ is displayed on the Status bar. Checks the current Voice Mail settings. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Voicemail y Status on the Menu bar Displays the current settings. b Tap [Done] in the Voicemail screen Status check is ended. Setting up Voice Mail Service with Voice Guidance a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, tap Phone y Voicemail y Check settings on the Menu bar, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Connects to Voice Mail Service Center. b Set up Voice Mail Service by following voice guidance Sets up Voice Mail Service. Using Call Waiting Service When you receive an incoming call during a call, Call Waiting Service allows you to put the active call on hold and answer the incoming call. This service also allows you to put the active call on hold to make another call.
Call Waiting Service is a paid subscription service. Monthly charge will apply.
When an incoming call is received during a call, you will hear the beep tone. 1Call Waiting Service
If you have enabled Caller ID Display Request Service along with Call Waiting Service, the Call Waiting Service will not be activated and the caller ID display request guidance is provided instead when an incoming call with no caller ID is received. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 346 00M1000EN.book 347
If you have enabled Call Waiting Service, disable the Set Arrival Act. If Set Arrival Act is enabled, according to its setting incoming calls will be diverted to Voice Mail Service Center.
Call Waiting Service is not activated in the following situations:
- When dialing 104, 110, 117, 118 or 119
- When dialing or calling another party
- When you are subscribed and connected to Voice Mail Service Center playing back voice messages, etc.
- When dialing a 4-digit number to set up various network services such as 1411
(enabling Voice Mail Service) and 1420
(disabling Call Forwarding Service)
- During a video call (an incoming call is stored in Missed Call List)
- When a video call is received during a voice call (the call is stored in Missed Call List)
The caller is being charged during a call on hold.
You cannot make a video call during a call.
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service. Enabling/Disabling Call Waiting Service Call Waiting Service is enabled. a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and then tap Settings y Call control on the Menu bar b Tap $$ in the Call Waiting field of the Call Control screen Enables Call Waiting Service.
Tap $$ again to disable Call Waiting Service. Putting the Active Call on Hold to Answer an Incoming Call You can put the active call on hold to answer an incoming call. a When the Incoming call screen is displayed during a call, tap
[Answer]
Puts the active call on hold. You can answer the incoming call.
Tap [Reject] to reject the incoming call.
During Call Waiting Service, the first caller is displayed in the upper half and the second caller in the lower half of the screen.
Tap [$$Switch] to switch between callers.
$$ indicates the caller you have put on hold. $$ indicates the caller you are now talking with. b Press e when you finish talking with the other party Ends the active call and reactivates the call on hold. Ending the Active Call to Answer an Incoming Call End the active call to answer an incoming call. a When the Incoming call screen is displayed during a call, tap $$ in Drop Active on Answer y [Answer]
Ends the active call. You can answer the incoming call.
Tap [Reject] to reject the incoming call. Putting the Active Call on Hold to Make Another Call Put the active call on hold to make another call. a Tap [$$Keypad] during a call N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 347 00M1000EN.book 348 b Enter a phone number in the Phone number entry screen y Tap [$$]
Puts the active call on hold to take the other call.
You can dial to stored phone numbers by tapping [History] in the Phone number entry screen and displaying Dialed List, Answered List or Missed Call List. c Press e when you finish talking with one of the parties Ends the active call and reactivates the call on hold. Using Call Forwarding Service You can automatically forward incoming calls to your FOMA handset to a pre-registered phone number.
Call Forwarding Service is an optional subscription service. Monthly charges will not apply.
Only 1 phone number can be set up as a forwarding destination.
Even if Call Forwarding Service has been enabled, you can answer calls as long as the handset rings. The handset ceases to ring when the call is diverted to Voice Mail Service Center. The time period in which the handset ring (ringing time) can be changed. 3 P371
Even if you also subscribe to Voice Mail Service, you cannot use the two services at the same time. When you have enabled Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service is automatically disabled. However, if you have disabled Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service will not be automatically enabled. If Remote Operation has been enabled, you can use a touch-tone landline or a payphone to perform remote operations on Call Forwarding Service. 3 P375 If you have enabled Caller ID Display Request Service along with Call Forwarding Service, Call Forwarding Service is not activated and the caller ID display request guidance is provided instead when an incoming call with no caller ID is received.
A video call is not forwarded even if Call Forwarding Service has been enabled unless a 3G - 324M compliant, video call-enabled phone is specified as the forwarding destination. Check the specifications of the destination when enabling Call Forwarding Service. The video caller will not hear the guidance indicating that call forwarding is in progress.
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service. Basic Flow of Call Forwarding Service You can follow the procedures below to use Call Forwarding Service. Step 1
: Register a forwarding destination number Step 2
: Enable Call Forwarding Service Step 3
: A call arrives at your FOMA handset Step 4
: Automatically forwards the call to the destination after the specified ringing time elapses Call Forwarding Service charges Call Forwarding Service charges are calculated as follows. No monthly charge
+
Call charges Callers are charged Caller Call Forwarding Service subscriber Forwarding destination Call Forwarding Service subscribers are charged
*
If a Call Forwarding Service subscriber forwards a call from his/her handset, the subscriber is charged for the call from forwarding source to destination. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 348 00M1000EN.book 349
* There is no call charge for registering the forwarding destination, enabling and disabling Call Forwarding Service, and setting the ring time. Modifying the Ringing Time Enable Call Forwarding Service a Tap $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap Setting y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Forwarding tab in the Call Control screen b Tap $$ in the Forwarding field in the Call Control screen
If a forwarding destination number has been already set up, the confirmation screen appears. Tap [Yes] to enable Call Forwarding Service. c Enter a phone number in the Enter forwarding number screen y Tap
[Activate service?]
Enables Call Forwarding Service. NOTE
You can also set up or change the forwarding destination number or ringing time independently. 3 See below Changing the Forwarding Destination Number a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Setting y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Forwarding tab in the Call Control screen b Tap the Number field in the Call Control screen to enter a phone number in the Enter forwarding number screen y Tap [Done]
1To select a forwarding destination number from Contacts a Tap [$$]
b Tap and select a desired forwarding destination number a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Setting y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Forwarding tab in the Call Control screen b Tap the Ringing time field in the Call Control screen to enter the ringing time in the Ringing time entry screen y Tap [Done]
Sets the ringing time. Disabling Call Forwarding Service a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Setting y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Forwarding tab in the Call Control screen b Tap $$ in the Forwarding field in the Call Control screen, and then tap
[Yes] in the confirmation screen Disables Call Forwarding Service. NOTE
You cannot specify toll free numbers or 3-digit numbers such as 110 as the forwarding destination.
When your handset is out of range or switched off, an incoming call is automatically forwarded without ringing your handset. In this case, Call Forwarding Service subscriber is charged for the call from forwarding source to destination.
NTT DoCoMo may suspend Call Forwarding Service on behalf of subscribers upon owners of forwarding destinations request and we deem it necessary.
Note that designating a PBX, beeper*, or FAX as forwarding destination may cause misunderstandings by callers.
*:
From January 2001 onwards, NTT DoCoMo beeper name has been changed to
"QUICKCAST".
If the ringing time you set is shorter than the ringless time, an incoming call is forwarded to the forwarding destination without ringing your handset. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 349 00M1000EN.book 350 Using Nuisance Call Blocking Service You can bar incoming calls to your handset by registering phone numbers from which you do not want to receive calls.
Nuisance Call Blocking Service is a paid subscription service. Monthly charge will apply.
You can register up to 30 phone numbers. Registering Phone Numbers Register the phone number of the last call as barred number.
Phone numbers that were not answered or you dialed cannot be registered. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Nuisance Calls y Block Last on the Menu bar b Tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Registers the phone number. Register Specified Phone Numbers a Tap $$ on the stand-by display, dial
"144" y tap [$$]
b Register phone numbers by following the voice guidance c When completed, press e Registers specified phone numbers. NOTE
When your handset is out of the service area or
out of range, you cannot access this service. If you have enabled other network services, including Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service, Call Waiting Service, Caller ID Display Request Service or Drive Mode, along with Incoming Call Barring Service, other network services are not activated. When an incoming call from a registered number is received, the call block guidance is provided.
When an incoming call from a registered number is received, neither the action on receiving incoming calls take place nor the call is recorded in the Missed Call list.
When an incoming call is a video call, the video call is discarded without providing the call block guidance.
Phone numbers with no caller ID can be
registered. International phone numbers may not be registered.
You cannot check or inquire registered numbers. We recommend that you take a note of them. Deleting registered phone numbers You can delete registered phone numbers one-by-one, beginning with the most recently registered one. You can also delete all phone number at a time. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Setting y Nuisance Calls y Delete items/Clear List on the Menu bar Delete items : Deletes the phone number you registered last. Clear List
: Deletes all the registered phone numbers. b Tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Deletes registered phone number(s). Using Caller ID Display Request Service When an incoming call with no Caller ID is received, voice guidance is provided requesting the caller to show caller ID.
You do not need to subscribe to Caller ID Display Request Service. No monthly charge will apply.
Caller ID Display Request Service is applied only to incoming voice calls.
This service is activated only when the reason for not notifying caller ID is set to "Hide Caller ID". If the reason is "Caller ID Not Available" or
"Payphone*", this service is not activated.
*:
If a caller prefixes "184" to a phone number when making a call at a payphone, this service is activated.
The caller is charged for responding to the voice guidance requesting the caller ID. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 350 00M1000EN.book 351 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Setting y Call control on the Menu bar a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Setting y Network on the Menu bar b Tap $$ in the Caller ID Request field of the Call Control screen, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Enables Caller ID Display Request Service.
Tap $$, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen to disable Caller ID Display Request Service. b Tap [Activate] in the Dual network field in the Network screen, and then enter a network password in the Network password entry screen Switches to FOMA.
Network password 3 P146 NOTE
When your handset is out of the service area or
out of range, you cannot access this service. If you have enabled other network services, including Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service, Call Waiting Service, or Drive Mode, along with Caller ID Display Request Service, other network services are not activated. When an incoming call with no caller ID is received, the caller ID display request guidance is provided to the caller. If Incoming Call Barring Service is enabled at the same time, the call block guidance is provided. If you have enabled the Action on Receiving Incoming calls According to Reason for Not Notifying Caller ID, along with Caller ID Display Request Service, the action is not activated. When an incoming call that does not notify caller ID has arrived, the caller ID display request guidance is provided to the caller. Checking the Current Setting You can check which network, FOMA or mova, you are using. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Setting y Network on the Menu bar b Tap [Check Status] in the Dual network field in the Network screen Displays the network you are using. NOTE
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service.
You cannot use a FOMA handset to switch from FOMA to mova. Switching must be performed from mova. Using Dual Network Service Dual Network Service allows you to use the phone number of your FOMA handset to work with mova. When your handset is out of FOMA service area, you can switch to mova to make or answer calls.
You cannot use FOMA and mova at the same time.
You need to subscribe to Dual Network service. Monthly charge will apply. Switching to FOMA Handset You can switch from mova to FOMA. Using English Announcement Service You can set the language used for the guidance you hear when making a call, or for a caller to hear the response in "Japanese" or
"English".
You do not need to subscribe to English Announcement Service. No monthly charge will apply.
When a caller uses a DoCoMo's moblie phone with the guidance language set to English in order to make a call to a DoCoMo's mobile phone with the guidance language set to English, the caller's voice guidance settings for outgoing calls takes precedence over called party's voice guidance settings for incoming calls when the voice guidance is provided. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 351 00M1000EN.book 352 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Setting y Guidance on the Menu bar NOTE
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service.
English Announcement Service is not available for video calls. Using Service Dialling Call DoCoMo Help Desk or DoCoMo Information Desk.
You do not need to subscribe to Service Dialling. No monthly charge will apply.
Screen display or the numbers you dial may vary, depending on your UIM. Making Inquiries about Failures a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Phone y My lines on the Menu bar, and then tap the Service number tab in the My lines screen b Tap DoCoMo Help Desk y [Call] in the My lines screen Calls DoCoMo Help Desk. Call DoCoMo Information Desk a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Phone y My Lines on the Menu bar, and then tap the Service number tab in the My lines screen b Tap DoCoMo Information Desk y [Call]
in the My lines screen Calls DoCoMo Information Desk. NOTE
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service. Outgoing calls Japanese English
: Sets the voice guidance you hear when making a call to Japanese.
: Sets the voice guidance you hear when making a call to English. Incoming calls Japanese
: Sets the voice guidance Japanese+
English English+
Japanese a caller party hears when you receive the call to Japanese.
: Sets the voice guidance a caller party hears when you receive the call to Japanese 3 English.
: Sets the voice guidance a caller party hears when you receive the call English 3 Japanese. b Tap the Outgoing field to select a language y Tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen c Tap the Incoming field to select a language y Tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen d Tap [Done]
Sets the language used for voice guidance. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 352 00M1000EN.book 353 Selecting Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call Selecting How to Handle Incoming Calls during Call Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call Enabling/Disabling Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call You can choose to automatically divert an incoming call received during a voice call or during 64K data communication to Voice Mail Service Center.
This feature is available only when you subscribe to Voice Mail Service.
You must enable the Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call before you can activate it. 3 P371 a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar y Setting y Call control on the Menu bar, and then tap the Forwarding tab in the Call Control screen b Tap $$ in the Fwd to voicemail when busy field of the Call Control screen, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Selects the Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call.
Tap $$, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen to deselect the action. NOTE
Even if Voice Mail Service has been disabled, Voice Mail Service is automatically enabled when you have enabled this feature.
When an video call or 64K data communication call arrives during a voice call or during 64K data communication, the incoming call is rejected. You can enable/disable the Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Setting y Call control on the Menu bar b Tap $$ in the Set Arrival Act field of the Call Control screen, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Enables the Action on Receiving Incoming Calls during Call.
Tap $$, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen to disable the action. NOTE
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service. Remote Operations Setting Remote Operations When you subscribe to Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, you can choose whether you perform remote operations on these services from payphones. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Setting y Roaming on the Menu bar b Tap $$ in the Remote access control field in the Roaming screen, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen Enables remote operations.
Tap $$, and then tap [Yes] in the confirmation screen to disable remote operations. NOTE
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 353 00M1000EN.book 354 NOTE
Register the service names and service codes
(USSD) provided by DoCoMo. Using Registered Services
When your handset is out of the service area or out of range, you cannot access this service. a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Additional Services on the Menu bar b Tap the number you want to use y
[Transmit] in the Additional Service screen Transmits the special number or Service Code (USSD) of the selected service to the service center. Deleting Registered Services a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Additional Services on the Menu bar b Tap the number you want to delete y [Clear] in the Additional Service screen Deletes the selected service. Added Service (Register USSD) Registering and Using Services When we introduce a new network service, you can register the new service to your FOMA handset.
Up to ten services can be registered. Registering/Modifying a Service a Tap $$ on the Application Selector bar, and then tap Phone y Additional Service on the Menu bar b Tap the number you want to register or change y [Edit] in the Additional Service screen Name
: Enter a network service name. Command
: Enter a Service Code
(USSD) used to notify the service center. c Tap the Name field y Enter a name
Up to 10 double-byte characters, or 20 single-byte characters can be entered. d Tap the Command field and enter a Service Code (USSD) in the Commands entry screen y
[Complete] y Tap [Done]
Registers or changes the service.
To register other services, repeat Steps 2 to 4. N e t w o r k S e r v i c e s 354 00M1000EN.book 355 Bluetooth About Bluetooth . 356 Before Using Bluetooth . 358 Using Bluetooth. 362 355 00M1000EN.book 356 About Bluetooth A wireless technology that exchanges data between devices such as PCs, headsets and handsfree devices. You can send/receive data between Bluetooth devices without using a cable. Services Available with Bluetooth With a Bluetooth device connected, your FOMA handset allows you to talk or transmit data via wireless. 2Talking Wirelessly By connecting a Bluetooth headset/
handsfree device to your FOMA handset, you can talk wirelessly. 2Sending Contacts/Schedule/ToDo List Entries 3 P384 By converting contacts into vCard format and Schedule/ToDo list entries into vCalendar format, you can send them to other FOMA handsets or Bluetooth devices. 2Sending Images/Video Clips/Voice 2Setting Up Dial-Up Connection Memos 3 P384 You can send image/video/voice memo files stored in your phone to other FOMA handsets or Bluetooth devices. 3 P419, P429 By connecting to a PC via Bluetooth, you can access to the Internet. Bluetooth Communications
Bluetooth provides wireless data transfer using the 2.4 GHz band, which is shared by various devices. Although Bluetooth employs a technique to minimize the interference from other devices in the same band, the transmission speed/range may be downgraded or even disconnected.
The transmission speed/range may differ depending on the distance and obstacles between the devices, radio signal conditions, and Bluetooth devices. Main Specifications Supporting Bluetooth version Bluetooth standard Ver.1.1 conformity Output Transmission range *1 Supporting Bluetooth profiles *2 Bluetooth standard Within about 10 meters Generic Object Exchange Profile Object Push Profile Serial Port Profile Dialup Networking Profile Headset Profile Service Discovery Application Profile Hands-free Profile 2.4 GHz band (2.402 GHz ~ 2.480 GHz) Frequency band
*1:
Varies depending on obstacles between the communication devices and the radio signal conditions. l B u e t o o t h 356 00M1000EN.book 357
*2:
The specifications of Bluetooth devices according to the usage. It is the standard for Bluetooth. 1Bluetooth Glossary Passkey A 1- to 16-digit alphanumerical password set for each device to prevent unauthorized incoming connection to Bluetooth devices. Pairing When two devices establish a Bluetooth connection for the fist time, pairing is carried out. To add a device, the passkey that other device has set must be entered. Profile A communication protocol defined according to the type of data transmitted via Bluetooth. Finding Finding other Bluetooth devices within the transmission range. l B u e t o o t h 357 00M1000EN.book 358 Before Using Bluetooth Flow for Sending/Receiving Information Using Bluetooth To connect a Bluetooth device to your FOMA handset, use the following steps:
<First connection>
<Second and subsequent connection>
Turning Bluetooth Function ON 3 P382 Adding and Connecting Bluetooth Devices 3 P382 Making/Answering Calls with Headset/Handsfree Device*
Sending Information 3 P384 Receiving Information 3 P385 Disabling Bluetooth Function 3 P382
*:
For call operations with a headset/handsfree device, see the operation manual for each device. l B u e t o o t h 358 00M1000EN.book 359 Setting up Connections Set up the environment for Bluetooth connections. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Connections tab y Bluetooth on the Control panel screen Bluetooth ON
: Turning Bluetooth connection ON/OFF. Visible to other devices
$$ is ON, $$ is OFF. No
: Makes your M1000 invisible to other devices. Yes
: Makes your M1000 visible to other devices. For 10 minutes : Makes your M1000 visible to other devices Receiving items for 10 minutes. Always receive : Always accepts a connection request from other device. Ask first
: Asks first when receiving a connection request from other device. Never receive
: Never accepts a connection request from other device. Name of my device
: Enter the name of your FOMA handset to be displayed on other devices. b Tap the item to set and make the setting c Tap [Done]
Adding and Connecting Bluetooth Devices When you make Bluetooth connection for the first time, or your desired Bluetooth device does not appear on the Available devices screen, you can find and add the devices within the communication range. a Put the Bluetooth device in standby status b Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Connections tab y Bluetooth on the Control panel screen l B u e t o o t h 359 00M1000EN.book 360 c Tap Devices tab d Tap [Add]
Bluetooth activates and starts finding the devices. The device name you can connect to appears after about XX seconds. Types of connectable devices
$$ : Mobile phone
$$ : Headset
$$ : PC
$$ : PDA
$$ : Other device e Tap the device name, and enter the passkey y tap [Done] on the Passkey entry screen The new device is added and connected via Bluetooth.
Tap [Update] to find again connectable devices. Accepting Information from Connected Bluetooth Devices l B u e t o o t h You can set your FOMA handset to accept information from connected other Bluetooth devices.
Setting Receiving items to Always or Ask first. 3 P382 a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Connections tab y Bluetooth on the Control panel screen b Tap $$ of Bluetooth ON to change it into $$
Bluetooth activates. 360 00M1000EN.book 361 c Establish the connection from other device d Tap Passkey:, and enter the passkey y tap [Done]
Tap [Cancel] to cancel the connection. l B u e t o o t h 361 00M1000EN.book 362 Using Bluetooth Sending Information You can send images/music/contact information stored in your phone to other PCs or FOMA handsets connected via Bluetooth.
<Example: To send video>
a On the Video display screen (3 P280), tap Video y Send as on the Menu bar b Tap Send as, and select Bluetooth y tap [Done]
Bluetooth activates and the list of connectable devices appears. l B u e t o o t h 362 c Select the destination device and tap [Send]
The selected file is sent. Make the file reception setting on the receiver.
Tap [Cancel] to cancel sending.
Tap [Update] to find again connectable devices. Receiving Information You can receive images/music/contact information stored in other Bluetooth device to your FOMA handset via Bluetooth for displaying, playing back or saving.
<Example: To save a file you received>
00M1000EN.book 363 a Send a file from other Bluetooth device b Tap [Accept]
The name of received file appears.
Tap [View] to display the received file.
Tap [Delete] to delete the file. l B u e t o o t h 363 00M1000EN.book 364 c Tap [Done]
The received file is stored in your FOMA handset and listed in the Short distance reception list screen. a Types of receiving files
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
$$
: Video file
: Picture file
: Music file
: vCard file
: vCalendar file
: Document file
: Other file b Sender name/file name Unknown files appear in bold. c Received 1Menu bar operations on the Short distance reception list screen Tap Message or Edit on the Menu bar to display the following items:
Message Edit Send as . P310 Delete message . P259 Disconnect . P195 Select all . P249 Sort by date . P258 Sort by sender . P258 Zoom . P141
Some items might not be available depending on the operation. l B u e t o o t h 364 00M1000EN.book 365 Setting Details on Available Devices You can set details on available devices such as changing the device name or showing/hiding the confirmation screen when receiving a connection request. a Tap $$ y $$ in the Application Selector bar, and tap the Connections tab y Bluetooth y Devices tab on the Control panel screen The list of available Bluetooth devices appears. b Tap the device name to set Device name
: The stored device names appear. Tap it to change the name. Ask connection
: Marks the checkbox with $$ to display the confirmation screen when receiving a connection request from other device. c Tap [Done]
The setting is accepted. 1To delete a device from the available list On the Step 2 screen, select the device to delete, and tap [Delete] y [Yes]. l B u e t o o t h 365 00M1000EN.book 366 00M1000EN.book 367 Using Wireless LAN Wireless LAN . 368 Setting up Wireless LAN. 369 Searching Available Access Points . 375 367 00M1000EN.book 368 Wireless LAN Wireless Local Area Network or wireless LAN allows you connect to a network without a cable. You can view Internet sites or exchange data within the service area. Operating the Wireless LAN
The wireless LAN transmits at 2.4GHz frequency band. The band is also used by other wireless devices. Despite the wireless LAN technologies to minimize the interference, this may cause radio interferences lowering the speed, reducing the coverage area, or causing connection failure.
Transmission speed and coverage area may vary depending on the distance between devices, obstacles, radio wave conditions and/or Wireless LAN devices. Specifications Standard Transmission system Transmission Power Frequency band Transmission speed IEEE802.11b DS-SS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) 2.4GHz Max. 11Mbps Range*
*: May vary according to obstacles between devices and radio wave conditions. XX m Bluetooth Interference with Wireless LAN Because wireless LAN (IEEE802.11b/g) and Bluetooth devices use the same frequency band
(2.4GHz), interference may be generated causing lower transmission speed, noise or connection failure when a device with Bluetooth is being used near the FOMA handset. The following measurements can be taken if any such interference occurs;
Set the Wireless LAN equipment and the FOMA handset/Bluetooth device more than 10 meters apart.
If the distance is within 10m, turn the switch off of either the device, wireless LAN or FOMA handset/Bluetooth handset. i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 368 00M1000EN.book 369 1Terminology PPPoe A protocol to enable PPP function on a LAN. SSID Similar to a LAN workgroup name. An SSID identical to that of the access point is needed for communication. 802.1x A standard regulating the user authentication method within a LAN. Only authenticated users are allowed to be connected.
See P181 for other terminology. Setting up Wireless LAN 1Preparation Prepare with the following information obtained from your network administrator. Username A username to log in to the LAN Password A password to log in to the LAN SSID The same digits (SSID) as that of the access point you want to log in to IP address Digits to identify the device connected to the Internet (LAN) Gateway Address of gateway server DNS Address of DNS server
* Set-up items, names and details required to connect may vary. Consult your network administrator for further details. a Tap $$y$$ on the Application Selector bar, and tap Connections tab y Internet accounts in the Control panel screen 1To edit an existing setup Tap the desired account name y Edit Repeat Step 2 onwards, if necessary 1To delete an existing setup Tap the desired account name y [Delete], and then tap
[Yes] to confirm on the Delete confirmation screen i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 369 00M1000EN.book 370 b Tap New Account name
: You can input the name of the network connection. Bearer FOMA CSD: Select when using FOMA 64K Data communication. GSM CSD : Select when using Data communication within GSM service area. PACKET
: Select when using FOMA Packet data connection. WLAN
: Select when using Wireless LAN.
Tap [cancel] to cancel the operation. c Tap Account Name to input the network connection name y Tap Bearer to select WLAN y Tap [Advanced]
d Tap the desired tab for set up
Refer to P393 to P397 for each tab setting.
Refer to P189 for Proxy tab setting. i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 370 00M1000EN.book 371 WLAN Default setting SSID: - Power-save mode: ON Tx power consumption level: high a Tap WLAN in Step 4 on P393 y Tap the desired items for setup y Tap [Done] after setting SSID
: Input the same SSID to that of the access point you want to connect.
Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered. Power-save mode
: When no transmission is in progress, set up to either reduce or maintain its level of power consumption.
$$ to put the mode on, $$ to put the mode off. Tx power consumption level
: Set up the transmission power level. The levels are as follows. Low 3 20%
Medium-Low 3 40%
Medium 3 60%
Medium-High 3 80%
High 3 100%
Security Default setting Authentication method: Open Data encryption: none 802.1x: $$
Network authentication: none a Tap Security in Step 4 on P393 y Tap the desired items for setting y Tap [Done] after setting Authentication method
: Set as same as the designated access point. Data encryption 802.1x
: Set data encryption method.
: Check for 802.1x authentication.
$$ for use, $$ for non-use. Network authentication
: Set authentication method to establish connection. i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 371 00M1000EN.book 372 1When [Network Key] is tapped The following screens is displayed for network key setting/change 1When [Property] is tapped The screen displayed varies depending on the setting in Network authentication. Desired property can be set/changed, if necessary. PPPoe a Tap PPPoe tab in Step 4 on P393 y Tap the desired items for setting y Tap [Done]
Default setting PPPoe: $$ Username:- Password:-
PPPoe
: Select when using PPPoe protocol connection. This requires a username and a password to be setup.
$$ for connection with PPPoe protocol, $$ for connection without PPPoe protocol. Username : Input a username if PPPoe protocol connection is set.
Up to 256 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered. Password : Input a password when using PPPoe protocol connection. The entered password is masked by
"4". i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 372 00M1000EN.book 373 IP/DNS Default setting Getting IP address automatically: $$ IP address: 0.0.0.0 Subnet mask: 0.0.0.0 Gateway: 0.0.0.0 Getting DNS address automatically: $$
Primary DNS address: 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS address: 0.0.0.0 a Tap IP/DNS tab in Step 4 on P393 y Tap the desired item to set up y Tap [Done] after setting Getting IP address automatically
: Select when automatically assigning IP address from network. IP address, subnet mask and gateway need to be set up when there are not selected.
$$ for assigning IP address automatically, $$ for non-assigning. IP address : Set up IP address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Subnet mask
: Setup subnet mask.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Gateway
: Setup gateway address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Getting DNS address automatically
: Select when automatically assigning DNS address from network. Primary DNS and Secondary DNS need to be set up when there are not selected.
$$ for assigning DNS address automatically, $$ for non-assigning. Primary DNS address:
: Setting primary DNS address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. Secondary DNS address:
: Setting secondary DNS address.
Enter 0 to 255 for each block. i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 373 00M1000EN.book 374 Others Default setting PPP compression: $$ Plaintext authentication: $$ Automatic VPN: $$ VPN policy: -
a Tap Others tab in Step 4 on P393 y Tap the desired item field to set up y Tap [Done] after setting PPP Compression
: Select when PPP compressed connection is used
$$ for compressed connection, $$ for uncompressed connection. Plaintext authentication
: Select when authentication is performed without encryption.
$$ for encryption $$ for non-encrypted connection. Automatic VPN VPN Policy
: Select when automatically enabling VPN upon establishment of connection.
$$ for valid, $$ for invalid.
: Specify the VPN policy to use when automatic VPN is $$. Info a Tap Info tab in Step 4 on P393 y Tap [Done] upon verifying selection Firmware version
: Confirm the firmware version. MAC address : Confirm MAC (Media Access Control) address. i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 374 00M1000EN.book 375 Searching Available Access Points Available access points can be searched and displayed as a list. a Tap $$ y $$ on Application Selector bar, and tap Connections tab y WLAN AP Search in Control Panel screen The previous search results will be displayed from the second time onwards.
Tap Details to check the access points details. b Tap [Refresh] and tap the desired access point in search result screen i U s n g W i r e l e s s L A N 375 00M1000EN.book 376 00M1000EN.book 377 Movian VPN VPN. 378 VPN Connection . 384 Checking Connection Settings . 385 377 00M1000EN.book 378 VPN VPN (Virtual Private Network) is a virtual dedicated line enabling secure connection to corporate LAN via Internet from your FOMA handset. Data on VPN can be encrypted to prevent from unauthorized access and spoofing. A connection methods (64k Data/Packet/Wireless LAN) are supported from Internet enabled FOMA handsets for VPN connection. Illustration M o v i a n V P N 378 00M1000EN.book 379 Setting up VPN Necessary setup procedures are performed for using VPN. The movianVPN applications are used for setting up. a Tap $$ y $$ on the Application Selector bar y Tap movianVPN b Tap movianVPN y New Policy on the Menu bar 1To edit registered policies Tap the policy, and tap movianVPN y Edit Policy on the Menu bar Proceed to Step 3 as required. c Tap the desired tab for setting
See P403 to P405 to configure each tab setting. 1Menu bar Tap movianVPN, Tools or About on the Menu bar to display the following items:
movianVPN New Policy . P400 Edit Policy . P400 Delet e Policy . P406 Import Policy . P405 Tools Ping. P406 IKE log . P408 IPSec policy . P408 IPSec status . P409 IPSec packet statistic . P410 Preferences . P410 About M o v i a n V P N 379 00M1000EN.book 380 movianVPN . P402 License. P402 Some items cannot be performed depending on the operation. 1About movianVPN MovianVPN details can be viewed with the following operations. Tap About y movianVPN on the Menu bar in the movianVPN Basic screen 1movianVPN license MovianVPN license operation can be viewed. Tap About y License in the movianVPN Basic screen M o v i a n V P N 380 00M1000EN.book 381 General Contact your network administrator to obtain information necessary for setup. a Tap General tab in Step3 on P401 y Tap the desired input field and enter the setting y Tap $$ after setting
The screen is just an example. Displayed items vary depending on the setting. Policy Name
: Specify the Policy Name.
Up to 30 single byte alphanumeric characters can be entered. Gateway Type
: Set up Gateway Server type for VPN connection. Gateway Address
: Enter an address for Gateway Server.
Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered. Using Split Tunnel
: Select to use Tunnel connection. Entry of Subnet Address and Subnet Mask are required in the Network tab when selected.
$$ to use, $$ non-use. DNS Search
: Select to search DNS Server.
$$ to search, $$ not to search. Perfect Forward Secrecy
: Select to connect using Perfect Forward Secrecy.
$$ to use, $$ non-use. Using Extended Authentification
: Select to connect using Extended Authentification.
$$ to use, $$ non-use. SecurID : Set up available when Nortel Contivity Series is selected in Gateway Type, and Extended authentication is set to $$. M o v i a n V P N 381 00M1000EN.book 382 Account Contact your network administrator for the following information. a Tap Account in Step3 on P401 y Tap the desired input field and enter setting y Tap $$ after setting
The screen is just an example. Displayed items vary depending on the setting. Username
: Set Username.
Up to 30 single byte alphanumeric characters can be entered. Group Name*
: Set Group Name.
Up to 30 single byte alphanumeric characters can be entered. User Password (Group Password*)
: Set User (Group) Password.
Up to 40 single byte alphanumeric characters can be entered. IKE Group
: Select data encryption group for VPN connection. IKE Encryption IKE Hash
: Set data encryption for VPN connection.
: Select hash algorithm used for data encryption. IPSec Suite SA Life time Set Security Association Life time.
: Select data encryption setting.
: Drag $$ to the right and left.
Life time can be set between 1 to 8 hours by the hour.
When Security Association becomes disabled it logs off automatically, and log in is required again.
*: Displays when Extended Authentication is set to $$ in the General tab. M o v i a n V P N 382 00M1000EN.book 383 Network Contact your network administrator for the required information;
Setup is enabled only when DNS Search is set to $$ or Using Split Tunnel is set to $$ in the General tab. a Tap the Network tab in Step3 on P401 y Tap the desired input field and enter setting y Tap $$ after setting
The screen is just an example. Displayed items vary depending on the setting. Primary DNS
: Enter an address for DNS server.
You can input digits (0 to 255) between delimiters. Secondary DNS : Enter an IP address for Secondary DNS Server
You can input digits (0 to 255) between delimiters. Subnet Address* : Enter a Subnet Address.
You can input digits (0 to 255) between delimiters. Subnet Mask*
: Enter the Subnet Mask.
You can input digits (0 to 255) between delimiters.
*: Displays if the Using Split Tunnel is set to $$ in the General tab. Importing Policy The policy can be imported when the Import Policy file (File name vpolimp.sis) is pre-installed for this function.
On how to install the Import Policy file 3 P268 a Tap movianVPN y Import Policy on the Menu bar in movian VPN Basic screen y Tap [Yes] on the import confirm screen
Tap [No] to cancel the import. Deleting Policies a Tap the policy you wish to delete in movianVPN Basic screen y Tap movianVPN y Delete Policy on the Menu bar y Tap [Yes] on the delete confirm screen
Tap [No] to cancel the deletion. M o v i a n V P N 383 00M1000EN.book 384 Checking the Configured Connection You can check responses from the connected destination with the configured setup. a Tap the policy to check the connection in the movianVPN Home screen y Tap Tool y Ping on the Menu bar Host
: Enter Domain Name or IP address that you wish to connect to.
You can input up to 40 single byte alphanumeric characters or (0~255) in each of the XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format. b Tap Host and enter the Domain Name or IP address of the server that you wish to connect to Success : <Time> : Displays if it succeeds. Timeout : <Time>
Displays if no response from server. Unknown Host : <Host Name>
Displays if Host cannot be found. 1When Timeout or Unknown Host are displayed Check common settings for VPN connection (64K Data Connection 3 P185, Packet Connection 3 P185, Wireless LAN 3 P392) VPN Connection VPN connection with configured policy. VPN connection requires appropriate settings of VPN setup (3p400), 64K Data connection (3P185), Packet Connection (3P185) and Wireless LAN (3P392). M o v i a n V P N 384 00M1000EN.book 385 a Tap [login] in movianVPN Basic screen 1To Disconnect VPN connection Tap [Logout]
1When it is not connected to the Internet Displays following message. See "Connect to the Internet to view a website" (3 P193). 1When it prompts authentication Displays following message. Enter Username and Reply (Password) provided by your network administrator. Then tap [Done]. Checking Connection Settings IKE Log Displays the latest information (IKE Protocol transaction information) between the user and VPN Gateway Server. The information is deleted if logged in again. M o v i a n V P N 385 00M1000EN.book 386 a Tap Tools y IKE log on the Menu bar in movianVPN Basic screen y Tap [Done] after confirmation IPSec Policy Displays the latest information (Encrypted IP Subnet address) between the user and VPN Gateway Server. a Tap Tools y IPSec Policy on the Menu bar in movianVPN Basic screen y Tap [Done] after confirmation Data is encrypted Data is not encrypted M o v i a n V P N 386 00M1000EN.book 387 IPSec Status Displays status of VPN connection or the information of users and VPN Gateway Server. a Tap Tools y IPSec Status on the Menu bar in movianVPN Basic screen y Tap [Done] after confirmation Gateway IP Address : Displays IP address of VPN Gateway Your public IP Address Server.
: Displays your IP address supplied by the Internet service provider. Your private IP Address
: Displays an IP address in the VPN network connection. NAT Port
: Displays whether the network address Split Tunneling
: Displays whether Split Tunneling is transport (NAT) is valid. valid. Encryption Suite
: Displays the type of encryption for the connection. Primary DNS Secondary DNS
: Displays address for DNS Server.
: Displays address for Secondary DNS SA Life time
: Displays security association life time. Server. IPSec Packet Statistics Displays number of packets when encrypted connection is used in VPN connection. Note that it is not valid once it is disconnected. M o v i a n V P N 387 00M1000EN.book 388 a Tap Tools y IPSec Packet Statistics on the Menu bar in movianVPN Basic screen y Tap Done [Done] after confirmation Tx encrypted
: Displays number of encrypted packets sent. Tx bypassed
: Displays number of sent packets that Tx dropped
: Displays number of dropped packets bypassed the encryption. sent. Tx error Rx decrypted
: Displays number of failed packet sent.
: Displays number of decrypted packets received. Rx bypassed
: Displays number of received packets Rx dropped
: Displays number of dropped receiving that bypassed the decryption. Rx error
: Displays number of packets failed to packets.
Tap Clear to set all values to "0". receive. Setting Number of Retry and Timeout Default setting Socket connection retry:2 Socket Timeout:4seconds You can set the number of retry and timeout duration. a Tap Tools y IP Packet Statistics on the Menu bar in movianVPN Basic screen Socket connection retry
: Set maximum number of retry between 1 to 5 time(s). Socket Timeout
: Set the session timeout (duration to determine the connection failure) between 1 to 8 second(s).
Tap [Cancel] to discontinue configuration. b Tap the desired input field and enter settings y Tap [Done]
M o v i a n V P N 388
1 2 | Exhibit 8E Users Manual Supplement RESPONSE TO CRN28353 | Users Manual | 292.84 KiB | / February 05 2005 |
APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT6EY1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL The following safety and compliance information will be formatted into the final version of the Users Manual. EXHIBIT 8E Specific Absorption Rate Data This model wireless phone meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government and by the Canadian regulatory authorities. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age or health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC and by the Canadian regulatory authorities is 1.6 W/
kg.1 Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC and by Industry Canada with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public in the U.S. and Canada, it must be tested and certified to the FCC and Industry Canada that it does not exceed the limit established by each government for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) reported to the FCC and available for review by Industry Canada. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 0.70 W/kg , and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.57 W/kg. The SAR value for this product in its data transmission mode (body-worn use) is 0.28 W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and regulatory requirements).2 While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the governmental requirements for safe exposure. Please note that improvements to this product model could cause differences in the SAR value for later products; in all cases, products are designed to be within the guidelines. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) Web site:
http://www.phonefacts.net or the Canadian Wireless Telecommunications Association (CWTA) Web site:
http://www.cwta.ca 1. In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 2. The SAR information includes the Motorola testing protocol, assessment procedure, and measurement uncertainty range for this product. Motorola, Inc. Consumer Advocacy Office 1307 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, IL 60196 www.motorola.com 1-800-331-6456 (United States) 1-888-390-6456 (TTY/TDD United States for hearing impaired) 1-800-461-4575 (Canada) MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent &
Trademark Office. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. Motorola, Inc., 2004. The Bluetooth trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Motorola, Inc. under license. Java and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. The information contained in Motorola's user's guides is believed to be correct at the time of printing. Motorola reserves the right to change or modify any information or specifications without notice. The contents of Motorolas user's guides are provided as is. Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability, or contents of this guide. Caution: Changes or modifications made in the radio phone, not expressly approved by Motorola, will void the users authority to operate the equipment. Manual Number: TBD 2 IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION>
Software Copyright Notice The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be modified, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Part Number: 6809476A21-O 2 Contents Safety and General Information . 4 FDA Consumer Information on Wireless Phones . 10 Product Registration . 20 RF Energy Interference . 20 Export Law Assurances. 20 Wireless: The New Recyclable . 21 Wireless Phone Safety Tips . 23 3 Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR PHONE. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information in users guides published prior to December 1, 2002. Exposure To Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Your phone contains a transmitter and a receiver. When it is ON, it receives and transmits RF energy. When you communicate with your phone, the system handling your call controls the power level at which your phone transmits. Your Motorola phone is designed to comply with local regulatory requirements in your country concerning exposure of human beings to RF energy. Operational Precautions To assure optimal phone performance and make sure human exposure to RF energy is within the guidelines set forth in the relevant standards, always adhere to the following procedures. External Antenna Care Use only the supplied or Motorola-approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the phone. Do NOT hold the external antenna when the phone is IN USE. Holding the external antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed. In addition, use of unauthorized antennas may result in non-compliance with the local regulatory requirements in your country. 4 Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your phone as you would a wireline telephone. Body-Worn Operation To maintain compliance with RF energy exposure guidelines, if you wear a phone on your body when transmitting, always place the phone in a Motorola-supplied or approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this phone, if available. Use of accessories not approved by Motorola may exceed RF energy exposure guidelines. If you do not use one of the body-worn accessories approved or supplied by Motorola, and are not using the phone held in the normal use position, ensure the phone and its antenna are at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body when transmitting. Data Operation When using any data feature of the phone, with or without an accessory cable, position the phone and its antenna at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body. Approved Accessories Use of accessories not approved by Motorola, including but not limited to batteries and antennas, may cause your phone to exceed RF energy exposure guidelines. For a list of approved Motorola accessories, visit our website at www.Motorola.com. RF Energy Interference/Compatibility Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to RF energy interference from external sources if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for RF energy compatibility. In some circumstances your phone may cause interference. 5 Facilities Turn off your phone in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. These facilities may include hospitals or health care facilities that may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your phone when on board an aircraft. Any use of a phone must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker. Persons with pacemakers should:
ALWAYS keep the phone more than 6 inches (15 centimeters) from your pacemaker when the phone is turned ON.
NOT carry the phone in the breast pocket.
Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.
Turn OFF the phone immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. 6 Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your phone while driving, please:
Give full attention to driving and to the road.
Use handsfree operation, if available.
Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Responsible driving best practices may be found in the Wireless Phone Safety Tips at the end of this manual and at the Motorola website:
www.Motorola.com/callsmart. Operational Warnings For Vehicles With an Air Bag Do not place a phone in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a phone is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the phone may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your phone prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. 7 Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn OFF your phone when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted Turn off electronic devices. Obey all signs and instructions. Batteries Batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touch exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. Use only Motorola original batteries and chargers. Your battery or phone may contain symbols, defined as follows:
Symbol LiIon BATT Definition Important safety information will follow. Your battery or phone should not be disposed of in a fire. Your battery or phone may require recycling in accordance with local laws. Contact your local regulatory authorities for more information. Your battery or phone should not be thrown in the trash. Your phone contains an internal lithium ion battery. Seizures/Blackouts Some people may be susceptible to epileptic seizures or blackouts when exposed to flashing lights, such as when watching television or playing 8 video games. These seizures or blackouts may occur even if a person never had a previous seizure or blackout. If you have experienced seizures or blackouts, or if you have a family history of such occurrences, please consult with your doctor before playing video games on your phone or enabling a flashing-lights feature on your phone. (The flashing-light feature is not available on all products.) Parents should monitor their children's use of video game or other features that incorporate flashing lights on the phones. All persons should discontinue use and consult a doctor if any of the following symptoms occur: convulsion, eye or muscle twitching, loss of awareness, involuntary movements, or disorientation. To limit the likelihood of such symptoms, please take the following safety precautions:
Do not play or use a flashing-lights feature if you are tired or need sleep.
Take a minimum of a 15-minute break hourly.
Play in a room in which all lights are on.
Play at the farthest distance possible from the screen. Repetitive Motion Injuries When you play games on your phone, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, arms, shoulders, neck, or other parts of your body. Follow these instructions to avoid problems such as tendonitis, carpal tunnel syndrome, or other musculoskeletal disorders:
Take a minimum 15-minute break every hour of game playing.
If your hands, wrists, or arms become tired or sore while playing, stop and rest for several hours before playing again. If you continue to have sore hands, wrists, or arms during or after play, stop playing and see a doctor.
9 FDA Consumer Information on Wireless Phones The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) provides consumer information on wireless phones at:
http://www.fda.gov/cellphones/qa.html Following are safety-related questions and answers discussed at this web site. Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless phones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless phones are shown to emit radio 10 frequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless phones;
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and
Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health. FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Communications Commission
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working group activities, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones. 11 FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the safety questions discussed in this document. What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of wireless phone RF?
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to radio frequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues. FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement
(CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. 12 What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radio frequency energy from my wireless phone?
If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radio frequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day, you could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use. What about children using wireless phones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to radio frequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless phone use by children was strictly 13 precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce risks from exposure to RF emissions?
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used with wireless phones for convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the phone, which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand, if the phone is mounted against the waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless of whether they are used against the head or against the body. Either configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit. Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield the head from RF radiation work?
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories that claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike hand-free kits, these so-called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phone users from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated claims. According to FTC, these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to substantiate their claim. 14 Motorola Limited Warranty for the United States and Canada What Does this Warranty Cover?
Subject to the exclusions contained below, Motorola, Inc. warrants its telephones, pagers, messaging devices, and consumer and professional two-way radios (excluding commercial, government or industrial radios) that operate via Family Radio Service or General Mobile Radio Service, Motorola-branded or certified accessories sold for use with these Products (Accessories) and Motorola software contained on CD-ROMs or other tangible media and sold for use with these Products (Software) to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal consumer usage for the period(s) outlined below. This limited warranty is a consumer's exclusive remedy, and applies as follows to new Motorola Products, Accessories and Software purchased by consumers in the United States or Canada, which are accompanied by this written warranty:
Products and Accessories Products Covered Products and Accessories as defined above, unless otherwise provided for below. Decorative Accessories and Cases. Decorative covers, bezels, PhoneWrap covers and cases. Length of Coverage One (1) year from the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser of the product unless otherwise provided for below. Limited lifetime warranty for the lifetime of ownership by the first consumer purchaser of the product. 15 Products Covered Monaural Headsets. Ear buds and boom headsets that transmit mono sound through a wired connection. Consumer and Professional Two-Way Radio Accessories. Products and Accessories that are Repaired or Replaced. Length of Coverage Limited lifetime warranty for the lifetime of ownership by the first consumer purchaser of the product. Ninety (90) days from the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser of the product. The balance of the original warranty or for ninety (90) days from the date returned to the consumer, whichever is longer. Exclusions Normal Wear and Tear. Periodic maintenance, repair and replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear are excluded from coverage. Batteries. Only batteries whose fully charged capacity falls below 80% of their rated capacity and batteries that leak are covered by this limited warranty. Abuse & Misuse. Defects or damage that result from: (a) improper operation, storage, misuse or abuse, accident or neglect, such as physical damage (cracks, scratches, etc.) to the surface of the product resulting from misuse; (b) contact with liquid, water, rain, extreme humidity or heavy perspiration, sand, dirt or the like, extreme heat, or food; (c) use of the Products or Accessories for commercial purposes or subjecting the Product or Accessory to abnormal usage or conditions; or (d) other acts which are not the fault of Motorola, are excluded from coverage. Use of Non-Motorola Products and Accessories. Defects or damage that result from the use of Non-Motorola branded or certified Products, Accessories, Software or other peripheral equipment are excluded from coverage. 16 Unauthorized Service or Modification. Defects or damages resulting from service, testing, adjustment, installation, maintenance, alteration, or modification in any way by someone other than Motorola, or its authorized service centers, are excluded from coverage. Altered Products. Products or Accessories with (a) serial numbers or date tags that have been removed, altered or obliterated; (b) broken seals or that show evidence of tampering; (c) mismatched board serial numbers; or (d) nonconforming or non-Motorola housings, or parts, are excluded from coverage. Communication Services. Defects, damages, or the failure of Products, Accessories or Software due to any communication service or signal you may subscribe to or use with the Products Accessories or Software is excluded from coverage. Software Length of Coverage Ninety (90) days from the date of purchase. Products Covered Software. Applies only to physical defects in the media that embodies the copy of the software (e.g. CD-ROM, or floppy disk). Exclusions Software Embodied in Physical Media. No warranty is made that the software will meet your requirements or will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by third parties, that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be corrected. Software NOT Embodied in Physical Media. Software that is not embodied in physical media (e.g. software that is downloaded from the internet), is provided as is and without warranty. Who is Covered?
This warranty extends only to the first consumer purchaser, and is not transferable. 17 What Will Motorola Do?
Motorola, at its option, will at no charge repair, replace or refund the purchase price of any Products, Accessories or Software that does not conform to this warranty. We may use functionally equivalent reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new Products, Accessories or parts. No data, software or applications added to your Product, Accessory or Software, including but not limited to personal contacts, games and ringer tones, will be reinstalled. To avoid losing such data, software and applications please create a back up prior to requesting service. How to Obtain Warranty Service or Other Information USA Phones 1-800-331-6456 Pagers 1-800-548-9954 Two-Way Radios and Messaging Devices 1-800-353-2729 Canada All Products 1-800-461-4575 TTY For Accessories and Software, please call the telephone number designated above for the product with which they are used. TTY 1-888-390-6456 You will receive instructions on how to ship the Products, Accessories or Software, at your expense, to a Motorola Authorized Repair Center. To obtain service, you must include: (a) a copy of your receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof of purchase; (b) a written description of the problem; (c) the name of your service provider, if applicable; (d) the name and location of the installation facility (if applicable) and, most importantly;
(e) your address and telephone number. What Other Limitations Are There?
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A 18 PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, OTHERWISE THE REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER, AND IS PROVIDED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, ACCESSORY OR SOFTWARE, OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA, SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE ABILITY OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES OR SOFTWARE TO THE FULL EXTENT THESE DAMAGES MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some states and jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, or limitation on the length of an implied warranty, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state or from one jurisdiction to another. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce and distribute copies of the Motorola software. Motorola software may only be copied into, used in, and redistributed with, the Products associated with such Motorola software. No other use, including without limitation disassembly of such Motorola software or exercise of the exclusive rights reserved for Motorola, is permitted. 19 Product Registration Online Product Registration:
http://www.motorola.com/warranty Product registration is an important step toward enjoying your new Motorola product. Registering helps us facilitate warranty service, and permits us to contact you should your product require an update or other service. Registration is for U.S. residents only and is not required for warranty coverage. Please retain your original dated sales receipt for your records. For warranty service of your Motorola Personal Communications Product you will need to provide a copy of your dated sales receipt to confirm warranty status. Thank you for choosing a Motorola product. RF Energy Interference This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Export Law Assurances This product is controlled under the export regulations of the United States of America and Canada. The Governments of the United States of America and Canada may restrict the exportation or re-exportation of this product to certain destinations. For further information contact the U.S. Department of Commerce or the Canadian Department of Foreign Affairs and International Trade. 20 Wireless: The New Recyclable Your wireless phone can be recycled. Recycling your wireless phone reduces the amount of waste disposed in landfills and allows recycled materials to be incorporated into new products. The Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) and its members encourage consumers to recycle their phones and have taken steps to promote the collection and environmentally sound recycling of end-of-life wireless devices. As a wireless phone user, you have an important role in ensuring that this phone is recycled properly. When it comes time to give this phone up or trade it in for a new one, please remember that the phone, the charger, and many of its accessories can be recycled. It's easy. To learn more about CTIA's Recycling Program for Used Wireless Devices in the United States, including information on where to recycle wireless devices near you, please visit www.recyclewirelessphones.com. 21 22 art# 020827-O.eps Wireless Phone Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!
Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies the benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:
1 Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road. 23 2 When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motorola Original hands-
free accessories available today. 3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. 4 Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous. 5 If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibilitydriving safely. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 24 8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident or medical emergencies.*
9 Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you.*
10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.*
* Wherever wireless phone service is available. 25 Check the laws and regulations on the use of wireless telephones and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE or visit the CTIA Web site at www.wow-com.com 26
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2005-03-18 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
2 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2005-03-18
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Motorola Mobility LLC
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0004321311
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Motorola Mobility LLC 222 W. Merchandise Mart Plaza
|
||||
1 2 |
Motorola Mobility LLC
|
|||||
1 2 |
Chicago, IL
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
IHD
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
T6EY1
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
J**** N******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Director Product Compliance
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
847-6********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
847-6********
|
||||
1 2 |
n******@motorola.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 05/02/2005 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 2 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | GSM Transceiver with WLAN and Bluetooth | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | This application was originally granted on 02/15/2005. | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Motorola Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
A****** P****
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
847-5********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
847-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
a******@motorola.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 24E | 1850.20000000 | 1909.80000000 | 1.7600000 | 0.1000000000 ppm | 250KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.045 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC